How to Design any graphics on corelDraw x3

Welcome to CorelDraw x3 CorelDRAW is an intuitive graphics design application that gives designers an enjoyable work experience. The program is built to meet the demands of today’s graphics professionals. Whether you work in advertising, printing, publishing, sign making, engraving, or manufacturing, CorelDRAW offers the tools you need to create accurate and creative vector illustrations and professional-looking page layouts. In this section, you’ll learn about • what’s new in CorelDRAW • installing CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 applications • changing the language of the user interface and Help • registering Corel products • updating Corel products • Corel Support Services • documentation conventions • getting help • VBA Programming Guide • customer feedback • other resources • about Corel Corporation What’s new in CorelDRAW New features and enhancements in the following areas will boost your productivity by helping you complete many tasks more easily and in less time. Shaping • The Crop tool lets you remove unwanted areas from vector objects and bitmaps. For more information, see "Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects." • You can now shape curve objects much more easily. Using the freehand marquee selection mode, you can select multiple nodes in the most complex curves. The newly designed control handles can also help you in selecting and editing nodes. In addition, you can move line segments more easily. For more information, see "Shaping curve objects." • You can reduce the number of nodes in curve objects, which can help in the output of your projects to devices such as vinyl cutters, plotters, and rotary engravers. For more information, see "To reduce the number of nodes in a curve object." • You can shape objects by filleting, scalloping, or chamfering their corners. For more information, see "Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners." • You can automatically create a path around selected objects to create a boundary. This boundary can be used for creating outlines, keylines, or cut lines. For more information, see "Creating a boundary around selected objects." Tracing You can trace (vectorize) bitmaps, such as photos, or scanned images and drawings, directly in CorelDRAW, converting them to editable and scalable vector graphics. You can then easily integrate the vector graphics into your designs. Preset styles let you achieve optimum results for any bitmap that you want to trace. In addition, you can easily preview and edit traced results by using the controls in Corel® PowerTRACE. For more information, see "Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results." Effects and Fills • Bevel effects let you add three-dimensional depth to graphic and text objects. Bevel effects can contain both spot and process (CMYK) colors, so they are ideal for printing. For more information, see "Creating bevel effects." • The Smart fill tool lets you apply fills to areas created by overlapping objects. Unlike other fill tools, which fill only objects, the Smart fill tool detects the edges of an area and creates a closed path, so that the area can be filled. For more information, see "Applying fills to areas." Copying objects • When duplicating objects, you can easily specify the distance between the original object and the object’s duplicate. For more information, see "To duplicate an object." • You can create multiple copies of objects and specify their position. For example, you can distribute object copies horizontally, to the left or right of the original object. For more information, see "To create copies of an object at a specified position." Drawing stars The Star and Complex star tools let you draw stars quickly. For more information, see "Drawing polygons and stars." Changing the order of objects The enhanced Arrange Order command lets you easily change the stacking order of objects on a layer or page. For more information, see "To change the order of an object." Formatting text • The Paragraph formatting and Character formatting dockers give you easy access to commonly used text formatting options. In addition, the new commands on the Text menu let you easily add tabs, columns, bullets, and drop caps and insert formatting codes, such as em dashes and nonbreaking spaces. • You can fit text to any path by using the dynamic preview, which helps you position the text. After fitting text to a path, you can further adjust the text’s position. For example, you can easily offset the text from the path and mirror the text horizontally or vertically, or both. • You can easily choose the right fonts for your project. In addition to previewing selected text with different fonts applied, you can now quickly view a list of the available font families and identify the fonts and styles available within each family. • You can insert optional hyphens, which let you specify where to break the word when it is at the end of a line. You can also create custom definitions for optional hyphenation, which allows you to specify where a hyphen is inserted in a specific word whenever that word is entered in CorelDRAW. • You can choose to import black text as CMYK black. For more information, see "Adding and formatting text." Spot colors Support for spot colors has been greatly enhanced. You can import, export, and preview files that contain spot colors. Vector effects, such as bevels, drop shadows, transparency, mesh fills, and blends, can now contain both process and spot colors, which makes them ideal for printing. In addition, spot colors beneath vector effects are now preserved rather than converted to process colors. Simulating overprinted colors You can preview a simulation of how overprinted colors will mix by using the Enhanced with overprints viewing mode. This feature is useful for proofing your projects. For more information, see "Choosing viewing modes." Correcting bitmaps The Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of photos and other bitmaps quickly and easily, in one location. For more information, see "Adjusting color and tone quickly in the Image Adjustment Lab." PDF security You can set security options to protect the Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) files that you create. Security options let you control whether, and to what extent, a PDF file can be accessed, edited, and reproduced when viewed in Adobe Acrobat. You can also open and import PDF files protected by a password. File compatibility • CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 provides improved file compatibility with many industry-standard file formats, such as Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), PostScript (PS or PRN), Corel DESIGNER, Adobe Illustrator (AI), Portable Document Format (PDF), and Paint Shop Pro (PSP). For more information, see "File formats." • RawShooter essentials 2005, an application included in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3, lets you open and edit raw camera files, and save them as TIFF or JPEG files. For more information, see "Raw camera file formats." CorelDRAW Design Collection The CorelDRAW Design Collection provides you with ready-to-use professional templates developed around several design styles. Combining layouts and design styles, you can create effective and original flyers, brochures, letterheads, envelopes, business cards, and labels. Features introduced in earlier versions of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite Features that were new in earlier versions of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite — from versions 9 to 12 — are easy to identify once you start the program. You can highlight all menu commands and tools that were new for a specific version by clicking Help Highlight what’s new. This feature is especially useful if you are upgrading from an earlier version of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite. Learning tools • Hints help you master each tool in the toolbox as you are using the tool. • In Insights from the Experts, CorelDRAW Graphics Suite experts from diverse graphics industries share with you their ideas, approaches, tips, and methods. For more information about these new learning tools, see "Getting help." To highlight what was new in earlier versions of CorelDRAW • Click Help Highlight what’s new, and click one of the following commands: • Since version 12 — highlights menu commands and tools introduced in version X3 • Since version 11 — highlights menu commands and tools introduced in versions 12 and X3 • Since version 10 — highlights menu commands and tools introduced in versions 11, 12, and X3 • Since version 9 — highlights menu commands and tools introduced in versions 10, 11, 12, and X3 • No highlight — removes highlighting from menu commands and tools in the toolbox Installing CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 applications The installation wizard makes it easy to install CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 applications and components. It lets you • install any applications included in your software package • add and delete components in the current installation • repair the current installation by reinstalling all application features • uninstall CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 Repairing an installation is useful when you encounter problems in using the application or when you suspect that the installation is corrupt. Before repairing an installation, try resetting the current workspace to the default settings by holding down F8 while starting the program. To install CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 applications 1. Close all applications. 2. Insert CD 1 in the CD drive. If the installation wizard does not start automatically, click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run. Type D:\CGS13\Setup, where D is the letter that corresponds to the CD drive. 3. Follow the InstallShield wizard instructions for installing the software. • You can also activate the installation wizard by clicking Start on the Windows taskbar, clicking Run, and typing D:\autorun. To repair a CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 installation 1. Close all applications. 2. On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control panel. If your operating system is Windows 2000, click Start Settings Control Panel. 3. Double-click Add or remove programs. 4. In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 from the list, and click Change. 5. In the InstallShield wizard, click the Repair button . 6. Follow the instructions that appear. To uninstall CorelDraw Graphics Suite X3 1. On the Windows taskbar, click Start Control Panel. If your operating system is Windows 2000, click Start Settings Control Panel. 2. Double-click Add/Remove programs. 3. In the Add or remove programs dialog box, choose CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 from the list, and click Remove. If your operating system is Windows 2000, click the Remove button. 4. Follow the InstallShield wizard instructions. • You can completely uninstall CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 by removing user files, such as presets, user-created fills, and customized files, during the uninstall process. To do this, click Change in the Add or remove programs dialog box, and click the Remove button . Enable the Remove user files check box. Changing the language of the user interface and Help If an application has been installed in more than one language, you can change the language of the user interface and Help at any time. To change the language of the user interface and Help 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, click Global. 3. Choose a language from the Select the language for the user interface list box. If you want to change the language of the user interface and Help as you start the application, enable the Ask me the next time the software starts check box. 4. Restart the application. Registering Corel products Registering Corel products is important. Registration provides you with timely access to the latest product updates, valuable information about product releases, and access to free downloads, articles, tips and tricks, and special offers. You can register when you install the application or at a later date. You can register in one of the following ways: • online — You can launch online registration if you are connected to the Internet when you install the Corel graphics application. If no Internet connection is detected, a list of options appears in a dialog box. • by phone — You can call the Corel Customer Service Center nearest you. For more information about registering a Corel product, visit www.corel.com/support/register. Updating Corel products You can use the InstallShield Update Manager to check for updates to Corel software and other software products online. When product updates become available, you can choose to have them downloaded and installed automatically. You can also set how often the Update Manager checks for product updates. You can access the Update Manager by clicking Program Updates on the Start menu of the Windows taskbar. For information about using the Update Manager, see the Help topics in the Update Manager dialog box. Documentation conventions The following table describes important conventions used in the user guide and Help. Convention Description Examples Menu Menu command A menu item and menu command that you need to click in sequence Click File Open. list box A list of options that drops down when a user clicks the down arrow button Choose a value from the Force field list box on the property bar. docker A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task Double-click the name of the group in the Object manager docker. Enter Enter key Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on the property bar, and press Enter. using the [specific tool] An indication to click a particular tool so that it becomes active for a given operation Select the text using the Text tool. A note contains important information that is relevant to the preceding steps. It may describe conditions under which the procedure can be performed. • A compound blend cannot be copied or cloned. • If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes. A tip contains suggestions for performing the preceding steps. It may present alternatives to the steps, or other benefits or uses of the procedure. • Trimming an object can reduce the drawing file size. • You can also create a hyperlink by using the Internet toolbar. Getting help The following tools are available to help you: • CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 User Guide — provides information about commonly used product features. The user guide is also available in PDF format and can be accessed through the Start menu on the Windows taskbar. • Help — provides comprehensive information about product features from directly within the program. You can browse through the entire list of topics, check the index, or use the search tool for a given word or phrase. From the Help window, you can also access the Corel Knowledge Base on the Corel Web site. • Hints — provide information about tools in the toolbox from within the program. When you click a tool, a hint is displayed, telling you how to use the selected tool. • CorelTUTOR — provides a series of project-based tutorials that introduce you to basic and advanced features of CorelDRAW • CorelDRAW Handbook: Insights from the Experts — a series of articles written by experts who use CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 in their daily work. The articles deconstruct designs that the authors created in CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3. The handbook is available as a printed publication as well as in PDF format. • ToolTips — let you access information about the icons and buttons found in the program. To view a ToolTip, position the pointer over an icon, button, or other application control. To use the Help 1. Click Help Help topics. 2. Click one of the following tabs: • Contents — lets you browse through topics in the Help • Index — lets you use the index to find a topic • Search — lets you search the full text of the Help for a particular word or phrase • Favorites — lets you create a list of Help topics that you can easily access. You can add or remove Help topics from the list at any time. You can also View Help for a dialog box Click the Help button. Print a specific Help topic Open a Help topic, click the frame you want to print, and click Print. Access information and troubleshooting tips on the Corel Web site Click Support in the upper-right corner of the Help window. • You can also access the Help by pressing F1. To search the Help 1. Click Help Help topics. 2. Click the Search tab, and type a word or phrase in the Type in the word(s) to search for box. For example, if you are looking for information about the RGB color mode, you can type “RGB” to display a list of relevant topics. To search for a phrase, you need to type the phrase and enclose it with quotation marks (for example, “dynamic guides” or “color mode”). 3. Choose a topic from the Select topic list, and press Enter. You can also Search for a word or phrase in a list of topics generated by the previous search Enable the Search previous results check box. Search for all forms of a word Enable the Match similar words check box. For example, if you type “blend”, the search results will include topics that contain the words “blends” and “blending.” Search only the titles of Help topics Enable the Search titles only check box. To display or hide Hints • Click Help Hints. When the Hints command is enabled, the Hints docker appears displaying information about the active tool in the toolbox. • To get information about a tool in the toolbox, click the tool or perform an action with it. • To get additional information about the active tool, click the Help button in the upper-right corner of the Hints docker. To access CorelTUTOR • Click Help CorelTUTOR. To access Insights from the experts • Click Help Insights from the experts. VBA Programming Guide The new VBA Programming Guide for CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 can help you use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) to automate tasks and create custom solutions in CorelDRAW. If your installation of CorelDRAW includes VBA, the guide is accessible from a link in the VBA Help for CorelDRAW. For information on how to access the VBA Help for CorelDRAW, see "To access the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help." Customer feedback If you have any comments or suggestions about CorelDRAW, you can send them by e-mail from the support page of the Corel Web site. If you have any comments or suggestions about the user guides, Help, or tutorials, you can send them by e-mail to drawdoc@corel.com. You can check the product Web site for the latest news, tips and tricks, and product upgrade information. Go to www.corel.com, and follow the links to the product site. Other resources Corel has training partnerships with other firms and provides professional services for its software products. Corel customized training Once you have Corel programs running on your computers, our team of expert Corel Training Specialists can help you make the most of them with customized training, tailored to your work environment. We will help you develop a curriculum that is practical and relevant to the needs of your organization. For more information, please visit www.corel.com/customizedtraining. Corel Training Partners (CTPs) A Corel Training Partner is an independent, officially accredited local organization that provides training on Corel products. CTPs are located worldwide for your convenience. To find a partner near you, please visit www.corel.com/trainingpartners. Corel Professional Services Corel is committed to getting you up and running quickly with time- and money-saving workflow solutions. To simplify the process of deploying Corel applications across your organization, our Professional Services department offers a comprehensive range of cost-effective services to meet your technology needs. This group brings together highly skilled experts from across the company who are dedicated to providing top-notch solutions. Our knowledgeable team is ready to offer assistance through all stages of your project, from application development and support to software systems integration and training. For more information about Corel Professional Services, please e-mail us at proservices@corel.com. Corel Technology Partners Corel Technology Partners include businesses that embed Corel technology in their products, develop plug-in applications for Corel software, or integrate standalone applications into Corel technology solutions. This comprehensive program is designed especially for developers and consultants. It includes all the necessary components to successfully design, develop, test, and market custom solutions related to Corel products. For more information about Corel Technology Partners, please e-mail us at techpartner@corel.com. Corel on the Web Visit www.corel.com to find articles, tips and tricks, product news, tutorials, and graphics resources that inspire, excite, and illuminate. About Corel Corporation Corel Corporation provides innovative software solutions that help millions of value-conscious businesses and consumers in more than 75 countries improve their productivity. The company is renowned for its powerful software portfolio, which combines innovative photo-editing, graphics-creation, vector-illustration, and technical-graphics applications with office and personal productivity solutions. Corel’s flagship products include CorelDRAW Graphics Suite, WordPerfect Office suite, Corel Paint Shop Pro, Corel Painter, and Corel DESIGNER Technical Suite. For more information, please visit www.corel.com. Workspace tour Becoming familiar with the terminology and workspace of CorelDRAW will help you easily follow this user guide’s concepts and procedures. In this section, you’ll learn about • CorelDRAW terminology and concepts • CorelDRAW application window • CorelDRAW workspace tools CorelDRAW terminology and concepts Before you get started with CorelDRAW, you should be familiar with the following terms. Term Description object An element in a drawing such as an image, shape, line, text, curve, symbol, or layer drawing The work you create in CorelDRAW: for example, custom artwork, logos, posters, and newsletters vector graphic An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn bitmap An image composed of grids of pixels or dots docker A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task flyout A button that opens a group of related tools or menu items artistic text A type of text to which you can apply special effects, such as shadows paragraph text A type of text to which you can apply formatting options, and which can be edited in large blocks CorelDRAW application window When you launch CorelDRAW, the application window opens containing a drawing window. The rectangle in the center of the drawing window is the drawing page where you create your drawing. Although more than one drawing window can be opened, you can apply commands to the active drawing window only. The CorelDRAW application window appears below. A description of its parts follows. Figure 1 Part Description Menu bar The area containing pull-down menu options Property bar A detachable bar with commands that relate to the active tool or object. For example, when the text tool is active, the text property bar displays commands that create and edit text. Toolbar A detachable bar that contains shortcuts to menu and other commands Title bar The area displaying the title of the currently open drawing Rulers Horizontal and vertical borders that are used to determine the size and position of objects in a drawing Toolbox A floating bar with tools for creating, filling, and modifying objects in the drawing Drawing window The area outside the drawing page bordered by the scroll bars and application controls Drawing page The rectangular area inside the drawing window. It is the printable area of your work area. Color palette A dockable bar that contains color swatches Docker A window containing available commands and settings relevant to a specific tool or task Status bar An area at the bottom of the application window that contains information about object properties such as type, size, color, fill, and resolution. The status bar also shows the current mouse position. Document navigator The area at the bottom left of the application window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages Navigator A button at the lower-right corner that opens a smaller display to help you move around a drawing • To toggle between displaying and hiding the status bar, click Window Toolbars Status bar. • To toggle between displaying and hiding the rulers, see "To hide or display the rulers." CorelDRAW workspace tools Application commands are accessible through the menu bar, toolbars, toolbox, property bar, and dockers. The property bar and dockers provide access to commands that relate to the active tool or current task. The property bar, dockers, toolbars, and toolbox can be opened, closed, and moved around your screen at any time. You can customize many of these workspace tools to suit your needs. For more information, see "Customizing your application." Related Topics • Standard toolbar • More about toolbars • Exploring the toolbox • Property bar • Dockers • Status bar Standard toolbar The standard toolbar, which appears by default, contains buttons and controls that are shortcuts to many of the menu commands. For information about customizing the position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars." Click this button To Start a new drawing Open a drawing Save a drawing Print a drawing Cut selected objects to the Clipboard Copy selected objects to the Clipboard Paste the Clipboard contents into a drawing Undo an action Restore an action that was undone Import a drawing Export a drawing Start Corel applications Access the Corel Graphics Community Web site Set a zoom level Related Topics • CorelDRAW workspace tools • More about toolbars • Exploring the toolbox • Property bar • Dockers • Status bar More about toolbars In addition to the standard toolbar, CorelDRAW has toolbars for specific kinds of tasks. For example, the Text toolbar contains commands relevant to using the Text tool. If you use a toolbar frequently, you can display it in the workspace at all times. For information about customizing the position, contents, and appearance of toolbars, see "Customizing toolbars." The following table describes toolbars other than the standard toolbar. Toolbar Description Yahoo! Toolbar Lets you access services on Yahoo.com, such as Calendar and Mail, and use Yahoo! Search to search the Web. You need an Internet connection to use the Yahoo! Toolbar. Text Contains commands for formatting and aligning text Zoom Contains commands for zooming in and out of a drawing page by specifying percentage of original view, clicking the Zoom tool, and selecting a page view Internet Contains commands for Web-related tools for creating rollovers and publishing to the Internet Print merge Contains commands for print merge items that combine text with a drawing such as creating and loading data files, creating data fields for variable text, and inserting print merge fields Transform Contains commands for skewing, rotating, and mirroring objects Visual Basic for Applications Contains commands for editing, testing, and running VBA commands • To toggle between displaying and hiding a toolbar, click Window Toolbars, and click the command with the toolbar name. Exploring the toolbox Flyouts open to display a set of related CorelDRAW tools. A small arrow in the bottom, right corner of a toolbox button indicates a flyout: for example, the Shape edit flyout . Clicking a flyout arrow opens a set of related tools. Clicking and dragging the grab handles at the end of the flyout sets the flyout in its expanded form. The following table provides descriptions of the flyouts and tools in the CorelDRAW toolbox. Flyouts Flyout Description Shape edit Lets you access the Shape, Smudge brush, Roughen brush, and Free transform tools Crop tool Lets you access the Crop, Knife, Eraser, and Virtual segment delete tools Zoom Lets you access the Zoom and Hand tools Curve Lets you access the Freehand, Bézier, Artistic media, Pen, Polyline, 3 point curve, Interactive connector, and Dimension tools Smart tools Lets you access the Smart fill and Smart drawing tools Rectangle Lets you access the Rectangle and 3 point rectangle tools Ellipse Lets you access the Ellipse and 3 point ellipse tools Object Lets you access the Polygon, Star, Complex Star, Graph paper, and Spiral tools Perfect Shapes Lets you access the Basic shapes, Arrow shapes, Flowchart shapes, Banner shapes, and Callout shapes tools Interactive tools Lets you access the Interactive blend, Interactive contour, Interactive distortion, Interactive drop shadow, Interactive envelope, Interactive extrude, and Interactive transparency tools Eyedropper Lets you access the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools Outline Lets you access the Outline pen and Outline color dialog boxes, a selection of outlines of various widths, and the Color docker Fill Lets you access the Fill color, Fountain fill, Pattern fill, Texture fill, and PostScript fill dialog boxes, and the Color docker Interactive fill Lets you access Interactive fill and Interactive mesh fill tools Tools Tool Description The Pick tool lets you select and size, skew, and rotate objects. The Shape tool lets you edit the shape of objects. The Smudge brush tool lets you distort a vector object by dragging along its outline. The Roughen brush tool lets you distort the outline of a vector object by dragging along the outline. The Free transform tool lets you transform an object by using the Free rotation, Angle rotation, Scale, and Skew tools. The Crop tool lets you remove unwanted areas in objects. The Knife tool lets you cut through objects. The Eraser tool lets you remove areas of your drawing. The Virtual segment delete tool lets you delete portions of objects that are between intersections. The Zoom tool lets you change the magnification level in the drawing window. The Hand tool lets you control which part of the drawing is visible in the drawing window. The Freehand tool lets you draw single line segments and curves. The Bézier tool lets you draw curves one segment at a time. The Artistic media tool provides access to the Brush, Sprayer, Calligraphic, and Pressure tools. The Pen tool lets you draw curves one segment at a time. The Polyline tool lets you draw lines and curves in preview mode. The 3 point curve tool lets you draw a curve by defining the start, end, and center points. The Interactive connector tool lets you join two objects with a line. The Dimension tool lets you draw vertical, horizontal, slanted, or angular dimension lines. The Smart fill tool lets you create objects from enclosed areas and then apply a fill to those objects. The Smart drawing tool converts the freehand strokes that you draw to basic shapes and smoothed curves. The Rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles and squares. The 3 point rectangle tool lets you draw rectangles at an angle. The Ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses and circles. The 3 point ellipse tool lets you draw ellipses at an angle. The Polygon tool lets you draw symmetrical polygons and stars. The Star tool lets you draw perfect stars. The Complex star tool lets you draw complex stars that have intersecting sides. The Graph paper tool lets you draw a grid of lines similar to that on graph paper. The Spiral tool lets you draw symmetrical and logarithmic spirals. The Basic shapes tool lets you choose from a full set of shapes, including hexagram, a smiley face, and a right-angle triangle. The Arrow shapes tool lets you draw arrows of various shape, direction, and number of heads. The Flowchart shapes tool lets you draw flowchart symbols. The Banner shapes tool lets you draw ribbon objects and explosion shapes. The Callout shapes tool lets you draw callouts and labels. The Text tool lets you type words directly on the screen as artistic or paragraph text. The Interactive blend tool lets you blend two objects. The Interactive contour tool lets you apply a contour to an object. The Interactive distortion tool lets you apply a Push or Pull distortion, a Zipper distortion, or a Twister distortion to an object. The Interactive drop shadow tool lets you apply a drop shadow to an object. The Interactive envelope tool lets you distort an object by dragging the nodes of the envelope. The Interactive extrude tool lets you apply the illusion of depth to objects. The Interactive transparency tool lets you apply transparencies to objects. The Eyedropper tool lets you select and copy object properties, such as fill, line thickness, size, and effects, from an object on the drawing window. The Paintbucket tool lets you apply object properties, such as fill, line thickness, size and effects, to an object in the drawing window after you select these properties with the Eyedropper tool. The Outline tool lets you set outline properties. The Fill tool lets you set the fill properties. The Interactive fill tool lets you apply various fills. The Interactive mesh tool lets you apply a mesh grid to an object. Property bar The property bar displays the most commonly used functions that are relevant to the active tool or to the task you’re performing. Although it looks like a toolbar, the property bar content changes depending on the tool or task. For example, when you click the Text tool in the Toolbox, the property bar displays only text-related commands. In the example below, the property bar displays text, formatting, alignment, and editing tools. You can customize the contents and position of the property bar to suit your needs. For more information, see "Customizing the property bar." • To toggle between displaying and hiding the property bar, click Window Toolbars Property bar. Dockers Dockers display the same types of controls as a dialog box, such as command buttons, options, and list boxes. Unlike most dialog boxes, you can keep dockers open while working on a document, so you can readily access the commands to experiment with different effects. An example is the Object properties docker. When this docker is open, you can click an object in the drawing window and view formatting, dimensions, and other properties of the object. Dockers can be either docked or floating. Docking a docker attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a docker detaches it from other parts of the workspace, so it can be easily moved around. You can also collapse dockers to save screen space. If you open several dockers, they usually appear nested, with only one docker fully displayed. You can quickly display a docker hidden from view by clicking the docker’s tab. Left: Docked and nested dockers. Right: A floating docker. To dock a floating docker, click the docker’s title bar, and drag to position the pointer on the edge of the drawing window. To close a docker, click the X button at the top corner; to collapse or expand a docker, click the arrow button at the top corner. Status bar The status bar displays information about selected objects (such as color, fill type, and outline, cursor position, and relevant commands). See "Customizing the status bar" for information about customizing the contents and appearance of the status bar. Getting started in CorelDRAW Drawings are the work that you create and edit in CorelDRAW. In this section, you’ll learn about • vector graphics and bitmaps • starting and opening drawings • finding, inserting, and storing drawing content • acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras • exploring the basic features of CorelDRAW • working with templates • undoing, redoing, and repeating actions • accessing drawing information • zooming and panning • previewing a drawing • choosing viewing modes • working with views • backing up and recovering files • saving drawings • closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW About vector graphics and bitmaps The two main types of computer graphics are vector graphics and bitmaps. Vector graphics are made of lines and curves, and they are generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Bitmaps, also known as raster images, are composed of tiny squares called pixels; each pixel is mapped to a location in an image and has numerical color values. Vector graphics are ideal for logos and illustrations because they are resolution-independent and can be scaled to any size, or printed and displayed at any resolution, without losing detail and quality. In addition, you can produce sharp and crisp outlines with vector graphics. Bitmaps are excellent for photographs and digital paintings because they reproduce color gradations well. Bitmaps are resolution-dependent — that is, they represent a fixed number of pixels. While they look good at their actual size, they can appear jagged or lose image quality when scaled, or when displayed or printed at a resolution higher than their original resolution. You can create vector graphics in CorelDRAW. You can also import bitmaps (such as JPEG and TIFF files) in CorelDRAW and integrate them into your drawings. For information about working with bitmaps, see "Working with bitmaps." The top illustration is a vector graphic consisting of lines and fills. The bottom version is a bitmap made up of pixels. Starting and opening drawings CorelDRAW lets you start a new drawing from a blank page, from a template, or from an existing drawing. A blank page gives you the freedom to specify every aspect of a drawing. A template provides you with a starting point and leaves the amount of customization up to you. The templates included with CorelDRAW are available under the following categories: • Full page • Label • Envelope • Side-fold • Web For more information about creating and using templates, see "Working with templates." Basing a new drawing on an existing drawing lets you reuse objects and page settings. CorelDRAW lets you open existing drawings saved in various file formats. However, you may not be able to open certain files, depending on their file type and contents. In such cases, you can try importing the files as objects in an open drawing. For information about the file formats you can import in CorelDRAW, see "File formats." If the drawing you are opening is from an earlier version of CorelDRAW and contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, you can choose code page settings to ensure that text is converted into Unicode characters properly. Code page settings help you correctly display text outside the drawing window, such as keywords, file names, and text entries in the Object manager and Object data manager dockers. To display text correctly in the drawing window, you need to use encoding settings. For more information, see "Encoding text." If the drawing you are opening contains an embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile, you can extract and save the profile. You can also preserve a drawing’s layers and pages. To start CorelDRAW • Click Start All programs CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 CorelDRAW X3 To start a drawing To Do the following Start a drawing from a blank page Click File New. Start a drawing from a template Click File New from template, click the tab that corresponds to the template category you want, and choose a template. • When you start a drawing from a blank page, the drawing is based on the default CorelDRAW template (CorelDRAW.cdt). • You can specify a layout style (template) by clicking Layout Page setup, clicking Layout in the list of categories, and choosing a layout style from the Layout list box. To open a drawing 1. Click File Open. 2. Locate the folder where the drawing is stored. 3. Click a filename. To make sure that you are opening the drawing you want, enable the Preview check box to view a thumbnail of the drawing. 4. Click Options to display additional options and file information. If the drawing is from CorelDRAW version 11 or earlier and contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, choose the corresponding option from the Code page list box to ensure text is converted into Unicode characters properly. 5. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Extract embedded ICC profile — lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder in which the application is installed • Maintain layers and pages — lets you maintain layers and pages when you open files. If you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer. 6. Click Open. • When the additional options are displayed, you can view file information, such as version number and compression ratio. For example, a compression ratio of 80 percent means that the file size was reduced by 80 percent after the file was saved. You can also see in what application and language the drawing was last saved, and you can view keywords and notes associated with a drawing. • You can also open a drawing by clicking the Open button on the toolbar. • If you want to view a thumbnail of the drawing, click the Preview check box. Finding, inserting, and storing drawing content The Scrapbook docker lets you use clipart, photo images, and sounds that are stored on the Corel content CDs or that are available online. The digital content manual contains pictures of the graphics available on the CD and lists their folder locations. You can browse for clipart, photo images, and sound files on your system, or browse online on Corel on the Web; or you can search for content by using keywords. You can also create your own scrapbook to store content from the drawing window that you want to reuse. To browse for clipart, photos, and sound files 1. Click Window Dockers Scrapbook. 2. Insert a Corel content CD into the CD drive. 3. Double-click an icon in the CD list and navigate to a folder. You can also Browse for files on your computer or network Double-click the Desktop icon, and navigate to a folder. Browse for images online Click the Content on the Web button. • To browse for images online, you must be connected to the Internet. • To change your browsing view in the Scrapbook docker, click the flyout arrow, click View, and choose a view type. To search for clipart, photos, and sound files 1. Click Window Dockers Scrapbook Search. 2. Insert a Corel contents CD into the CD drive. 3. Type a keyword in the Search for text box. To insert a graphic or sound file • Drag the graphic or sound file from the Scrapbook docker to the drawing window. To store drawing content 1. Click Window Dockers Scrapbook Browse. 2. Browse to the folder where you want to create your scrapbook folder. 3. Click the flyout arrow, and click New folder. 4. Rename and open the folder. 5. Drag an object or a group of objects from the drawing window into the Scrapbook docker. • By default, each item you add to your scrapbook folder is named Scrap, Scrap (1), Scrap (2), and so on. You can give all items logical names to make them easy to find them. • Instead of creating a new folder, you can use an existing folder to store drawing content. Acquiring images from scanners and digital cameras You can load photos from digital cameras and scan images and in CorelDRAW. CorelDRAW supports scanners that use Microsoft Windows Image Acquisition (WIA), which provides a standard interface for loading images. If your scanner or digital camera does not support WIA, you can use the scanner’s or digital camera’s TWAIN driver for loading images. The software interfaces and options vary. For information about using your scanner’s or digital camera’s software, see the manufacturer’s documentation. To load photos from a digital camera 1. Connect a digital camera to your computer. 2. Click File Acquire image Select source. 3. Choose a digital camera from the Sources box. A digital camera may have both a WIA or TWAIN driver source. 4. Click File Acquire image Acquire. 5. Choose the images you want to load from the dialog box that appears. If your digital camera does not support WIA, you are presented with the digital camera’s TWAIN driver interface for loading images. Options vary, depending on the digital camera. 6. Click Get pictures. On your digital camera’s interface, this button may have a different name. • To load additional photos during the same session, click File Acquire image Acquire. • If your digital camera does not support WIA or doesn’t have a TWAIN driver, you can still open photos in CorelDRAW by clicking File Import, browsing to the digital camera directory, and selecting the photos you want to open. To scan images 1. Click File Acquire image Select source. 2. Choose a scanner from the Sources list. A scanner may have both WIA or TWAIN driver source. If you are scanning 48-bit color images, you need to select the TWAIN driver. 3. Click Select. 4. Click File Acquire image Acquire. If your scanner does not support WIA, you are presented with the scanner’s TWAIN driver interface for loading images. Options vary, depending on the scanner. 5. Preview the image, and select the area that you want to scan. 6. Click Scan. On your scanner’s interface, this button may have a different name, such as OK or Send. • The WIA interface is available only for the Windows XP operating system. • To scan additional images during the same session, click File Acquire image Acquire. Exploring the basic features of CorelDRAW CorelDRAW has a virtually unlimited number of tools and capabilities to help you create drawings. The following table provides you with the basic features of CorelDRAW to help you get started. For information about See Drawing lines "Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes" Drawing shapes "Drawing shapes" Creating and manipulating objects "Working with objects" Adding color to objects "Filling objects" Adding text to a drawing "Adding and selecting text" Creating drawings for use on the Web "Publishing to the Web" Printing drawings "Printing" Working with templates A template is a set of styles and page layout settings that govern the layout and appearance of a drawing. You can use the default template (CorelDRAW.cdt) or choose one from a wide variety of preset templates available in the application. For information on starting a drawing from a template, see "Starting and opening drawings." If none of the preset templates meets your requirements, you can create a template based on styles you create or styles taken from other templates. For example, if you regularly put together a newsletter, you can save the newsletter’s page layout settings and styles to a template. When you create a new drawing based on a template, CorelDRAW formats the page according to the template’s page layout settings and then loads the template’s styles into the new file. You can edit a template by making changes to the styles, page layout settings, or objects. For example, if you like a template but want to make it more versatile, you can add styles that you’ve created or that you’ve taken from another template. For information about setting page layout options, see "Specifying the page layout." After you have started a drawing with a template, you can load a different template. When you load a template, you can choose to load just the styles or to load styles, page layout settings, and objects. Use a template for drawing designs that you want to reuse. To create a template 1. Click File Save as. 2. Type a name in the File name list box. 3. Choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Save as type list box. 4. Locate the folder where you want to save the template. 5. Click Save. To edit a template 1. Click File Open. 2. Choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Files of type list box. 3. Locate the folder where the template is stored. 4. Double-click a template filename. 5. In the Open dialog box, enable the Open for editing check box. • To preview the contents of a template, enable the Preview check box. To create a new file based on a saved template 1. Click File Open. 2. Choose CDT - CorelDRAW template from the Files of type list box. 3. Locate the folder where the template is stored. 4. Double-click a template filename. 5. Enable the New from template check box in the Open dialog box. If, in addition to loading the template’s styles, you also want to load page settings and objects, enable the With contents check box. To load styles from another template 1. Click Tools Graphic and text styles. 2. In the Graphic and text styles docker, click the flyout button , and click Template Load. 3. Locate the folder where the template is stored. 4. Click a template whose styles you want to load. 5. Click Open. • When you use the Load command, only the styles are loaded. CorelDRAW does not use the template’s page layout settings and does not add objects saved with the template to the page. The attributes of existing objects are maintained. Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions You can undo the actions you perform in a drawing, starting with the most recent action. If you don’t like the result of undoing an action, you can redo it. Reverting to the last saved version of a drawing also lets you remove one or more actions. Certain actions applied to objects, such as stretching, filling, moving and rotating, can be repeated to create a stronger visual effect. Customizing the undo settings lets you increase or decrease the number of actions that you can undo or redo. To undo, redo, and repeat actions To Do the following Undo an action Click Edit Undo. Redo an action Click Edit Redo. Undo or redo a series of actions Click Tools Undo Docker. Choose the action that precedes all the actions you want to undo, or choose the last action you want to redo. Revert to the last saved version of a drawing Click File Revert. Repeat an action Click Edit Repeat. • When you undo a series of actions, all actions listed below the action you choose are undone. • When you redo a series of actions, the action you choose and all actions listed between it and the last undone action are redone. • You can repeat an action on another object or group of objects by selecting the object or objects and clicking Edit Repeat. • You can also undo or redo actions by clicking the Undo button or Redo button on the Standard toolbar. To customize the undo settings 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click General. 3. Type a value in any of the following boxes: • Regular — specifies the number of actions that can be reversed when you use the Undo command with vector objects • Bitmap effects — specifies the number of actions that can be reversed when you work with bitmap effects • The value you specify is limited only by your computer’s memory resources. The higher the value you specify, the greater the demand on memory resources Accessing drawing information As you work, you can access drawing information such as the number of pages, fonts, text statistics, color models used, and the types of objects the drawing contains. You can also save and print this information. To access drawing information 1. Click File Document info. 2. Enable the check box beside each type of information you want to display. You can also Save drawing information Click Save as, specify a folder and filename, and click Save. Print drawing information Click Print. Zooming and panning You can change the view of a drawing by zooming in to get a closer look or by zooming out to see more of the drawing. You can experiment with a variety of zoom options to determine the amount of detail you want. Another way in which you can view specific areas of a drawing is by panning. When you work at high magnification levels or with large drawings, you may not be able to see the whole drawing. Panning lets you view areas that aren’t displayed by moving the page around in the drawing window. You can use the Hand tool to pan around a large image and view particular areas. You can zoom in and out while you are panning, and you can pan while you are zooming; this saves you from having to alternate between the two tools. By specifying default zooming and panning settings, you can zoom in quickly to detailed parts of a drawing and zoom out to the larger context. To zoom 1. Open the Zoom flyout , and click the Zoom tool . 2. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Zoom in • Zoom out • Zoom to selected • Zoom to all objects • Zoom to page • Zoom to page width • Zoom to page height • The Zoom to selected button is available only when you select one or more objects before you open the Zoom flyout. • When you are not editing text, you can also access the Zoom tool by pressing the Z key. • You can also zoom in by double-clicking or dragging anywhere in the drawing window using the Hand tool . To zoom out, right-click in the drawing window. To pan in the drawing window 1. Open the Zoom flyout , and click the Hand tool . 2. Drag in the drawing window until the area you want to view appears. • When you are not editing text, you can also access the Hand tool by pressing the H key. • If you want to pan in the drawing window while zoomed in on the drawing, click the Navigator button in the bottom-right corner of the drawing window or the N key. Drag the cross-haired pointer around in the Navigator pop-up window. • You can quickly center the page in the drawing window by double-clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox. Using the Navigator, you can display any part of a drawing without having to zoom out. To establish default settings for zooming and panning 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, Hand tool. 3. To specify the action of the Zoom or Hand tool when you right-click it in the drawing window, enable one of the following options: • Zoom out — zooms out by a factor of 2 • Context menu — displays a menu of commands from which you can choose to zoom to a specific level Previewing a drawing You can preview a drawing to see how it will look when you print and export. When you preview a drawing, only the objects on the drawing page and in the immediate area of the drawing window are displayed, and you can see all layers that are set to print in the Object manager docker. If you want a closer look at specific objects in a drawing, you can select and preview them. When you preview selected objects, the rest of the drawing is hidden. Before you preview a drawing, you can specify the preview mode. The preview mode affects the speed with which your preview appears as well as the amount of detail displayed in the drawing window. By default, the borders of a page are displayed in the drawing window, but you can hide them at any time. If a drawing is intended for print, you can display the area that will actually print as well as the bleed, the part of the drawing that extends beyond the page border. Bleeds are useful when a drawing contains a color page background or objects positioned on the page border. Bleeds ensure that no white space appears between the edges of a drawing and the edge of the paper after the printer cuts, binds, and trims the document To preview a drawing • Click View Full screen preview. Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window. • You can press Page up and Page down to preview pages in a multiple-page drawing. To preview selected objects 1. Select the objects. 2. Click View Preview selected only. 3. Click View Full screen preview. Click anywhere on the screen, or press any key, to return to the application window. • If Preview selected only mode is enabled and no objects are selected, Full screen preview displays a blank screen. • You can disable Preview selected only mode after you return to the application window by clicking View Preview selected only. To specify the full screen preview mode 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Use draft view — displays the drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps without using anti-aliasing • Use enhanced view — displays the drawing with or without PostScript fills with anti-aliasing to display a sharper version of your drawing • You can display PostScript fills when you preview in Enhanced mode by enabling the Show PostScript fills in enhanced view check box. To set page display options 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Document list of categories, click Page. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Show page border — displays page borders • Show printable area — usually displays two dotted lines inside or around the page, depending on the current printer settings. One outline indicates the area that can be printed on the current printer; the other outline indicates the paper size your printer is set to use. • Show bleed area — displays the area of the drawing extending beyond the page border. To change the bleed area, click Layout Page setup, and type a value in the Bleed box. • When preparing a drawing for commercial printing, you may also need to set a bleed limit. For more information, see "To set a bleed limit." Choosing viewing modes As you work, CorelDRAW lets you display a drawing in any of the following modes: • Simple wireframe — displays an outline of the drawing by hiding fills, extrusions, contours, drop shadows, and intermediate blend shapes; also displays the bitmaps in monochrome. This mode lets you quickly preview basic elements in a drawing. • Wireframe — displays a drawing in simple wireframe mode plus intermediate blend shapes • Draft — displays a drawing’s fills and bitmaps with a low resolution. This mode eliminates some detail to allow you to focus on the color balances in a drawing. • Normal — displays a drawing without PostScript fills or high-resolution bitmaps. This mode refreshes and opens slightly faster than the Enhanced mode. • Enhanced — displays a drawing with PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics. • Enhanced with overprints — simulates the color of areas where overlapping objects were set to overprint and displays PostScript fills, high-resolution bitmaps, and anti-aliased vector graphics. The viewing mode you choose affects the amount of time it takes for a drawing to open or be displayed on the monitor. For example, a drawing displayed in Simple wireframe view takes less time to refresh or open than does a drawing displayed in Enhanced view. Simple wireframe viewing mode (left); Enhanced viewing mode (center), and Enhanced with overprints viewing mode (right). The fill for the gray diamond shape and the cup’s shadow are set to overprint. To choose a viewing mode • Click View, and click one of the following modes: • Simple wireframe • Wireframe • Draft • Normal • Enhanced • Enhanced with overprints • If you are overprinting, it is important to preview the objects in the Enhanced with overprints mode before printing. The type of objects you are overprinting and the type of colors you are mixing determine how overprinted colors are combined. For more information about overprinting, see "Working with color trapping and overprinting." • You can quickly switch between the selected viewing mode to the previous viewing mode by pressing Shift + F9. Working with views You can save a view of any part of a drawing so that you can return to that view later. For example, you can save a view of an object at 230 percent magnification and then switch to this specific view at any time. If a document contains multiple pages, you can view them all at once by using the Page Sorter view. You can also display consecutive pages on the screen at the same time and create objects that span two pages. To save a view 1. Click Tools View manager. 2. Use the Zoom tools on the View manager docker to set up a view. 3. Click Add current view . You can also Rename a view Double-click a view name and type a new name. Delete a saved view Click a view, and then click Delete current view . • If you disable the Page icon beside a saved view on the docker, CorelDRAW switches to the magnification level only, not the page, when you switch to that view. Similarly, if you disable the Magnifying glass icon, CorelDRAW switches to the page only, not the magnification level. • You can also save the current view by clicking in the Zoom levels list box on the standard toolbar, typing a name, and pressing Enter To switch to a saved view 1. Click Tools View manager. 2. Click a view on the View manager docker. • You can also switch to a saved view by selecting it from the Zoom levels list box on the toolbar. To view all pages in a multipage document • Click View Page sorter view. To view facing pages 1. Click Layout Page setup. 2. In the Document, Page list of categories, click Layout. 3. Enable the Facing pages check box. 4. Choose one of the following settings from the Start on list box: • Left side — starts the document on a left-facing page • Right side — starts the document on a right-facing page • You will be unable to view facing pages if the document uses a Tent Card or Top-fold Card layout style, or if it contains multiple page orientations. The Left Side option is available only for the Full Page and Book layout styles. Backing up and recovering files CorelDRAW can automatically save backup copies of drawings and prompt you to recover them when you restart the program in the event of a system error. The auto-backup feature saves drawings that you have open and modified. During any working session with CorelDRAW, you can set the time interval for automatically backing up files and specify where you want the files to be saved: by default in your temporary folder or to a specified folder. You can recover backed-up files from the temporary or specified folder when you restart CorelDRAW. Backup files are stored in either the temporary or the user-specified folder. You can choose not to recover a file; however, that file is automatically erased when you shut down the program normally. To specify auto-backup settings 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click Save. 3. Enable the Auto-backup every check box, and choose a value from the Minutes list box. 4. In the Always back-up to area, enable one of the following options: • Temporary folder — lets you save an auto-backup file in the temporary folder • Specific folder — lets you specify the folder for an auto-backup file You can also Create a backup file every time you save Enable the Make backup on save check box. Disable the auto-backup feature Choose Never from the Minutes list box. • Auto-backup files are named auto_backup_of_filename and can be saved in any folder you specify. Backup files created when you save a drawing are named backup_of_filename and are always stored in the same folder as the original drawing. • All open or modified files other than CorelDRAW file format (.cdr) are backed up as .cdr files. • You can cancel the creation of an auto-backup file by pressing Esc while a file is being saved. To recover a backup file 1. Restart CorelDRAW. 2. Click OK in the File recovery dialog box. 3. Save and rename the file in the specified folder. • Recovered files are named GraphicsX.cdr, where X is the numbered increment. • If you click Cancel, CorelDRAW ignores the backup file and deletes it when you exit the program normally. Saving drawings By default, drawings are saved to the CorelDRAW file format (CDR) and are compatible with the latest version of the application. You can also save a drawing so that it is compatible with an earlier version of CorelDRAW Graphics Suite. This is especially useful if you want to use the drawing in Corel R.A.V.E. You can save a drawing to other vector file formats as well. If you want to use a drawing in another application, you must save it to a file format that is supported by that application. For information about saving files to other formats, see "Exporting files." The application lets you assign notes, keywords, and thumbnails to drawings so that you can find them more easily. If your drawing will be used on the Internet, you can have the application automatically replace spaces in the filename with underscores, to prevent potential display problems. If your drawing will be viewed on a system that does not have all of the fonts used in the drawing, you can embed all fonts to ensure that text will appear as originally created. You can also save selected objects in a drawing. For large drawings, saving only the selected objects reduces the file size, which can decrease the time it takes to load the drawing. You can use advanced save options to control how bitmaps, textures, and vector effects, such as blends and extrusions, are saved with a drawing. A drawing can also be saved as a template, allowing you to create other drawings with the same properties. For information about saving a drawing as a template, see "Working with templates." To save a drawing 1. Click File Save as. 2. Type a filename in the File name list box. 3. Locate the folder where you want to save the file. If you want the drawing to be compatible with a previous version of CorelDRAW, choose a version from the Version list box. If you want to save the drawing to a vector file format other than CorelDRAW (CDR), choose a file format from the File type list box. 4. Click Options, specify the settings you want, and click Save. You can also Save notes or keywords with the file Type notes or keywords in the corresponding box. Choose what thumbnail to attach to a drawing Choose an option from the Thumbnail list box. Use a filename suitable for the Web Enable the Web_safe_filenames check box. • Saving a drawing to a previous version of CorelDRAW may result in loss of certain effects that were not available in the previous version of the application. • If you want to save changes made to a previously saved drawing, click File Save. • You can also save a drawing by clicking the Save button on the Standard toolbar. To save only selected objects 1. Select the objects. 2. Click File Save as. 3. Click Options. 4. Enable the Selected only check box. 5. Locate the folder where you want to save the file. 6. Type a filename in the File name list box. 7. Click Save. To use advanced options when saving 1. Click File Save as. 2. Click Advanced. 3. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Save presentation exchange — saves a drawing as a Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) file so that you can open and edit it in other Corel applications, such as WordPerfect • Use current thumbnail — preserves the thumbnail format that is currently selected • Use bitmap compression — reduces the file size by compressing bitmap effects, such bitmap extrusions, transparencies, and drop shadows • Use graphic object compression — reduces the file size by compressing vector objects, such as polygons, rectangles, ellipses, and perfect shapes Using compression increases the time for opening and saving a drawing. 4. If a drawing contains texture fills, enable one of the following options: • Save textures with the file — saves custom texture fills with the file • Rebuild textures when opening a file — re-creates texture fills when you open the saved drawing 5. If a drawing contains blends and extrusions, enable one of the following options: • Save blends and extrudes with the file — saves all blends and extrusions included in a drawing • Rebuild blends and extrudes when opening a file — re-creates blends and extrusion when you open the saved drawing • Choosing to save textures, blends, and extrusions with the file increases the file size but lets you open and save a drawing more quickly. Conversely, choosing to rebuild textures, blends, and extrusions when a saved drawing is opened decreases the file size but increases the time required for saving or opening a drawing. Closing drawings and quitting CorelDRAW You can close one or all open drawings at any time before quitting CorelDRAW. To close drawings To Do the following Close one drawing Click File Close. Close all open drawings Click Window Close all. To quit CorelDRAW • Click File Exit. • You can also quit CorelDRAW by pressing Alt + F4. Working with lines, outlines, and brush strokes CorelDRAW lets you add lines and brush strokes by using a variety of techniques and tools. After you draw lines or apply brush strokes to lines, you can format them. You can also format the outlines that surround objects. CorelDRAW provides preset objects that you can spray along a line. You can also create flow and dimension lines in drawings. You can also draw lines by using shape recognition. For more information, see "Drawing by using shape recognition." In this section, you’ll learn about • drawing lines • drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines • formatting lines and outlines • copying, converting, and removing outlines • closing multiple line segments • applying brush strokes • spraying objects along a line • drawing flow and dimension lines Drawing lines A line is a path between two points. Lines can consist of multiple segments, and the line segments can be curved or straight. The line segments are connected by nodes, which are depicted as small squares. CorelDRAW provides various drawing tools that let you draw curved and straight lines, and lines containing both curved and straight segments. Freehand and Polyline tools The Freehand and Polyline tools let you draw freehand lines as if you were sketching on a sketchpad. If you make a mistake while drawing, you can erase the unwanted part immediately and continue drawing. When drawing straight lines or segments, you can constrain them to straight vertical or horizontal lines. The Freehand tool lets you control the smoothness of the curved line you are drawing as well as add segments to an existing line. However, the Polyline tool is easier to use for quickly drawing a complex line that consists of alternating curved and straight segments. You can choose settings to control how the Freehand and Bézier tools behave. For example, you can change the default smoothness of a curved line that you’ve created with these tools. Bézier and Pen tools The Bézier and Pen tools let you draw lines one segment at a time by placing each node with precision and controlling the shape of each curved segment. When using the Pen tool, you can preview the line segments you are drawing. You can draw lines with multiple segments by using the Bézier tool and clicking each time you want the line to change direction. You can draw curves by using the Bézier tool and dragging the control handles at the ends of the Bézier curve. 3 point curve tool The 3 point curve tool lets you draw simple curved lines by specifying their width and height. Use this tool to create arc shapes quickly without manipulating nodes. You can draw a curved line by specifying its width (left), and then specifying its height and clicking the page (right). Smart drawing tool The Smart drawing tool lets you use shape recognition to draw straight and curved lines. For more information, see "Drawing by using shape recognition." Using nodes and control handles Some lines have nodes and control handles that you can manipulate to shape lines as you draw. For information about node types, see "Using curve objects." To draw a line by using the Freehand tool 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Freehand tool . 2. Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Draw a curved line Click where you want to start the curved line, and drag. Draw a straight line Click where you want to start the line, and then click where you want the line to end. Control the smoothness of a curved line Type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. Higher values produce smoother curves. Add line segments to an existing line Click the end node of a selected line, and click where you want the new segment to end. Create a closed shape from two or more connected lines In a line that contains two segments, click the end node, and then click the start node. • You can constrain a line created with the Freehand tool to a predefined angle, called a constrain angle, by holding down Ctrl while you drag. This feature is useful for drawing straight vertical and horizontal lines. For information about changing the constrain angle, see "To change the constrain angle." • You can erase a portion of a curved freehand line by holding down Shift and dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse button. To draw a line by using the Polyline tool 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Polyline tool . 2. Do one of the following: • To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment, and then click where you want to end it. • To draw a curved segment, click where you want to start the segment, and drag across the drawing page. You can add as many segments as you want and alternate between curved and straight segments. 3. Double-click to end the line. • You can erase a portion of a curved line by holding down Shift and dragging backward over the line before releasing the mouse button. • You can close an open object by clicking the Auto-close curve button on the property bar. To draw a line by using the Bézier tool 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Bézier tool . 2. Do one of the following: • To draw a curved segment, click where you want to place the first node, and drag the control handle to where you want to place the next node. Release the mouse button, and drag the control handle to create the curve. • To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment, and click where you want to end it. You can add as many segments as you want. 3. Press the Spacebar to finish the line. You can also Draw a curved segment followed by a straight segment Draw a curved segment, double-click the end node, and click where you want the straight segment to end. Draw a straight segment followed by a curved segment Draw a straight segment. Click the endpoint of the segment, drag to where you want, and release the mouse button. Drag to draw a curve. Change curve angle to preset increments as you draw While holding down Ctrl, drag a control handle. To draw a line by using the Pen tool 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Pen tool . 2. Do one of the following: • To draw a curved segment, click where you want to place the first node, and drag the control handle to where you want to place the next node. Release the mouse button, and drag the control handle to create the curve you want. • To draw a straight segment, click where you want to start the line segment, and click where you want to end it. You can add as many segments as you want and alternate between curved and straight segments. For more information about alternating curved and straight segments, see "To draw a line by using the Bézier tool." 3. Double-click to finish the line. You can also Preview a line while drawing Enable the Preview mode button in the property bar. Click on the drawing page, and release the mouse button. Move the mouse, and click to finish the line. Add a node to a line Enable the Auto add-delete button on the property bar. Point to where in the line you want to add a node, and click when the pointer changes to the Add node state . Delete a node from a line Point to a node, and click when the pointer changes to the Delete node state . To draw a curve by specifying width and height 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the 3 point curve tool . 2. Click where you want to start the curve, and drag to where you want the curve to end. 3. Release the mouse button, and click where you want the center of the curve to be. To set options for the Freehand and Bézier tools 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click Toolbox, and then click Freehand/Bézier tool. 3. Move the Freehand smoothing slider to set the default smoothness for curved lines. Higher values produce smoother curves. • Double-click the Freehand or Bézier tool to display the Freehand/Bézier page in the Options dialog box. Drawing calligraphic, pressure-sensitive, and preset lines CorelDRAW lets you simulate the effect of a calligraphic pen when you draw lines. Calligraphic lines vary in thickness according to the direction of the line and the angle of the pen nib. By default, calligraphic lines appear as closed shapes drawn with a pencil. You can control the thickness of a calligraphic line by changing the angle of the line you draw in relation to the calligraphic angle you choose. For example, when the line you draw is perpendicular to the calligraphic angle, the line is at the maximum thickness specified by the pen width. Lines drawn at the calligraphic angle, however, have little or no thickness. A calligraphic pen allows you to draw lines of various thicknesses. CorelDRAW lets you create pressure-sensitive lines which vary in thickness. You can create this effect using the mouse or a pressure-sensitive pen and graphics tablet. Both methods result in lines with curved edges and varying widths along a path. For information about using a pressure-sensitive pen on a graphics tablet, see the manufacturer’s instructions. A flower drawn by using three different artistic media lines: calligraphic lines (left), pressure-sensitive lines of variable thickness (center), and flat preset lines (right). CorelDRAW provides preset lines that let you create thick strokes in a variety of shapes. After you draw a calligraphic or preset line, you can apply a fill to it as you would to any other object. For information about applying fills, see "Filling objects." To draw a calligraphic line 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Artistic media tool . 2. Click the Calligraphic button on the property bar. If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar. 3. Type a value in the Calligraphic angle box on the property bar. If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. 4. Drag until the line is the shape you want. • The width you set is the maximum line width. The angle of the line you draw in relation to the calligraphic angle determines the line’s actual width. • You can also access calligraphic lines by clicking Effects Artistic media and specifying the settings you want in the Artistic media docker. To draw a pressure-sensitive line 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Artistic media tool . 2. Click the Pressure button on the property bar. If you are using the mouse, press the Up arrow or Down arrow to simulate changes in pen pressure, and change the width of the line. 3. Drag until the line is the shape you want. If you want to change the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar. • The width you set represents the line’s maximum width. The amount of pressure you apply determines the line’s actual width. • You can also access pressure-sensitive lines by clicking Effects Artistic media. To draw a preset line 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Artistic media tool . 2. Click the Preset button on the property bar. 3. Choose a preset line shape from the Preset stroke list list box. If you want to smooth the edges of the line, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. 4. Drag until the line is the shape you want. If you want to set the width of the line, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar. Formatting lines and outlines Lines are treated the same way as outlines of closed shapes, such as ellipses and polygons. You can change the appearance of both lines and outlines by using the controls of the Outline pen dialog box, the Outline page of the Object properties docker, and the property bar. For example, you can specify the color, width, and style of lines and outlines. You can choose a corner style to control the corner shape in lines and choose a line cap style to change the appearance of a line’s endpoints. By default, an outline is applied on top of an object’s fill, but you can apply it behind the fill, with the fill overlapping the outline. You can also link the outline thickness to an object’s size so that the outline increases when you increase the object’s size and decreases when you decrease the object’s size. Different corner styles were applied to the upper and lower row of triangles. Different line caps were applied to the lines in the upper-right corner. Arrowheads were applied to the lines in the lower-right corner. When an object contains lines that meet at sharp angles, you can set the miter limit to determine their corner shape. Corners with angles above the miter limit are pointed (mitered); corners with angles below the miter limit are beveled (squared off). You can create calligraphic outlines. A calligraphic outline varies in thickness, creating the effect of a hand-made drawing. In addition, you can add arrowheads to lines and curves. You can create new arrowheads and edit existing arrowheads. The default line and outline properties for each new object that you draw are as follows: • hairline width • CMYK black color • solid line • square corner and line cap styles • no arrowheads applied • outline applied on top of an object’s fill • outline not linked to an object’s size. However, you can change any of these default line and outline properties at any time. To specify line and outline settings 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Outline tool flyout , and click the Outline pen dialog button . 3. Open the color picker, and click a color. 4. Type a value in the Width box. 5. Choose a line style from the Style box. You can also Set the shape of corners In the Corners area, choose a corner style. Set the appearance of endpoints in open paths Choose a cap style in the Line caps area. Apply an outline behind an object’s fill Enable the Behind fill check box. Link the outline thickness to an object’s size Enable the Scale with image check box. Create a line style Click Edit style, and move the slider in the Edit line style dialog box. By clicking the boxes to the left of the slider, you can specify the placement and frequency of the dots in the new line style you create. Edit a line style Choose a line style from the Style list box, and click Edit style. Create a line style in the Edit line style dialog box, and click Replace. Set the miter limit Type a value in the Miter limit box. • You can quickly access the Outline pen dialog box by clicking the Outline icon on the status bar. • You can also change the outline width of a selected object by typing a value in the Outline width box on the property bar. To create a calligraphic outline 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Outline tool flyout , and click the Outline pen dialog button . 3. In the Corners area, enable a corner style. 4. In the Calligraphy area, type a value in the Stretch box to change the width of the pen’s nib. The value range is from1 to 100, with 100 as the default setting. Reducing the value makes square nibs rectangular and round nibs oval, creating a more pronounced calligraphic effect. 5. Type a value in the Angle box to change the orientation of the pen in relation to the drawing surface. • To reset Stretch and Angle values to their original values, click Default. • You can also adjust the Stretch and Angle values by dragging in the Nib shape preview box. To add an arrowhead 1. Select a line or curve. 2. Open the Outline tool flyout , and click the Outline pen dialog button . 3. In the Arrows area, open the Start arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape. 4. Open the End arrowhead picker, and click a line-ending shape. You can also Create an arrowhead In the Arrows area, click Options New. Drag the side handles and hollow nodes to shape the arrowhead. Edit an arrowhead Using the Pick tool , select an object with an arrowhead. Click the Arrowhead Selector button on the property bar. In the arrowhead picker, click Other. In the Edit window, drag the side handles and hollow nodes to shape the arrowhead. To set the line and outline properties for new objects 1. Using the Pick tool, click on an empty space in the drawing window to deselect all objects. 2. Open the Outline tool flyout , and click the Outline pen dialog button . 3. In the Outline pen dialog box, click OK to change the default outline properties for new graphic objects only. If you want to change the outline properties for text objects as well, enable the Artistic text and Paragraph text check boxes. 4. Specify the settings you want. Copying, converting, and removing outlines CorelDRAW lets you copy outline properties to other objects. You can also convert an outline to an object, and you can remove an outline. Converting an outline to an object creates an unfilled closed object with the outline’s shape. You can apply fills and special effects to the new object. To copy outline properties to another object 1. Using the Pick tool , select the object that has the outline you want to copy. 2. Right-click the first object, and drag over the destination object, to which you want to apply the outline. A blue outline of the original object follows the pointer to the new object. 3. When the pointer changes to a crosshair pointer , release the mouse button, and choose Copy outline here from the context menu. • You can also use the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools to copy outline properties. For more information, see "To copy fill, outline, or text properties from one object to another." • You can also sample the color of an existing object and apply the sampled color to the outline of another object. For more information, see "To sample a color." To convert an outline to an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Arrange Convert outline to object. To remove an object’s outline 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Outline tool flyout , and click the No outline button . • You can also remove an object’s outline by selecting the object and right-clicking No Color on the color palette. Closing multiple line segments You can quickly create a closed object from line segments by selecting which lines you want to connect and the shape of the connecting line. You can connect lines by using the closest nodes between lines. The connecting line can be either straight or curved. You can also connect lines by using their start and end nodes. The end node of the first selected line connects directly with the starting node of the closest selected line. The connected lines take on the properties of the first line selected. Closing multiple line segments can be the starting point for more complex drawings. To close multiple line segments 1. Hold down Shift, and select each object using the Pick tool . 2. Click Arrange Close path, and click one of the following: • Closest nodes with straight lines • Closest nodes with curvy lines • Start to end with straight lines • Start to end with curvy lines • You can also connect the subpaths in a group of objects. • You can also select lines by marquee selecting. If the lines are marquee selected, the properties from the top object on a layer are used.To see which object is the top one, open the Object manager docker by clicking Window Dockers Object manager. Applying brush strokes CorelDRAW lets you apply a variety of preset brush strokes, ranging from strokes with arrowheads to ones that are filled with rainbow patterns. When you draw a preset brush stroke, you can specify some of its attributes. For example, you can change the width of a brush stroke and specify its smoothness. You can also create custom brush strokes by using an object or a group of vector objects. When you create a custom brush stroke, you can save it as a preset. The above image was created by using many different brush strokes and widths. To apply a preset brush stroke 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Artistic media tool . 2. Click the Brush button on the property bar. 3. Choose a brush stroke from the Brush stroke list box. If you want to smooth the edges of the brush stroke, type a value in the Freehand smoothing box on the property bar. 4. Drag until the stroke is the shape you want. If you want to set the width of the stroke, type a value in the Artistic media tool width box on the property bar. • If you have access to a brush stroke that isn’t listed in the Brush stroke list box, you can apply it by clicking the Browse button on the property bar, and locating the brush stroke file. To create a custom brush stroke 1. Select an object or a set of grouped objects. 2. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Artistic media tool . 3. Click the Brush button on the property bar. 4. Click the object or grouped objects. 5. Click the Save artistic media stroke button on the property bar. 6. Type a filename for the brush stroke. 7. Click Save. • Custom brush strokes can be accessed from the Brush stroke list box on the property bar. • To delete a custom brush stroke, choose the brush stroke from the Brush stroke list box on the property bar, and click the Delete button . • You can create custom brush strokes by clicking Effects Artistic media and specifying the settings you want in the Artistic media docker. Spraying objects along a line CorelDRAW lets you spray a series of objects in a line. Besides graphic and text objects, you can import bitmaps and symbols to spray along a line. You can control how a sprayed line appears by adjusting the spacing between objects, so they are closer or farther apart from each other. You can also vary the order of objects in the line. For example, if you are spraying a series of objects that includes a star, a triangle, and a square, you can change the spray order so that the square appears first, followed by the triangle and then the star. CorelDRAW also lets you shift the position of objects in a sprayed line by rotating them along the path or offsetting them in one of four different directions: alternating, left, random, or right. For example, you can choose a left offset direction to align the objects you spray to the left of the path. You can also create a new spraylist with objects of your own. Objects sprayed along a curved line. The objects and line can be edited after the objects have been sprayed. To spray a line 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Artistic media tool . 2. Click the Sprayer button on the property bar. 3. Choose a spraylist from the Spraylist file list box on the property bar. If the spraylist you want is not listed, click the Browse button on the property bar to select the folder in which the file is located. 4. Drag to draw the line. You can also Adjust the number of objects sprayed at each spacing point Type a number in the top box of the Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar. Adjust the spacing between dabs Type a number in the bottom box of the Dabs/spacing of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar. Set the spray order Choose a spray order from the Choice of spray order list box on the property bar. Adjust the size of spray objects Type a number in the top box of the Size of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar. Increase or decrease the size of the spray objects as they progress along the line Type a number in the bottom box of the Size of objects to be sprayed box on the property bar. Reset a spraylist to its saved settings Click the Reset values button on the property bar. • Increasing the value for the size of spray objects along the line causes objects to become larger as they are distributed along the path. • Spraylists that have more complex objects use more system resources. CorelDRAW requires more time to produce lines when complex objects are used, and these objects increase the file size. Using symbols for each group in the list can help reduce file size and ease the demands on your system. For more information about creating symbols, see "Working with symbols." To rotate the lines that you spray 1. Select the spraylist that you want to adjust. 2. Click the Rotation button on the property bar. 3. Type a value between 0 and 360 in the Angle box on the property bar. If you want each object in the spray to rotate incrementally, enable the Use Increment check box and type a value in the Increment box. 4. Enable one of the following options: • Path based — rotates objects in relation to the line • Page based — rotates objects in relation to the page 5. Press Enter. To offset the lines that you spray 1. Select a spraylist. 2. Click the Offset button on the property bar. 3. Enable the Use offset check box to offset objects from the path of the line sprayed. If you want to adjust the offset distance, type a new value in the Offset box. 4. Choose an offset direction from the Offset direction list box. If you want to alternate between the left and right of the line, choose Alternating. To create a new spraylist 1. Click Effects Artistic media. 2. Select an object, a set of grouped objects, or a symbol. 3. Click the Save button on the Artistic media docker. 4. Enable Object sprayer. 5. Click OK. 6. Type a filename in the Filename box. 7. Click Save. • Spraylists are saved as CorelDRAW (CDR) files and can be accessed from the Spraylist file list box on the Artistic media property bar. • To delete a custom spraylist, select the spraylist from the Spraylist file list box on the property bar, and click the Delete button . Drawing flow and dimension lines You can draw flow lines in flowcharts and organizational charts to connect chart shapes. Objects stay connected by these lines even when you move one or both objects. For information about drawing flowchart shapes, see "Drawing predefined shapes." You can draw callout lines that label and draw attention to objects. You can also draw dimension lines to indicate the distance between two points in a drawing or the size of objects. By default, dimension lines and the measurements shown on the lines change when you change an object’s size. You can set how dimension lines are displayed. For example, you can specify dimension units, style, and precision as well as add a prefix or suffix to the dimension text. You can also set default values for all new dimension lines that you create. Dimension lines can show the sizes of parts of an object. To be able to use flow, callout, and dimension lines with precision, you need to snap them to specific nodes in objects. For more information about snapping and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects." To draw a flow line between two or more objects 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Interactive connector tool . 2. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Angled connector — to create a flow line containing right angles. The flow line can be a sequence of vertical or horizontal segments, or both. • Straight connector — to create a straight flow line at any angle 3. Drag from a node on one object to a node on another object. You can also Move a segment in a flow line containing right angles Using the Shape tool , select a flow line, and drag the node that you want to move. To draw a callout 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Dimension tool . 2. Click the Callout tool on the property bar. 3. Click where you want the first callout segment to start. 4. Click where you want the second segment to start. 5. Click where you want the second segment to end. A text cursor is displayed at the end of the callout line, indicating where to type a label for the object. 6. Type the callout text. To draw a dimension line 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Dimension tool . 2. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Vertical dimension tool — to create a vertical dimension line that measures the vertical distance between any two nodes (along the y-axis) • Horizontal dimension tool — to create a horizontal dimension line that measures the horizontal distance between any two nodes (along the x-axis) • Slanted dimension tool — to create a slanted dimension line that measures the length of slanted line segments • Auto dimension tool — to create a vertical or horizontal dimension line 3. Click the start point and endpoints of the dimension line. 4. Click where you want to place the dimension text. You can also Draw an angular dimension line Click the Angular dimension tool button on the property bar. Click where you want the two lines that measure the angle to intersect. Click where you want the first line to end, and click where you want the second line to end. Click where you want the angle’s label to appear. To set how the dimension units are displayed 1. Select a dimension line. 2. Make sure that the Show units for dimension button on the property bar is enabled. 3. On the property bar, choose options from the following list boxes: • Dimension style — lets you choose fractional, decimal, or standard dimension units • Dimension precision — lets you choose a level of precision for the measurements • Dimension units — lets you choose the unit of measurement You can also Hide dimension units Click the Show units for dimensions button. Specify the position of the dimension units Click the Text position drop down button on the property bar, and click a text position. Change the point size and font of the dimension units Select a dimension line. Click Text Format text. Choose a font style from the Font list box, and type a value in the Size box. Specify a prefix or suffix to dimension text Type a prefix or suffix in the Prefix or Suffix box on the property bar. To set default properties for new dimension lines 1. Open the Curve flyout , and click the Dimension tool . 2. Double-click the Dimension tool. The Dimension tool page of the Options dialog box appears. 3. Specify the dimension style, precision, and units, prefix, and suffix Drawing shapes CorelDRAW lets you draw basic shapes, which you can modify by using special effects and reshaping tools. In this section, you’ll learn about • drawing rectangles and squares • drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and pie shapes • drawing polygons and stars • drawing spirals • drawing grids • drawing predefined shapes • drawing by using shape recognition Drawing rectangles and squares CorelDRAW lets you draw rectangles and squares. You can draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally with the Rectangle tool or by specifying the width and height with the 3 point rectangle tool. The 3 point rectangle tool lets you quickly draw rectangles at an angle. After you draw a rectangle or square, you can reshape it by rounding one or more of its corners. You can create a rectangle by first drawing its baseline and then drawing its height. The resulting rectangle is angled. To draw a rectangle or square by dragging diagonally To Do the following Draw a rectangle Open the Rectangle flyout , and click the Rectangle tool . Drag in the drawing window until the rectangle is the size you want. Draw a square Open the Rectangle flyout , and click the Rectangle tool . Hold down Ctrl, and drag in the drawing window until the square is the size you want. • You can draw a rectangle from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. You can also draw a square from its center outward by holding down Shift + Ctrl as you drag. • You can draw a rectangle that covers the drawing page by double-clicking the Rectangle tool. To draw a rectangle by specifying height and width 1. Open the Rectangle flyout , and click the 3 point rectangle tool . 2. In the drawing window, point to where you want to start the rectangle, drag to draw the width, and release the mouse button. 3. Move the pointer to draw the height, and click. To adjust the size of the rectangle, type values in the Object(s) size boxes on the property bar. • To constrain the angle of the baseline to a preset increment, known as constrain angle, hold down Ctrl as you drag. For information about changing the constrain angle, see "To change the constrain angle." To round the corners of a rectangle or square 1. Click a rectangle or square. 2. Type values in the Corner roundness areas on the property bar. To apply the same roundness to all corners, click the Round corners together button on the property bar. • You can also round the corners of a selected rectangle or a square by filleting. For more information, see "Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners." • You can also round the corners of a selected rectangle or square by using the Shape tool to drag a corner node toward the shape’s center. • To set default corner roundness, click Tools Options, and double-click Toolbox from the Workspace list of categories. Then, click Rectangle tool, and move the slider or enter a number Drawing ellipses, circles, arcs, and pie shapes You can draw an ellipse or circle by dragging diagonally with the Ellipse tool, or you can draw an ellipse by using the 3 point ellipse tool to specify its width and height. The 3 point ellipse tool lets you quickly create an ellipse at an angle, eliminating the need to rotate the ellipse. Using the Ellipse tool, you can draw a new arc or pie shape, or you can draw an ellipse or circle and then change it to an arc or a pie shape. You can also change the default properties of new objects that are drawn with the Ellipse tool. For example, you can set the default properties so that all new shapes you draw are arcs or pie shapes. Using the 3 point ellipse tool, you can draw an ellipse by first drawing its centerline and then drawing its height. This method lets you draw ellipses at an angle. To draw an ellipse or a circle by dragging diagonally To Do the following Draw an ellipse Open the Ellipse flyout , and click the Ellipse tool . Drag in the drawing window until the ellipse is the shape you want. Draw a circle Open the Ellipse flyout , and click the Ellipse tool . Hold down Ctrl, and drag in the drawing window until the circle is the size you want. • You can draw an ellipse or a circle from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. To draw an ellipse by specifying width and height 1. Open the Ellipse flyout , and click the 3 point ellipse tool . 2. In the drawing window, drag to draw the centerline of the ellipse at the angle you want. The centerline runs through the center of the ellipse and determines its width. 3. Move the pointer to define the height of the ellipse, and click. To draw an arc or a pie shape To Do the following Draw an arc Open the Ellipse flyout , and click the Ellipse tool. Click the Arc button on the property bar. Drag in the drawing window until the arc is the shape you want. Draw a pie shape Open the Ellipse flyout , and click the Ellipse tool. Click the Pie button on the property bar. Drag in the drawing window until the pie is the shape you want. • To draw an arc, the ellipse or circle must have an outline. • You can change the direction of a selected arc or pie shape by clicking the Clockwise/counterclockwise arcs or pies button on the property bar. • You can constrain the movement of the node to 15-degree increments by holding down Ctrl as you drag. To use the Shape tool to create a pie shape, drag the node of the ellipse (left) to the inside of the ellipse (center). To create an arc, drag the node to the outside of the ellipse (right). To change the default properties for new objects drawn with the Ellipse tool 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click Toolbox, and then click Ellipse tool. 3. To change the shape of new objects to arcs or pie shapes, enable one of the following options: • Pie • Arc 4. Type values in the Starting angle and Ending angle boxes. 5. To set the direction of all new arcs or pie shapes, enable one of the following options: • Clockwise • Counterclockwise Drawing polygons and stars CorelDRAW lets you draw polygons and two types of stars: perfect and complex. Perfect stars are traditional-looking stars and can have a fill applied to the entire star shape. Complex stars have intersecting sides and produce original results with a fill applied. Left to right: a polygon, a perfect star, and a complex star, each with a fountain fill applied You can modify polygons and stars. For example, you can change the number of sides on a polygon or the number of points on a star, and you can sharpen the points of a star. You can also use the Shape tool to reshape polygons and complex stars, just as you would with any other curve object. For more information about working with curve objects, see "Using curve objects." Perfect stars can also be reshaped, but with some restrictions. To draw a polygon • Open the Object flyout , click the Polygon tool , and drag in the drawing window until the polygon is the size you want. • You can draw a polygon from its center by holding down Shift as you drag. • You can draw a symmetrical polygon by holding down Ctrl as you drag. To draw a star To Do the following Draw a perfect star Open the Object flyout , click the Star tool , and drag in the drawing window until the star is the size you want. Draw a complex star Open the Object flyout, click the Complex star tool , and drag in the drawing window until the star is the size you want. • You can draw a star from its center by holding down Shift as you drag. • You can draw a symmetrical star by holding down Ctrl as you drag. To modify a polygon To Do the following Change the number of sides of a polygon Select a polygon, type a value in the Number of points or sides on polygon, star or complex star box on the property bar, and press Enter. Reshape a polygon into a star Select a polygon, click the Shape tool , and drag a node on the polygon until the star is the shape you want. From left to right: The Shape tool was used to change a polygon into a star that can be shaped as a curve object. The line segments of the star were then converted to curves and adjusted to produce the starfish shape. To modify a star To Do the following Change the number of points on a star Select a star, type a value in the Number of points or side on polygon, star or complex star box on the property bar, and press Enter. Sharpen a star’s points Select a star, and type a value in the Sharpness of star and complex star box on the property bar. Reshape a star Select a star, click the Shape tool , and drag a node on the star. • When you use the Shape tool to reshape a perfect star, the node movement is constrained. Also, on perfect stars, you cannot add or delete nodes, nor can you convert line segments to curves. Drawing spirals You can draw two types of spirals: symmetrical and logarithmic. Symmetrical spirals expand evenly so that the distance between each revolution is equal. Logarithmic spirals expand with increasingly larger distances between revolutions. You can set the rate by which a logarithmic spiral expands outward. A symmetrical spiral (left) and a logarithmic spiral (right) To draw a spiral 1. Open the Object flyout , and click the Spiral tool . 2. Type a value in the Spiral revolutions box on the property bar. 3. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Symmetrical spiral • Logarithmic spiral If you want to change the amount by which the spiral expands as it moves outward, move the Spiral expansion slider. 4. Drag diagonally in the drawing window until the spiral is the required size. • You can draw a spiral from its center outward by holding down Shift as you drag. • You can also draw a spiral with even horizontal and vertical dimensions by holding down Ctrl as you drag Drawing grids You can draw a grid and set the number of rows and columns. A grid is a grouped set of rectangles that you can break apart To draw a grid 1. Open the Object flyout , and click the Graph paper tool . 2. Type values in the top and bottom portions of the Graph paper columns and rows box on the property bar. The value you type in the top portion specifies the number of columns; the value you type in the bottom portion specifies the number of rows. 3. Point to where you want the grid to appear. 4. Drag diagonally to draw the grid. • If you want to draw the grid from its center point outward, hold down Shift as you drag; if you want to draw a grid with square cells, hold down Ctrl as you drag. To ungroup a grid 1. Select a grid by using the Pick tool . 2. Click Arrange Ungroup. • You can also break apart a grid by clicking the Ungroup button on the property bar Drawing predefined shapes Using the Perfect Shapes collection, you can draw predefined shapes. Certain shapes — specifically basic shapes, arrow shapes, banner shapes, and callout shapes — contain glyphs. You can drag a glyph to modify the appearance of a shape. Using the Shape tool, you can drag a glyph to alter a shape. You can add text to the inside or outside of the shape. For example, you might want to put a label inside a flowchart symbol or a callout. To draw a predefined shape 1. Open the Perfect Shapes flyout , and click one of the following tools: • Basic shapes • Arrows shapes • Flowchart shapes • Banner shapes • Callout shapes 2. Open the Perfect Shapes picker on the property bar, and click a shape. 3. Drag in the drawing window until the shape is the size you want. • Perfect Shapes can be modified like any other shapes. To modify a predefined shape 1. Select a shape that contains a glyph. 2. Drag a glyph until you achieve the shape you want. • The right-angle, heart, lightning bolt, explosion, and flowchart shapes do not contain glyphs To add text to a predefined shape 1. Click the Text tool . 2. Position the cursor inside the shape’s outline until it changes to a text cursor . 3. Type inside the shape, choose a font, and format the text. Drawing by using shape recognition You can use the Smart drawing tool to draw freehand strokes that can be recognized and converted to basic shapes. Rectangles and ellipses are translated to native CorelDRAW objects; trapezoids and parallelograms are translated to Perfect Shapes objects; lines, triangles, squares, diamonds, circles, and arrows are translated to curve objects. If an object is not converted to a shape, it is smoothed. Objects and curves drawn with shape recognition are editable. You can set the level at which CorelDRAW recognizes shapes and converts them to objects. You can also specify the amount of smoothing applied to curves. You can set the amount of time to elapse between making a pen stroke and the implementation of shape recognition. For example, if the timer is set to one second and you draw a circle, shape recognition takes effect one second after you draw the circle. You can make corrections as you draw. You can also change the thickness and line style of a shape that was drawn by using shape recognition. Shapes created with the Smart drawing tool are recognized and smoothed. To draw a shape or line by using shape recognition 1. Click the Smart drawing tool . 2. Choose a recognition level from the Recognition level list box on the property bar. 3. Choose a smoothing level from the Smoothing level list box on the property bar. 4. Draw a shape or line in the drawing window. • The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart drawing tool is selected. To set shape recognition delay 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Toolbox list of categories, click Smart drawing tool. 3. Move the Drawing assistance delay slider. • The minimum delay is 10 milliseconds; the maximum is 2 seconds. To make a correction while using shape recognition • Before the delay recognition period has elapsed, hold down Shift, and drag over the area you want to correct. You must start erasing the shape or line from the last point drawn. • If you are drawing a freehand shape consisting of several curves, you can delete the last curve drawn by pressing Esc. To change the outline thickness of an object drawn with shape recognition 1. Click the Smart drawing tool . 2. Click the shape. 3. From the Outline width list box on the property bar, choose an outline thickness. • The Smart drawing tool property bar is displayed only when the Smart drawing tool is selected. • When you overlap lines drawn with the Smart drawing tool, the outline thickness is determined by the average. • You can change the line style of a shape drawn with shape recognition. For more information, see "To specify line and outline settings." Working with objects Working with objects is an essential part of creating drawings. In this section, you’ll learn about • selecting objects • copying, duplicating, and deleting objects • copying object properties, transformations, and effects • creating objects from enclosed areas • creating a boundary around selected objects • cloning objects • positioning objects • aligning and distributing objects • snapping objects • using dynamic guides • changing the order of objects • sizing and scaling objects • rotating and mirroring objects • grouping objects • combining objects • locking objects • finding and replacing objects • constraining objects Selecting objects Before you can change an object, you must select it. You can select visible objects, objects that are hidden from view by other objects, and a single object in a group or a nested group. In addition, you can select objects in the order in which they were created, select all objects at once, and deselect objects. A bounding box appears around a selected object, and an “X” appears at its center. You can select a single object from a group. To select objects To Do the following Select an object Click an object using the Pick tool . Select multiple objects Hold down Shift, and click each object that you want to select. Select an object, starting with the first object created and moving toward the last object created Press Shift + Tab until a selection box appears around the object you want to select. Select an object, starting with the last object created and moving toward the first object created Press Tab until a selection box appears around the object you want to select. Select all objects Click Edit Select all Objects. Select an object in a group Hold down Ctrl, click the Pick tool, and then click an object in a group. Select an object in a nested group Hold down Ctrl, click the Pick tool, and then click an object you want to select until a selection box appears around it. Select an object hidden from view by other objects Hold down Alt, click the Pick tool, and then click the topmost object until a selection box appears around the hidden object you want to select. Select multiple hidden objects Hold down Shift + Alt, click the Pick tool, and then click the topmost object until a selection box appears around the hidden objects you want to select. Select a hidden object in a group Hold down Ctrl + Alt, click the Pick tool, and then click the topmost object until a selection box appears around the hidden object you want to select. • The status bar displays a description of each hidden object as you select it. • You can also select one or more objects by clicking the Pick tool and then dragging around the object or objects. This method is known as marquee selecting. To deselect objects To Do the following Deselect all objects Click the Pick tool , and click a blank space in the drawing window. Deselect a single object among multiple selected objects Hold down Shift, click the Pick tool , and then click the object. Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects CorelDRAW provides you with several ways to copy objects. When you no longer need an object, you can delete it. Cutting, copying, and pasting You can cut or copy an object to place it on the Clipboard and paste it into a drawing or another application. Cutting an object places it on the Clipboard and removes it from the drawing. Copying an object places it on the Clipboard but keeps the original in the drawing. Duplicating Duplicating an object places a copy directly in the drawing window and does not use the Clipboard. Duplicating is faster than copying and pasting. Also, when duplicating an object, you can specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object along the x and y axes. This distance is known as the offset. You can apply a transformation, such as rotating, sizing or skewing, to the duplicate of an object while keeping the original object intact. If you decide that you want to keep the original object, you can delete the duplicate. Copying objects at a specified position You can create multiple object copies simultaneously while specifying their position, without using the Clipboard. For example, you can distribute object copies horizontally, to the left or right of the original object; or you can distribute object copies vertically, below or above the original object. You can specify the spacing between object copies, or you can specify the offset at which object copies are created in relation to each other. Copying objects quickly You can use other methods to create object copies quickly, without placing an object copy on the Clipboard. You can use the plus sign (+) on the numeric keypad to place an object copy on top of the original object, or you can press the Spacebar or right-click while dragging an object to create copies instantly To cut or copy an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Edit, and click one of the following: • Cut • Copy • You can also cut or copy an object by right-clicking the object and clicking Cut or Copy To paste an object into a drawing • Click Edit Paste. • You can use this procedure to paste an object from another application. • If you want to paste an object from an unsupported file format or specify options for the pasted object, click Edit Paste special. For more information about pasting objects from other applications, see "Object linking and embedding." To paste an object into a drawing • Click Edit Paste. • You can use this procedure to paste an object from another application. • If you want to paste an object from an unsupported file format or specify options for the pasted object, click Edit Paste special. For more information about pasting objects from other applications, see "Object linking and embedding." To duplicate an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Edit Duplicate. When you duplicate objects for the first time, the Duplicate offset dialog box appears. To specify the distance between the duplicate and the original object along the x and y axes, type values in the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset boxes. • Offset values of 0 place the duplicate on top of the original. • Positive offset values place the duplicate up and to the right of the original. • Negative offset values place the duplicate down and to the left of the original. • You can change the offset at which duplicates are created. To do this, click Tools Options, click General in the Document list of categories, and type values in the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset boxes. • You can also duplicate a selected object by pressing Ctrl + D. To create copies of an object at a specified position 1. Select an object. 2. Click Edit Step and Repeat. 3. In the Step and repeat docker, type a value in the Number of copies box. To Do the following Distribute object copies horizontally In the Vertical offset area, choose No offset from the Mode list box. In the Horizontal offset area, choose Spacing from the Mode list box. To specify the spacing between object copies, type a value in the Distance box. To place the object copies to the right or left of the original, choose Right or Left from the Direction list box. Distribute object copies vertically In the Horizontal offset area, choose No offset from the Mode list box. In the Vertical offset area, choose Spacing from the Mode list box. To specify the spacing between object copies, type a value in the Distance box. To place the object copies above or below the original, choose Up or Down from the Direction list box. Offset all object copies by a specified distance In the Horizontal offset and Vertical offset areas, choose Offset from the Mode list box, and type values in the Distance boxes. Offsetting multiple copies of an object by a specified distance • You can access the Step and repeat docker by pressing Ctrl+Shift+D. To create object copies quickly 1. Select an object by using the Pick tool . 2. Right-click while moving, rotating, or transforming the object. You can also Place an object copy on top of the original Press the plus sign (+ ) on the numeric keypad. Create multiple copies (useful for a transition effect) While moving, rotating, or transforming the object, press the Spacebar multiple times. To transform the duplicate of an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Arrange Transformations, and click any of the commands. 3. Choose the settings you want in the Transformation docker. 4. Click Apply to duplicate. • You can clear a transformation by selecting an object and clicking Arrange Clear transformations. To delete an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Edit Delete. • To retrieve a deleted object, you must use the Undo command. For more information, see "Undoing, redoing, and repeating actions." • You can also delete an object by clicking it and pressing Delete. Creating objects from enclosed areas You can create objects from areas enclosed by other objects. For example, if you draw a freehand line that crosses over itself to create loops, you can create an object from the loop shape. It doesn’t matter how many shapes and lines surround the area; as long as it is totally enclosed, you can create an object in the shape of that area. For more information about creating objects from enclosed areas, see "Applying fills to areas." The enclosed areas created by the two spirals objects (left) are filled by using the Smart fill tool. The Smart fill tool creates objects from each area. In the example above, the original spiral objects are deleted (right), and the newly created objects remain. Creating a boundary around selected objects You can automatically create a path around selected objects on a layer to create a boundary. This boundary can be used for various purposes, such as to produce keylines or cut lines. The boundary is created by a closed path that follows the shape of the selected objects. The default fill and outline properties apply to the object created by the boundary. You can create a boundary around selected objects (left). The boundary is created as a new object (middle) that can be used as a cut line or keyline for a finished logo (right). To create a boundary around selected objects 1. Select the objects that you want to surround with a boundary. 2. Click Effects Create boundary. Copying object properties, transformations, and effects CorelDRAW lets you copy one object’s attributes to another. You can copy object properties such as outline, fill, and text properties. You can copy object transformations such as sizing, rotating, and positioning. You can also copy effects applied to an object. To copy fill, outline, or text properties from one object to another 1. Click the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Eyedropper tool . 2. Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar. 3. Click the Properties flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Outline • Fill • Text 4. Click the edge of the object that has properties you want to copy. 5. Click the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Paintbucket tool . 6. Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the properties. • Options that are enabled in the Transformations and Effects flyouts on the property bar are also applied when you copy properties. • You can copy fill or outline properties, or both, by right-clicking an object, dragging over another object, and choosing Copy fill here, Copy outline here, or Copy all properties. To copy size, position, or rotation from one object to another 1. Click the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Eyedropper tool . 2. Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar. 3. Click the Transformations flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Size • Rotation • Position 4. Click the edge of the object that has transformations you want to copy. 5. Click the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Paintbucket tool . 6. Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the transformations. • Options that are enabled in the Properties and Effects flyouts on the property bar are also applied when you copy properties. To copy effects from one object to another 1. Click the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Eyedropper tool . 2. Choose Object attributes from the list box on the property bar. 3. Click the Effects flyout on the property bar, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Perspective • Envelope • Blend • Extrude • Contour • Lens • PowerClip • Drop shadow • Distortion 4. Click the edge of the object that has effects you want to copy. 5. Click the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Paintbucket tool . 6. Click the edge of the object to which you want to copy the effects. • Options that are enabled in the Properties and Transformations flyouts on the property bar are also applied when you copy properties. Cloning objects When you clone an object, you create a copy of an object that is linked to the original. Any changes you make to the original object are reflected automatically in the clone. Changes you make to the clone are not automatically reflected in the original, however. You can remove changes made to the clone by reverting to the original. Cloning lets you modify multiple copies of an object simultaneously by changing the master object. It is especially useful if you want the clone and master objects to differ by certain properties, such as fill and outline color, but want the master object to control other properties, such as the shape. If you simply want to use the same object in a drawing multiple times, consider using symbols, instead of clones, to keep the file size manageable. For more information about symbols, see "Working with symbols." The star on the left was cloned twice. Different fill and outline properties were applied to the clones. The clone on the right was also reshaped. To clone an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Edit Clone. You can also Select the master object of a clone Right-click the clone, and click Select master. Select the clone objects of a master Right-click the master, and click Select clones. • You can clone a master object multiple times, but you cannot clone a clone. To revert to a clone’s master 1. Right-click a modified clone, and click Revert to master. 2. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Clone fill — restores the master fill attributes • Clone outline — restores the master outline attributes • Clone path shape — restores the master shape attributes • Clone transformations — restores the master shape and size attributes • Clone bitmap color masks — restores the master color settings • You can restore only those master properties that were changed in the clone object Positioning objects You can position objects by dragging them to a new location, by nudging, or by specifying their horizontal and vertical position. Nudging lets you move an object in increments by pressing the Arrow keys. The increment value is known as nudge distance. Micro-nudging lets you move an object by a fraction of the nudge distance. Super-nudging lets you move an object by a multiple of the nudge distance. By default, you can nudge objects in 0.1-inch increments, but you can change this increment value to suit your needs. You can also change micro-nudge and super-nudge values. To position an object, you can set horizontal and vertical coordinates that are relative to the object’s center anchor point or to another anchor point. You can also move an object to another page. For more information, see "To move an object to another page." To move an object • Drag an object to a new position in the drawing. • You can move an object to another page by dragging the object over a page number tab and then dragging over the page. To move an object while drawing 1. Start drawing a shape such as a rectangle, ellipse, or polygon. 2. Hold down the right mouse button without releasing the left mouse button, and drag the unfinished object to its new position. 3. Release the right mouse button, and continue drawing. Moving an object while drawing To nudge an object To Do the following Nudge a selected object by the nudge distance Press an Arrow key. Nudge a selected object by a fraction of the nudge distance (micro-nudge) Hold down Ctrl, and press an Arrow key. Nudge a selected object by a multiple of the nudge distance (super-nudge) Hold down Shift, and press an Arrow key To set nudge distances 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3. Type a value in the Nudge box. 4. Type a value in one of the following boxes: • Super nudge • Micro nudge • You can also set the nudge distance by deselecting all objects and typing a value in the Nudge offset box on the property bar. • To save the new nudge distances to use in new drawings, click Tools Save settings as default. To position an object by x and y coordinates 1. Select an object. 2. On the property bar, type values in the following boxes: • x — lets you position the object on the x-axis • y — lets you position the object on the y-axis 3. Press Enter. To position an object by changing the anchor point 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Dockers Transformations Position. 3. Disable the Relative position check box in the Transformations docker. 4. Type values in the following boxes: • H — lets you specify a value for the horizontal position of an object • V — lets you specify a value for the vertical position of an object 5. Enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point that you want to set. 6. Click Apply. • By default, the point of origin (0,0) is at the lower-left corner of the drawing page. • When you enable the Relative position check box on the Transformations docker, the H and V boxes identify the position of the center anchor point as 0,0. When you specify a different position in the H and V boxes, the values represent a change from the object’s current position as measured from the center anchor point. Aligning and distributing objects CorelDRAW lets you precisely align and distribute objects in a drawing. You can align objects with each other and with parts of the drawing page, such as the center, edges, and grid. When you align objects with objects, you can line them up by their centers or by their edges. CorelDRAW lets you align multiple objects with the center of the drawing page horizontally or vertically. Single or multiple objects can also be arranged along the edge of the page and to the nearest point on a grid. Distributing objects automatically adds spacing between them based on their width, height, and center points. You can distribute objects so that their center points or selected edges (for example, top or right) appear at equal intervals. You can also distribute objects so that there is equal space between them. You can distribute objects over the extent of the bounding box surrounding them or over the entire drawing page. Scattered objects (left) with vertical alignment applied to them (right). To align an object with an object 1. Select the objects. The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edge is determined by either the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the last object created is used. If you select the objects one at a time, the last object selected is the reference point for aligning the other objects. 2. Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3. Click the Align tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes to specify horizontal and vertical alignment: • Left, Center, or Right — aligns objects vertically • Top, Center, or Bottom — aligns objects horizontally 5. From the Align objects to list box, choose Active objects. If you are aligning text objects, choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box: • First line baseline — uses the baseline of the first line of text as a reference point • Last line baseline — uses the baseline of the last line of text as a reference point • Bounding box — uses the bounding box of a text object as a reference point • You can also align objects with another object quickly, without using the Align and distribute dialog box, by clicking Arrange Align and distribute and clicking any of the first six alignment commands. The letter beside a command name indicates the keyboard shortcut you can use to align objects. For example, the letter L beside the Align left command shows that you can press L to align objects with the leftmost point of the object that is used as a reference point. • You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar. To align an object with the page center 1. Select an object. If you want to align multiple objects, marquee select the objects. 2. Click Arrange Align and distribute, and then click one of the following: • Center to page — aligns all objects with the page center • Center to page vertically — aligns objects with the page center along a vertical axis • Center to page horizontally — aligns objects with the page center along a horizontal axis • You can also align all objects with the page center by pressing P. To align an object with the page edge 1. Select an object. If you want to align an object group, select the group. 2. Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3. Click the Align tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes to specify horizontal and vertical alignment: • Left, Center, or Right — aligns objects vertically • Top, Center, or Bottom — aligns objects horizontally 5. Choose Edge of page from the Align to object list box. To align an object with a specified point 1. Select an object. If you want to align an object group, select the group. 2. Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3. Click the Align tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes to specify horizontal and vertical alignment: • Left, Center, or Right — aligns objects vertically • Top, Center, or Bottom — aligns objects horizontally 5. Choose Specified point from the Align to object list box. 6. Click Apply. The pointer changes to a crosshair pointer. 7. Click in the drawing window to define the reference point for alignment. To distribute objects 1. Select the objects. 2. Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3. Click the Distribute tab. 4. To distribute the objects horizontally, enable one of the following options from the top-right row: • Left — evenly spaces the objects’ left edges • Center — evenly spaces the objects’ center points • Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects • Right — evenly spaces the objects’ right edges 5. To distribute the objects vertically, enable one of the following options from the column on the left: • Top — evenly spaces the objects’ top edges • Center — evenly spaces the objects’ center points • Spacing — places equal intervals between the selected objects • Bottom — evenly spaces the objects’ bottom edges 6. To indicate the area over which the objects are distributed, enable one of the following options: • Extent of selection — distributes the objects over the area of the bounding box surrounding them • Extent of page — distributes the objects over the drawing page Top: Distributing objects horizontally. 1) Left — evenly spaces the objects’ left edges. 2) Center — evenly spaces the objects’ center points; Bottom: Distributing objects vertically. 3) Top — evenly spaces the objects’ top edges. 4) Center — evenly spaces the objects’ center points. Snapping objects When you move or draw an object, you can snap it to another object in a drawing. You can snap an object to a number of snap points in the target object. When the pointer is close to a snap point, the snap point is highlighted, indicating it as the pointer’s snapping target. To snap an object to another object with greater precision, you first snap the pointer to a snap point in the object, and then snap the object to a snap point in the target object. For example, you can snap the pointer to a rectangle’s center, and then drag the rectangle by its center and snap it to the center of another rectangle. The pointer was snapped to an end node of the screw (left), and then the screw was dragged to snap to the center of an ellipse (right). Snapping modes determine which snap points you can use in an object. The table below includes descriptions of all available snapping modes. Snapping mode Description Snapping mode indicator Node Lets you snap to an object’s node Intersection Lets you snap to a geometric intersection of objects Midpoint Lets you snap to a line segment midpoint Quadrant Lets you snap to points that are at 0°, 90°, 130°, and 270° on a circle, ellipse, or arc Tangent Lets you snap to a point on the outside edge of an arc, circle, or ellipse where a line touches, but not intersect, the object Perpendicular Lets you snap to a point on the outside edge of a segment where a line is to the object Edge Lets you snap to a point that touches the edge of an object Center Lets you snap to the center of the closest object (arc, regular polygon, or curve centroid) Text baseline Lets you snap to a point in the baseline of artistic or paragraph text You can choose a number of snapping options. For example, you can disable some or all snapping modes to make the application run faster. You can also set a snapping threshold, which specifies the distance from the pointer at which a snap point becomes active. To turn snapping on or off • Click View Snap to objects. A check mark beside the Snap to objects command indicates that snapping is turned on. • You can also press Alt + Z to toggle snapping on and off. To snap objects 1. Select the object that you want to snap to the target object. 2. Move the pointer over the object until the snap point becomes highlighted. 3. Drag the object close to the target object until the snap point becomes highlighted. • To snap an object as you draw it, drag in the drawing window until the snap point in the target object becomes highlighted. To set snapping options 1. Click View Snap to objects setup. 2. In the Snapping modes area, enable one or more of the mode check boxes. To enable all snapping modes, click Select all. To disable all snapping modes without turning off snapping, click Deselect all. 3. Choose one of the following snapping options from the Snapping threshold list box: • Low — activates a snap point when it is 4 screen pixels away from the pointer • Medium — activates a snap point when it is 8 screen pixels away from the pointer • High — activates a snap point when it is 16 screen pixels away from the pointer You can also Display or hide snapping mode indicators Enable or disable the Show snap location marks check box. Display or hide screen tips Enable or disable the Screen tip check box. Using dynamic guides You can display dynamic guides to help you precisely move, align, and draw objects in relation to other objects. Dynamic guides are temporary guidelines that you can pull from the following snap points in objects — center, node, quadrant, and text baseline. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects." As you drag an object along a dynamic guide, you can view the object’s distance from the snap point used to create the dynamic guide, and place the object precisely. You can use dynamic guides to place objects in relation to other objects as you draw them. You can also display intersecting dynamic guides and then place an object at the intersection point. A dynamic guide was pulled from a node in the bolt on the left. The screen tip beside the node displays the angle of the dynamic guide (0º)and the distance between the node and the pointer (1.5”). The bolt on the right was dragged along the dynamic guide and positioned precisely 1.5 inches away from the node used to generate the dynamic guide. Dynamic guides contain invisible divisions, called ticks, to which your pointer gravitates. Ticks let you move objects with precision along a dynamic guide. You can adjust tick spacing to suit your needs, and you can disable snapping to ticks. You can set other options for dynamic guides. For example, you can choose to display dynamic guides at one or more preset angles, or at custom angles that you specify. You can preview the angle settings. When you no longer need a dynamic guideline at a certain angle, you can delete the angle settings. You can also display dynamic guides that are extensions of line segments. A dynamic guide that is an extension of a line segment You can turn off dynamic guides at any time. To enable or disable dynamic guides • Click View Dynamic guides. • A check mark beside the Dynamic guides command indicates that dynamic guides are enabled. • You can toggle dynamic guides on and off by clicking the Dynamic guides button on the property bar or by pressing Shift + Alt + D. To display dynamic guides 1. With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool. 2. Move the pointer over, and then off, an eligible snap point of an object. 3. Repeat step 2 with other objects to display other dynamic guides. The snap points you point to are registered in a queue and are used to create dynamic guides. • The eligible snap points — the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap points — appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects." • To avoid displaying too many dynamic guides, you can clear the queue of points at any time by clicking in the drawing window or pressing Esc. • You can use the snap points you registered to display intersecting dynamic guides. To do this, you first display a dynamic guide and then move the pointer along the dynamic guide to where an intersecting dynamic guide would appear from a registered snap point. To place an object in relation to another object 1. With dynamic guides enabled, select an object. If you want to move the object by a specific snap point, move the pointer over the snap point until the snap point becomes highlighted. 2. Drag the object to an eligible snap point of the target object. 3. When the snap point of the target object becomes highlighted, drag the object along the dynamic guide to position it. • The eligible snap points — the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap points — appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects." To draw an object in relation to another object 1. With dynamic guides enabled, click a drawing tool. 2. Move the pointer over an eligible snap point of an object. 3. When the snap point becomes highlighted, move the pointer to display a dynamic guide. 4. Move the pointer along the dynamic guide to where you want, and drag to draw an object. • The eligible snap points — the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap points — appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects." To place an object at the intersection of dynamic guides 1. With dynamic guides enabled, select an object. If you want to use a specific snap point to move the object, move the pointer over the snap point until the snap point becomes highlighted. 2. Drag the object to an eligible snap point of another object, drag to display a dynamic guide, and continue to hold down the mouse button. 3. Drag the object to another eligible snap point. When the snap point becomes highlighted, drag to display another dynamic guide where the two dynamic guides would intersect. 4. When the intersection point appears, release the mouse button. In the following example, intersecting dynamic guidelines are used to position a washer in relation to two other objects — another washer and a bolt. First, the washer was dragged by its center snap point (left) to the other washer’s edge, and then to the right to display a dynamic guide (right). Next, the washer was dragged to the edge of the bolt, and then down to display another dynamic guide (left). Finally, the washer was positioned at the intersection of the dynamic guides (right). • The eligible snap points — the node, center, quadrant, and text baseline snap points — appear only when the corresponding snapping modes are activated. For more information about snap points and snapping modes, see "Snapping objects." To set dynamic guide options 1. Click View Dynamic guides setup. 2. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Angle screen tip — lets you display or hide the angle of dynamic guides • Distance — lets you display or hide the distance from the snap point that is used to create the dynamic guide 3. Type a value in the Tick spacing box to change the distance between the invisible divisions on the dynamic guides. 4. In the Guides area, enable or disable the angle check boxes to choose the angles at which to create the dynamic guides. When you enable an angle check box, a preview of the dynamic guide appears in the Guides preview window. 5. Enable the Extend along segment check box to create dynamic guides that are extensions of line segments. You can also Disable snapping to ticks Disable the Snap to ticks check box. Display a custom dynamic guide by specifying its angle In the Guides area, type a value in the Degrees box, and click Add. Delete angle settings Click an angle check box in the list box, and click Delete. Display dynamic guides at all available angles Click Select all. Changing the order of objects You can change the stacking order of objects on a layer or a page by sending objects to the front or back, or behind or in front, of other objects. You can also position objects precisely in the stacking order, as well as reverse the stacking order of multiple objects. The four objects (left) are ordered from top to bottom to create the final image (right). To change the order of an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Arrange Order, and then click one of the following: • To front of page — moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the page • To back of page — moves the selected object behind all other objects on the page • To front of layer — moves the selected object in front of all other objects on the active layer • To back of layer — moves the selected object behind all other objects on the active layer • Forward one — moves the selected object forward one position. If the selected object is in front of all other objects on the active layer, it is moved to the layer above. • Back one — moves the selected object behind one position. If the selected object is behind all other objects on the selected layer, it is moved to the layer below. • In front of — moves the selected object in front of the object that you click in the drawing window • Behind — moves the selected object behind the object that you click in the drawing window • An object cannot be moved to a master or locked (non-editable) layer; instead, it is moved to the closest normal or editable layer. For example, when you apply the To front of page command, and the topmost layer is locked, the object is moved to the topmost editable layer. Any objects on the locked layer remain in front of the object. • An Order command is unavailable if the selected object is already positioned in the specified stacking order. For example, the To front of page command is unavailable if the object is already in front of all the other objects on the page. To reverse the order of multiple objects 1. Select the objects. 2. Click Arrange Order Reverse order. Sizing and scaling objects CorelDRAW lets you size and scale objects. In both cases, you change the dimensions of an object proportionally by preserving its aspect ratio. You can size an object’s dimensions by specifying values or by changing the object directly. Scaling changes an object’s dimensions by a specified percentage. You can change an object’s anchor point from its center to any of its eight selection handles. To size an object To Size a selected object Drag any of the corner selection handles. Size a selected object from its center Hold down Shift, and drag one of the selection handles. Size a selected object to a multiple of its original size Hold down Ctrl, and drag one of the selection handles. Stretch a selected object as you size it Hold down Alt, and drag one of the selection handles. • You can also set a precise size for the object by typing values in the Object size boxes on the property bar. To scale an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Dockers Transformations Scale. 3. In the Transformations docker, type values in the following boxes: • H — lets you specify a percentage by which you want to scale the object horizontally • V — lets you specify a percentage by which you want to scale the object vertically If you want to change the object’s anchor point, enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set. If you want to maintain the aspect ratio, disable the Non-proportional check box. • You can also scale an object by dragging a selection handle. Rotating and mirroring objects CorelDRAW lets you rotate and create mirror images of objects. You can rotate an object by specifying horizontal and vertical coordinates. You can move the center of rotation to a specific ruler coordinate or to a point that is relative to the current position of the object. Rotating objects around a single point Mirroring an object flips it from left to right or top to bottom. By default, the mirror anchor point is in the center of the object. Mirroring an object from top to bottom To rotate an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Dockers Transformations Rotate. 3. Disable the Relative center check box in the Transformations docker. To rotate an object around a point relative to its current position, enable the Relative center check box. 4. Type a value in the Angle box. You can also Specify the point around which you want to rotate the object Type values in the H and V boxes to specify the horizontal and vertical positions. Click Apply. • You can also rotate a selected object by dragging a rotation handle clockwise or counterclockwise. To rotate an object around a ruler coordinate 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Dockers Transformations Rotate. 3. Disable the Relative center check box. 4. Type a value in the Angle box. 5. Type values in any of the following Center boxes: • H — lets you specify the point on the horizontal ruler around which the object rotates • V — lets you specify the point on the vertical ruler around which the object rotates 6. Type a value in the Angle of rotation box on the property bar. 7. Press Enter. To mirror an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Dockers Transformations Scale. 3. In the Transformations docker, click one of the following: • Horizontal mirror — lets you flip the object from left to right • Vertical mirror — lets you flip the object from top to bottom If you want to flip the object on a specific anchor point, enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set. 4. Click Apply. • You can also mirror a selected object by holding down Ctrl and dragging a selection handle to the opposite side of the object. • You can open the Transformations docker by clicking Arrange Transformations and selecting an option from the flyout. Grouping objects When you group two or more objects, they are treated as a single unit. Grouping lets you apply the same formatting, properties, and other changes to all the objects within the group at the same time. CorelDRAW also lets you group other groups to create nested groups. You can add objects to or remove objects from a group, and you can delete objects that are members of a group. You can also edit a single object in a group without ungrouping the objects. If you want to edit multiple objects in a group at the same time, you must ungroup the objects first. If a group contains nested groups, you can ungroup all objects in the nested groups simultaneously. Single objects retain their attributes when they are grouped. To group objects 1. Select the objects. 2. Click Arrange Group. • The status bar indicates that a group of objects is selected. • You can select objects from different layers and group them; however, once grouped, the objects reside on the same layer. • You can create a nested group by selecting two or more groups of objects and clicking Arrange Group. • You can also group objects by clicking Window Dockers Object manager and dragging an object’s name in the Object manager docker over the name of another object. To add an object to a group 1. Click Window Dockers Object manager. 2. In the Object manager docker, drag the name of the object to the name of the group. To remove an object from a group 1. Click Window Dockers Object manager. 2. In the Object manager docker, double-click the name of the group. 3. Drag an object from the group to a position outside the group. • You can also remove an object from a group by clicking the object in the object list and dragging it out of the group. • To delete an object in a group, select the object in the object list, and click Edit Delete. To edit a single object in a group 1. Click the Pick tool . 2. While holding down Ctrl, click an object in a group. 3. Edit the object. • You can also select a single object in a group by clicking the object’s name in the Object manager docker. To access the Object manager docker, click Tools Object manager. To ungroup objects 1. Select one or more groups. 2. Click Arrange, and click one of the following commands: • Ungroup — breaks a group into individual objects, or a nested group into multiple groups • Ungroup all — breaks a group into individual objects, including objects within nested groups • You can also ungroup objects by clicking the Ungroup button on the property bar. • You can also ungroup all nested groups within a group by clicking the Ungroup all button . Combining objects Combining two or more objects creates a single object with common fill and outline attributes. You can combine rectangles, ellipses, polygons, stars, spirals, graphs, or text. CorelDRAW converts these objects to a single curve object. If you need to modify the attributes of an object that has been combined from separate objects, you can break apart the combined object. You can extract a subpath from a combined object to create two separate objects. You can also weld two or more objects to create a single object. For information about welding objects, see "Welding and intersecting objects." The two objects (left) are combined to create a single object (right). The new object has the fill and outline properties of the last object selected before combining. To combine objects 1. Select the objects to be combined. 2. Click Arrange Combine. • Combined text objects become larger blocks of text. • You can also combine selected objects by clicking the Combine button on the property bar. • You can close open lines in a combined object by clicking Arrange Close path and clicking a command. To break apart a combined object 1. Select a combined object. 2. Click Arrange Break curve apart. • If you break apart a combined object that contains artistic text, the text breaks apart first into lines, and then into words. Paragraph text breaks into separate paragraphs. To extract a subpath from a combined object 1. Click the Shape tool , and select a segment, node, or group of nodes on a combined object. 2. Click the Extract subpath button on the property bar. • After you extract the subpath, the path’s fill and outline properties are removed from the combined object. Locking objects Locking an object prevents you from accidentally moving, sizing, transforming, filling, or otherwise changing it. You can lock single, multiple, or grouped objects. To change a locked object, you need to unlock it first. You can unlock one object at a time or all locked objects at the same time. To lock an object • Select an object, and click Arrange Lock object. • You can also lock an object by right-clicking it and clicking Lock object. To unlock objects 1. Select a locked object or group of objects. 2. Click Arrange, and then click one of the following: • Unlock object • Unlock all objects • You can also unlock an object by right-clicking it and clicking Unlock object. Finding and replacing objects You can use the Find and Replace wizards to locate and edit objects in a large drawing. The Find wizard guides you step by step in finding and selecting objects in a drawing according to search criteria that you specify. The search criteria can include object type and its related properties, fill and outline properties, vector effects applied to objects, or the name of an object or style. For example, you can search for and select all rectangles with rounded corners and without fill, or all text on a path. You can also search for objects that contain the same properties as a selected object. You can change the search criteria in the middle of a search. You can also save search criteria for later use. The Replace wizard guides you through the process of finding objects that contain the properties you specify and then replacing those properties with others. For example, you can replace all object fills of a certain color with fills of a different color. You can also replace color models and palettes, outline properties, and text attributes, such as font and font size. You can also search for specific words and replace them with other words. For more information, see "Finding, editing, and converting text." To find and select objects 1. Click Edit Find and replace Find objects. 2. Follow the instructions in the Find wizard. To replace object properties 1. Click Edit Find and replace Replace objects. 2. Follow the instructions in the Replace wizard. Constraining objects You can restrict how objects are drawn and edited by using a constrain key while you draw. For example, you can press a constrain key to constrain a rectangle to a square, an ellipse to a circle, or a straight line to a perfectly horizontal or vertical line. By default, the application uses the Ctrl key to constrain the shape or angle of objects, and the Shift key to draw shapes outward from their center of origin. However, you can change the default constrain key to Shift at any time. Using a constrain key lets you draw or rotate an object or an object’s nodes and control handles at a preset increment, known as a constrain angle. By default, the constrain angle is 15 degrees, but you can change it to suit your needs. To constrain objects while drawing or editing To Do the following Constrain a shape to equal width and height While holding down Ctrl, draw diagonally. Use a preset increment (the constrain angle) to draw or rotate an object While holding down Ctrl, move the pointer to draw or rotate the object. • A rectangle is constrained to a square, an ellipse to a circle, and a polygon to a shape with sides of equal length. To change the constrain key 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click Toolbox, and then click Pick tool. 3. In the Ctrl and Shift keys area, enable one of the following options: • Traditional CorelDRAW — to use the Ctrl key as the constrain key and the Shift key to draw shapes outward from their center of origin • Windows standard — to use the Shift key as the constrain key and the Ctrl key to apply transformations to the duplicate of an object, while leaving the original intact To change the constrain angle 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click Edit. 3. Type a value in the Constrain angle box. Shaping objects CorelDRAW lets you shape objects in various ways. In this section, you’ll learn about • using curve objects • shaping curve objects • mirroring changes in curve objects • skewing and stretching objects • smudging objects • roughening objects • applying distortion effects • shaping objects by using envelopes • cropping, splitting, and erasing objects • trimming objects • filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners • welding and intersecting objects • creating PowerClip objects For more information about working with paths and subpaths, see "Reference: Shaping objects." Using curve objects A curve object has nodes and control handles, which you can use to change the object’s shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line. An object’s nodes are the small squares that appear along the object’s outline. The line between two nodes is called a segment. Segments can be curved or straight. Each node has a control handle for each curved segment connected to it. Control handles help you adjust the curve of a segment. The components of a curve: nodes, segments, and control handles Most objects that are added to a drawing are not curve objects, with the exception of spirals, freehand lines, and Bézier lines. Therefore, if you want to customize the shape of an object or text object, it is recommended that you convert it to a curve object. To convert objects to curve objects 1. Select the object. 2. Click Arrange Convert to curves. • You can convert artistic text to curves so that you can shape individual characters. • You can also convert an object to a curve object by selecting the object and clicking the Convert to curves button on the property bar. Shaping curve objects You can shape curve objects by manipulating their nodes and segments, and by adding and deleting nodes. Selecting and moving nodes You can select individual, multiple, or all of the object’s nodes. Selecting multiple nodes lets you shape different parts of an object simultaneously. You can marquee select nodes by enclosing them with a rectangular marquee box, or by enclosing them with an irregularly shaped marquee box. Freehand marquee selection is useful when you want to select specific nodes in complex curves. When a node is selected on curved segments, control handles are displayed. You can adjust the shape of the curved segments by moving the nodes and control handles. Usually, a control handle is displayed as a solid blue arrowhead (left). When a control handle overlaps with a node, it is displayed as an unfilled blue arrowhead beside the node (right). The Shape tool is the standard tool for moving nodes. You can also use the Pick and Bézier tools to move nodes. Manipulating segments You can move curved segments to change an object’s shape. You can also control the smoothness of curved segments. You can change the direction of a curve object by reversing the position of its start and end nodes. The effect is apparent only when the ends of a curve object are different. For example, when an arrowhead is applied to the end node of a curve object, changing the direction results in moving the arrowhead to the start node. Changing the direction of a curve Adding, removing, joining, and aligning nodes When you add nodes, you increase the number of segments and, therefore, the amount of control you have over the shape of the object. You can delete selected nodes to simplify an object’s shape. When curve objects contain many nodes, it is difficult to edit and output them to devices such as vinyl cutters, plotters, and rotary engravers. You can have the number of nodes in a curve object reduced automatically. Reducing the number of nodes removes overlapping nodes and can smoothe a curve object. A curve object is made up of components called paths. A path can be open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, an ellipse) and can consist of a single line, or a curve segment, or many joined segments. You can add color to the inside of closed paths. To apply a fill to an open path, such as a line, you first need to join its start and end nodes to create a closed object. For information about applying fills, see "Filling objects." If the paths consist of multiple subpaths, you can break paths apart to extract subpaths. For more information about paths, see "Reference: Shaping objects." You can align the nodes of a curve object horizontally or vertically. Using node types You can change the nodes on a curve object to one of four types: cusp, smooth, symmetrical, or line. The control handles of each node type behave differently. Cusp nodes let you create sharp transitions, such as corners or sharp angles, in a curve object. You can move the control handles in a cusp node independently of one another, changing only the line on one side of the node. With smooth nodes, the lines passing through the node take on the shape of a curve, producing smooth transitions between line segments. The control handles of a smooth node are always directly opposite one another, but they may be at different distances from the node. Symmetrical nodes are similar to smooth nodes. They create a smooth transition between line segments, but they also let you give lines on both sides of a node the same curve appearance. The control handles of symmetrical nodes are directly opposite each other and at an equal distance from the node. Line nodes let you shape curve objects by changing the shape of their segments. You can make a curved segment straight or a straight segment curved. Making a straight segment curved does not noticeably change the segment’s appearance, but it displays control handles that you can move to change the segment’s shape. Left to right: Cusp, smooth, symmetrical, and line nodes Transforming nodes You can shape objects by stretching, scaling, rotating, and skewing their nodes. For example, you can scale the corner nodes of a curve object to enlarge the curve object proportionally. Also, a curve object or parts of a curve object can be rotated in a counterclockwise or clockwise direction. To select a node 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Select a curve object. 3. Click a node. You can also Marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Rectangular from the Shape tool selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes that you want to select. Freehand marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Freehand from the Shape tool selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Select multiple nodes Hold down Shift, and click each node. Select all nodes on a selected curved object Click Edit Select all Nodes. Select the first or last node of a curve object Press Home or End. Select the node that follows or precedes a selected node Press Tab or Shift + Tab. Deselect a node Hold down Shift, and click a selected node. Deselect multiple nodes Hold down Shift, and click each selected node. Deselect all nodes Click an unused space in the drawing window. • You can also select a node by using the Pick , Freehand , Bézier , or Polyline tool. To do this, first click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and make sure that the Enable node tracking check box is enabled. Click a curve object, move the pointer over a node until the tool’s shape state cursor appears, and click the node. Note that when the Enable node tracking check box is enabled, the snapping feature is not available. To move a node or control handle 1. Select an object by using the Shape tool . 2. Click a node. 3. Drag the node or any of the control handles to shape the segments on both sides. You can change a control’s handle angle and distance from the node to shape a segment. • You can also move a node by using the Pick , Freehand , Bézier , or Polyline tool. To do this, first click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and make sure that the Enable node tracking check box is enabled. Click a curve object, move the pointer over a node until the tool’s shape state cursor appears, and drag the node. To manipulate a curve object’s segments 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Click a curve object. 3. Drag a segment until it’s the shape you want. You can also Straighten a curve segment Click a curve segment, and click the Convert curve to line button on the property bar. Curve a straight segment Click a straight segment, and click the Convert line to curve button on the property bar. Smooth a segment Click a node, and move the Curve smoothness slider on the property bar. To smooth all segments in a curve object, select all of the object’s nodes before moving the Curve smoothness slider. Change the direction of a curve object Click a segment, and click the Reverse curve direction button on the property bar. To add or delete a node To Do the following Add a node Open the Shape edit flyout , click the Shape tool , select a curve object, and double-click where you want to add a node. Delete a node Open the Shape edit flyout, click the Shape tool, select a curve object, and double-click a node. To reduce the number of nodes in a curve object 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Click a curve object, and do one of the following: • To reduce the number of nodes in the entire object, click the Select all nodes button on the property bar. • To reduce the number of nodes in a part of a curve object, marquee select the part you want to change. 3. Do one of the following: • Click Reduce nodes on the property bar to have overlapping and redundant nodes automatically removed. • Move the Curve smoothness slider to control the number of nodes that are removed. Removing many nodes can reshape the curve object. To join the end nodes of a single subpath 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Click a subpath. 3. Click the Auto-close curve button on the property bar. • You can close multiple subpaths by clicking Arrange Close path. For more information, see "Closing multiple line segments." To join the nodes of multiple subpaths 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Press Shift, and click a node from each subpath. 3. Click the Extend curve to close button on the property bar. • If you want to join nodes from separate curve objects, you must first combine them into a single curve object, and then join the end nodes of the new subpaths. For information about combining objects, see "Combining objects." To break a path To Do the following Break a path Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . Select a node on the path, and click the Break curve button on the property bar. Extract a broken path from an object Open the Shape edit flyout, and click the Shape tool. Right-click a path, and click Break apart. Select a segment, node, or group of nodes that represents the portion of the path you want to extract, and click the Extract subpath button on the property bar. To align nodes 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Select a curve object. 3. Press Shift, and select the nodes you want to align. 4. Click the Align nodes button on the property bar. To shape a curve object by using cusp, smooth, or symmetrical nodes 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Click a node. 3. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Make node a cusp • Make node smooth • Make node symmetrical 4. Drag the node’s control handles. • You can also change an existing node from one type to another by using shortcut keys. To change a smooth node to a cusp node or a cusp node to a smooth node, click the node using the Shape tool, and press C. To change a symmetrical node to a smooth node or a smooth node to a symmetrical node, click the node with the Shape tool, and press S . To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Select a curve object. 3. Select the nodes along the curve that you want to transform. 4. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Stretch and scale nodes • Rotate and skew nodes 5. Drag a set of handles to transform the nodes. Mirroring changes in curve objects When you mirror changes in curve objects, you edit nodes and have the same edits take place in reverse on corresponding nodes. For example, you can move a node to the right, and its corresponding node moves the same distance to the left. To mirror changes, you must select two curve objects one of which was created by mirroring the other, or a symmetrical object. For information about mirrroring objects, see "Rotating and mirroring objects." Next, you need to choose whether to mirror changes horizontally (along a vertical line of symmetry) or vertically (along a horizontal line of symmetry). Finally, you need to select the appropriate corresponding nodes so that editing changes are mirrored across the selected objects. Left: Two corresponding nodes are selected in mirrored curve objects. Right: When the blue control handles are moved, the change is reflected in the corresponding control handles (in red). To mirror changes in curve objects 1. Using the Pick tool, select mirrored curve objects or a symmetrical curve object. 2. Click the Shape tool . 3. On the property bar, click one of the following: • Reflect nodes horizontally button — lets you edit corresponding nodes in objects that have been mirrored horizontally • Reflect nodes vertically button — lets you edit corresponding nodes in objects that have been mirrored vertically 4. Hold down Shift, and select corresponding nodes on the left and right, or top and bottom. 5. Edit the nodes on one side. The changes occur in reverse on corresponding nodes on the other side. Skewing and stretching objects You can skew and stretch objects in CorelDRAW. When you skew an object, you specify the degree by which you want to slant the object. Stretching changes an object’s vertical and horizontal dimensions non proportionally. CorelDRAW also lets you change the skew and sizing anchor point of an object from its default center position. Skewing an object horizontally Stretching an object horizontally To skew an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Arrange Transformations Skew. 3. In the Transformations docker type a value in any of the following boxes: • H — lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the object horizontally • V — lets you specify the number of degrees by which you want to skew the object vertically If you want to change the object’s anchor point, enable the Use anchor point check box, and enable the check box that corresponds to the anchor point you want to set. 4. Click Apply. • If you move the skew anchor point, you can reset it to the center again. • You can also skew an object interactively by dragging one of its skew handles. To stretch an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Arrange Transformations Size. 3. Enable the Non-proportional check box. 4. In the Transformations docker, type a value in the following boxes: • H — lets you specify the width of a selected object • V — lets you specify the height of a selected object 5. Click Apply. • The new values that you enter to stretch an object are the basis for a new ratio of the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the object. When you disable the Non-proportional check box, any resizing of the object is based on this new ratio. To revert the object to its original one-to-one proportions before transforming it again, you must disable the Non-proportional check box, and then retype the original values. • You can stretch the sides of an object proportionally by disabling the Non-proportional check box, typing a value in either the H or V box, and pressing Enter. • You can also stretch an object from its center by pressing Shift and dragging a corner selection handle. • You can also stretch an object in increments of 100% by pressing Ctrl, and dragging a corner selection handle. Smudging objects Smudging lets you distort an object by dragging its outline. When applying smudging to an object, you can control the extent and shape of the distortion whether you activate the controls for the graphics tablet stylus or use the settings that apply to a mouse. The smudging effect responds to both the angle of rotation — or bearing — and the tilt angle of a graphics tablet stylus. Rotating the stylus changes the angle of the smudging effect and tilting the stylus flattens the brush tip and changes the shape of the smudging. If you are using a mouse, you can simulate the bearing and tilt of the stylus by specifying values. Increasing the bearing angle from 0 - 359° changes the angle of the brush stroke. As you decrease the tilt angle from 90° - 1°, you change the smudging shape by flattening the brush tip. Smudging can respond to the pressure of a stylus on a tablet where the smudging widens with more pressure and narrows with less. If you are using a mouse or want to override stylus pressure, you can enter real values to simulate the pressure of a stylus on a graphics tablet. Negative values to -10 create a narrowing distortion, 0 maintains an even stroke width, and positive values to 10 create an expanding distortion. Objects placed in the foreground and background have been shaped by outside smudging (sun’s rays and blades of grass) and inside smudging (clouds). Whether you are using a stylus or a mouse, you must specify the nib size. The nib size determines the width of the smudging applied to an object. You can apply the smudging effect to the inside and outside of an object. To smudge an object 1. Select an object using the Pick tool . 2. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Smudge brush tool . 3. Drag around the outline to distort it. You can also Change the size of the brush nib Type a value in the Size of the nib box on the property bar. Change the size of the brush nib when using the graphics stylus Click the Use stylus pressure button on the property bar and apply pressure to the stylus. Widen or narrow the smudging Type a value between -10 and 10 in the Add dry out to the effect box on the property bar. Specify the shape of the smudging Type a value between 1 and 90 in the Enter a fixed value for tilt settings box on the property bar. Change the shape of the smudging when using the graphics stylus Click the Use stylus tilt button on the property bar. Specify the angle of the nib shape for smudging Type a value between 0 and 359 in the Enter a fixed value for bearing settings box on the property bar. Change the angle of the nib shape for smudging when using the graphics stylus Click the Use stylus bearing button on the property bar. Smudge the inside of an object Click the outside of an object and drag inwards. Smudge the outside of an object Click the inside of an object an drag outwards. • You cannot apply smudging to Internet or embedded objects, linked images, grids, masks, mesh-filled objects, or objects with blend and contour effects. • To get the minimum and maximum values for the smudging controls, right-click the control on the property bar and click Settings. Roughening objects The roughening effect lets you apply a jagged or spiked edge to objects, including lines, curves, and text. You can control the size, angle, direction, and number of the indentations whether you activate the graphics tablet stylus or apply settings to a mouse. The roughening effect is determined either by movements of a graphics tablet stylus, by fixed settings, or by automatically applying perpendicular spikes to the line. Tilting the stylus toward and away from the tablet’s surface increases and decreases the size of the spikes. If you are using a mouse, you can specify the tilt angle from 1 - 90°. You can determine the direction of the spikes by changing the angle of rotation (or bearing) of the stylus as you apply the roughening effect to an object. When you are using a mouse, you can set the bearing angle from 0 - 359°. You can also increase or decrease the number of spikes that are applied as you drag. The roughening effect also responds to the pressure of the stylus on the tablet. The more pressure you apply, the more spikes are created in the roughened area. If you are using a mouse, you can specify values to simulate the stylus pressure. You can also change the brush nib size. Roughening allows you to apply jags or spikes to part of an outline or path To roughen an object 1. Select an object using the Pick tool . 2. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Roughen brush tool . 3. Point to the area on the outline you want to roughen, and drag the outline to distort it. You can also Specify the size of the roughening spikes Type a value from 0.01 to 2.0 in the Size of the nib box on the property bar. Change the number of spikes in a roughened area Type a value between 1 and 10 in the Enter a value for frequency of spikes box on the property bar. Change the number of spikes in a roughened area when using a graphics stylus Click the Use stylus pressure button on the property bar. Specify the height of the roughening spikes Type a value between 1 and 90 in the Enter a fixed value for tilt settings box on the property bar. Increase the number of roughening spikes as you drag Type a value between -10 and 10 in the Add dry out to the effect box on the property bar. Change the height of the roughening spikes when using a graphics stylus Click the Use stylus tilt button on the property bar. Specify the direction of the roughening spikes Choose Fixed direction from the Spike direction list box. Type a value between 0 and 359 in the Enter a fixed value for bearing settings box on the property bar. Change the direction of the roughening spikes when using a graphics stylus Choose Stylus setting from the Spike direction list box on the property bar. Create roughening spikes perpendicular to the path or outline Choose Auto from the Spike direction list box on the property bar. • Objects with distortions, envelopes, and perspective applied to them are converted to curve objects before the roughening effect is applied. • To make the tilt angle and bearing angle responsive to the graphics tablet stylus, right-click the roughened object, and select a command from the submenu. • To get the minimum and maximum values for the roughening controls, right-click the control on the property bar, and click Settings Applying distortion effects You can apply three types of distortion effects to shape objects. Distortion effect Description Push and pull Lets you push the edges of an object in or pull the edges of an object out Zipper Lets you apply a saw tooth effect to the edges of the object. You can adjust the amplitude and frequency of the effect. Twister Lets you rotate an object to create a swirl effect. You can choose the direction of the swirl, as well as the origin, degree, and amount of rotation. From left to right: Original image; Zipper and Twister distortions applied; Pull distortion applied After you distort an object, you can change the effect by altering the center of distortion. This point is identified by a diamond-shaped handle, around which a distortion appears. It is similar to a mathematical compass, where the pencil moves around a stationary point. You can place the center of distortion anywhere in the drawing window, or choose to center it in the middle of an object so that the distortion is distributed evenly and the shape of the object changes in relation to its center. You can create an even more dramatic effect by applying a new distortion to an already distorted object. You don’t lose the effect of the original distortion if, for example, you apply a zipper distortion on top of a twister distortion. The CorelDRAW application also lets you remove and copy distortion effects. To distort an object 1. Open the Interactive tool flyout , and click the Interactive distortion tool . 2. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons, and specify the settings you want: • Push and pull distortion • Zipper distortion • Twister distortion 3. Point to where you want to place the center of distortion, and drag until the object is the shape you want. You can also Change the center of distortion Drag the diamond-shaped position handle to a new location. Adjust the number of points on a zipper distortion Move the slider on the center of the distortion handle. Apply a preset distortion Choose a distortion preset from the Preset list box on the property bar. Apply more than one distortion to an object Click another distortion type on the property bar, click an object, and drag. • You can reapply the effects to distorted objects. • You can center a distortion by clicking the Center distortion button on the property bar. You can use the interactive vector controls to edit a distortion effect. Upper left: a circle with a zipper effect applied. Upper right: zipper effects with higher frequency (more spikes). Bottom: examples of zipper effects. To remove a distortion 1. Select a distorted object. 2. Click Effects Clear distortion. • Removing a distortion this way clears the most recent distortion you’ve applied. • You can also remove a distortion from a selected object by clicking the Clear distortion button on the property bar. To copy a distortion 1. Select the object to which you want to copy a distortion. 2. Click Effects Copy effect Distortion from. 3. Click a distorted object. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy the effect. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." Shaping objects by using envelopes CorelDRAW lets you shape objects, including lines, artistic text, and paragraph text frames by applying envelopes to them. Envelopes are made of multiple nodes that you can move to shape the envelope and, as a result, change the shape of the object. You can apply a basic envelope that conforms to the shape of an object, or you can also apply a preset envelope. After you apply an envelope, you can edit it or add a new envelope to continue changing the object’s shape. CorelDRAW also lets you copy and remove envelopes. You can edit an envelope by adding and positioning its nodes. Adding nodes gives you more control over the shape of the object contained in the envelope. CorelDRAW also lets you delete nodes, move multiple nodes simultaneously, change nodes from one type to another, and change a segment of an envelope to a line or curve. For more information about the different types of nodes, see "Using curve objects." You can also change the mapping mode of an envelope to specify how the object fits to the envelope. For example, you can stretch an object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then apply the horizontal mapping mode to compress it horizontally so that it fits the shape of the envelope. To apply an envelope 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive envelope tool . 3. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Envelope straight line mode — creates envelopes based on straight lines, adding perspective to objects • Envelope single arc mode — creates envelopes with an arc shape on one side, giving objects a concave or convex appearance • Envelope double arc mode — creates envelopes with an S shape on one or more sides • Envelope unconstrained mode — creates freeform envelopes that let you change the properties of the nodes, and add and delete the nodes 4. Click the object. 5. Drag the nodes to shape the envelope. If you want to reset the envelope, press Esc before releasing the mouse. You can also Apply a preset envelope Click the Add preset button on the property bar, and click an envelope shape. Apply an envelope to an object with an envelope Click the Add new envelope button on the property bar, and drag the nodes to change the shape of the envelope. Remove an envelope Click Effects Clear envelope. • You can prevent the object’s straight lines from being converted to curves by enabling the Keep lines button on the property bar. To copy an envelope 1. Select an object to which you want to copy an envelope. 2. Click Effects Copy effect Envelope from. 3. Select the object from which you want to copy the envelope. • You can also copy an envelope by selecting an object, clicking the Copy envelope properties button on the property bar, and selecting an object with the envelope you want to copy. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy an envelope. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." To edit an envelope’s nodes and segments 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive envelope tool . 2. Select an object with an envelope. 3. Double-click the envelope to add a node or double-click a node to delete it. You can also Move several envelope nodes at once Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar, marquee select the nodes you want to move, and drag any node to a new position. Marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Rectangular from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes that you want to select. Freehand marquee select multiple nodes On the property bar, choose Freehand from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Move opposing nodes an equal distance in the same direction Press Ctrl, select two opposing nodes, and drag them to a new position. Move opposing nodes an equal distance in the opposite direction Click the Envelope single arc mode or Envelope double arc mode button on the property bar so that it appears raised, press Shift, and drag one of the nodes to a new position. Change an envelope node type Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears pressed, and click either the Make node a cusp , the Make node smooth , or the Make node symmetrical button. Change an envelope segment to a straight line or curve Click the Envelope unconstrained mode button on the property bar so that it appears pressed, click a line segment, and click the Convert curve to line button or the Convert line to curve button. To change the mapping mode 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive envelope tool. 2. Click an object with an envelope. 3. On the property bar, choose one of the following from the Mapping mode list box: • Horizontal — stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then compresses the object horizontally to fit the shape of the envelope • Original — maps the corner handles of the object’s selection box to the envelope’s corner nodes. The other nodes are mapped linearly along the edge of the object's selection box. • Putty — maps the corner handles of the object’s selection box to the envelope corner nodes • Vertical — stretches the object to fit the basic dimensions of the envelope, and then compresses the object vertically to fit the shape of the envelope 4. Drag the nodes or the control handles. • The mapping mode of paragraph text frames cannot be changed after an envelope is applied. Cropping, splitting, and erasing objects You can crop, split, and erase portions of objects. Cropping objects Cropping lets you quickly remove unwanted areas in objects and imported graphics, eliminating the need to ungroup objects, break linked groups apart, or convert objects to curves. You can crop vector objects and bitmaps. Cropping objects When cropping objects, you define a rectangular area (cropping area) that you want to keep. Object portions outside the cropping area are removed. You can specify the exact position and size of the cropping area, and you can rotate and resize it. You can also remove the cropping area. You can crop only selected objects without affecting other objects in a drawing, or you can crop all objects on the drawing page. In either case, the affected text and shape objects are automatically converted to curves. Splitting objects You can split a bitmap or vector object in two and reshape it by redrawing its path. You can split a closed object along a straight or jagged line. CorelDRAW lets you choose between splitting an object into two objects, or leaving it as one object composed of two or more subpaths. You can specify whether you want to close paths automatically or keep them open. The Knife tool creates two separate objects by cutting the ellipse in half (left). The two objects are separated and used to form the top of the screw (right). Erasing portions of objects CorelDRAW lets you erase unwanted portions of bitmaps and vector objects. Erasing automatically closes any affected paths and converts the object to curves. If you erase connecting lines, CorelDRAW creates subpaths rather than individual objects. You can also delete virtual line segments, which are portions of objects that are between intersections. For example, you can delete a loop in a line that crosses over itself, or loops in line segments in which two or more objects overlap. To crop objects 1. Select the objects that you want to crop. If no objects on the drawing page are selected, all objects will be cropped. 2. Open the Crop tool flyout , and click the Crop tool . 3. Drag to define a cropping area. 4. Double-click inside the cropping area. You can also Specify the exact position of the cropping area Type values in the Position boxes on the property bar, and press Enter. Specify the exact size of the cropping area Type values in the Size boxes on the property bar, and press Enter. Rotate the cropping area Type values in the Angle of rotation box. Remove the cropping area Click the Clear crop marquee button. • Objects on locked, hidden, Grid, or Guides layers cannot be cropped. Also, you cannot crop OLE and Internet objects, rollovers, or the content of PowerClip objects. • During cropping, affected linked groups, such as contours, blends, and extrusions, are automatically broken apart. • You can move, rotate, and size the cropping area interactively as you would any object. To move the cropping area, drag it to a new position. To size the cropping area, drag any of its handles . To rotate the cropping area, click inside, and drag a rotation handle . • You can remove the cropping area by pressing Esc. To split an object 1. Open the Crop tool flyout , and click the Knife tool . 2. Position the Knife tool over the object’s outline where you want to start cutting. The Knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly. 3. Click the outline to start cutting. 4. Position the Knife tool where you want to stop cutting, and click again. You can also Split an object along a freehand line Point to where you want to start the cut, and drag to where you want it to end. Split an object along a Bézier line Press Shift, click where you want to start cutting an object, and click each time you want to change the direction of the line. If you want to constrain the line by 15-degree increments, press Shift + Ctrl. Split an object into two subpaths Click the Leave as one object button on the property bar. Split an object while keeping only one of its parts Click the object’s outline where you want to start the cut, and point to where you want the cut to end. Press Tab once or twice until only the part of the object that you want to keep is selected, and then click. • By default, objects are split into two objects and paths are automatically closed. • When you use the Knife tool on a selected object, the object becomes a curve object. To split an object 1. Open the Crop tool flyout , and click the Knife tool . 2. Position the Knife tool over the object’s outline where you want to start cutting. The Knife tool snaps upright when positioned properly. 3. Click the outline to start cutting. 4. Position the Knife tool where you want to stop cutting, and click again. You can also Split an object along a freehand line Point to where you want to start the cut, and drag to where you want it to end. Split an object along a Bézier line Press Shift, click where you want to start cutting an object, and click each time you want to change the direction of the line. If you want to constrain the line by 15-degree increments, press Shift + Ctrl. Split an object into two subpaths Click the Leave as one object button on the property bar. Split an object while keeping only one of its parts Click the object’s outline where you want to start the cut, and point to where you want the cut to end. Press Tab once or twice until only the part of the object that you want to keep is selected, and then click. • By default, objects are split into two objects and paths are automatically closed. • When you use the Knife tool on a selected object, the object becomes a curve object. To erase portions of an object 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Crop tool flyout , and click the Eraser tool . 3. Drag over the object. You can also Change the size of the eraser nib Type a value in the Eraser thickness box on the property bar, and press Enter. Change the shape of the eraser nib Click the Circle/square button on the property bar. Maintain all the nodes of the area being erased Disable the Auto-reduce on erase button on the property bar. • When you erase portions of objects, any affected paths are automatically closed. • You can erase straight lines by clicking where you want to start erasing, and then clicking where you want to finish erasing. Press Ctrl if you want to constrain the line’s angle. • You can also erase an area of a selected object by double-clicking the area with the Eraser tool. To delete a virtual line segment 1. Open the Crop tool flyout , and click the Virtual segment delete tool . 2. Move the pointer to the line segment you want to delete. The Virtual segment delete tool snaps upright when positioned properly. 3. Click the line segment. If you want to delete multiple line segments at one time, click the pointer to drag a marquee around all line segments you want to delete. • The Virtual segment delete tool does not work on linked groups such as drop shadows, text, or images. Deleting virtual line segments Trimming objects Trimming creates irregularly shaped objects by removing object areas that overlap. You can trim almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot trim paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones. Before you trim objects, you must decide which object you want to trim (the target object) and which object you want to use to perform the trimming (the source object). For example, if you want to create a star-shaped cut out of a square object, the star is the source object because you are using it to trim the square. The square is the target object because it’s the object you want to trim. The source object trims the part of the target object it overlaps. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes. For example, if you trim a rectangle that is overlapped by a circle, the area of the rectangle that was covered by the circle is removed, creating an irregular shape. CorelDRAW lets you trim objects in different ways. You can use a front object as the source object to trim an object behind it, as well as use the back object to trim a front object. You can also remove hidden areas of overlapping objects, so that only the visible areas remain in the drawing.Removing the hidden areas can reduce file size when you convert vector graphics to bitmaps. Trimming can be used to reduce the number of objects in a drawing. Instead of adding eyes and spots to the bug, areas (shown on the left in gray) are trimmed to reveal the black background (right). The letter “A” is the front object used to trim the back object. A partial silhouette of the letter is created in the logo (right). To trim an object 1. Select the source objects. 2. Hold down Shift, and click the target object. 3. Click Arrange Shaping Trim. • If you marquee select the objects, CorelDRAW trims the bottom-most selected object. If you select multiple objects individually, the last object selected is trimmed. • You can also trim objects by marquee selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Trim button on the property bar To trim front or back objects 1. Marquee select the source and target objects. 2. Click Arrange Shaping, and click one of the following: • Back minus front — removes the front object from the back one • Front minus back — removes the back object from the front one • You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object so that the object inside the PowerClip object will assume the new shape of the PowerClip container. For information about PowerClip objects, see "Creating PowerClip objects." • Linked objects such as drop shadows, text on a path, artistic media, blends, contours, and extrusions are converted to curve objects before they are trimmed. To trim overlapping areas among objects 1. Marquee select the objects you want to trim. 2. Click Arrange Shaping Simplify. • You can trim the control object of a PowerClip object, so that the object inside the PowerClip object assumes the new shape. • Linked objects, such as drop shadows, text on a path, artistic media, blends, contours, and extrusions, are converted to curve objects before they are trimmed Filleting, scalloping, and chamfering corners You can shape an object by filleting, scalloping, or chamfering corners. Filleting produces a rounded corner, scalloping rounds and inverts the corner to create a notch, and chamfering bevels a corner so that it appears flat. From left to right, you can see standard corners with no changes, filleted corners, scalloped corners, and chamfered corners. You can fillet, scallop, or chamfer the corners of any curve object, whether it originates from a shape, lines, text, or a bitmap. If you select a shape that has not been converted to curves, a dialog box appears and gives you the option of converting the shape automatically. Text objects must be converted to curves manually by using the Convert to curves command. Changes apply to all corners unless you select individual nodes. You cannot fillet, scallop, or chamfer a smooth or symmetrical curve; the corner must be created by two straight or curved segments that intersect at an angle of less than 180 degrees. The operation is not applied to some or all of the corners when the fillet, scallop, or chamfer value is too high. This occurs when the line segments aren’t long enough to apply the radius or chamfer distance. When setting values for these operations, consider that although the line segments may appear long enough at the beginning of the operation, they shorten as the radius or chamfer values are applied across the object. In this example, the circles represent fillet radius settings. The top row shows the proposed fillets on the left and the filleted results on the right. The bottom row shows the proposed fillets on the left, but in the results on the right, not all corners are filleted. After the first fillet is applied, the next corner cannot be filleted because the line segment is not long enough. This corner is skipped, and the final corner is filleted. To round object corners by filleting 1. Using the Pick tool , select the object. 2. Click Window Dockers Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer. 3. In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, choose Fillet from the Operation list box. 4. Type a value in the Radius box. The radius is used to create a circular arc, with the center equidistant from either side of a corner. Higher values produce more rounded corners. 5. Click Apply. • The Apply button is disabled if no valid objects or nodes are selected. • To select individual nodes, use the Shape tool . • You can also round all the corners of a selected rectangle or square by clicking the Shape tool and dragging a corner node toward the center of the object. The shape is not converted to curves if you use this method. To scallop object corners 1. Using the Pick tool , select the object. 2. Click Window Dockers Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer. 3. In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, choose Scallop from the Operation list box. 4. Type a value in the Radius box. The radius value is measured from the original corner point to create a scalloping arc. 5. Click Apply. • To select individual nodes, use the Shape tool . To bevel object corners by chamfering 1. Using the Pick tool , select the object. 2. Click Window Dockers Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer. 3. In the Fillet/Scallop/Chamfer docker, choose Chamfer from the Operation list box. 4. Type a value in the Distance box to set where the chamfer will begin in relation to the original corner. 5. Click Apply. • To select individual nodes, use the Shape tool . Welding and intersecting objects You can create irregular shapes by welding and intersecting objects. You can weld or intersect almost any object, including clones, objects on different layers, and single objects with intersecting lines. However, you cannot weld or intersect paragraph text, dimension lines, or masters of clones. You can weld objects to create one object with a single outline. The new object uses the welded objects’ perimeter as its outline and adopts the fill and outline properties of the target object. All intersecting lines disappear. You can weld objects regardless of whether they overlap each other. If you weld objects that do not overlap, they form a weld group that acts as a single object. In both cases, the welded object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object. You can weld single objects with intersecting lines so that the object breaks into several subpaths, but its appearance remains the same. Welding the leaves to the apple creates a single object outline. Intersecting creates an object from the area where two or more objects overlap. The shape of this new object can be simple or complex, depending on the shapes you intersect. The new object’s fill and outline attributes depend on the object you define as the target object. To weld an object 1. Select the source object or objects. 2. Hold down Shift, and click the target object. 3. Click Arrange Shaping Weld. • You can also weld objects by marquee-selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Weld button on the property bar To intersect objects 1. Select the source object. 2. Hold down Shift, and select the target object. 3. Click Arrange Shaping Intersect. • You can also intersect objects by selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Intersect button on the property bar. To intersect multiple objects 1. Marquee select the source object or objects. 2. Hold down Shift, and click each target object. 3. Click Arrange Shaping Intersect. • You can also intersect objects by marquee-selecting the source and target objects and clicking the Intersect button on the property bar. Creating PowerClip objects CorelDRAW lets you place vector objects and bitmaps, such as photos, inside other objects, or containers. A container can be any object, for example artistic text or a rectangle. When you place an object into a container that is larger than the container, the object, called the content, is cropped to fit the form of the container. This creates a PowerClip object. Objects before becoming a PowerClip object: artistic text and a bitmap You can create more complex PowerClip objects by placing one PowerClip object inside another PowerClip object to produce a nested PowerClip object. You can also copy the contents of one PowerClip object to another PowerClip object. In the PowerClip object, the artistic text is the container, and the bitmap forms the contents. The bitmap is shaped to the letters of the artistic text. After you create a PowerClip object you can modify the content and the container. For example, you can lock the content, so that when you move the container, the content moves with it. CorelDRAW also lets you extract the content from a PowerClip object, so that you To create a PowerClip object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects PowerClip Place inside container. 3. Click the object you want to use as the container. If you want to create a nested PowerClip object, hold down the right mouse button, drag the PowerClip object inside a container, and click PowerClip inside To copy the contents of a PowerClip object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects Copy effect PowerClip from. 3. Click a PowerClip object. To edit the contents of a PowerClip object 1. Select a PowerClip object. 2. Click Effects PowerClip Edit contents. 3. Edit the contents of the PowerClip object. 4. Click Effects PowerClip Finish editing this level. • While you edit, the container appears in Wireframe mode and cannot be selected. To lock or unlock the contents of a PowerClip object • Right-click a PowerClip object, and click Lock contents to PowerClip. • If you move the container while the content is unlocked, the content remains stationary and is not visible until you move the container over it. To extract the contents of a PowerClip object 1. Select a PowerClip object. 2. Click Effects PowerClip Extract contents. • You must extract the contents of each level in a nested PowerClip separately. Reference: Shaping objects Objects created in CorelDRAW follow a path that gives them their defining shape. When this path is broken or cut, subpaths remain. Paths and subpaths • Paths outline an object's shape and are often visible as one or more line or curve segments. You can disconnect line segments from one another to create subpaths. Even though they are not connected, subpaths are still part of the defining path of the original object; however, you can extract a subpath to create two separate objects: the extracted subpath and the object it was extracted from. • Subpaths are the basic curves and shapes from which a single curve object is constructed. For example, a single curve object with subpaths is often created when text is converted to curves. The letter “O,” for instance, is composed of two ellipses: the outside ellipse that defines the letter’s shape and the inside ellipse that defines the “hole.” The ellipses are subpaths that compose the single curve object, “O.” One of the basic reasons for creating an object with subpaths is that you can produce objects with holes in them. In the preceding example, you can see objects underneath the center of the letter “O.” 1) The letter “O” is converted to curves. 2) The resulting subpaths are the outside ellipse that defines the shape of the letter and the inside ellipse (tinted gray) that defines the hole. 3) In comparison, the black ellipse consists of a single path and cannot contain a “hole”. Working with symbols The CorelDRAW application lets you create objects and save them as symbols. Symbols are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. Each time you insert a symbol into a drawing, you create an instance of the symbol. Symbol definitions, as well as information about instances, are stored in a symbol manager, which is part of the CorelDRAW (CDR) file. Using symbols for objects that appear many times in a drawing helps to reduce file size. In this section, you’ll learn about • creating, editing, and deleting symbols • using symbols in drawings • managing collections and libraries • sharing symbols between drawings For information about modifying symbol instances and about unsupported object types, see "Reference: Working with symbols." The term “symbol,” as it was used in earlier versions of CorelDRAW, has been replaced by “special character” in CorelDRAW X3. For more information about working with special characters, see "Embedding graphics and adding special characters." Creating, editing, and deleting symbols Symbols are objects that are defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. You can have multiple instances of a symbol in a drawing with little impact on file size. Symbols make editing a drawing quicker and easier, as changes made to a symbol are automatically inherited by all instances. Symbols are created from objects. When you convert an object to a symbol, the new symbol is added to the Symbol manager, and the selected object becomes an instance. You can also create a symbol from multiple objects. You can edit a symbol; any changes you make affect all instances in a drawing. The selection handles for symbols differ from those for objects. Selection handles for symbols are blue; selection handles for objects are black. You can also delete a symbol instance and purge unused symbol definitions. Purging removes all symbol definitions that are not instanced in a drawing. Using symbols for objects that appear many times helps to reduce file size. To convert an object to a symbol 1. Select an object or multiple objects. 2. Click Edit Symbol New symbol. • Symbols cannot span layers. If you convert objects on different layers to a symbol, the objects are combined on the topmost object’s layer. For more information about layers, see "Working with layers." • You can also convert an existing object or objects to a symbol by dragging the object or objects to the Symbol manager docker. To make a linked symbol internal 1. Select a symbol. 2. Click Edit Symbol Break link. If other instances of the symbol are in the drawing, you are given the choice to break links to all instances. If you do, the internal symbol will then apply to all the instances. • You can also make a linked symbol internal by right-clicking a symbol and choosing Break link. To edit a symbol 1. In the Symbol manager docker, choose a symbol from the Symbols list. If you want to name or rename the symbol, double-click the symbol’s name box, and type a name. 2. Click the Edit symbol button . 3. Modify the objects on the drawing page. 4. Click the Finish editing object tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing window. • Changes made to a symbol are automatically made to all instances in the active drawing. • While working in symbol edit mode, you cannot add layers or save a drawing. • You can also edit a symbol by selecting an instance in the drawing window, and clicking the Edit symbol button on the property bar or holding down Ctrl and clicking a symbol. • While editing a symbol, you can insert an instance of another symbol, which creates a nested symbol. You cannot, however, insert an instance of the same symbol. To edit a linked symbol 1. Click File Open. 2. Choose the drive and folder where the library is stored. 3. Click a library filename. Library files have a .csl filename extension. 4. Click Open. 5. In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document, and choose a symbol from the Symbols list. If you want to rename the symbol, click the name again, and type a new name. 6. Click the Edit symbol button . 7. Modify the objects on the drawing page. 8. Click the Finish editing object tab in the bottom-left corner of the drawing window. 9. Click File Save. • You may need permission to change files on the network. To delete a symbol 1. In the Symbol manager docker, choose a symbol from the Symbols list. 2. Click the Delete symbol button . • When you delete a symbol, it is removed from the Symbol manager, and all instances of the symbol are removed from the drawing. Using symbols in drawings You can insert a symbol into a drawing, which creates a symbol instance. You can modify certain properties of a symbol instance, such as size and position, without affecting the symbol definition stored in the library. You can revert a symbol instance to an object or objects while preserving its properties. You can also delete a symbol instance. To insert a symbol instance 1. Open the Symbol manager docker by clicking Window Dockers Symbol manager. If you want the symbol scaled automatically to match the current drawing scale, ensure that the Scale to world units button is enabled. 2. Choose a symbol from the Symbols list. 3. Click the Insert symbol button . • The term “symbol,” as it was used in earlier versions of CorelDRAW, has been replaced by “special character” in CorelDRAW X3. For more information about working with special characters, see "Embedding graphics and adding special characters." • You can also insert a symbol instance by dragging a symbol from the Symbol manager docker to the drawing window. To purge unused symbol definitions 1. In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document. 2. Click the Purge unused definitions button . To modify a symbol instance 1. Select a symbol instance. 2. Make any changes. • If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated as if they were a group. You cannot modify individual objects in a symbol instance. • Not all properties of a symbol instance can be modified. For a list of properties that can be modified, see "Modifying symbol instances." • When a symbol instance is selected, you can modify many object properties on the property bar To revert a symbol instance to an object or objects 1. Select a symbol instance. 2. Click Edit Symbol Revert to objects. • The symbol remains in the Symbol manager. • You can also revert a symbol instance to an object by right-clicking the symbol instance and clicking Revert to objects To delete a symbol instance 1. Select a symbol instance. 2. Press Delete. • The symbol remains in the Symbol manager Managing collections and libraries Most of the symbols you will use have already been created and are stored in library files that are grouped into collections. The Symbol manager docker always displays libraries and collections that are in your local Symbols folder. You can add collections and libraries to your Symbols folder from elsewhere on the network. When you insert a local or external symbol into a drawing, a copy of the symbol definition is added to the document, but it remains linked to the source symbol. To add a collection or library 1. Click Window Dockers Symbol manager. 2. In the tree, click Local Symbols or Network Symbols. 3. Click the Add library button . 4. Locate and choose a collection or library. 5. Click OK. • By default, library files are referenced from their original location. If you want to copy a library to your User Symbols folder, enable the Copy libraries locally checkbox. • If you are adding a collection, you can enable the Recursive check box to include subfolders. To delete a collection or library 1. In the Symbol manager docker, click a collection or library. 2. Press Delete. • The collection or library is removed from the tree in the Symbol manager docker, but files are not deleted. Sharing symbols between drawings In CorelDRAW, each drawing has its own library of symbols, which is part of the CorelDRAW (CDR) file. You can share symbols between drawings by copying and pasting. Copying symbols to the Clipboard leaves the originals in the library. You can also copy and paste instances of a symbol to and from the Clipboard. Pasting a symbol instance places the symbol in the library and also places an instance of the symbol in the drawing. Subsequent pasting will place another instance of the symbol in the drawing without adding to the library. If a modified symbol instance is pasted into a drawing, the new instance maintains the properties of the original instance, and the new symbol definition in the library maintains the properties of the original symbol. Symbol instances are copied and pasted in the same way other objects are. For more information, see "Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects." To copy or paste symbols To Do the following Copy symbols to the Clipboard In the Symbol manager docker, choose the symbol or symbols from the Symbols list, right-click, and click Copy. Paste symbols from the Clipboard In the Symbol manager docker, right-click, and click Paste. • If a pasted symbol has the same name as an existing symbol, the new name is appended with an increment number. For example, a pasted symbol named “logo” would be renamed “logo1.” To export a symbol library 1. In the Symbol manager docker, click the active document. 2. Click the Export library button . 3. Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the library file. 4. Type a filename in the File name box. 5. Click Save. To create a new library 1. Click File Save. 2. Choose the drive and folder where you want to store the library. 3. Type a filename in the File name box. 4. Choose CSL - Corel Symbol Library from the Save as type list box. 5. Click Save. To add a symbol to an existing library 1. Click File Open. 2. Choose the drive and folder where the library is stored. 3. Choose CSL - Corel Symbol Library from the Files of type list box. 4. Choose the library file where you want to add a symbol. 5. Paste a symbol to the document. 6. Save the library file. Reference: Working with symbols This reference section contains information on the following: • modifying symbol instances • unsupported object types Modifying symbol instances The following object properties can be modified for symbol instances. If a symbol contains multiple objects, all objects in the symbol instance are treated collectively as a single object, just as if they were grouped. Property Notes Position Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Positioning objects." Size Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Sizing and scaling objects." Scale Percentage is relative to the symbol definition. Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Sizing and scaling objects." Skew For more information, see "Skewing and stretching objects." Rotation angle Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Rotating and mirroring objects." Transparency Uniform transparency only. Click the Symbol effects tab in the Object properties docker. For more information, see "Applying transparencies." Mirroring Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Rotating and mirroring objects." Wrap paragraph text Click the General tab in the Object properties docker. Can also be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text." Order Can be modified on the property bar. For more information, see "Changing the order of objects." Name The name of an instance is displayed in the Object manager docker. Click twice to change it. Unsupported object types Most objects in CorelDRAW can be converted to symbols, with the following exceptions Unsupported object type Notes Linked or embedded objects Includes barcodes Objects with lenses that are not frozen Lenses must be frozen. Control objects in link groups All related objects in the link group must be included in the symbol. For example, if an object has a drop shadow, you cannot convert the object without the drop shadow. Internet objects Buttons, radio buttons, text fields, Java Applets, and embedded files Print merge fields Linked bitmaps Placed PDF or EPS files Locked object Object must be unlocked. Paragraph text Connector and dimension lines Must be broken apart or included with the linked object or objects Guidelines Rollovers You cannot convert a rollover to a symbol; however, you can include a symbol instance in a rollover state. Objects with transparency or transparency effects applied Filling objects You can add colored, patterned, textured, and other fills to the inside of objects or other enclosed areas. You can customize a fill and set it as a default, so that each object you draw has the same fill. In this section, you’ll learn about • applying uniform fills • applying fountain fills • applying pattern fills • applying texture fills • applying PostScript texture fills • applying mesh fills • applying fills to areas • working with fills Applying uniform fills You can apply a uniform fill to objects. Uniform fills are solid colors that you can choose or create by using color models and color palettes. For information about creating colors, see "Working with color." To apply a uniform fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive fill tool . 3. Choose Uniform fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4. Specify the settings you want on the property bar, and press Enter. • You can also fill a selected object by clicking a color on the color palette. • You can mix colors in a uniform fill by selecting a filled object, pressing Ctrl, and clicking another color on the color palette. Applying fountain fills A fountain fill is a smooth progression of two or more colors that adds depth to an object. There are four types of fountain fills: linear, radial, conical, and square. A linear fountain fill flows in a straight line across the object, a conical fountain fill creates the illusion of light hitting a cone, a radial fountain fill radiates from the center of the object, and a square fountain fill is dispersed in concentric squares from the center of the object. You can apply preset fountain fills, two-color fountain fills, and custom fountain fills to objects. Custom fountain fills can contain two or more colors, which you can position anywhere in the fill’s progression. After you create a custom fountain fill, you can save it as a preset. When you apply a fountain fill, you can specify attributes for the fill type you choose; for example, the direction of a fill’s color blend, the fill’s angle, center point, midpoint, and edge pad. You can also adjust the print and display quality of the fountain fill by specifying the number of fountain steps. By default, the fountain step setting is locked so that the print quality of the fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the print settings and the display quality is determined by the default value you set. However, you can unlock the fountain steps setting when you apply a fountain fill and specify a value that applies to both the print and view quality of the fill. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see "Fine-tuning print jobs." There are four types of fountain fills. Left to right: linear, radial, conical, and square. To apply a preset fountain fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Fountain fill dialog button . 3. Choose a fill from the Presets list box. 4. Specify the settings you want. To apply a two-color fountain fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive fill tool . 3. Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4. Open the Fill dropdown picker on the property bar, and click a color. 5. Open the Last fill picker on the property bar, and click a color. 6. Specify the settings you want. • You can mix colors in a two-color fountain fill by selecting one of the interactive vector handles, pressing Ctrl, and clicking a color on the color palette. • You can add a color to a fountain fill by dragging a color from the color palette to an object’s interactive vector handle. To apply a custom fountain fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Fountain fill dialog button . 3. Choose a fountain fill from the Type list box. 4. Enable the Custom option. 5. Click the box at one end of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette. 6. Click the box at the opposite end of the area just above the color band, and click a color. 7. Specify the attributes you want. You can also Add an intermediate color Double-click between the two ends of the area just above the color band, and click a color on the color palette. Adjust the midpoint between colors On the color band, double-click between two colors to add a new marker. Drag the marker to adjust the transition point between the two colors. Change a color Click the marker above the color you want to change, and click a color on the color palette. Delete a color Double-click the marker above the color you want to delete. Change the position of a color Drag the marker just above the color to a new location. Save the fill as a preset Type a name in the Presets box, and click the Add preset button . • You can also apply a custom fountain fill by opening the Interactive fill flyout , clicking the Interactive fill tool , and dragging colors from the color palette in the drawing window onto the object’s interactive vector handles. To change the fountain fill print and display quality 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive fill tool . 3. Choose a fountain fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4. Click the Fountain step lock/unlock button on the property bar, type a value in the Fountain step box, and press Enter. • When the Fountain step box is locked, the number of steps in the printed fountain fill is determined by the value specified in the Print dialog box. For information about setting fountain fill steps for printing, see "Fine-tuning print jobs." To set the display quality for fountain fills 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Display. 3. Type a value in the Preview fountain steps box. Applying pattern fills You can fill objects with two-color, full-color, or bitmap pattern fills. Examples of bitmap pattern fills A two-color pattern fill is composed of only the two colors that you choose. A full-color pattern fill is a more complex vector graphic that can be composed of lines and fills. A bitmap pattern fill is a bitmap image whose complexity is determined by its size, image resolution, and bit depth. CorelDRAW provides preset pattern fills that you can apply to objects; however, you can also create your own pattern fills. For example, you can create pattern fills from objects that you draw or images that you import. You can change the tile size of pattern fills. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first pattern, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill. You can choose how the pattern fill appears by specifying whether to mirror the fill so that alternating tiles are the reflections of one another. If you want a pattern fill to change according to actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you want it to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a pattern that transforms, the pattern becomes larger while the number of tiles is not increased. You can apply a pattern of two colors or many colors to an object. To apply a two-color pattern fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive fill tool . 3. Choose Two color pattern from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4. Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern. 5. Open the Front color picker, and click a color. 6. Open the Back color picker, and click a color. • You can also mix colors in a two-color pattern fill by pressing Ctrl and clicking a color on the color palette. • You can mix a color with only one of the colors in the fill by pressing Ctrl and dragging a color to the interactive handle. To apply a full-color or bitmap pattern fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive fill tool . 3. Choose one of the following from the Fill type list box on the property bar: • Full-color pattern • Bitmap pattern 4. Open the Fill dropdown picker, and click a pattern. To create a two-color pattern fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Pattern fill dialog button. 3. Enable the 2-color option. 4. Open the following color pickers, and click a color: • Front — to choose a foreground color • Back — to choose a background color 5. Click Create. 6. In the Two-color pattern editor dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Bitmap size area: • 16 X 16 — changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 16 x 16 squares • 32 X 32 — changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 32 x 32 squares • 64 X 64 — changes the resolution of the Edit grid to 64 x 64 squares 7. In the Pen size area, enable one of the following options: • 1 X 1 — changes the pen size to a 1-grid square • 2 X 2 — changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square • 4 X 4 — changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square • 8 X 8 — changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square 8. Click in the grid to enable a square. If you want to disable a square, right-click the square. Squares that are enabled form the foreground, and squares that are disabled form the background. • You can also create a foreground pattern by dragging in the grid. To create a two-color pattern fill from an image 1. Click Tools Create Pattern. 2. Enable the Two-color option. 3. In the Resolution area, enable one of the following options: • Low — creates a low-resolution, two-color pattern • Medium — creates a medium-resolution, two-color pattern • High — creates a high-resolution, two-color pattern 4. Click OK. 5. Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern. To create a full-color pattern from an image 1. Click Tools Create Pattern. 2. Enable the Full color option. 3. Click OK. 4. Select the image or area of the image that you want to use in the pattern. 5. In the Create pattern dialog box, click OK. 6. Type a filename for the pattern in the File name box. To create a pattern fill from an imported image 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Pattern fill dialog button. 3. Enable one of the following options: • 2-color • Full-color • Bitmap 4. Click Load. 5. In the Import dialog box, locate the image you want to use, and double-click the filename To change the size of pattern tiles 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Pattern fill dialog button . 3. Enable one of the following options: • 2-color • Full-color • Bitmap 4. Type a value in any of the following boxes: • Width — lets you change the width of a pattern tile • Height — lets you change the height of a pattern tile You can also Set the tile origin of a pattern fill Type values in the X and Y boxes in the Origin area. Offset the tile origin of a pattern fill Enable the Row or Column option, and type a value in the % of tile size box. Rotate a pattern fill Type a value in the Rotate box. Skew a pattern fill Type a value in the Skew box. Mirror a pattern fill Enable the Mirror fill check box. Transform a pattern fill with the object Enable the Transform fill with object check box. • You can also change the size of pattern tiles by opening the Interactive fill flyout , clicking the Interactive fill tool , selecting an object, and clicking the Small tile for pattern , Medium tile for pattern , or Large tile for pattern button on the property bar. • You can skew or rotate tiles by opening the Interactive fill flyout , clicking the Interactive fill tool , selecting an object, and dragging the skewing or rotation handles to change the appearance of the pattern. Applying texture fills A texture fill is a randomly generated fill that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. CorelDRAW provides preset textures, and each texture has a set of options that you can change. You can use colors from any color model or palette to customize texture fills. Texture fills can hold only RGB colors; however, other color models and palettes can be used as a reference to select colors. For information about color models, see "Understanding color models." You can change the tile size of texture fills. Increasing the resolution of a texture tile increases the accuracy of the fill. You can also specify exactly where these fills begin by setting the tile origin. CorelDRAW also lets you offset tiles in a fill. Adjusting the horizontal or vertical position of the first tile, relative to the top of the object, affects the rest of the fill. You can rotate, skew, adjust the tile size, and change the center of the texture to create a custom fill. If you want a texture fill to change according to the actions you perform on the filled object, you can specify that you want the fill to transform with the object. For example, if you enlarge an object filled with a texture that transforms, the texture becomes larger instead of increasing the number of tiles. Texture fills are powerful features that can enhance a drawing. However, they also increase the size of a file and the time it takes to print, so you may want to use them in moderation. To apply a texture fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Texture fill dialog button . 3. Choose a texture library from the Texture library list box. 4. Choose a texture from the Texture list. You can also Create a custom texture fill Specify the settings you want in the Style name area. Change the size of texture tiles Click Tiling, and type values in the Width and Height boxes. Set the tile origin of a texture fill Click Tiling, and type values in the X and Y boxes in the Origin area. Offset the tile origin of a texture fill Click Tiling, and enable the Row or Column option. Type an amount of offset in the % of tile size box. Rotate a texture fill Click Tiling, and type a value in the Rotate box. Skew a texture fill Click Tiling, and type a value in the Skew box. Mirror a texture fill Click Tiling, and enable the Mirror fill check box. • You can modify the texture you choose from the texture library and save it to another library, but you cannot save textures to or overwrite textures in the texture library. • You can save a custom texture fill by clicking the plus sign (+ ) in the Texture fill dialog box and typing a name in the Texture name box. Applying PostScript texture fills You can apply PostScript texture fills to objects. A PostScript texture fill is created in the PostScript language. Some textures are very complex, and large objects that contain PostScript texture fills may take time to print or to update on the screen. Depending on the view mode you are using, the letters “PS” — rather than the fill — may appear. For more information about displaying PostScript fills, see "Working with views." When you apply a PostScript texture fill, you can change several parameters, such as the size, line width, and the amount of gray that appears in the texture's foreground and background. To apply a PostScript texture fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive fill tool . 3. Choose PostScript fill from the Fill type list box on the property bar. 4. Choose a PostScript fill from the PostScript fill textures list box. If you want to change the fill's parameters, click the Edit fill button on the property bar, and specify the settings you want. Applying mesh fills When you fill an object with a mesh fill, you can create unique effects. For example, you can create smooth color transitions in any direction without having to create blends or contours. When you apply a mesh fill, you specify the number of columns and rows in the grid, and you specify the grid’s intersecting points. After you have created a mesh object, you can edit the mesh fill grid by adding and removing nodes or intersections. You can also remove the mesh. A mesh fill can be applied only to closed objects or a single path. If you want to apply a mesh fill to a complex object, you must first create a mesh-filled object and combine it with the complex object to form a PowerClip object. For more information about working with PowerClip objects, see "Creating PowerClip objects." You can add color to a patch of a mesh fill and to the individual intersection nodes. You can also choose to mix colors for a more blended appearance. To apply a mesh fill to an object 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive mesh fill tool . 3. Type the number of columns in the top portion of the Grid size box on the property bar. 4. Type the number of rows in the bottom portion of the Grid size box on the property bar, and press Enter. 5. Adjust the grid nodes on the object. You can also Add an intersection Click once within a grid, and click the Add intersection button on the property bar. Add a node Hold down Shift, and double-click where you want to add the node. Remove a node or an intersection Click a node, and click the Delete node(s) button on the property bar. Shape the mesh fill Drag a node to a new location. Remove the mesh fill Click the Clear mesh button on the property bar. • If the mesh object contains color, adjusting the intersection nodes of the mesh affects how the colors blend together. • You can also marquee select or freehand marquee select nodes to shape an entire area of the mesh. To marquee select nodes, choose Rectangular from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. To freehand select nodes, choose Freehand from the Selection mode list box, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Holding down Alt while dragging lets you toggle between the Rectangular and Freehand selection mode. • You can add an intersection by double-clicking in a space, or you can add a single line by double-clicking a line. To add color to a patch in a mesh fill 1. Select a mesh-filled object. 2. Open the Interactive fill flyout , and click the Interactive mesh fill tool . 3. Drag a color from the color palette to a patch in the object. You can also Color an intersection node in a mesh fill Click an intersection node, and click a color on the color palette. Mix a color in a mesh fill Select part of the mesh, press Ctrl, and click a color on the color palette. • You can also drag a color from the color palette to an intersection node. • You can also marquee select or freehand marquee select nodes to apply a color to an entire area of the mesh. To marquee select nodes, choose Rectangular from the Selection mode list box on the property bar, and drag around the nodes you want to select. To freehand select nodes, choose Freehand from the Selection mode list box on the property bar, and drag around the nodes you want to select. Holding down Alt while dragging lets you toggle between the Rectangular and Freehand selection mode. Applying fills to areas You can apply fills to any enclosed area by using the Smart fill tool. Unlike other fill tools, which fill only objects, the Smart fill tool detects the edges of an area and creates a closed path so that the area can be filled. For example, if you draw a freehand line that crosses over itself to create loops, the Smart fill tool can detect the edges of the loops and fill them. As long as the paths of one or more objects completely enclose an area, it can be filled. In the example above, the original spiral object is duplicated and offset, resulting in enclosed areas that can be filled by using the Smart fill tool. Because the Smart fill tool creates a path around the area, it essentially creates a new object that can be filled, moved, copied, or edited. This means the tool can be used in one of two ways: to fill an area or to create a new object from an area. Although primarily used to fill areas, the Smart fill tool can also be used to create new objects. In the example above, the original objects, the two spirals (left), are deleted (right), but the fill remains because each filled area is actually an object. You can apply the default fill and outline to the area, use the property bar to specify a specific fill color and outline, or create an outline with no fill. When you use the Smart fill tool on areas that already have fills applied to them, remember the following: • An object with transparency applied to it is considered completely transparent —paths under any area of the object are detected, regardless of whether the specific area appears opaque. • PostScript fills are considered transparent — paths under any area of a PostScript fill are detected. • All fills other than PostScript fills are considered opaque — paths under these fills are not detected. To apply a fill to an area outside existing objects 1. Open the Smart tools flyout , and click the Smart fill tool . 2. On the property bar, choose one of the following options from the Fill options list box: • Specify — lets you fill the area with a solid color by choosing a color from the Fill Color color picker on the property bar • Use default — lets you fill the area with the Fill tool default setting • No fill — applies no fill to the area 3. From the Outline options box, choose one of the following options: • Use default — lets you apply the default outline setting • Specify — lets you choose a line width from the Outline width box and a line color from the Outline color color picker • No outline — applies no outline to the area 4. Click inside the enclosed area that you want to fill. A new object is created from the enclosed area, and the current fill and outline styles are applied to it. The new object appears on top of the existing objects in the layer. • If you click outside an enclosed area, a new object is created from all objects on the page, and the fill and outline properties are applied to the new object. • The outline width is centered on an object’s path. Because the Smart fill tool detects paths, not outlines, thick outlines appear partially covered by the new object. You can uncover the original outlines by changing the stacking order of the objects. For information about changing the stacking order of objects, see "To change the order of an object." Working with fills There are a number of tasks that are common to all types of fills. You can choose a default fill color so that every object you add to a drawing has the same fill. You can also remove any fill, copy it to another object, or use it to fill an area surrounded by an open curve. To choose a default fill color 1. Click a blank area on the drawing page to deselect all objects. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Fill color dialog. 3. In the Uniform fill dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes: • Graphic — applies the default fill color to shapes you draw • Artistic text — applies the default fill color to artistic text you add • Paragraph text — applies the default fill color to paragraph text you add 4. Specify any fill settings. To remove a fill 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the No fill button . To copy a fill to another object 1. Using the Pick tool , select the object that has the fill you want to copy. 2. Right-click the first object, and then drag over the destination object, to which you want to apply the fill. A blue outline of the first object follows the pointer to the destination object. 3. When the pointer changes to a crosshair pointer , release the mouse button, and choose Copy fill here from the context menu. • You can also use the Eyedropper and Paintbucket tools to copy a fill. For more information, see "To copy fill, outline, or text properties from one object to another." • You can also sample the color of an existing object and apply the sampled color to another object as a uniform fill. For more information, see "To sample a color." To show fills in open curves 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click General. 3. Enable the Fill open curves check box. Working with color Your application lets you choose and create colors by using a wide variety of industry-standard palettes, color mixers, and color models. You can create and edit custom color palettes to store frequently used colors for future use. You can also customize how color palettes appear on your screen by changing the size of swatches, the number of rows in palettes, and other properties. In this section, you’ll learn about Choosing colors You can choose fill and outline colors by using fixed or custom color palettes, color viewers, color harmonies, or color blends. When you want to use a color that already exists in an object or document, you can sample the color to achieve an exact match. For information about applying the colors you choose, see "Applying uniform fills" and "Formatting lines and outlines." Default color palette A color palette is a collection of color swatches. You can choose fill and outline colors by using the default color palette, which contains 99 colors from the CMYK color model. The selected fill and outline colors appear in the color swatches on the status bar. Fixed or custom color palettes Fixed color palettes are provided by third-party manufacturers. Some examples of these are PANTONE, HKS Colors, and TRUMATCH. It may be useful to have on hand a manufacturer’s swatch book, which is a collection of color samples that shows exactly what each color looks like when printed. Some fixed color palettes — PANTONE, HKS Colors, TOYO, DIC, Focoltone, and SpectraMaster — are collections of spot colors. If you create color separations when you print, each color from these color palettes requires a separate printing plate. This can significantly affect the cost of your print job. If you want to use these colors, but you don’t want to use spot colors, convert the spot colors to process colors when printing. For more information, see "Printing color separations." Custom color palettes can include colors from any color model or fixed color palette. You can save a custom color palette for future use. For more information about working with custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes" and "Opening and editing custom color palettes." Color viewers Color viewers provide a representation of a range of colors by using either one-dimensional or three-dimensional shapes. The default color viewer is based on the HSB color model, but you can use this viewer to choose CMYK, CMY, or RGB colors. For information about color models, see "Understanding color models." Color harmonies Color harmonies work by superimposing a shape, such as a rectangle or a triangle, over a color wheel. Each vertical row in the color grid begins with the color located at one of the points on the superimposed shape. The colors at each corner of the shape are always complementary, contrasting, or harmonious, depending on the shape you choose. The color harmonies allow you to choose the color model you prefer to use, and are most useful when you’re choosing several colors for a project. Color blends When you choose a color by using color blends, you combine base colors to get the color you want. The color blender displays a grid of colors that it creates from the four base colors you choose. To choose a color by using the default color palette To Do the following Choose a fill color for a selected object Click a color swatch. Choose an outline color for a selected object Right-click a color swatch. Choose from different shades of a color Click and hold a color swatch to display a pop-up color picker, and click a color. View more colors in the default color palette Click the scroll arrows at the top and bottom of the color palette. • You can display color names by pointing to a swatch. To choose a color by using a fixed or custom color palette 1. Select an object. 2. Open one of the following flyouts: • the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool . • the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool . 3. Click the Palettes tab. 4. Choose a fixed or custom palette from the Palette list box. 5. Move the color slider to set the range of colors displayed in the color selection area. 6. Click a color in the color selection area. • Each color swatch on a fixed color palette is marked with a small white square. • You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output. For more information about reproducing colors accurately, see "Managing color for display, input, and output." • You can display or hide the names of fixed or custom colors by clicking Options Show color names. • You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors. To choose a color by using a color viewer 1. Select an object. 2. Open one of the following flyouts: • the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool . • the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool . 3. Click the Models tab. 4. Choose a color model from the Model list box. 5. Click Options Color viewers, and click a color viewer. 6. Move the color slider. 7. Click a color in the color selection area. • If you choose a color that is out of the printer’s gamut, CorelDRAW displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For information about color correction, see "Managing color for display, input, and output." • You should use the same color model for all colors in a drawing; the colors will be consistent and you will be able to predict the colors of the final output more accurately. It is preferable to use the same color model that you are using for the final output. • You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors. To choose a color by using color harmonies 1. Select an object. 2. Open one of the following flyouts: • the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool . • the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool . 3. Click the Mixers tab. 4. Click Options Mixers Color harmonies. 5. Choose a shape from the Hues list box. 6. Choose an option from the Variation list box. 7. Drag the black dot on the color wheel. 8. Click a color swatch on the color palette below the color wheel. • If you choose a color that is out of the printer’s gamut, CorelDRAW displays the closest in-gamut color. This color is displayed in the Reference area, in the small swatch beside the New color. You can either choose this closest in-gamut color, or you can correct the out-of-gamut color. For information about color correction, see "Managing color for display, input, and output." • You can change the number of swatches in the color grid by dragging the Size slider. • You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors To choose a color by using color blends 1. Select an object. 2. Open one of the following flyouts: • the Fill flyout, and click the Fill color dialog tool . • the Outline flyout, and click the Outline color dialog tool . 3. Click the Mixers tab. 4. Click Options Mixers Color blend. 5. Open each color picker, and click a color. 6. Click a color in the color selection area. • You can only blend colors that are in the default color palette. If you want to blend other colors, change the default color palette. For information, see "To open a custom color palette." • You can change the cell size of the color grid by moving the Size slider. • You can swap the Old color (of the selected object) and the New color (which has been chosen in the color selection area) by clicking Options Swap colors. To sample a color 1. Open the Eyedropper flyout , and click the Eyedropper tool . 2. Choose Sample color from the list box on the property bar. 3. Click the Sample size flyout on the property bar, and enable one of the following options: • 1×1 — lets you choose the color of the pixel you click • 2×2 — lets you choose the average color in a sample area of 2 × 2 pixels. The pixel you click is in the middle of the sample area. • 5×5 — lets you choose the average color in a sample area of 5 × 5 pixels If you want to sample a color outside the drawing window, click Select from Desktop. 4. Click the color you want to sample. If you want to apply the sampled color to an object, click the Paintbucket tool , and click the object in the drawing window. The pointer changes as you hover over an area to indicate whether an outline or fill area is chosen. For example, as you hover over the center of a square, the pointer displays a solid color swatch; as you hover over the outline of the square, the pointer displays an outline shape. • In some cases, the sampled color may be an RGB or CMYK color that is the closest equivalent to the original color, instead of being a complete match. • The color you sample appears on the Fill color swatch in the lower-right corner of the drawing window. If you want to change the fill or outline color of an object to the sampled color, you can drag the Fill color swatch to the object. Creating custom color palettes Custom color palettes are collections of colors that you save. A number of preset custom color palettes are available; however, you can create color palettes from scratch. Custom color palettes are useful when you frequently choose the same colors, or when you want to work with a set of colors that look good together. You can create a custom color palette by choosing each color manually, or by using colors in an object or an entire area. To create a custom color palette 1. Click Window Color palettes Palette editor. 2. Click New palette . 3. Type a filename. 4. Click Save. To create a color palette from an object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Color palettes Create palette from selection. 3. Type a filename. 4. Click Save. To create a color palette from a document 1. Click Window Color palettes Create palette from document. 2. Type a filename. 3. Click Save. Opening and editing custom color palettes You can open a custom color palette, and you can set it as the default color palette. For more information about customizing color palettes, see "Setting color palette properties." When you create a custom color palette, the color palette is empty; however, you can edit it by adding the colors you want to include, as well as changing, deleting, sorting, and renaming colors. To open a custom color palette 1. Click Window Color palettes Open palette. 2. Choose the folder where the custom color palette is stored. 3. Double-click the filename. If you want to set the opened custom color palette as the default palette, right-click anywhere on the edge of the color palette border, and click Set as default. • You can close a custom color palette by right-clicking the edge of the color palette, and clicking Palette Close. To edit a custom color palette 1. Click Window Color palettes Palette editor. 2. Choose a palette from the list box. 3. Modify any colors. To Do the following Add a color Click Add color. Click a color in the color selection area, and click Add to palette. Change a color In the color selection area, click the color that you want to change, click Edit color, and click the new color in the color selection area. Delete a color Click a color in the color selection area, and click Delete color. Sort colors Click Sort colors, and click a color sorting method. Rename a color Click a color in the color selection area, and type a color name in the Name box. • You can delete multiple colors from a custom color palette by holding down Shift or Ctrl, and clicking in the color selection area Setting color palette properties Your application offers you the option of customizing color palettes. Color palettes can be either docked or floating. Docking a color palette attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a color palette pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around. With color swatches, you can set the right mouse button either to display a context menu or to set the outline color. You can also adjust the color swatch border and size, and you can hide or display the No color well. To dock or undock a color palette To Do the following Dock a color palette Click the top of the color palette border, and drag the color palette to any edge of the application window until a thin black toolbar outline appears. Undock a color palette Click the color palette border, and drag the color palette away from the edge of the application window. Change the number of rows on a docked color palette Click Tools Customization. In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. Type a value in the Maximum palette rows when docked box. • You can set a maximum of seven rows in a color palette. To set the action of the right mouse button for color swatches 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. 3. Enable one of the following check boxes: • Context menu • Set outline color • If you enable Set outline color, you can still display the context menu by right-clicking anywhere on the border of a color palette. To customize the color swatches 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Color palette. 3. Enable or disable any of the following check boxes: • Wide borders • Large swatches • Show no color well • You can also display color names in the color swatches by clicking the Options flyout button at the top of a color palette and clicking Show color names. Understanding color models You need a precise method to define colors. Color models provide various methods to define colors, each model defining colors through the use of specific color components. There are a range of color models to choose from when creating graphics. CMYK color model The CMYK color model uses the following components to define color: • cyan (C) • magenta (M) • yellow (Y) • black (K) The cyan, magenta, yellow, and black components are the amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black ink that a CMYK color contains and are measured in percent from 0 to 100. The CMYK color model, a subtractive color model, is used to produce printed materials. Subtractive color models use reflected light to display color. When you combine cyan, magenta, yellow, and black, so that the value of each component is 100, the result is black. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure white. RGB color model The RGB color model uses the following components to define color: • red (R) • green (G) • blue (B) The red, green, and blue components are the amounts of red, green, and blue light that an RGB color contains and are measured in values ranging from 0 to 255. The RGB color model is an additive color model. Additive color models use transmitted light to display color. Monitors use the RGB color model. When you add red light, blue light, and green light together, so that the value of each component is 255, the color white is displayed. When the value of each component is 0, the result is pure black. HSB color model The HSB color model uses the following components to define color: • hue (H) • saturation (S) • brightness (B) Hue describes the pigment of a color and is measured in degrees from 0 to 359 (for example, 0 degrees is red, 60 degrees yellow, 120 degrees green, 180 degrees cyan, 240 degrees blue, and 300 degrees magenta). Saturation describes the vividness or dullness of a color and is measured in percent from 0 to 100 (the higher the percentage, the more vivid the color). Brightness describes the amount of white that the color contains and is measured in percent from 0 to 100 (the higher the percentage, the brighter the color). Grayscale color model The grayscale color model defines color by using only one component, lightness, which is measured in values ranging from 0 to 255. Each grayscale color has equal values of the red, green, and blue components of the RGB color model. Changing a color photo to grayscale creates a black-and-white photo. Managing color for display, input, and output You may find that the colors displayed on your monitor don’t match the colors of a scanned image or of a printer’s output. Color management lets you reproduce colors accurately by using color profiles and by correcting colors for display. In this section, you’ll learn about • the Color management dialog box • working with color profiles • choosing advanced color management settings • correcting colors for display Understanding the Color management dialog box Color management is the process of matching colors between devices, such as scanners, digital cameras, printers, and monitors. Your application features color management controls designed to help you achieve the best possible color matches. The Color management dialog box, with its default settings, looks like this: The Color management dialog box You can activate the following visual elements: • Scanner/digital camera icon • Separations printer icon • Monitor icon • Composite printer icon • Import/export icon • Internal RGB icon • Arrows You can click the Monitor icon, the Import/export icon, the Internal RGB icon, and the Arrows to choose color management options and advanced settings. You can click the caption text under the icons to choose color profiles for each device. You can also get other color profiles from the application CD or online. For more information, see "Working with color profiles." To help you choose the appropriate profile, check the manufacturer’s documentation for a device. In addition, you can click the arrows between device icons to turn the color profiles on or off. The arrows appear orange when on, and grayed and broken when off. You can use the arrows to correct colors between devices and control how colors are displayed. The following table contains descriptions of what happens when an arrow is on or off. When a device is corrected for color, at least two profiles are used — one for each device. For example, if the printer colors are being corrected with Internal RGB, both the Internal RGB and printer profiles are used. If you use simulation to display colors on your monitor as they are printed, three profiles are used: the Internal RGB, printer, and monitor profiles. You can choose how effects, such as transparencies, are calculated — in the CMYK or RGB color mode. For more information, see "Correcting colors for display." Convention Description Examples From the Scanner/digital camera to Internal RGB The scanner/digital camera profile and the Internal RGB profiles are used for color correction. The profiles are not used. From Internal RGB to the Monitor Colors are calibrated for display using the Internal RGB and monitor color profiles. The profile is not used. From Internal RGB to the Composite printer The printer and Internal RGB profile are used for color correction. The profile is not used. From the Composite printer to the Monitor The monitor simulates a composite printer output. The monitor does not simulate a composite printer output. From Internal RGB to the Separations printer The separations printer and RGB profiles are used for color correction. The profile is not used. You can override this setting in the Print dialog box. From the Separations printer to the Monitor The monitor simulates output from the color separations printer. The monitor does not simulate output from the color separations printer. From the Separations printer to the Composite printer The composite printer simulates separations printer display. The composite printer does not simulate separations printer display. From Internal RGB to Import/Export Internal RGB profiles are embedded. ICC profiles are not embedded. From Import/Export to Internal RGB Embedded ICC profiles are used. ICC profiles are ignored Working with color profiles A color management system helps you achieve accurate colors across a variety of devices consistently. The first stage in setting up your color management system is to choose color profiles for your monitor and each of the devices you use, such as scanners, digital cameras, and printers. Understanding color management Each device has a range of colors, or color space, that it uses. For example, a monitor displays a different set of colors than a printer reproduces. So, you may see some colors on the screen that cannot be printed. You can use a color management system to translate colors from one device to another. Color profiles define the color space for your monitor and for the input and output devices you use. For more information about using color management in your application, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box." Choosing color profiles Different brands and models of monitors, scanners, digital cameras, and printers have different color spaces and thus require different color profiles. Some widely used profiles are installed with your application. Standard ICC (International Color Consortium) color profiles are used in your application. You can choose color profiles for the following: • monitor • scanner/digital camera • composite printer • separations printer • internal RGB color space Obtaining additional color profiles If you need additional profiles or updates, you can get them from the application CD, or you can download them. To choose a color profile 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Click a profile name under one of the following icons: • Scanner/digital camera • Separations printer • Monitor • Composite printer • Internal RGB 3. Choose a profile from the list box. • By default, color profiles are stored in the application’s Color folder. • You can access other color profiles. For more information, see "To copy a color profile from the CD" and "To download a color profile." To copy a color profile from the CD 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Get profile from disk. 3. Insert the application CD. 4. In the Browse for folder dialog box, choose the folder where the profiles are located. You may want to load color profiles that you have stored on a network or on your hard disk. 5. In the Install from disk dialog box, choose the color profile you want to copy. 6. Click Choose. To download a color profile 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Below a device icon, click a color profile list box, and choose Download profiles. 3. In the dialog box, enable the check box for each profile you want to download. 4. Click Download. 5. In the Save as dialog box, choose a destination for the color profile. If you want to store the new color profile with the existing profiles, download it to the application’s Color folder. You can also Choose a different profile type Click the Profile type list box, and choose a type. Specify your connection speed Click the Connection speed list box, and choose a speed. The faster your connection speed, the shorter the download time. Update the profiles list Click Refresh. Return to the main Color management dialog box Click Cancel. Choosing advanced color management settings Once you choose color profiles, the color management system uses a Color Matching Module (CMM) to match colors between devices as closely as possible. Your application uses the Kodak Color Management System by default. You can also choose different rendering intents, which control how the color management system converts colors between different color spaces. When you import or export graphics, you can embed, or attach, color profiles. By embedding a color profile, you can ensure color integrity; anyone viewing or printing your work will use the same colors that you used. By enabling the gamut alarm, you can preview which on-screen colors cannot be printed. The colors that cannot be reproduced are highlighted. The gamut alarm highlights colors that a printer cannot reproduce There are advanced settings for separations and composite printers; you can link a color profile to a specific printer. Using color styles, you can choose to turn color management off or to optimize the color display. To choose a color engine and rendering intent 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Click the Internal RGB icon . 3. In the Advanced settings dialog box, from the Rendering intent list box, choose one of the following: • Absolute colorimetric — preserves the white point throughout conversion • Automatic — default setting, which uses saturation for vector graphics and perceptual for bitmaps • Perceptual — good for a variety of images, especially bitmaps and photographic images • Relative colorimetric — good for producing proofs on inkjet printers • Saturation — good for vector graphics (lines, text, and solid colored objects) 4. Choose an option from the Color engine list box. • The Microsoft ICM 2.0 Color Matching Module (CMM) is not available for Windows NT 4.0. To embed color profiles 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Click the Import/export icon . 3. In the Import area, enable one of the following options: • Use embedded ICC profile • Always convert using • Ignore embedded ICC profile 4. In the Export area, enable one of the following options: • Embed internal RGB profile • Always embed using • Do not embed ICC profiles • When you enable the Always convert using import options, as well as the Always embed using export option, you can choose a profile from the list box. • When you enable the Embed internal RGB profile or the Always embed using export options, certain file formats are exported with an embedded ICC profile. These file formats are: TIFF, encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT), CorelDRAW (CDR), JPEG, Portable Document Format (PDF), and Adobe Photoshop (PSD). To enable the gamut alarm 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Click the Monitor icon . 3. Enable the Highlight display colors out of printer gamut check box. If you want to show CMYK in percentages, enable the Show CMYK in percentages check box. • You can map spot colors into CMYK gamut by enabling the Map spot colors into CMYK gamut check box. • You can change the warning color of the gamut alarm by opening the Warning color picker and choosing a color. To choose advanced printer settings 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Click one of the following icons: • Composite printer • Separations printer 3. Choose a setting from the list box. • If you choose an advanced setting, that setting overrides the profile that displays under the printer icon in the Color management dialog box. To use color management styles 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. Choose one of the following from the Settings list box: • Color management off • Default settings • O ptimized for desktop printing • Optimized for professional output • Optimized for the Web • Some color management settings, such as Default, Optimized for desktop printing, and Optimized for professional output, can result in on-screen colors appearing dull. This is due to an on-screen printer simulation of the output. For more information, see "Correcting colors for display." • You can add or delete a color management style by clicking the Save current style or Delete current style buttons Correcting colors for display You can correct colors so that they display as accurately as possible on screen. If you correct only the display colors, the colors are shown according to the internal RGB and monitor color profiles. If you are working with CMYK colors, you can choose to render all effects, such as transparencies, in the CMYK color space. If you display colors as they will print, on-screen colors simulate output using the Internal RGB, monitor, and printer color profiles. Simulating printer output may cause on-screen colors to appear dull. To correct colors for display • Click Tools Color management. To Do the following Correct display colors Click the arrow from the Internal RGB icon to the Monitor icon . Display simulation of a composite printer output Click the arrow from the Composite printer icon to the Monitor icon . Display simulation of a color separations printer output Click the arrow from the Separations printer icon to the Monitor icon . Display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer Click the arrow from the Separations printer icon to the Composite printer icon . • Arrows appear orange when they are turned on, and grayed and broken when they are turned off. For more information about using the arrows for color correction, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box." • The display simulation of a separations printer on a composite printer does not affect output. To display effects in the RGB or CMYK color mode 1. Click Tools Color management. 2. In the Color mode used for effects area at the bottom of the dialog box, choose one of the following: • CMYK — renders effects in the CMYK color mode. This option simulates printed CMYK colors. • RGB — renders effects in the RGB color mode. This option is suitable for output to the Web or other RGB destinations. Adding three-dimensional effects to objects You can create the illusion of three-dimensional depth in objects by adding contour, perspective, extrusion, bevel, or drop shadow effects. In this section, you’ll learn about • contouring objects • applying perspective to objects • creating vector extrusions • creating bevel effects • creating drop shadows • blending objects Contouring objects You can contour an object to create a series of concentric lines that progress to the inside or outside of the object. CorelDRAW also lets you set the number and distance of the contour lines. After contouring an object, you can copy or clone its contour settings to another object. You can also change the colors of the fill between the contour lines and the contour outlines themselves. You can set a color progression in the contour effect, where one color blends into another. The color progression can follow a straight, clockwise, or counterclockwise path through the color range of your choice. A center contour has been applied to the above object. The number of contour lines, as well as the distance between lines, can be changed. An outside contour has been applied to the above object. Note that an outside contour projects from the outside edge of the object. To contour an object 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive contour tool . 2. Click an object or a set of grouped objects, and drag the start handle toward the center to create an inside contour. 3. Move the object slider to change the number of contour steps. You can also Specify the number of contour lines Click the Inside button on the property bar, and type a value in the Contour steps box on the property bar. Specify the distance between contour lines Type a value in the Contour offset box on the property bar. Accelerate contour line progression Click the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar, and move the object slider. • You can create an outside contour by dragging the start handle away from the center. To copy or clone a contour 1. Select the object you want to contour. 2. Click Effects and click one of the following: • Copy effect Contour from • Clone effect Contour from 3. Click a contour object. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a contour. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." To set the fill color for a contour object 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive contour tool . 2. Select a contour object. 3. Open the Fill color picker on the property bar, and click a color. If the original object has a fountain fill, a second color picker appears. • You can accelerate the fill color progression by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar. • You can change the contour center’s color by dragging a color from the color palette to the end fill handle. To specify an outline color for the contour object 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive contour tool . 2. Select a contour object. 3. Open the Outline color picker on the property bar, and click a color. To set the fill progression 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive contour tool . 2. Select a contour object. 3. Click one of the following buttons on the property bar: • Linear contour colors • Clockwise contour colors • Counterclockwise contour colors Applying perspective to objects You can create a perspective effect by shortening one or two sides of an object. This effect gives an object the appearance of receding in one or two directions, thereby creating a one-point perspective or a two-point perspective. Perspective effects can be added to objects or grouped objects. You can also add a perspective effect to linked groups, such as contours, blends, extrusions, and objects created with the Artistic media tool. You can’t add perspective effects to paragraph text, bitmaps, or symbols. The original graphic (left) with one-point (middle) and two-point (right) perspectives applied to it. After you apply a perspective effect, you can copy it to other objects in a drawing, adjust it, or remove it from the object. To apply a perspective To Apply a one-point perspective Click Effects Add perspective. Press Ctrl, and drag a node. Apply a two-point perspective Click Effects Add perspective. Drag the nodes on the outside of the grid to apply the effect you want. • Pressing Ctrl constrains the node’s movement to the horizontal or vertical axis to create a one-point perspective effect. • You can move opposing nodes the same distance in opposite directions by pressing Ctrl + Shift as you drag. To copy an object’s perspective effect 1. Select an object to which you want to apply a perspective effect. 2. Click Effects Copy effect Perspective from. 3. Select an object whose perspective effect you want to copy. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a perspective effect. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." To adjust the perspective 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Select an object that has a perspective effect. 3. Drag a node to a new position. • You can also adjust the perspective by dragging one or both of the vanishing points. To remove an object’s perspective effect 1. Select an object that has a perspective effect. 2. Click Effects Clear perspective. Creating vector extrusions You can make objects appear three-dimensional by creating vector extrusions. You can create vector extrusions by projecting points from an object and joining them to create an illusion of three dimensions. CorelDRAW also lets you apply a vector extrusion to an object in a group. After you create an extrusion, you can copy or clone its attributes to a selected object. Cloning and copying transfer the extrusion attributes of an extruded object to another. However, the cloned extrusion settings cannot be edited independently from the master. You can change an extruded form by rotating it and rounding its corners. CorelDRAW also lets you remove a vector extrusion. Bevels Another way in which you can give an object a three-dimensional appearance is by applying a beveled edge to an extrusion. A bevel creates the illusion that an object’s extruded edges are cut on an angle. You can specify the angle and depth values of the bevel to control the effect. You can create a bevel effect without extruding an object. For more information, see "Creating bevel effects." Extruded fills You can apply fills to an entire vector extrusion or to the extruded surfaces of a vector extrusion. You can cover each surface individually with the fill, or you can drape the fill so that it blankets the entire object with no breaks to the pattern or texture. Left to right: a simple shape, the shape with an extruded fill of solid color, the shape with an extruded gradient fill and a rotation applied. Lighting You can enhance vector extrusions by applying light sources. You can add up to three light sources to project toward the extruded object with varying intensity. When you no longer need light sources, you can remove them. Vanishing points You can create a vector extrusion in which the lines of the extrusion converge at a vanishing point. The vanishing point of a vector extrusion can be copied to another object so that both objects appear to recede toward the same point. Vector extrusions with the same vanishing point You can also give two vector extrusions different vanishing points. Vector extrusions with different vanishing points To create a vector extrusion 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive extrude tool . 2. Choose an extrusion type from the Extrusion type list box on the property bar. 3. Select an object. 4. Drag the object’s selection handles to set the direction and depth of the extrusion. If you want to reset the extrusion, press Esc before releasing the mouse button. You can also Apply preset settings to a vector extrusion Select an extrude object, click the Interactive extrude tool, and choose a preset setting from the Preset list box on the property bar. To copy or clone a vector extrusion 1. Select the object you want to extrude. 2. Click Effects and click one of the following: • Copy effect Extrude from • Clone effect Extrude from 3. Click an extruded object. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a vector extrusion. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." To change the form of a vector extrusion To Do the following Rotate an extrusion Select an extruded object. Click the Extrude rotation button on the property bar. Drag the extrusion in the direction you want. Change the direction of an extrusion Using the Interactive extrude tool , click an extrusion. Click the vanishing point, and drag in the direction you want. Change the depth of an extrusion Using the Interactive extrude tool , click an extrusion. Drag the slider between the interactive vector handles. Round the corners of an extruded rectangle or square Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . Drag a corner node along the outline of the rectangle or square. To remove a vector extrusion 1. Select an extruded object. 2. Click Effects Clear extrude. • You can also remove a vector extrusion by clicking the Clear extrude button on the property bar. To apply a fill to a vector extrusion 1. Select an extruded object with the Interactive extrude tool . 2. Click the Color button on the property bar. 3. Click one of the following buttons: • Use object fill — applies the object’s fill to the extrusion • Use solid color — applies a solid color to the extrusion • Use color shading — applies a gradient fill to the extrusion • You can apply an unbroken pattern or texture fill to an object by enabling the Drape fills check box before you click the Use object fill button. To apply beveled edges to a vector extrusion 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive extrude tool . 2. Select an extruded object. 3. Click the Bevels button on the property bar. 4. Enable the Use bevel check box. 5. Type a value in the Bevel depth box. 6. Type a value in the Bevel angle box. • You can also set the bevel depth and angle by using the Interactive display box below the Use bevel check box. • You can show only the bevel and hide the extrusion by enabling the Show bevel only check box. To add light to a vector extrusion 1. Select an extruded object. 2. Click the Lighting button on the property bar. 3. Click any of the three Light buttons . The lights appear as numbered circles in the preview window. 4. Drag the numbered circles in the Light intensity preview window to position the lights. If you want to create more realistic shading, enable the Use full color range check box. You can also Adjust the intensity of a light source Select a light in the Light intensity preview window, and move the Intensity slider. Remove a light source Click an active Light button. To change the vanishing point of a vector extrusion To Do the following Lock a vanishing point Double-click an extruded object. Choose VP locked to object or VP locked to page from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Copy a vanishing point Double-click an extruded object whose vanishing point you want to change. Choose Copy VP from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Select the extruded object that has the vanishing point you want to copy. Set one vanishing point for two extrusions Double-click an extruded object. Choose Shared vanishing point from the Vanishing point properties list box on the property bar. Select the extruded object that has the vanishing point you want to share. Creating bevel effects A bevel effect adds three-dimensional depth to a graphic or text object by making its edges appear sloped (cut at an angle). Bevel effects can contain both spot and process (CMYK) colors, so they are ideal for printing. You can remove a bevel effect at any time. Bevel styles You can choose from the following bevel styles: • Soft edge — creates beveled surfaces that appear shaded in some areas • Emboss — makes an object appear as a relief Left to right: a logo, the logo with a Soft Edge bevel effect, and the logo with an Emboss bevel effect. Beveled surfaces You can control the intensity of the bevel effect by specifying the width of the beveled surface. Light and color An object with a bevel effect appears lit by white ambient (surrounding) light and a spotlight. The ambient light is of low intensity and cannot be changed. The spotlight is also white by default, but you can change its color, intensity, and location. Changing the spotlight color affects the color of the beveled surfaces. Changing the spotlight’s intensity lightens or darkens the beveled surfaces. Changing the location of the spotlight determines which beveled surfaces appear lit. You can change the location of the spotlight by specifying its direction and altitude. Direction determines where the light source is located in the plane of the object (for example, to the left or right of an object). Altitude determines how high the spotlight is located in relation to the object’s plane. For example, you can place the spotlight flush with the horizon (altitude of 0° ) or directly above the object (altitude of 90°). In addition, you can change the color of the beveled surfaces that are in shadow by specifying a shadow color. To create a Soft Edge bevel effect 1. Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it. 2. Click Effects Bevel. 3. In the Bevel docker, choose Soft edge from the Style list box. 4. Enable one of the following Bevel offset options: • To center — lets you create beveled surfaces that meet in the middle of the object • Distance — lets you specify the width of the beveled surfaces. Type a value in the Distance box. You can also Change the color of beveled surfaces in shadow Choose a color from the Shadow color picker. Beveled surfaces change to a shade of the specified shadow color. Choose a spotlight color Choose a color from the Light color picker. Change the intensity of the spotlight Move the Intensity slider. Specify the position of the spotlight Move either of the following sliders: • Direction • Altitude Direction values range from 0° to 360°; altitude values range from 0° to 90°. • The lowest altitude value (0°) places the spotlight on the plane of the object; the highest altitude value (90°) places the spotlight directly above the object. • Using a given altitude value, you can change the spotlight’s location by changing the direction value. For example, at an altitude of 45°, the following direction values change the spotlight location as noted: • 45° places the spotlight on the upper right. • 135° places the spotlight on the upper left. • 225° places the spotlight on the lower left. • 315° places the spotlight on the lower right. • The effect of the shadow color is most apparent when the spotlight is located close to the object’s plane (low altitude value). To create an Emboss effect 1. Select an object that is closed and has a fill applied to it. 2. Click Effects Bevel. 3. In the Bevel docker, choose Emboss from the Style list box. 4. In the Distance box, type a low value. 5. To change the intensity of the spotlight, move the Intensity slider. 6. To specify the direction of the spotlight, move the Direction slider. 7. Click Apply. If you want to create a more pronounced bevel effect, type a higher value in the Distance box, and reapply the effect. You can also Choose a shadow color Choose a color from the Shadow color picker. Choose a spotlight color Choose a color from the Light color picker. • The Emboss bevel effect is achieved by creating two duplicates of the object. The duplicates are offset in opposite directions: one toward the light source and the other away from the light source. The color of the duplicate placed toward the spotlight is a blend of the spotlight and object colors and depends on the light intensity. The color of the duplicate placed away from the spotlight is a 50 percent blend of the shadow and object colors. • The Altitude slider is disabled for the Emboss bevel style. To remove a bevel effect 1. Select an object with a bevel effect applied. 2. Click Effects Clear effect. Creating drop shadows Drop shadows simulate light falling on an object from one of five particular perspectives: flat, right, left, bottom, and top. You can add drop shadows to most objects or groups of objects, including artistic text, paragraph text, and bitmaps. When you add a drop shadow, you can change its perspective, and you can adjust attributes such as color, opacity, fade level, angle, and feathering. A drop shadow applied to an object After you create a drop shadow, you can copy it or clone it to a selected object. When you copy a drop shadow, the original and copy have no connection and can be edited independently. With cloning, the master object’s drop shadow attributes are automatically applied to its clone. The feathered effect softens the edges of a drop shadow. By separating a drop shadow from its object, you gain more control over the drop shadow itself. For example, you can edit the drop shadow as you would edit a transparency. For information about editing a transparency, see "Applying transparencies." As with transparencies, you can apply a merge mode to a drop shadow to control how the color of the drop shadow blends with the color of the object underneath. For more information about merge modes, see "Applying merge modes." You can also adjust the rendering resolution of a drop shadow. For example, you can increase the rendering resolution to improve a drop shadow’s appearance. However, increasing the resolution of a drop shadow may increase the file size of a drawing. You can remove a drop shadow. To add a drop shadow 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive drop shadow tool . 2. Click an object. 3. Drag from the center or side of the object until the drop shadow is the size you want. 4. Specify any attributes on the property bar. • Drop shadows cannot be added to linked groups, such as blended objects, contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, objects created with the Artistic media tool , or other drop shadows. To copy or clone a drop shadow 1. Select the object to which you want to copy or clone a drop shadow. 2. Click Effects and click one of the following: • Copy effect Drop shadow from • Clone effect Drop shadow from 3. Click the drop shadow of an object. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a drop shadow. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." To separate a drop shadow from an object 1. Select an object’s drop shadow. 2. Click Arrange Break drop shadow group apart. 3. Drag the shadow. To apply a merge mode to a drop shadow 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive drop shadow tool . 2. Select an object with a drop shadow, and choose a merge mode from the Transparency operation list box on the property bar. • The default merge mode Multiply produces natural-looking drop shadows. To adjust the resolution of a drop shadow 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Workspace list of categories, click General. 3. Type a value in the Resolution box. To remove a drop shadow 1. Select an object’s drop shadow. 2. Click Effects Clear drop shadow. • You can also remove a drop shadow from an object by clicking the Clear drop shadow button on the property bar. Blending objects CorelDRAW lets you create blends, such as straight-line blends, blends along a path, and compound blends. A straight-line blend shows a progression in shape and size from one object to another. The outline and fill colors of the intermediate objects progress along a straight-line path across the color spectrum. The outlines of intermediate objects show a gradual progression in thickness and shape. After you create a blend, you can copy or clone its settings to other objects. When you copy a blend, the object takes on all the blend-related settings, except for their outline and fill attributes. When you clone a blend, changes you make to the original blend (also called the master) are applied to the clone. Straight-line blends can be used to create graphics with a glass-like appearance. The rollover button (left) contains a blend of tightly overlapped blended objects. You can fit objects along part or all of a path’s shape, and you can add one or more objects to a blend to create a compound blend. The straight-line blend (top) is fitted to a curved path (bottom). You can change the appearance of a blend by adjusting the number and spacing of its intermediate objects, the blend’s color progression, the nodes the blends map to, the blend’s path, and the start and end objects. You can fuse the components of a split or compound blend to create a single object. This compound blend consists of three blends. You can also split and remove a blend. By mapping nodes, you can control the appearance of a blend. Two nodes on the polygon are mapped to two nodes of a star shape, showing a more gradual transition (bottom). To blend objects To Do the following Blend along a straight line Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive blend tool . Select the first object, and drag over the second object. If you want to reset the blend, press Esc as you drag. Blend an object along a freehand path Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive blend tool. Select the first object. Hold down Alt, and drag to draw a line to the second object. Fit a blend to a path Open the Interactive tools flyout, and click the Interactive blend tool. Click the blend. Click the Path properties button on the property bar. Click New path. Using the curved arrow, click the path to which you want to fit the blend. Stretch the blend over an entire path Select a blend that is already fitted on a path. Click the Miscellaneous blend options button on the property bar, and enable the Blend along full path check box. Create a compound blend Using the Interactive blend tool, drag from an object to the start or end object of another blend. To copy or clone a blend 1. Select the two objects you want to blend. 2. Click Effects, and click one of the following: • Copy effect Blend from • Clone effect Blend from 3. Select the blend whose attributes you want to copy or clone. • You can’t copy or clone a compound blend. • You can also use the Eyedropper tool to copy a blend. For more information, see "To copy effects from one object to another." To set the distance for intermediate objects in a blend 1. Select a blend. 2. Click the Use steps or fixed spacing for blend button on the property bar. 3. Type a value in the Number of steps or offset between blend shapes box on the property bar. 4. Press Enter. • You can set object and color acceleration rates by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding slider. To set the color progression in a blend 1. Select a blend. 2. On the property bar, click one of the following: • Direct blend • Clockwise blend • Counterclockwise blend • You can’t create color progressions by using blended objects filled with bitmaps, texture, pattern, or PostScript fills. • You can set how fast the object’s colors transform from the first to the last object by clicking the Object and color acceleration button on the property bar and moving the corresponding sliders To map the nodes of a blend 1. Select a blend. 2. Click the Miscellaneous blend options button on the property bar. 3. Click the Map nodes button on the property bar. 4. Click a node on the start object and on the end object. To work with the start or end objects in a blend To Do the following Select the start or end object Select a blend, click the Start and end object properties button on the property bar, and click Show start, or Show end. Change the start or end object of a blend Select a blend, click the Start and end object properties button on the property bar, and click New start, or New end. Click an object outside the blend that you want to use as the start or end of the blend. Fuse the start or end object in a split or compound blend Hold down Ctrl, click a middle object in a blend, and then click a start or end object. Click the Miscellaneous options button on the property bar. If you have selected the start object, click the Fuse start button . If you have selected the end object, click the Fuse end button . • You can reverse the direction of the blend by clicking Arrange Order Reverse order. To change the blend path 1. Select a blend. 2. Click the Path properties button on the property bar, and click New path. 3. Click the path you want to use for the blend. You can also Detach a blend from a path Click the Path properties button on the property bar, and click Detach from path. Change the path of a selected freehand blend Click the blend path with the Shape tool , and drag a path’s node. • To select the blend path, click the Path properties button, and click Show path. To split a blend 1. Select a blend. 2. Click the Miscellaneous options button on the property bar. 3. Click the Split button . 4. Click the intermediate object at the point at where you want to split the blend. • You can’t split a blend at the intermediate object that is immediately adjacent to the start or end object. To remove a blend 1. Select a blend. 2. Click Effects Clear blend. • You can also remove a selected blend by clicking the Clear blend button on the property bar. Changing the transparency of objects You can apply a transparency to an object so that all objects behind it show through. The CorelDRAW application also lets you specify how the color of the transparent object combines with the color of the object beneath it. In this section, you’ll learn about • applying transparencies • applying merge modes Applying transparencies When you apply a transparency to an object, you make the objects beneath it partially visible. You can apply transparencies using the same kind of fills you apply to objects; that is, uniform, fountain, texture, and pattern. For more information about these fills, see "Filling objects." By default, CorelDRAW applies all transparencies to the object’s fill and outline; however, you can specify whether you want the transparency to apply only to the object’s outline or fill. You can also copy a transparency from one object to another. When you position a transparency over an object, you can freeze it, making the view of the object move with the transparency. Some types of transparencies: uniform, fountain, textured, and patterned To apply a uniform transparency 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 3. On the property bar, choose Uniform from the Transparency type list box. 4. Type a value in the Starting transparency box on the property bar, and press Enter. • You can click a color on the color palette to apply a color to the transparency To apply a fountain transparency 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 3. On the property bar, choose one of the following fountain transparencies from the Transparency type list box: • Linear • Radial • Conical • Square 4. Reposition the interactive vector handles that display, or point to where you want the transparency to start on the object, and drag to where you want the transparency to end. If you want to reset the transparency, press Esc before releasing the mouse button. 5. Type a value in the Transparency midpoint box on the property bar, and press Enter. • You can create a custom fountain transparency by dragging colors, whose shades convert to grayscale, from the color palette onto the object’s interactive vector handles . To apply a textured transparency 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 3. Choose Texture from the Transparency type list box on the property bar. 4. Choose a sample from the Texture library list box on the property bar. 5. Open the First transparency picker on the property bar, and click a texture. 6. On the property bar, type values in the following boxes: • Starting transparency — lets you change the opacity of the starting color • Ending transparency — lets you change the opacity of the ending color To apply a pattern transparency 1. Select an object. 2. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 3. From the Transparency type list box on the property bar, choose one of the following: • Two-color pattern — a simple picture composed of “on” and “off” pixels. The only shades included in the picture are the two that you assign. • Full-color pattern — a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of dots of color like bitmaps. These vector graphics are smoother and more complex than bitmap images and are easier to manipulate. • Bitmap pattern — a color picture composed of patterns of light and dark or differently colored pixels in a rectangular array. 4. Open the First transparency picker on the property bar, and click a pattern. 5. On the property bar, type values in the following boxes: • Starting transparency • Ending transparency To specify the extent of a transparency 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 2. Select an object to which a transparency has been applied. 3. From the Transparency target list box on the property bar, choose one of the following: • Fill • Outline • All To copy a transparency to another object 1. Select an object to which you want to apply a transparency. 2. Click Effects Copy effect Lens from. 3. Using the horizontal cursor, select the object with the transparency you want to copy. To freeze the contents of a transparency 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 2. Select an object to which a transparency has been applied. 3. Click the Freeze button on the property bar. • The view of the object beneath the transparency moves with it; however, the actual object remains unchanged. Applying merge modes You can apply a merge mode to a transparency to specify how the color of a transparency is combined with the color of the object behind it. The following merge modes available for transparencies can also be applied to drop shadows. Merge mode Description Normal Applies the transparency color on top of the base color Add Adds the values of the transparency color and the base color Subtract Adds the values of the transparency color and the base color together, and then subtracts 255 Difference Subtracts the transparency color from the base color and multiplies by 255. If the transparency color value is 0, the result will always be 255. Multiply Multiplies the base color by the transparency color, and then divides by 255. This has a darkening effect, unless you are applying color to white. Multiplying black with any color results in black. Multiplying white with any color leaves the color unchanged. Divide Divides the base color by the transparency color, or conversely, divides the transparency color by the base color, depending on which color has the higher value If lighter Replaces any base color pixels that are a darker color with the transparency color. Base color pixels that are lighter than the transparency color are not affected. If darker Replaces any base color pixels that are a lighter color with the transparency color. Base color pixels that are darker than the transparency color are not affected. Texturize Converts the transparency color to grayscale, and then multiplies the grayscale value by the base color Hue Uses the hue of the transparency color, as well as the saturation and lightness of the base color. If you are adding color to a grayscale image, there will be no change because the colors are desaturated. Saturation Uses the lightness and hue of the base color and the saturation of the transparency color Lightness Uses the hue and saturation of the base color and the lightness of the transparency color Invert Uses the transparency color’s complementary color. If a transparency color value is 127, there will be no change because the color value falls in the center of the color wheel. Logical AND Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula AND to these values Logical OR Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula OR to these values Logical XOR Converts the transparency and base colors to binary values, and then applies the Boolean algebraic formula XOR to these values Red Applies the transparency color to the red channel of RGB objects Green Applies the transparency color to the green channel of RGB objects Blue Applies the transparency color to the blue channel of RGB objects To apply a merge mode to a transparency 1. Open the Interactive tools flyout , and click the Interactive transparency tool . 2. Select an object with a transparency. 3. Choose a merge mode from the Transparency operation list box on the property bar. Using lenses with objects Lenses contain creative effects that let you change the appearance of an object without actually changing the object. In this section, you’ll learn about • applying lenses • editing lenses Applying lenses Lenses change how the object area beneath the lens appears, not the actual properties and attributes of the objects. You can apply lenses to any vector object, such as a rectangle, ellipse, closed path, or polygon. You can also change the appearance of artistic text and bitmaps. When you apply a lens over a vector object, the lens itself becomes a vector image. Likewise, if the lens is placed over a bitmap, the lens also becomes a bitmap. After you apply a lens, you can copy it and use it with another object. The lens types applied to the original (far left): (left to right) Heat map, Magnify, and a Custom color map The following are the types of lenses you can apply to objects. Lens Description Brighten Lets you brighten and darken object areas and set the rate of the brightness and darkness Color add Lets you simulate an additive light model. The colors of the objects beneath the lens are added to the color of the lens as if you were mixing colors of light. You can choose the color and the amount of color you want to add. Color limit Lets you view an object area with only black and the lens color showing through. For example, if you place a green color limit lens over a bitmap, all colors except green and black are filtered out in the lens area. Custom color map Lets you change all the colors of the object area beneath the lens to a color ranging between two colors you specify. You can choose the range’s start and end colors and the progression between the two colors. The progression can follow a direct, forward, or reverse route through the color spectrum. Fish eye Lets you distort, magnify, or shrink the objects beneath the lens, according to the percentage value you specify Heat map Lets you create the effect of an infrared image by mimicking the heat levels of colors in object areas beneath the lens Invert Lets you change the colors beneath the lens to their complementary CMYK colors. Complementary colors are colors that are opposite one another on the color wheel. Magnify Lets you magnify an area on an object by an amount that you specify. The magnify lens overrides the original object’s fill, making the object look transparent. Tinted grayscale Lets you change the colors of object areas beneath the lens to their grayscale equivalents. Tinted grayscale lenses are particularly effective for creating sepia-tone effects. Transparency Lets you make an object look like a piece of tinted film or colored glass Wireframe Lets you display the object area beneath the lens with the outline or fill color you choose. For example, if you set red for the outline and blue for the fill, all areas beneath the lens appear to have red outlines and blue fills. To apply a lens 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects Lens. 3. Choose a lens type from the list box in the Lens docker. 4. Specify the settings you want. • You cannot apply the lens effect directly to linked groups such as contoured objects, beveled objects, extruded objects, drop shadows, paragraph text or objects created with the Artistic media tool . • You can preview the different types of lenses in real-time before auto-applying one to a drawing by clicking the Lock button and then choosing a lens and settings to preview. When you find the lens you want to use, click the Lock button again, and click Apply. To copy a lens 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects Copy effect Lens from. 3. Click the object whose lens you want to copy. Editing lenses You can edit a lens to change how it affects the area beneath it. For example, you can change the viewpoint of a lens, indicated by an X in the drawing window, to display any part of a drawing. The viewpoint represents the center point of what is being viewed through the lens. You can position the lens anywhere in the drawing window, but it always shows the area around its viewpoint marker. For example, you can use the viewpoint marker on the Magnify lens to enlarge part of a map. You can also display a lens only where it overlaps other objects or the background. As a result, the lens effect is not seen where the lens covers blank space (white space) in the drawing window. Freezing the current view of a lens lets you move the lens without changing what’s displayed through it. In addition, changes you make to the areas beneath the lens have no effect on the view. To edit a lens 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects Lens. 3. Enable the Viewpoint check box on the Lens docker. If you want to display a lens only where it covers other objects, enable the Remove face check box. 4. Click Edit to display the viewpoint marker. 5. Drag the viewpoint marker in the drawing window to a new location. 6. Click End. If you want to freeze the current view of a lens, enable the Frozen check box. 7. Click Apply. • The Remove face check box is not available for the Fish Eye and Magnify lenses. Working with pages and layout tools The CorelDRAW application allows you to specify the size, orientation, unit of scale, and background of the drawing page. You can customize and display page grids and guidelines to help you organize objects and place them exactly where you want. For example, if you are designing a newsletter, you can set the dimensions of the pages and create guidelines for positioning columns and heading text. When you are laying out an advertisement, you can align graphics and text along guidelines and arrange graphic elements within a grid. Rulers can help you position grids, guidelines, and objects along a scale, which uses units of your choosing. Also, you can add and delete pages. Page layout settings and tools are fully customizable and can be used as defaults for other drawings. In this section, you’ll learn about • specifying the page layout • choosing a page background • adding, renaming, and deleting pages • using the rulers • calibrating the rulers • setting up the grid • setting up guidelines • setting the drawing scale Specifying the page layout You can begin working on a drawing by specifying settings for the size, orientation, and layout style of the page. The options you choose when specifying the page layout can be used as a default for all new drawings you create. You can also adjust the page size and orientation settings to match the standard paper settings for printing. Page size There are two options for specifying a page size: choosing a preset page size and creating your own. You can choose from many preset page sizes, ranging from legal-size paper and envelopes to posters and Web pages. If a preset page size does not meet your needs, you can create a custom page size by specifying a drawing’s dimensions. Page orientation The orientation of the page can be landscape or portrait. In landscape orientation, the drawing’s width is greater than its height, and in portrait orientation, the drawing’s height is greater than its width. Any pages you add to a drawing project will have the current orientation; however, you can give a different orientation to single pages in a drawing project. Layout styles When you use the default layout style (Full Page), each page in a document is considered a single page and prints on one sheet. You can choose layout styles for multipage publications, such as booklets and brochures. The multipage layout styles — Book, Booklet, Tent Card, Side-fold Card, and Top-fold Card — split the page size into two or more equal parts. Each part is considered a separate page. The advantage of working with separate parts is that you can edit each page in upright orientation, and in sequential order in the drawing window, regardless of the layout required to print your document. When you are ready to print, the application automatically arranges the pages in the order required for printing and binding. Label styles You can choose from more than 800 preset label formats from different label manufacturers. You can preview the dimensions of labels and see how they fit on a printed page. If CorelDRAW does not provide a label style that meets your requirements, you can modify an existing style or create and save your own original style. To set the page size and orientation To Do the following Choose a preset page size Click Layout Page setup, and choose a paper type from the Paper list box. Specify a custom page size Click Layout Page setup, and type values in the Width and Height boxes. Set the page orientation Click Layout Page setup, and enable the Landscape or the Portrait option. Set the page size and orientation for an individual page in a multipage document Go to the page. Click Layout Page setup, choose the page size and orientation you want, and enable the Resize current page only check box. • With the Pick tool active and no objects selected, you can quickly change the page size and orientation by using the controls on the property bar. To apply page size and orientation settings to all pages in a drawing, begin by clicking the top half of the Set default or current page size and orientation button . To change only the current page, click the bottom half of the Set default or current page orientation button. • You can also specify the page size and orientation by clicking View Page sorter view and using the controls on the property bar. To choose a layout style 1. Click Layout Page setup. 2. In the Page list of categories, click Layout. 3. Choose a layout style from the Layout list box. Each layout style is accompanied by a short description and illustration. To use a label style 1. Click Layout Page setup. 2. In the Page list of categories, click Label, and enable the Labels option. 3. Choose the manufacturer name from the list. 4. Choose the label style you want from the list. If you want to customize the label style, click Customize label, and adjust the label size, margins, gutters, and the number of labels appearing on each sheet. If you want to save the custom label style you created, click the Add button , and type a name for the new label style in the Save as box. • You cannot use label styles if a drawing contains multiple pages. • For best results, choose Letter paper size and Portrait orientation before applying a label style. To set the default page layout 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, click Document. 3. Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box. 4. Enable the Page options check box. • The page size and orientation of new documents match the options that were last specified with the Resize current page only check box disabled To match the page settings to the printer settings 1. Click Layout Page setup. 2. Enable the Normal paper option. 3. Click Set from printer. Choosing a page background You can choose the color and type of background for a drawing. For example, you can use a solid color if you want a uniform background. If you want a more intricate or dynamic background, you can use a bitmap. Some examples of bitmaps include textured designs, photographs, and clipart. When you choose a bitmap as the background, it is embedded in the drawing by default. This option is recommended. However, you can also link the bitmap to the drawing so that if you later edit the source image, the change is automatically reflected in the drawing. If you send a drawing with a linked image to someone else, you must also send the linked image. You can make a background bitmap printable and exportable, or you can save computer resources by exporting and printing a drawing without the background bitmap. If you no longer need a background, you can remove it. To use a solid color as the background 1. Click Layout Page background. 2. Enable the Solid option. 3. Open the Color picker, and click a color. To use a bitmap as the background 1. Click Layout Page background. 2. Enable the Bitmap option. 3. Click Browse. 4. Choose a file format from the Files of type list box. 5. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 6. Double-click the filename. 7. Enable one of the following options: • Linked — links the bitmap to the drawing so that changes made to the source file are reflected in the bitmap background • Embedded — embeds the bitmap in the drawing so that changes made to the source file are not reflected in the bitmap background If you want the background to be printed and exported with the drawing, enable the Print and export background check box. 8. Enable one of the following options: • Default size — lets you use the bitmap’s current size • Custom size — lets you specify the dimensions of the bitmap. Type values in the H and V boxes. If you want to specify nonproportional height and width values, disable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. • If the bitmap is smaller than the drawing page, it is tiled across the drawing page. If it is larger than the drawing page, it is cropped to fit the drawing page. • A background bitmap is not an object and cannot be edited. To remove a background 1. Click Layout Page background. 2. Enable the No background option. Adding, renaming, and deleting pages CorelDRAW lets you add a page to a drawing, rename it at any time, and delete a single page or an entire range of pages. You can also move objects from one page to another. You can use the Page Sorter view to manage pages while viewing the page contents. The Page Sorter view lets you change the order of pages as well as copy, add, rename, and delete pages. To add a page 1. Click Layout Insert page. 2. Type the number of pages you want to add in the Insert pages box. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Before • After If you want to insert a page before or after a page other than the current page, type the page number in the Page box. • If you are on the first or last page, you can add a page by clicking the Add page button in the document window. • You can also choose where to add a page by right-clicking a page tab in the document window and clicking Insert page after or Insert page before. To rename a page 1. Click Layout Rename page. 2. Type the name of the page in the Page name box. • You can also rename a page in the Object manager docker by clicking the page name twice and typing a new name. To access the Object manager docker, click Tools Object manager. To delete a page 1. Click Layout Delete page. 2. In the Delete page dialog box, type the number of the page you want to delete. • You can delete a range of pages by enabling the Through to page check box and typing the number of the last page to delete in the Through to page box. To change the order of pages • Drag the page tabs on the document navigator at the bottom of the drawing window. To move an object to another page • Drag the object over the tab with the destination page number, and without releasing the mouse button, drag the object to position it on the page. To manage pages while viewing their contents 1. Click View Page sorter view. 2. Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Change the order of pages Drag a page to its new location. Copy a page Right-click, drag the page to its new location, and click Copy here. Add a page Right-click a page, and click Insert before page or Insert after page. Rename a page Click the page name below a selected page, and type a new name. Delete a page Right-click a page, and click Delete page. Return to normal view Double-click a page. Using the rulers You can display rulers in the drawing window to help you draw, size, and align objects precisely. You can hide the rulers or move them to another position in the drawing window. You can also customize the ruler settings to suit your needs. For example, you can set the ruler origin, choose a unit of measurement, and specify how many marks or ticks appear between each full unit mark. By default, CorelDRAW applies the same units used for the rulers to the duplicate and nudge distances. You can change the default so that you can specify different units for these and other settings. For information about nudging, see "Positioning objects." To hide or display the rulers • Click View Rulers. A check mark beside the Rulers command indicates that the rulers are displayed. To move a ruler • Hold down Shift, and drag a ruler to a new position in the drawing window. To customize ruler settings 1. Click View Grid and ruler setup. 2. In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3. In the Units area, choose a unit of measurement from the Horizontal list box. If you want to use a different unit of measurement for the vertical ruler, disable the Same units for horizontal and vertical rulers check box, and choose a unit of measurement from the Vertical list box. 4. In the Origin area, type values in the following boxes: • Horizontal • Vertical 5. Type a value in the Tick divisions box. • If you change the unit of measurement for rulers, the unit of measurement for nudge distances automatically changes as well, unless you first disable the Same units for duplicate distance, nudge and rulers check box in the Nudge area. • You can access ruler settings directly by double-clicking a ruler. • You can specify nudge settings by typing values in the Nudge, Super nudge, and Micro nudge boxes in the Nudge area. Calibrating the rulers You can have one inch on your screen equal one inch of “real” distance. This lets you work with real-world distances as opposed to relative distances that depend on screen resolution. This tool is particularly useful when you work with signs or draw in 1:1 zoom mode. Before you can perform this procedure, you must have a clear plastic ruler for comparing real-world and on-screen distances. This ruler should use the same unit of measurement that you set for the CorelDRAW rulers. For information about ruler settings, see "Using the rulers." To calibrate the rulers to real-world distance 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the Toolbox list of categories, double-click Toolbox, and click Zoom, hand tool. 3. Click Calibrate rulers. 4. Place a clear plastic ruler under the on-screen horizontal ruler. 5. Click the up or down arrows on the Horizontal box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler. 6. Place the ruler beside the on-screen vertical ruler. 7. Click the up or down arrows on the Vertical box to match one unit of measurement on the on-screen ruler with one unit of measurement on the actual ruler. Setting up the grid The grid is a series of intersecting dashed lines or dots that you can use to precisely align and position objects in the drawing window. You can set the distance between the grid lines or dots by specifying the frequency or spacing. Frequency refers to the number of lines or dots that appear between each horizontal and vertical unit. Spacing refers to the exact distance between each line or dot. High frequency values or low spacing values can help you align and position objects more precisely. You can have objects snap to the grid so that when you move the objects, they jump between grid lines. To display or hide the grid • Click View Grid. • A check mark beside the Grid command indicates that the grid is displayed. To set the distance between the grid lines 1. Click View Grid and ruler setup. 2. Enable one of the following options: • Frequency — specifies grid spacing as the number of lines per unit of measure • Spacing — specifies grid spacing as the distance between each grid line 3. Type values in the following boxes: • Horizontal • Vertical • The unit of measure used for grid spacing is the same as that used for rulers. For information about ruler settings, see "To customize ruler settings." To have objects snap to the grid 1. Click View Snap to grid. 2. Move the objects, using the Pick tool Setting up guidelines Guidelines are lines that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object placement. There are three types of guidelines: horizontal, vertical, and slanted. By default, the application displays guidelines that you can add to the drawing window, but you can hide them at any time. You can add a guideline wherever you need one; however, you can also choose to add preset guidelines. There are two types of preset guidelines: Corel presets and user-defined presets. Examples of Corel presets include guidelines that appear at 1-inch margins and guidelines that appear at newsletter column borders. User-defined presets are guidelines whose location you specify. For example, you can add preset guidelines that display margins at a distance you specify or that define a column layout or grid. After you add a guideline, you can select it, move it, rotate it, lock it in place, or delete it. You can have objects snap to the guidelines, so that when an object is moved near a guideline, it can only be centered on the guideline or lined up on either side of the guideline. Guidelines use the unit of measure specified for rulers. For information about ruler settings, see "To customize ruler settings." Guidelines can be placed in the drawing window to aid in object placement. To display or hide the guidelines • Click View Guidelines. • A check mark beside the Guidelines command indicates that the guidelines are displayed. To add a horizontal or vertical guideline 1. Click View Guidelines setup. 2. In the list of categories, click one of the following: • Horizontal • Vertical 3. Specify the guideline settings you want. 4. Click Add. • You can also add a guideline by dragging from the horizontal or vertical ruler in the drawing window. To add a slanted guideline 1. Click View Guidelines setup. 2. In the Guidelines list of categories, click Guides. 3. From the Specify list box, choose one of the following: • 2 points — lets you specify two points to be joined to create a guideline • Angle and 1 point — lets you specify one point and an angle. The guideline crosses through the point at the angle specified. 4. Choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 5. Specify the x and y coordinates and, if applicable, the angle. 6. Click Add. To add preset guidelines 1. Click View Guidelines setup. 2. In the Document, Guidelines list of categories, click Presets. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Corel presets • User defined presets 4. Specify guideline settings by enabling the corresponding check boxes. If you enable the User defined presets option, specify values in the Margins, Columns, or Grid areas. 5. Click Apply presets. To modify guidelines To Do the following Select a single guideline Click the guideline using the Pick tool . Select all guidelines Click Edit Select all Guidelines. Move a guideline Drag a guideline to a new position in the drawing window. Rotate a guideline Using the Pick tool , click the guideline twice, and then rotate the guideline when skewing handles appear. Lock a guideline Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and click Arrange Lock object. Unlock a guideline Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and click Arrange Unlock object. Delete a guideline Click a guideline using the Pick tool, and press Delete. Delete a preset guideline Click View Guidelines setup, and click Presets in the list of categories. Disable the check box beside the preset guideline that you want to delete. • You can also lock or unlock a guideline by right-clicking the guideline and then clicking Lock object or Unlock object. • You can access the guidelines setup directly by right-clicking a ruler and then clicking Guidelines setup. To have objects snap to the guidelines 1. Click View Snap to guidelines. 2. Drag the object to the guideline. To snap the center of an object to a guideline, select the object, and move it over the guideline until its center of rotation snaps to the guideline. Setting the drawing scale You can choose a preset or custom drawing scale so that distances in a drawing are proportionate to real-world distances. For example, you can specify that 1 inch in the drawing corresponds to 1 meter in the physical world. A preset drawing scale lets you set a typical scale, such as 1:2 or 1:10. A custom drawing scale lets you set any distance on the page to correspond to a real-world distance. For example, you can set a more accurate, precise scale that includes decimal numbers, such as 4.5 to 10.6. Drawing scales are particularly useful if you are creating a technical or architectural drawing with dimension lines. For information about dimension lines, see "Drawing flow and dimension lines." The checkered effect in this graphic was created by using a grid. To choose a preset drawing scale 1. Click View Grid and ruler setup. 2. In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3. Click Edit scale. 4. Choose a drawing scale from the Typical scales list box. To create a custom drawing scale 1. Click View Grid and ruler setup. 2. In the Document list of categories, click Rulers. 3. Click Edit scale. 4. Choose Custom from the Typical scales list box. 5. Specify the settings you want. • The Edit scale button does not appear if the ruler’s unit of measure is pixels. • If the drawing scale is set to anything other than 1:1, the units on the vertical ruler are the same as the units on the horizontal ruler. Working with layers You can work with layers to help you organize and arrange objects in complex illustrations. In this section, you’ll learn about • creating layers • changing layer properties and stacking order • moving and copying objects between layers Creating layers All CorelDRAW drawings consist of stacked objects. The vertical order of these objects — the stacking order — contributes to the appearance of the drawing. You can organize these objects by using invisible planes called layers. Drawings can be assembled by placing objects on various levels or layers. Layering lets you change foregrounds and backgrounds independently. Layering gives you added flexibility when you organize and edit the objects in complex drawings. You can divide a drawing into multiple layers, each containing a portion of the drawing’s contents. For example, using layers can help you organize an architectural plan for a building. You can organize the building’s various components (for example, plumbing, electrical, structural) by placing them on separate layers. You can choose to display only layers or only pages. Each new file has one master page, which contains and controls three default layers: the Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers. The Grid, Guides, and Desktop layers contain the grid, guidelines, and objects outside the borders of the drawing page. The Desktop layer lets you create drawings that you can use later. You can specify settings for the grid and guidelines on the master page. You can also specify settings (such as color) for each layer on the master page and display selected objects. You can add one or more master layers to a master page. This layer contains information that you want to display on every page of a multipage document. For example, you can use a master layer to place a header, footer, or static background on every page To create a layer To Do the following Create a layer Click Tools Object manager. Click the flyout button , and click New layer. Create a master layer Click Tools Object manager. Click the flyout button, and click New master layer. • To use a layer in the drawing, you must first make the layer active. In the Object manager docker, the active layer is highlighted in red. When you start a drawing, the default layer (Layer 1) is the active layer. • When you create a master layer, it moves to the master page. • You can also add a layer by clicking the New layer button in the Object manager docker. • You can make any layer a master layer by right-clicking the layer name, and clicking Master. To display pages, layers, and objects in the Object Manager docker To Do the following Display pages Click Window Dockers Object manager. Click the flyout button , and then click Show pages . Display layers Click Window Dockers Object manager. Click the Layer manager view button . Display objects Click Window Dockers Object manager. Click the flyout button , and then click Expand to show selection. To delete a layer 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. Click the name of a layer. 3. Click the flyout button , and click Delete layer. • When you delete a layer, you also delete all the objects on it. To keep an object on the layer you’re deleting, move it to a different layer first. • You can delete any unlocked layer except the three default layers of the master page (Grid, Guides, and Desktop). For more information about locking and unlocking layers, see "To set a layer’s editing properties." To specify settings for a layer on the master page 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. Right-click the layer, and click Properties. Changing layer properties and stacking order For each new layer, the display, editing, and printing and exporting properties are enabled by default, and the master layer property is disabled by default. You can change these properties at any time. For information about master layers, see "Creating layers." The icons to the left of a layer’s name let you change the layer’s properties. Display properties Display properties control whether a layer is visible in the drawing window. You can display or hide layers. Hiding a layer lets you identify and edit the objects on other layers. It also reduces the time required for your drawing to refresh when you edit it. Printing and exporting properties Printing and exporting properties control whether if a layer is displayed in the printed or exported drawing. Note that hidden layers are displayed in the final output if the printing and exporting properties are enabled. Editing properties You can make a layer active and allow editing of all layers or of the active layer only. You can also lock a layer to prevent accidental changes to its objects. When you lock a layer, you cannot select or edit its objects. Layer names and stacking order You can rename layers to indicate their contents, their position in the stacking order, or their relationship with other layers. YouTo display or hide a layer 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. Click the Show or hide icon beside the layer name. The layer is hidden when the Show or hide icon is grayed. • Objects on a hidden layer are displayed in the printed or exported drawing unless the layer’s printing and exporting properties are disabled. For more information, see "To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer." • You can also display or hide a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and then clicking Visible. can also change a layer’s place in the stacking order. To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. Click the Enable or disable printing and exporting icon beside the layer name. • Disabling the printing and exporting of a layer prevents its contents from appearing in the printed or exported drawing, or in full-screen previews. For information about full-screen previews, see "Previewing a drawing." • You can also enable or disable the printing and exporting of a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and clicking Printable. To set a layer’s editing properties • Click Tools Object manager. To Do the following Make a layer active Click the name of a layer. Lock or unlock a layer Click the Lock or unlock icon beside the layer name. Allow editing of all layers Click the flyout button , and click Edit across layers. Allow editing of the active layer only Click the flyout button , and disable Edit across layers. • If you disable the Edit across layers button , you can work only on the active layer and the Desktop layer. You cannot select or edit objects on inactive layers. • You cannot lock or unlock the Grid layer. • You can also allow editing of all layers by clicking the Edit across layers button in the Object manager docker. Editing across layers is enabled when the button appears pressed. Clicking the button again restricts editing to the active layer. • You can also lock or unlock a layer by right-clicking the layer in the Object manager docker and then clicking Editable. To rename a layer 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. Right-click the layer name, and click Rename. • You can also rename a layer by clicking the layer name and typing a new name. To change the position of a layer in the stacking order 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. In the Layers list, drag a layer name tag to a new position. Moving and copying objects between layers You can move or copy selected objects to new layers, including layers on the master page. Moving or copying an object to a layer below its current layer causes the object to become the top object on its new layer. Similarly, moving or copying an object to a layer above its current layer causes the object to become the bottom object on its new layer. To move or copy an object to another layer 1. Click Tools Object manager. 2. Click an object in the Object manager. 3. Click the flyout button , and click one of the following: • Move to layer • Copy to layer 4. Click the destination layer. • When you move objects to or from a layer, the layer must be unlocked. • You can move and copy an object to another layer by dragging the object to a new layer in the Object manager docker. • You can also move an object to another layer by using an Order command. For more information, see "To change the order of an object". Adding and formatting text The CorelDRAW application lets you use text to create documents or annotate drawings. In this section, you’ll learn about • adding and selecting text • encoding text • changing the appearance of text • finding, editing, and converting text • aligning and spacing text • shifting and rotating text • moving text • fitting text to a path • formatting paragraph text • hyphenating text • combining and linking paragraph text frames • wrapping paragraph text around objects and text • embedding graphics and adding special characters • inserting formatting codes • displaying nonprinting characters Adding and selecting text There are two types of text you can add to drawings — artistic text and paragraph text. Artistic text can be used to add short lines of text to which you can apply a wide range of effects, such as drop shadows. Paragraph text can be used for larger bodies of text that have greater formatting requirements. You can add both paragraph and artistic text directly in the drawing window. You can add artistic text along an open or closed path. You can also fit existing artistic and paragraph text to a path. For more information, see "Fitting text to a path." When adding paragraph text, you must first create a text frame. By default, paragraph text frames remain the same size regardless of how much text they contain. Any text that continues past the bottom-right border of the text frame is hidden until you either enlarge the text frame or link it to another text frame. You can fit text to a frame, which automatically adjusts the point size of text so that the text fits perfectly in the frame. For information about fitting text to a frame, see "To fit text to a paragraph text frame." You can also have paragraph text frames automatically expand and shrink as you type, so that the text fits perfectly in the frame. You can insert a paragraph text frame inside a graphic object. This lets you use objects as containers for text so that you can use different shapes for text frames. You can also separate text from an object. When you do, the text retains its shape, and you can move or modify the text and the object independently. Paragraph text placed inside an object. The object is made invisible by removing its outline. When you import or paste text, you have the option of maintaining formatting, maintaining fonts and formatting, or discarding fonts and formatting. Maintaining fonts ensures that imported and pasted text retains its original font type. Maintaining formatting ensures that formatting information, such as bullets, columns, and bold or italic formatting, is preserved. You can also preserve the text color or choose to import black text as CMYK black. If you choose to discard fonts and formatting, the imported or pasted text takes on the properties of the selected text object, or if none is selected, the default font and formatting properties. For more information about importing files, see "Importing files." For more information about pasting, see "To paste an object into a drawing." You can also assign hyperlinks to text. For more information, see "To assign a hyperlink to text." To modify text, you must first select it. You can select entire text objects or specific characters. To add artistic text • Click anywhere in the drawing window using the Text tool , and type. To add paragraph text To Do the following Add paragraph text Click the Text tool . Drag in the drawing window to size the paragraph text frame, and type. Add paragraph text inside an object Click the Text tool. Move the pointer over the object’s outline, and click the object when the pointer changes to an Insert in object pointer. Type inside the frame. Separate a paragraph text frame from an object Select the object using the Pick tool , and click Arrange Break paragraph text inside a path apart. Have paragraph text frames automatically adjust to fit text Click Tools Options. In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Expand and shrink paragraph text frames to fit text check box. • Enabling the Expand and shrink paragraph text frames to fit text check box on the Paragraph page of the Options dialog box affects only new text frames. Existing paragraph text frames remain fixed in size. • You can adjust the size of a paragraph text frame by clicking the text frame using the Pick tool, and dragging any selection handle. To set options for importing and pasting text 1. Import or paste the text. 2. In the Importing/pasting text dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Maintain fonts and formatting • Maintain formatting only • Discard fonts and formatting If you want to apply CMYK black to the imported black text, enable the Force CMYK black check box. This check box is available when you choose an option that maintains text formatting. • Clicking Cancel cancels the import or paste operation. • If you choose to maintain fonts, and a required font is not installed on your computer, the PANOSE font matching system substitutes the font for you. For more information, see "Substituting unavailable fonts." • You can also set hyphenation options for imported text. For more information about hyphenation options, see "To create a custom definition for optional hyphenation." • You can re-enable the Importing/pasting text dialog box by clicking Tools Options, clicking Warnings in the Workspace list of categories, and enabling the Pasting and importing text check box. • If you want to use the same formatting options whenever you import or paste text, enable the Don’t show this warning again check box. To select text To Do the following Select an entire text object Click the text object while using the Pick tool . Select specific characters Drag across the text while using the Text tool . • You can select multiple text objects by holding down Shift and clicking each text object while using the Pick tool. Encoding text After opening or importing a drawing that contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, you may find that the text is not displayed correctly. To display text correctly, you can change the encoding. Encoding determines the character set of text. Encoding settings cannot correct the display of text outside the drawing window, such as keywords, file names, and text entries in the Object manager and Object data manager dockers. You have to use code page settings in the Open or Import dialog boxes to set the proper characters for such text. For information about using code page settings, see "Starting and opening drawings" and "Importing files." To display text correctly in any language 1. Click Text Encode. 2. In the Text encoding dialog box, choose the Other encoding option. 3. From the Other encoding list, choose an encoding setting that makes the text readable. The preview window displays the text with the selected encoding setting. Changing the appearance of text You can change the default text style, so that all new artistic or paragraph text you create has the same properties. You can enhance artistic text and paragraph text by modifying their character properties. For example, you can change the font type and size or make the text bold or italic. You can also change the position of text to subscript or superscript, which is useful if a drawing contains scientific notation. You can add underlines, strikethrough lines, and overlines to text. You can change the thickness of these lines, as well as the distance between the lines and the text. You can also change the color of text. For information about previewing fonts, see "Previewing and identifying fonts." You can change the case of text to lowercase or uppercase without deleting or replacing letters. You can increase or decrease font size by a specified increment amount. By default, the unit of measure is points. You can change this setting for the active drawing and all subsequent drawings you create. When you change the unit of measure, all font settings are displayed in the new unit of measure. Greeking text lets you increase the redraw speed by representing text under a certain size with lines. This is useful when showing prototypes of documents or drawings. You can make text readable again by reducing the greeking value or by zooming in on the text. To change the default text style 1. Click a blank space in the drawing window using the Pick tool . 2. In the Character formatting docker, specify the properties you want. If the Character formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Character formatting. Following each property change you make, by default you must specify whether the changes are applied to artistic text, paragraph text, or both. • To have changes to the default text style apply to future documents, click Tools Save settings as default. • You can make the style of an existing text frame or object the default style by clicking Tools Graphic and text styles, and dragging the text frame or object over either the Default artistic text or the Default paragraph text icon on the Graphic and text docker. To change character properties 1. Select the text. 2. In the Character formatting docker, specify the character attributes you want. If the Character formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Character formatting. • You can also make selected text bold, italic, or underlined by clicking the Bold button , Italic button , or Underline button on the property bar. To change the color of text 1. Select the text using the Text tool . 2. Click a color on the color palette. • You can change the color of an entire text object by selecting it with the Pick tool and dragging a color swatch from the color palette to the text object. To change text case 1. Select the text. 2. Click Text Change case. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Sentence case — capitalizes the initial letter of the first word in each sentence • Lowercase — makes all text lowercase • Uppercase — makes all text uppercase • Title case — capitalizes the initial letter of each word • Toggle case — reverses the case; all uppercase letters become lowercase and all lowercase letters become uppercase To resize text To Do the following Increase the size of text Select the text using the Text tool , hold down Ctrl, and press 8 on the number pad. Decrease the size of text Select the text using the Text tool, hold down Ctrl, and press 2 on the number pad. Specify the amount by which to resize text Click Tools Options. In the list of categories, click Text, and type a value in the Keyboard text increment box. Change the default unit of measure Click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Text, and choose a unit from the Default text units list box. • You must be in Num lock mode to increase or decrease the size of text. To greek text 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, click Text. 3. Type a value in the Greek text below box. Finding, editing, and converting text You can find text in a drawing and replace it automatically. You can also find special characters, such as an em dash or optional hyphen. You can edit text directly in the drawing window or in a dialog box. CorelDRAW lets you convert artistic text to paragraph text if you require more formatting options, and paragraph text to artistic text if you’d like to apply special effects. You can also convert both paragraph and artistic text to curves. This transforms characters into single line and curve objects, letting you add, delete, or move the nodes of individual characters to alter their shape. For more information, see "Using curve objects." When you convert text to curves, the appearance of the text is preserved, including font, style, character position and rotation, spacing, and any other text settings and effects. Any linked text objects are also converted to curves. If you convert paragraph text in a fixed-sized frame to curves, any text that overflows the frame is deleted. For information about fitting text to a frame, see "Formatting paragraph text." To find text 1. Click Edit Find and replace Find text. 2. Type the text you want to find in the Find box. If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case check box. 3. Click Find next. • You can also find special characters by clicking the arrow to the right of the Find box, choosing a special character, and clicking Find next To find and replace text 1. Click Edit Find and replace Replace text. 2. Type the text you want to find in the Find box. If you want to find the exact case of the text you specified, enable the Match case check box. 3. Type the replacement text in the Replace with box. 4. Click one of the following buttons: • Find next — finds the next occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box • Replace — replaces the selected occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box. If no occurrence is selected, Replace finds the next occurrence. • Replace all — replaces every occurrence of the text specified in the Find what box To edit text 1. Select the text. 2. Click Text Edit text. 3. Make changes to the text in the Edit text dialog box. You can also Edit text in the drawing window Select the text using the Text tool , and edit it. • You cannot edit text that has been converted to curves. To convert text To Do the following Convert paragraph text to artistic text Select the text using the Pick tool , and click Text Convert to artistic text. Convert artistic text to paragraph text Select the text using the Pick tool, and click Text Convert to paragraph text. Convert artistic or paragraph text to curves Select the text using the Pick tool, and click Arrange Convert to curves. • You cannot convert paragraph text to artistic text when the paragraph text is linked to another frame, has special effects applied to it, or overflows its frame. • You can also convert text to curves by right-clicking the text using the Pick tool and clicking Convert to curves. Aligning and spacing text You can align both paragraph and artistic text horizontally. Aligning paragraph text lines up text relative to the paragraph text frame. You can horizontally align all paragraphs or only selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame. You can vertically align all paragraphs in a paragraph text frame. You can also align text to another object. You can align a text object to other objects by using the first line baseline, the last line baseline, or the edge of the text bounding box. Artistic text can be aligned horizontally, but not vertically. When you align artistic text, the entire text object aligns in relation to the bounding box. If characters have not been shifted horizontally, applying no alignment produces the same result as applying left alignment. Artistic text is aligned within the bounding box, which is indicated by eight selection handles (black squares). The text at the top is left-aligned; the text at the bottom is right-aligned. You can change character and word spacing in selected paragraphs, or in an entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. Changing character spacing between selected or specific text is also referred to as tracking; changing character spacing in an entire block of text is also called kerning. You can change the line spacing of text, which is also referred to as leading. Changing the leading for artistic text applies the spacing to lines of text separated by a carriage return. For paragraph text, leading applies only to lines of text within the same paragraph. You can also change the spacing before and after paragraphs in paragraph text, and you can kern selected characters. Kerning balances the optical space between letters. To align text horizontally 1. Select the text object using the Pick tool . 2. In the Alignment area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose an alignment option from the Horizontal list box. If the Paragraph formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Paragraph formatting. • You can also align text horizontally by clicking the Horizontal alignment button on the property bar and choosing an alignment style from the list box. The property bar displays the alignment icon corresponding with the current alignment style. • To align selected paragraphs in a paragraph text frame, select them using the Text tool . To align paragraph text vertically in a text frame 1. Select the paragraph text. 2. In the Alignment area of the Paragraph formatting docker, choose an alignment option from the Vertical list box. If the Paragraph formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Paragraph formatting. To align text to an object 1. Hold down Shift, select the text, and then select the object. 2. Click Arrange Align and distribute Align and distribute. 3. Choose one of the following from the For text source objects use list box: • First line baseline — aligns the text with the baseline of the first line of text • Last line baseline — aligns the text with the baseline of the last line of text • Bounding box — aligns the text with its bounding box 4. Enable one of the following horizontal alignment check boxes: • Left • Right • Center 5. Enable one of the following vertical alignment check boxes: • Top • Bottom • Center 6. Click Apply. • The object used to align the left, right, top, or bottom edges is determined by the order of creation or order of selection. If you marquee select the objects before you align them, the last object created will be used. If you select the objects one at a time the last object selected will be the reference point for aligning the others. If you’ve applied a linear transformation, such as rotation, to the text and are aligning with a baseline, the objects align with the baseline point of the starting edge of the text object. • If you are aligning text objects to each other and have elected to align with the first line baseline or last line baseline, the vertical and horizontal alignment check boxes are grayed. The baseline points of the text objects are aligned to each other. • You can also align objects by selecting them and clicking the Align and distribute button on the property bar. To change the spacing of text 1. Select the text. 2. In the Spacing area of the Paragraph formatting docker, type values in any of the boxes. If the Paragraph formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Paragraph formatting. • Character and word spacing can only be applied to entire paragraphs, or to an entire paragraph text frame or artistic text object. For information about adjusting character and word spacing for selected characters, see "To kern text." • Values represent a percentage of the space character. The Character values range from -100 to 2000 percent. All other values range from 0 to 2000 percent. • You can also change the spacing between words and characters proportionately by selecting the text object using the Shape tool and dragging the Interactive horizontal spacing arrow in the bottom-right corner of the text object. Drag the Interactive vertical spacing arrow in the bottom-left corner of the text object to change the line spacing proportionately. To kern text 1. Select the characters using the Text tool . If you’re applying kerning to two characters, you can position the Text tool cursor between them. 2. In the Character formatting docker, type a value in the Range kerning box. If the Character formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Character formatting. Shifting and rotating text Shifting artistic and paragraph text vertically and horizontally can create an interesting effect. You can also rotate characters. Straightening text pulls the text into its original position. You can return vertically shifted characters to the baseline without affecting their rotation angle. You can also mirror artistic and paragraph text. Rotated characters To shift or rotate a character 1. Select the character or characters using the Text tool . 2. In the Character shift area of the Character formatting docker, type a value in one of the following boxes: • Angle — A positive number rotates characters counterclockwise, and a negative number rotates characters clockwise. • Horizontal shift — A positive number moves characters to the right, and a negative number moves characters to the left. • Vertical shift — A positive number moves characters up, and a negative number moves characters down. If the Character formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Character formatting. • You can also shift or rotate characters whose nodes you select using the Shape tool by typing values in the Horizontal shift box , Vertical shift box , or Angle of rotation box on the property bar. To straighten a shifted or rotated character 1. Select the text. 2. Click Text Straighten text. To return a vertically shifted character to the baseline 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Select the text object, and select the node to the left of the character. 3. Click Text Align to baseline. To mirror text 1. Using the Text tool , select the artistic text or the paragraph text frame. 2. On the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Mirror horizontally — flips the text characters from left to right • Mirror vertically — flips the text characters upside down • You can also mirror text fitted to a path. For more information, see "To mirror text fitted to a path." Moving text CorelDRAW lets you move paragraph text between frames, and artistic text between artistic text objects. You can also move paragraph text to an artistic text object, and artistic text to a paragraph text frame. To move text 1. Select the text using the Text tool . 2. Drag the text to another paragraph text frame or artistic text object. You can also Move text within the same frame or object Select the text, and drag it to a new position. Move or copy selected text to a new text object Right-click and drag the text to a new position, and click Copy here or Move here. Fitting text to a path You can add artistic text along the path of an open object (for example, a line) or a closed object (for example, a square). You can also fit existing text to a path. Artistic text can be fitted to an open or closed path. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only. After you fit text to a path, you can adjust the text’s position relative to that path. For example, you can mirror the text horizontally, vertically, or both. Using tick spacing, you can specify an exact distance between the text and the path. CorelDRAW treats text fitted to a path as one object; however, you can separate the text from the object if you no longer want it to be part of the path. When you separate text from a curved or closed path, the text retains the shape of the object to which it was fitted. Straightening the text reverts it to its original appearance. To add text along a path 1. Select a path using the Pick tool . 2. Click Text Fit text to path. The text cursor is inserted on the path. If the path is open, the text cursor is inserted at the beginning of the path. If the path is closed, the text cursor is inserted at the center of the path. 3. Type along the path. • You can’t add text to the path of another text object. • You can also fit text to a path by clicking the Text tool and pointing to a path. When the pointer changes to a Fit to path pointer, click where you want the text to begin, and type. To fit text to a path 1. Select a text object using the Pick tool . 2. Click Text Fit text to path. The pointer changes to the Fit text to path pointer . As you move the pointer over the path, a preview of where the text will be fitted is displayed. 3. Click a path. If the text is fitted to a closed path, the text is centered along the path. If the text is fitted to an open path, the text flows from the point of insertion. • Artistic text can be fitted to open or closed paths. Paragraph text can be fitted to open paths only. • You can’t fit text to the path of another text object. To adjust the position of text fitted to a path 1. Using the Pick tool , select the text fitted to a path. 2. Choose a setting from any of the following list boxes on the property bar: • Text orientation — the angle at which the text sits on the path • Distance from path — the distance between the text and the path • Horizontal offset — the horizontal position of the text along the path You can also Use tick spacing to increase the distance between the path and the text in specified increments Select the text. On the property bar, click Tick snapping, enable the Tick snapping on option, and type a value in the Tick spacing box. When you move the text from the path, it moves in the increment you specified in the Tick spacing box. As you move the text, the distance from the path is displayed below the original text. • You can also change the horizontal position of fitted text by selecting it with the Shape tool and dragging the character nodes you want to reposition. • Using the Pick tool, you can move text along or off the path by dragging the red glyph that appears beside the text. As you drag the glyph along the path, a preview of the text is displayed. If you drag the glyph off the path, the distance between the text preview and the path is displayed. To mirror text fitted to a path 1. Using the Pick tool , click the text fitted to a path. 2. In Mirror text area of the property bar, click one of the following buttons: • Mirror horizontally — flips the text characters from left to right • Mirror vertically — flips the text characters upside down • You can apply a 180-degree rotation to text fitted to a path by clicking both the Mirror horizontally and the Mirror vertically buttons. • You can also mirror artistic text and paragraph text frames. For more information, see "To mirror text." To separate text from a path 1. Select the path and the fitted text by using the Pick tool . 2. Click Arrange Break text apart. To straighten text 1. Using the Pick tool , select the fitted text and the path. 2. Click Arrange Break text apart. 3. Using the Pick tool, select the text. 4. Click Text Straighten text. Formatting paragraph text CorelDRAW offers various formatting options for paragraph text. For example, you can fit text to a paragraph text frame. Fitting text to a frame increases or decreases the point size of text so that it fits the text frame exactly. You can also use columns to lay out text-intensive projects such as newsletters, magazines, and newspapers. You can create columns of equal or varying widths and gutters. Applying drop caps to paragraphs enlarges the initial letter and insets it into the body of text. You can customize a drop cap by changing its settings. For example, you can change the distance between the drop cap and the body of text, or specify the number of lines of text you want to appear beside the drop cap. You can remove the drop cap at any point, without deleting the letter. You can use bulleted lists to format information. You can have text wrap around bullets, or you can offset a bullet from text to create a hanging indent. CorelDRAW lets you customize bullets by changing their size, position, and distance from text. After you add a bullet, you can remove it without deleting the text. You can add tabs to indent paragraph text. You can also remove tabs and change tab alignment. Setting trailing leader tabs automatically creates dots that precede the tab. Indenting changes the space between a paragraph text frame and the text that it contains. You can indent an entire paragraph, the first line of a paragraph, all but the first line of a paragraph (a hanging indent), or from the right side of the frame. You can also remove an indent without deleting or retyping text. Paragraph text frame formatting can be applied to selected frames only, selected frames and frames they are currently linked to, or to all selected and subsequently linked frames. For information about setting these options, see "To choose formatting options for paragraph text frame." To fit text to a paragraph text frame 1. Select a paragraph text frame. 2. Click Text Paragraph text frame Fit text to frame. • If you fit text to linked paragraph text frames, the application adjusts the size of text in all of the linked text frames. For more information about linking frames, see "Combining and linking paragraph text frames." To add columns to paragraph text frames 1. Select a paragraph text frame. 2. Click Text Columns. 3. Type a value in the Number of columns box. 4. Specify the settings and options you want. • You can change the size of columns and gutters by dragging a side selection handle in the drawing window with the Text tool . To add a drop cap 1. Select the paragraph text. 2. Click Text Drop cap. 3. Enable the Use drop cap check box. You can add a drop cap (left) or a hanging indent drop cap(right). You can also Specify the number of lines beside a drop cap Type a value in the Number of lines dropped box. Specify the distance between the drop cap and the body of text Type a value in the Space after drop cap box. Remove drop caps Disable the Use drop cap check box. Offset the drop cap from the body of text Enable the Use hanging indent style for drop cap check box. Preview the drop cap effect Click Preview. To add bullets 1. Select the paragraph text. 2. Click Text Bullets. 3. Enable the Use bullets check box. 4. In the Appearance area, choose a font from the Font list box. 5. Open the Symbol picker, and click a symbol. 6. Type a value in the Size box to specify the bullet size. 7. Type a value in the Baseline shift box to specify the distance the bullet is shifted from the baseline. 8. In the Spacing area, type a value in the Text frame to bullet box to specify the distance the bullet is indented from the paragraph text frame. 9. Type a value in the Bullet to text box to specify the distance between the bullet and the text. You can also Add a bullet with a hanging indent Enable the Use hanging indent style for bulleted lists check box. Change the color of the bullet Select the bullet with the Text tool , and click a color on the color palette. • Bullets are inserted at the beginning of each new line that is preceded by a return. To add a tab 1. Select the paragraph text. 2. Click Text Tabs. 3. Click Add. 4. Click the new cell in the Tabs column, and type a value. You can also Change the alignment of tabs Click the cell in the Alignment column, and choose an alignment option from the list box. Set tabs with trailing leader characters Click the cell in the Leaders column, and choose On from the list box. Delete a tab Click the cell, and click Remove. Change the default leader character Click Leader options, open the Character picker, and click a character. Change the default leader spacing Click Leader options, and type a value in the Spacing box. • You can also add, move, or delete tabs on the horizontal ruler at the top of the drawing window. Click to add a tab, drag a tab marker to move it, and drag a tab marker off the ruler to delete it. For information about rulers, see "Using the rulers." To indent paragraph text 1. Select the paragraph text. 2. In the Paragraph formatting docker, type values in the following boxes in the Indents area: • First line — indents the first line of paragraph text • Left — creates a hanging indent in which all but the first line of text is indented • Right — indents the right side of paragraph text If the Paragraph formatting docker isn’t open, click Text Paragraph formatting. • You can remove indents by typing 0 in the First Line, Left, and Right boxes. • You can indent an entire paragraph by typing the same value in the First line and Left boxes. Hyphenating text Hyphenation breaks words between lines when the whole word does not fit on one line. You can have CorelDRAW hyphenate automatically. When you use automatic hyphenation, CorelDRAW uses a preset hyphenation definition, in combination with your hyphenation settings. You can specify hyphenation settings such as the minimum number of letters before and after a hyphen, and the hot zone. Optional hyphens let you specify where a word will break when it is at the end of a line. You can also create custom definitions for optional hyphenation, which allow you to specify where a hyphen is inserted in a specific word whenever that word is entered in CorelDRAW. To hyphenate paragraph text automatically 1. Select the paragraph text frame or a paragraph. 2. Click Text Use hyphenation. • Hyphenation can be used for any of the writing tool languages you have installed. For more information about language modules, see “Working with languages” in the Help. To insert an optional hyphen 1. Using the Text tool , click in a word where you want to place an optional hyphen. 2. Click Text Insert formatting code Optional hyphen. • You can insert an optional hyphen by pressing Ctrl + -. To create a custom definition for optional hyphenation 1. Click Text Insert formatting codes Custom optional hyphens. 2. Type the word for which you want to create the hyphenation definition in the Word box. As you type in the Word box, the same text is entered in the Hyphenated word box. 3. In the Hyphenated word box, click where you want the optional hyphen inserted, and press the hyphen key (-). 4. Click Add definition. You can also Create a custom hyphen definition for a specific language keyboard Enable the Show all languages check box, and choose a language option from the Language list box. Automatically insert custom optional hyphens when typing Enable the When typing check box. Automatically insert custom optional hyphens when typing, pasting, or importing text Enable the When pasting and importing text check box. Delete a custom optional hyphen definition Click Remove definition. • The custom hyphenation definition is defined only for the language you choose in the Language list box. You can choose another language without affecting your keyboard. • You can create a custom optional hyphen definition by selecting a word in the document. The word appears in the Word box of the Custom optional hyphens dialog box. After you insert the optional hyphen in the Hyphenated word box, you can apply it by clicking Apply to selection. • You can find and replace optional hyphens. For more information, see "To find text" and "To find and replace text." To modify hyphenation settings 1. Select the paragraph text frame or a paragraph. 2. Click Text Hyphenation settings. 3. Enable the Automatically hyphenate paragraph text check box. 4. Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Hyphenate capitalized words Enable the Break capitalized words check box. Hyphenate words in all uppercase Enable the Break words using ALL CAPS check box. Set the minimum word length for automatic hyphenation In the Hyphenation criteria area, type or set the number of characters in the Minimum word length box. Set the minimum number of characters to precede a hyphen In the Hyphenation criteria area, type or set the number of characters in the Minimum characters before box. Set the minimum number of characters to follow a hyphen In the Hyphenation criteria area, type or set the number of characters in the Minimum characters after box. Set the hot zone In the Hyphenation criteria area, type or set the number of characters in the Distance from right margin box. Combining and linking paragraph text frames You can combine paragraph text frames. You can also break paragraph text frames apart into subcomponents — columns, paragraphs, bullets, lines, words, and characters. Every time you break apart a text frame, the subcomponents are placed into separate paragraph text frames. Linking paragraph text frames directs the flow of text from one text frame to another if the amount of text exceeds the size of the first text frame. If you shrink or enlarge a linked paragraph text frame, or change the size of the text, the amount of text in the next text frame is automatically adjusted. You can link paragraph text frames before or after you type text. You cannot link artistic text. However, you can link a paragraph text frame to an open or closed object. When you link a paragraph text frame to an open object (for example, a line), the text flows along the path of the line. Linking a text frame to a closed object (for example, a rectangle) inserts a paragraph text frame and directs the flow of text inside the object. If text exceeds the open or closed path, you can link the text to another text frame or object. You can also link to paragraph text frames and objects across pages. After linking paragraph text frames, you can redirect the flow from one object or text frame to another. When you select the text frame or object, a blue arrow indicates the direction of the text flow. You can hide or display these arrows. You can make text flow between frames and objects by linking the text. You can remove links between multiple paragraph text frames, and between paragraph text frames and objects. When you have only two linked paragraph text frames and you remove the link, the text flows into the remaining paragraph text frame. Removing a link between paragraph text frames with a series of links redirects the flow of text into the next paragraph text frame or object. By default, CorelDRAW applies paragraph formatting such as columns, drop caps, and bullets to only the selected paragraph text frames; however, you can change your settings so that formatting is applied to all linked frames, or all selected and subsequently linked frames. For example, if you apply columns to the text in one text frame, you can choose whether you want all of the linked frames to also be formatted in columns. For information about paragraph formatting, see "Formatting paragraph text." To combine or break apart paragraph text frames 1. Select a text frame. If you are combining text frames, hold down Shift, and select subsequent text frames using the Pick tool . 2. Click Arrange, and click one of the following: • Combine • Break apart • Text frames with envelopes, text fitted to a path, and linked frames cannot be combined. • If you select a text frame with columns first, the combined text frame will have columns To link paragraph text frames and objects 1. Select the starting text frame using the Text tool . 2. Click the Text flow tab at the bottom of the text frame or object. If the frame cannot hold all the text, the tab contains an arrow . 3. When the pointer changes to a Link to pointer , click the frame or object into which you want to continue the text flow. If the frame or object is on a different page, first click the corresponding Page tab on the Document Navigator. • If a text frame is linked, the Text flow tab changes , and a blue arrow indicates the direction of text flow. If the linked text is on another page, the page number and a dashed blue line are displayed. To hide or display these indicators, see "To choose formatting options for paragraph text frame." • To link paragraph text frames successfully, the text frames cannot be automatically sized. For information, see "Adding and selecting text." To change text flow to a different text frame or object 1. Using the Pick tool , click the Text flow tab at the bottom of the text frame or object from which you want to change the link. 2. Select the new text frame or object into which you want the text flow to continue. To remove links between text frames or objects 1. Click the text frame to which another text frame is linked. 2. Click Arrange Break apart. • The linked text frames can be on different pages. To choose formatting options for paragraph text frame 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Paragraph. If you want to hide or display the text flow indicators, disable or enable the Show linking of text frames check box. 3. Enable one of the following options: • To all linked frames — applies paragraph formatting to selected frames and all frames linked to them • To selected frames only — applies paragraph formatting to only the selected frames • To selected and subsequent frames — applies paragraph formatting to selected frames and any frames later linked to these frames Wrapping paragraph text around objects and text You can change the shape of text by wrapping paragraph text around an object, artistic text, or a paragraph text frame. You can wrap text by using contour or square wrapping styles. The contour wrapping styles follow the curve of the object. The square wrapping styles follow the bounding box of the object. You can also adjust the amount of space between paragraph text and the object or text, as well as remove any wrapping style you apply. Wrapping text around an object by using the contour wrapping style (left) and the square wrapping style (right) To wrap paragraph text around an object or text 1. Select the object or text around which you want to wrap text. 2. Click Window Dockers Properties. 3. In the Object properties docker, click the General tab. 4. Choose a wrapping style from the Wrap paragraph list box. If you want to change the amount of space between wrapped text and the object or text, change the value in the Text wrap offset box. 5. Click the Text tool , and drag to create a paragraph text frame over the object or text. 6. Type text in the paragraph text frame. • You can wrap existing paragraph text around a selected object by applying a wrapping style to the object and dragging the paragraph text frame over the object. To remove a wrapping style 1. Select the wrapped text or the object it wraps. 2. Click Window Dockers Properties. 3. In the Object properties docker, click the General tab. 4. Choose None from the Wrap paragraph list box. Embedding graphics and adding special characters You can embed a graphic object or bitmap in text. The graphic object or bitmap is treated as a text character. As a result, you can apply formatting options according to the type of text in which you embed the graphic object. You can also remove an embedded object from text, after which the object returns to its original state. You can add special characters to text as text objects or as graphic objects. When you add special characters as text, you can format the characters as you do the text. When you add special characters as graphic objects, the characters are curves. Consequently, you can edit them as you would other graphic objects. You can also change objects, such as company logos or modified letters, into special characters, and then add them to a character set. This lets you add an object to text as a text or graphic object. The object is automatically resized to match the proportions of other characters in the set. To embed a graphic object in text 1. Select a graphic object. 2. Click Edit, and click one of the following: • Cut • Copy 3. Using the Text tool , click where you want to embed the graphic object. 4. Click Edit Paste. To remove an embedded object from text 1. Select an embedded object using the Text tool . 2. Click Edit Cut. 3. Click the Pick tool , and click outside the text object. 4. Click Edit } Paste. To add a special character as a text object 1. Using the Text tool , click where you want to add the special character. 2. Click Text Insert symbol character. 3. In the Insert character docker, choose a font from the Font list box. 4. Double-click a character in the list. The size of the character is determined by the font size of the text. To add a special character as a graphic object 1. Click Text Insert symbol character. 2. In the Insert character docker, choose a font from the Font list box. 3. Type a value in the Character size box. 4. Drag a special character from the list to the drawing page. • The special character is inserted with the default graphic style. For information about graphic styles, see "Working with graphic, text, and color styles." Inserting formatting codes You can insert formatting codes such as em dashes and nonbreaking spaces. The following formatting characters are available: • em dash • en space • optional hyphen • en dash • 1/4 em space • nonbreaking space • em space • nonbreaking hyphen • column/frame break You can find and replace formatting codes. For more information, see "To find text" and "To find and replace text." To insert a formatting code 1. Using the Text tool , click to place your cursor where you want to insert a character or space. 2. Click Text Insert formatting code, and choose a formatting code from the menu. • The Insert formatting code menu is unavailable when the Text tool is not active. • All shortcut keys for formatting codes are customizable. For information about customizing shortcut keys, see "To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command." Formatting codes can be found in the Text commands category. • You can insert other characters not listed in the Insert formatting code menu by clicking Text Insert symbol character and clicking the character you want to insert in the Insert character docker. Displaying nonprinting characters You can display nonprinting characters, such as spaces, tabs, and formatting codes. For example, if you choose to display nonprinting characters, each space you add appears as a tiny black dot, non-breaking spaces appear as a circle, and em spaces appear as a line. When enabled, nonprinting characters are displayed only when you add or edit text. To display nonprinting characters • Click Text Show nonprinting characters. • You can also display nonprinting characters by clicking Tools Options, and choosing Text in the list of categories. You can then enable the Show nonprinting characters check box. Working with Asian text If you are running CorelDRAW on an Asian operating system, or if you have Asian language support installed on another operating system, you can take advantage of the Asian text formatting capabilities available with CorelDRAW. In this section, you’ll learn about • formatting Asian text • using Asian line-breaking rules Formatting Asian text Asian character input is only supported in CorelDRAW when using an Asian operating system or when language support is installed on a non-Asian operating system. You can choose a default font and text orientation (either horizontal or vertical) when typing text on an operating system that has Asian language support. When you type artistic or paragraph text, the program uses a default artistic or paragraph text style. You can also mix Asian text and other scripts in one text object and set the spacing between the two. You can change the font properties of one or both languages in a block of Latin or Asian text. To choose a default font for Asian text 1. Click the Text tool . 2. Choose an input method from the Input Method Editor (IME) on the status bar. 3. Choose a font from the Font list list box on the property bar. To choose a text orientation To Do the following Choose a default text orientation Click a blank space in the drawing window, click Text Format text, click the Paragraph tab, and choose either Horizontal or Vertical from the Orientation list box. Change the text orientation Using the Pick tool, select the text and click Text Format text. Click the Paragraph tab, and choose either Horizontal or Vertical from the Orientation list box. • The default orientation for Asian text is horizontal. • When you change the text orientation from horizontal to vertical, underlines become left lines and overlines become right lines. • If you have Asian text support installed with your operating system, you can also change text orientation on the Text tool property bar. To specify spacing between Latin and Asian text 1. Click Text Format text. 2. Click the Paragraph tab. 3. Type a value in the Language box. • The inter-language spacing is based on the percentage of a standard space. For example, two spaces are represented by typing a value of 200. To change the font properties of Latin and Asian text 1. Select the text. 2. Click Text Format text. 3. Click the Character tab, and choose one of the following from the Script list box: • Latin • Asian 4. Change any font properties. • The text orientation setting applies to the entire text object. You cannot mix orientations in one text object. Using Asian line-breaking rules CorelDRAW includes line-breaking rules for use with Asian text when you have an Asian operating system. For most Asian languages, a line of text can break between any two characters, with a few exceptions. Some characters cannot appear at the end of a line. These characters are referred to as “leading characters.” Other characters — referred to as “following characters” — cannot appear at the beginning of a line. The line breaks either after the following character or before the character that precedes the following character. Still others — referred to as “overflow characters” — are not wrapped but are, instead, allowed to extend beyond the right or bottom margin. To enforce one or more of the line-breaking rules, you can enable any of the rules. To customize the rules, you can add or remove characters. You can also reset the rules to the default. To disable or enable line-breaking rules 1. Click Text Format text. 2. Click the Rules tab. 3. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Leading characters — ensures that a line does not break after any of the characters in the list • Following characters — ensures that a line does not break before any of the characters in the list • Overflow characters — ensures that the characters in the list are allowed to extend beyond the margin of the line • You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system and have paragraph text selected to view the Rules tab. To add or remove characters to a line-breaking rule 1. Click Text Format text. 2. Click the Rules tab. 3. Type or remove the characters in the appropriate box. • You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system and have paragraph text selected to view the Rules tab To reset a line-breaking rule to the default 1. Click Text Format text. 2. Click the Rules tab. 3. Click the Default button beside a rule. • You must have Asian text support installed on your operating system and have paragraph text selected to view the Rules tab. Managing fonts CorelDRAW allows you to manage fonts. In this section, you’ll learn about • substituting unavailable fonts • previewing and identifying fonts • using Bitstream Font Navigator Substituting unavailable fonts You can use PANOSE font matching to access a list of fonts that can be used as substitutes for fonts used in a drawing but not installed on your computer. You can set font matching options. You can use font matching in text only, in both text and text styles, or you can turn off font matching. With font matching, you can accept the default substitute font, or you can choose another font to substitute for the missing font. You can apply the substitution temporarily or permanently to the drawing. You can build a list of exceptions to font substitutions. Exceptions override the font substitutions recommended by the PANOSE font matching feature. This is useful when sharing drawings across the two platforms because sometimes the same font has a different spelling for its name on each platform. To set font matching options 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts. 3. Click PANOSE font matching. 4. In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Text and styles — lets you select font substitutions for text in the document and for text styles • Text — lets you select font substitutions for text in the document and applies default font substitutions for text styles • Never show — applies default font substitutions for text in the document and for text styles To use PANOSE font matching 1. Open a drawing. If the drawing contains missing fonts, the Font substitution for missing fonts dialog box opens. The name of the missing font appears in the Missing font list, and the recommended substitute appears in the Substituted font list. 2. Enable one of the following options: • Temporary — replaces the missing font with the substitution, but only in the current session of the drawing • Permanent — permanently makes the font substitution in the document. When you save the file and reopen it, the new font is used. To substitute a missing font 1. Open a drawing. 2. Enable the Substitute font with option. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Show fonts in the same code page as missing font — displays only missing fonts that support the code page of the active drawing • Show all fonts — displays all missing fonts 4. Choose a missing font from the Missing font list. 5. Choose a font from the Substitute font with list box. 6. Enable one of the following options: • Temporary — replaces the missing font with the substitution, but only in the current session of the drawing • Permanent — permanently makes the font substitution in the document. When you save the file and reopen it, the new font will be used. • In order for the Font matching results dialog box to appear, the drawing that you open must contain fonts that aren’t installed on your computer. • You can save font substitutions by enabling the Save this exception for future font matching check box. • You can substitute a font for more than one missing font by holding down Shift and selecting the fonts in the Missing font list in the Font substitution for missing fonts dialog box. To build a list of exceptions to font substitutions 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Fonts. 3. Click PANOSE font matching. 4. In the PANOSE font matching preferences dialog box, click Exceptions. 5. In the PANOSE font matching exceptions dialog box, type the name of the missing font in the Missing font box. 6. Choose a font that is installed on your computer from the Substituted font list box. Previewing and identifying fonts CorelDRAW lets you preview fonts before you use them. You can also preview a font in all available styles, such as bold and italic. You can easily identify which fonts you used in a document. You can also easily access the fonts you most recently used. To preview a font 1. Click the Text tool . 2. On the property bar, click the Font list box. The font name appears in the given font. • The names of symbol fonts are displayed in the default user interface font, with examples of the symbol font appearing to the right of the symbol font name. • If a font has other styles, such as bold or italic, you can preview those styles of the font by clicking the flyout arrow next to the font name To display document fonts 1. Click Text Font list options. 2. Enable the Show document fonts only check box. Only the fonts used in the active drawing appear in the Font list box on the property bar when the Text tool is active. • The fonts you used most recently are displayed at the top of the Font list box. By default, the list displays the five most recently used fonts. You can modify the number of fonts that appear in this list by typing a value in the Number of most recently used fonts displayed box. The maximum number of recently used fonts that you can display is 20. Using Bitstream Font Navigator Bitstream Font Navigator is a font management system included with your application. Font Navigator lets you store up to 2000 fonts in a database (or “catalog”). You can access fonts quickly, organize them, and preview them before using them. See the Font Navigator documentation for information about installing and using Font Navigator. Using writing tools Writing tools let you correct errors in spelling and grammar, correct mistakes automatically, and help to refine your writing style. In this section, you’ll learn about • using QuickCorrect • using the spelling checker and Grammatik • using the thesaurus • working with languages • customizing the writing tools • using checking styles • using rule classes • analyzing a drawing • using word lists • checking statistics For more information about using the writing tools, see "Reference: Using writing tools." Using QuickCorrect QuickCorrect automatically corrects misspelled words and capitalization errors. You can customize QuickCorrect by specifying which types of errors you want corrected. Adding words to QuickCorrect lets you replace words and abbreviations that you often mistype. The next time you type the misspelled word, QuickCorrect corrects the word automatically. You can use this feature to create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. For example, you can store the phrase “for your information” under the abbreviation “FYI” so that each time you type “FYI” followed by a space, it is replaced with the phrase. You can have QuickCorrect add corrections made with the spelling checker to its word list so that the next time you misspell the word the same way, it is automatically corrected. You can also undo a QuickCorrect correction. To customize QuickCorrect 1. Click Text Writing tools QuickCorrect. 2. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Capitalize first letter of sentences • Change straight quotes to typographic quotes • Correct two initial, consecutive capitals • Capitalize names of days • Replace text while typing • The Correct two initial, consecutive capitals option doesn’t make a change when a capital letter is followed by a space or period, or if a word contains other capital letters. • Instead of enabling the Capitalize first letter of sentences check box, you can change the text case to sentence case. For more information, see "To change text case." To add words to QuickCorrect 1. Click Text Writing tools QuickCorrect. 2. Enable the Replace text while typing check box. 3. In the Replace box, type the text to be replaced. 4. Type the replacement text in the With box. 5. Click Add. • You can use this feature to create shortcuts to frequently used words and phrases. Type the abbreviation in the Replace box, and the word or phrase in the With box. To add spelling corrections to QuickCorrect 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Text, and click Spelling. 3. Enable the Add corrections to QuickCorrect check box. To undo a QuickCorrect correction • Click Edit Undo QuickCorrect. Using the spelling checker and Grammatik The writing tools let you check your text in many ways. By using the spelling checker and Grammatik, you can check the spelling and grammar in an entire drawing, part of a drawing, or only selected text. You can manually edit text and then resume checking the drawing. The spelling checker and Grammatik replace words or phrases in two ways: you can choose a word, or define an automatic replacement for a word. Defining automatic replacement words is useful for words that are regularly misspelled. Automatic replacement words are stored in a user word list file. For more information about user word list files, see "Using word lists." You can skip a writing error once but flag subsequent occurrences of the problem, or you can skip the error for the rest of the proofreading session. To check an entire drawing 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Choose Document from the Check list box. 3. Click Start. To check part of a drawing 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. From the Check list box, choose one of the following: • Paragraph • Selected text • Sentence • Word 3. Click one of the following: • Start — begins a new check • Resume — continues an interrupted check • The options available from the Check list box vary according to the type of drawing you are checking. To check selected text 1. Select the text you want to check. 2. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik By default, the Auto start command is enabled for the Spelling checker and Grammatik. If you want to disable the Auto start command, click Options Auto start; to check a drawing, you must click the Start button in the Writing tools dialog box. To edit text manually 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. When the checking stops on a word or phrase, click where you want to make changes. To replace a word or phrase 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. When the checking stops, choose a word or phrase from the Replacements list. 3. Click Replace. • If the spelling checker does not offer replacement words, you can edit text manually in the Replace with box. To define automatic replacements 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. When the checking stops on a word, click Auto replace. To skip an error once 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. When the checking stops, click Skip once. To skip all occurrences of an error 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. When the checking stops, click Skip all. • You can also skip all occurrences of a word for all proofreading sessions by adding it to a User word list. For more information about user word list files, see "Using word lists." Using the thesaurus You can use the thesaurus to refine your writing style. The thesaurus lets you look up options such as synonyms, antonyms, and related words. You can replace a word using the thesaurus. When you look up a word, the thesaurus provides a short definition and a list of the lookup options selected. The thesaurus also maintains a history list of the words that you have looked up. Each time you start the thesaurus, it begins a new history list. The thesaurus automatically replaces a word with a suggested word, but you can also use the thesaurus to insert words. To replace a word 1. Select a word. 2. Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 3. Click Look up. 4. In the list of categories, double-click a definition and click a word. 5. Click Replace. You can also Look up words suggested by the thesaurus View definitions in the pane to the right of the suggested words. Look up any word Type a word in the list box at the top of the Thesaurus page. Click Look up. Look up recently checked words Choose a word from the list box at the top of the Thesaurus page. • In some instances, the thesaurus prompts you to select the correct form of the word you want to insert. This happens when you want to replace a word that is the same in the present or past tense (such as “read”) or a word that can be used as multiple parts of speech (for example, “wonder”, which can be used as either a noun or a verb). • Click the left and right arrows to scroll through word lists. To insert a word 1. In the drawing, click where you want to insert the word. 2. Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 3. Type a word in the box at the top of the Thesaurus page. 4. Click Look up. 5. Choose a word from the list box. 6. Click Insert. • In some instances, the thesaurus prompts you to select the correct form of the word you want to insert. This happens when you want to replace a word that is the same in the present or past tense (such as “read”) or a word that can be used as multiple parts of speech (for example, “wonder”, which can be used as either a noun or a verb). Working with languages A drawing can contain text that alternates between different languages. For example, if English is your computer system’s default language, and you also have a French language module installed, you can use the writing tools to check the spelling or grammar of both French and English text. When you run the spelling checker, Grammatik, or the thesaurus, CorelDRAW checks words, phrases, and sentences according to their assigned language. This prevents foreign words from being marked as misspellings. You can use the writing tools the same way you would if the text were all in one language. You can also check for the formatting conventions of another language. For example, the spelling checker can format all dates in a drawing according to French conventions (such as “12 avril 2005”). Many of the languages support hyphenation. Hyphenation lets you reduce the raggedness of text along the right margin by dividing a word that falls at the end of a line, instead of forcing the entire word to the next line. You can set a data file to set the language file that the thesaurus uses to look up words. You can select from a list of writing tool languages when you install the application. If you did not perform a custom installation to include additional languages, only the default writing tool language is installed. For more information about updating your installation to include more writing tool languages, see "To add or delete components in a CorelDRAW Graphics Suite X3 installation." To assign a language to text 1. Select the text. 2. Click Text Writing tools Language. 3. In the Text language dialog box, choose a language from the list. • You can assign a language to selected words, sentences, or paragraphs. • To use the writing tools for the language you select in the Text language dialog box, the module for that language must be installed. • You can check which language has been assigned to text by selecting the text and viewing the three-letter language code that appears in the status bar. To set a data file 1. Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 2. Click Options Set data file. 3. In the Open dialog box, choose the data file. 4. Click Open. Customizing the writing tools You can customize how the spelling checker checks spelling in a drawing. For example, you can choose how the spelling checker starts and whether it searches for misspelled words, irregular capitalization, duplicate words, or words with numbers. You can customize how Grammatik checks grammar in a drawing. For example, you can customize Grammatik to start automatically, to prompt you before it automatically replaces words, and to show spelling suggestions for misspelled words. You can customize the thesaurus to look up words or close automatically. The thesaurus can also be customized to suggest spelling suggestions for misspelled words and display multiple alternative word lists. To set spelling checker options 1. Click Text Writing tools Spell check. 2. Click Options, and click one of the following: • Auto start • Beep on misspelled • Recheck all text • Check words with numbers • Check duplicate words • Check irregular capitalization • Prompt before auto replacement • Show phonetic suggestions • Any options you change will be effective the next time you open the spelling checker To set Grammatik options 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options, and click one of the following: • Auto start • Prompt before auto replacement • Suggest spelling replacements • Any options you change will be effective the next time you open Grammatik To set thesaurus options 1. Click Text Writing tools Thesaurus. 2. Click Options, and click one of the following: • Auto look up • Auto close • Spelling assist • Any options you change will be effective the next time you open Thesaurus. Using checking styles A checking style is a preset writing style rule applied to a drawing. Using a checking style lets you check a drawing that has a specific type of writing. For example, you can choose an advertising checking style to check advertising copy or marketing materials. You can create, delete, edit, and restore a checking style. You can specify a maximum number of items when Grammatik checks the grammar of a drawing. For example, you can specify the maximum number of consecutive nouns that Grammatik allows. Choosing a formality level lets Grammatik check a drawing for strict or relaxed use of language and diction. Each checking style has a default level of formality assigned to it. Each formality level focuses on a different style of writing. You can choose from three formality levels: informal, standard, and formal. To select a checking style 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose one of the following: • Spelling plus • Quick check • Very strict • Formal memo or letter • Informal memo or letter • Technical or scientific • Documentation or speech • Student composition • Advertising • Fiction • Grammar As-You-Go 4. Click Select. • A checking style remains in effect until you disable the checking style or choose another one. To create a checking style 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose Very strict from the list. 4. Click Edit. 5. In the Edit checking styles dialog box, disable any rule classes in the Rule classes list that you do not want to include. 6. Modify any of the settings. 7. Click Save as. 8. In the Save as checking style dialog box, type a name in the Custom style name box. To delete a checking style 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4. Click Delete. • You can delete custom checking styles, but you cannot delete preset checking styles. To edit a checking style 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style. 4. Click Edit. 5. Modify any of the settings. 6. Click Save. • When you save an edited checking style, an asterisk (*) is added to the style name. To restore an edited checking style 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose an edited checking style from the list. 4. Click Edit. 5. Click Restore. If you want to save an edited or restored checking style with a new name, click Save as, and type the new name in the Save as checking style dialog box. • Custom checking styles saved with new names cannot be returned to default settings. To specify the maximum number of certain items 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4. Click Edit. 5. In the Maximum allowed area, type values in any of the following boxes: • Consecutive nouns • Consecutive prepositional phrases • Long sentence length • Spell numbers below or equal to • Words allowed in split infinitive • Set the Spell numbers below or equal to value to zero if you do not want figures to be flagged as errors. To change a formality level 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4. Click Edit. 5. In the Formality levels area, enable one of the following: • Informal • Standard • Formal Using rule classes Rule classes contain groups of grammar and style rules. Grammatik uses rule classes to detect common writing errors. You can enable or disable rules at any time during a Grammatik session. When you disable a rule, Grammatik ignores all the errors associated with that rule during the current proofreading session. You can also choose which rule classes to apply during a Grammatik session or save a new set of rules as a Checking style. To enable a rule 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Turn on rules. 3. In the Turn on rules dialog box, choose the rules you want to enable from the Rules list. • The Turn on rules command is available only when you have disabled a rule during proofreading. Otherwise, it is grayed. To disable a rule 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Start a new grammar checking session. 3. When Grammatik alerts you to an error you do not want to flag, click Turn off. To add rule classes 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Checking styles. 3. In the Checking styles dialog box, choose a checking style from the list. 4. Click Edit. 5. In the Edit checking styles dialog box, enable any check boxes beside the rule classes in the Rule classes list that you want to add. To save a set of rules as a new checking style 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Save rules. 3. In the Save rules dialog box, click Save as. 4. In the Save as checking style dialog box, type a name in the Custom style name box. • The Save rules command is available only when a rule has been turned off. Analyzing a drawing Grammatik lets you analyze the grammatical structure of text in a drawing. You can analyze parts of a sentence and parts of speech. When Grammatik analyzes a sentence, it assigns a sentence part to each word or group of words. Grammatik uses Parse Tree to let you view the parts of a sentence. When Grammatik analyzes text, it assigns a part of speech to each word in a sentence. You can view the parts of speech that Grammatik assigns to a sentence. You can view a basic counts report to analyze a writing style. The basic counts report determines if there are too many long words or if paragraphs are too long and complicated for the reader to easily understand. You can also view a flagged errors report to analyze a writing style. The flagged errors report lists the types of errors flagged in a drawing and reports the number of times each error was flagged. You can also use this report to identify the types of grammar problems that often appear in a drawing. Viewing a readability report lets you analyze the amount of skill required for a reader to understand the text in a drawing. Grammatik analyzes the readability of a drawing by comparing the text with a comparison document. You can choose from one of three Grammatik comparison documents, or you can add a custom comparison document. To view a parse tree 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Analysis Parse tree. • The location of the cursor determines the sentence that displays in the parse tree. To view parts of speech 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Analysis Parts of speech. • The location of the cursor determines the sentence that displays in the Parts of speech dialog box. To view a basic counts report 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Analysis Basic counts. To view a flagged errors report 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Analysis Flagged To view the readability of a drawing 1. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 2. Click Options Analysis Readability. 3. In the Readability dialog box, choose a comparison document from the Comparison document list box. To add a comparison document 1. Open the drawing you want to use as a comparison document. 2. Click Text Writing tools Grammatik. 3. Click Options Analysis Readability. 4. In the Readability dialog box, click Add document. • Grammatik lets you add only one custom comparison document. If you add a second document, it overwrites the first custom comparison document. Using word lists A word list is a list of words or phrases scanned when you proof text by using the writing tools. Writing tools scan two types of word lists: user word lists and main word lists. Each language comes with a default user word list. You can customize user word lists by adding, deleting, or replacing words. Main word lists are lists of specialized words used by the spell checker for a particular language, field or company. You can choose a user word list to help proof a text. You can have up to 10 user word lists active simultaneously. For example, if you want the spelling checker to scan both the US English and the Canadian English main word lists, choose both lists. If you work in the medical profession, you can select a third-party medical word list that runs with the writing tools. Each language supported by the spelling checker has a default main word list. The active User Word Lists are scanned first; if the word or phrase is not found there, the active Main Word Lists are scanned. You can add, disable, or remove word lists. You can add a word to a user word list so that the word is not flagged as an error. You can also add replacement words to a user word list, which lets you choose a replacement when the spelling checker or Grammatik stops on a word. You can edit or delete words in a User Word List at any time. To choose a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. Enable the User word list check box. If there is only one user word list, no check box will display. • The default user word list for the language is always enabled. To add a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. Click in the User word lists list where you want to position the new user word list. 4. Click Add list. 5. In the Add user word list dialog box, choose the new user word list. 6. Click Open. • The filename extension for a user word list is .uwl. • When you check a drawing, the user word lists are scanned in the order they display in the User word lists list. To disable a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. Disable the check box that corresponds to a user word list. • The default user word list for the language is always enabled. To remove a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools Spell check. 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. Choose a user word list. 4. Click Remove list. • You cannot remove the default language word list. To add a word to a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list. 4. Type a word in the Word/phrase box. 5. If you want to add a replacement word, type it in the Replace with box. 6. Click Add entry. 7. Click Close. • In the spelling checker, replacement words appear in the Replacements box. • Click Add from the Spell checker or Grammatik pages to add the word to the current user word list. • You can also add short phrases to a user word list. To add alternative words to a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list. 4. Type a word in the Word/phrase box. 5. Type a replacement word in the Replace with box. 6. Click Add entry. 7. Click Close. • You can also add short phrases to a user word list. To add alternative words to a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. In the User word lists dialog box, choose a user word list. 4. Type a word in the Word/phrase box. 5. Type a replacement word in the Replace with box. 6. Click Add entry. 7. Click Close. • You can also add short phrases to a user word list. To edit a word or phrase in a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. Choose the User word list that contains the word or phrase you want to edit. 4. Choose the word or phrase you want to edit. 5. Edit the word or phrase in the Replace with box. 6. Click Replace entry. • If the word list you want to edit does not appear in the User word lists dialog box, click Add list to open the list. To delete a word or phrase from a user word list 1. Click Text Writing tools, and click one of the following: • Spell check • Grammatik 2. Click Options User word lists. 3. Choose the word list you want to edit. 4. Choose the word or phrase you want to delete. 5. Click Delete entry. Checking statistics You can check text statistics to count text elements, including the number of lines, words, characters, and the names of the fonts and styles used. You can display statistics either for selected text objects or for the entire drawing. If no text is selected, all text elements in the drawing, including tab and space characters, are counted. To count text elements for an entire drawing 1. Click a blank space in the drawing window. 2. Click Text Text statistics. You can also Count text elements for selected text Select a block of text. Click Text Text statistics. • If you want to display information about the styles used, enable the Show style statistics check box. Reference: Using writing tools The abbreviations that identify parts of a sentence or speech are listed below. Abbreviation Explanation 3v The third person is a present tense of a verb. Examples: He “waits,” she “brushes” her hair, “does” it sing. <> Punctuation clarifies the meaning of a phrase or statement by inserting punctuation marks. Examples, period (.), comma (,), question mark (?). abrv An abbreviation is a shortened version of a word. For example: etc. is an abbreviation of etcetera. adj An adjective modifies a noun. Example: a “good” book. adv An adverb modifies a verb or an adjective. Examples: go “quickly,” a “very” good book. aux An auxiliary verb is a form of “be,” “have,” or “do.” Examples: “is” coming, “had” not run, “did” he say. bv A base verb is the form of a verb that comes after “to” in an infinitive, or after a modal like “would.” c/s Comparative and superlative are forms of adjectives or adverbs that indicate a degree of comparison. Examples: happier, slowest. cj A conjunction joins words, phrases, or clauses. Examples: the book “and” the pen, “because” it is late. det A determiner is a type of adjective. Examples: “a,” “an,” “the,” “some,” “these,” “any.” direct object A direct object receives the action. Example: Bob gave her “an apple.” ij An interjection is an exclamation. Examples: hi!, oh!, hey! indirect object An Indirect Object tells “to whom” or “for whom.” Example: Bob gave an apple to “her.” inf A split infinitive is a verb in its infinitive form (to be, to run) that is split by intervening modifiers. For example, in the split infinitive “to boldly go,” the adverb “boldly” splits the infinitive “to go.” main clause A main clause is complete in meaning without any other sentence component. Example: “We will have the meeting today.” mod A modal is a type of auxiliary verb. Examples: will, must, can, should, might. num A number is a unit of measure. Examples of a number are: three, 497, 6:00. phrasal A phrasal is a preposition that is part of a verb phrase, but separated from it. Example: put the book “down.” pn A plural noun is the plural form of a noun. Examples of a plural noun are: “books,” “children.” poss A possessive noun is a possessive form of a noun, indicating ownership. Examples: “dog’s” leg, “students’ ” cars, “Joe’s” son. ppt A past participle is a past-tense form of a verb. Example: the note was “written” in ink. prep phr A prepositional phrase is a preposition and its object, plus any modifiers. Prepositional phrases usually function as adjectives, adverbs, or nouns. Example: We came back “for the second show.” pres-p A present participle is a form of a verb, usually created by adding “ing.” Examples: He is “writing” a book. She is “going” to bed. prn A pronoun takes the place of a noun. Examples: “I,” “me,” “you,” “mine,” “yourself,” “these,” “who,” “which.” pv The past is the past tense of a verb. Examples: He “wrote” the book. We “went” to the store. relative clause A relative clause is a type of subordinate clause that acts like an adjective, describing a noun or pronoun before it. A relative clause usually starts with a relative pronoun like “who,” “whom,” or “what.” Example: The employees “who used the dental plan” appreciated the change. rel prn A relative pronoun introduces a subordinate clause and links it with an independent clause. Example: The noise “that” scared you was made by the boy “who” lives next door. sn A singular noun is the name of one person, place, thing, or idea. Examples: “Tom,” “Canada,” “pen,” “health.” subject The subject of a clause performs the action. A subject can be one word or several. Examples: “John” ran, “The cats” meowed, “All the children and their mothers” took naps. subordinate clause A subordinate clause is also called a dependent clause. A subordinate clause cannot stand alone. It depends on another clause to complete its meaning. Example: We will have the meeting today, “since everyone is here.” that clause A that clause is a specialized subordinate clause starting with “that.” Example: We were sure “that you would pay us.” verb or verb phrase A verb or verb phrase shows action in the verb. Verbs can contain one or several words. VERB is used for a single word. For example: John “ran.” A VERB PHRASE is used when several words make up the verb. For example: He “has gone” (VERB PHRASE). wh- clause A Wh- Clause is a specialized subordinate clause starting with “when,” “how,” “why,” or “where.” A wh-clause can act like a noun, an adverb, or an adjective. Examples: We knew “where she would go,” I will tell you “when I go.” Working with bitmaps You can convert a vector graphic to a bitmap. Also, you can import and crop bitmaps in the CorelDRAW application. You can also add color masks, watermarks, special effects, and change the color and tone of the images. In this section, you’ll learn about • converting vector graphics to bitmaps • adding bitmaps • cropping and editing bitmaps • using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps • working with colors in bitmaps • applying special effects to bitmaps • adjusting color and tone quickly in the Image Adjustment Lab • applying color and tone effects • transforming color and tone effects • removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps • editing bitmaps in Corel PHOTO-PAINT Converting vector graphics to bitmaps When you convert a vector graphic to a bitmap, you can apply special effects in the CorelDRAW application that are unavailable to vector graphic or objects. As you convert the vector graphic, you can select the color mode of the bitmap. A color mode determines the number and kind of colors that make up the bitmap, so that file size is also affected. As you convert a vector graphic to a bitmap, you can specify settings such as dithering, anti-aliasing, overprinting black, background transparency, and color profile. When you export to a bitmap file format, such as TIFF, JPEG, CPT, or PSD, the same bitmap conversion options are available. For more information about exporting, see "Exporting files." To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap 1. Select an object. 2. Click Bitmaps Convert to bitmap. 3. Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box. 4. Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. 5. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This option is available for images that use 256 or fewer colors. • Always overprint black — avoids gaps between black objects and underlying objects when printing by overprinting black whenever it is the top color • Apply ICC profile — applies the International Color Consortium profiles to standardize colors across devices and color spaces • Anti-aliasing — smooths the edges of the bitmap • Transparent background — makes the background of the bitmap transparent • You can change the black threshold for the Always overprint black option. For information about setting the black threshold, see "To set the overprint black threshold." • If you export a vector file to a bitmap format, such as GIF, you are prompted to set the Convert to bitmap options described in the procedure above before you export the file. • Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background. To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap when exporting 1. Click File Export. 2. Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 3. Choose a bitmap file format from the Save as type list box, and type a filename in the File name list box. 4. Set the options that you want, and click Export. 5. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, type values in one of the following pairs of boxes: • Width and Height — let you specify the image dimensions • Width % and Height % — let you resize the image to a percentage of its original size 6. Choose a resolution from the Resolution list box. 7. Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. 8. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Dithered — simulates a greater number of colors than those available. This option is available for images that use 256 or fewer colors. • Always overprint black — avoids gaps between black objects and underlying objects when printing by overprinting black whenever it is the top color • Apply ICC profile — applies the International Color Consortium profiles to standardize colors across devices and color spaces 9. In the Options area, enable any of the following: • Anti-aliasing — smooths the edges of the bitmap • Maintain layers — preserves layers • Transparent background — makes the background of the bitmap transparent • You can change the black threshold for the Always overprint black option. For information about setting the black threshold, see "To set the overprint black threshold." • Not all of the options in the Convert to bitmap dialog box are available for all bitmap file formats. • Making the background of a bitmap transparent lets you see images or a background otherwise obscured by the bitmap background. Adding bitmaps You can import a bitmap into a drawing either directly or by linking it to an external file. When you link to an external file, edits to the original file are automatically updated in the imported file. To import a bitmap 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the folder where the bitmap is stored. 3. Select the file. If you want to link the image to the drawing, enable the Link bitmap externally check box. 4. Click Import. 5. Click where you want to place the bitmap. If you want to center the image on the drawing page, press Enter. • Ensure that All file formats is chosen from the Files of type list box when you import an image. • The status bar provides information about the bitmap, including color mode, size, and resolution after it has been placed on the page. • You can import a bitmap in its original size by pressing Spacebar when you click the Import button. • Linking to a bitmap results in a smaller file size than importing the bitmap directly. Cropping and editing bitmaps After you add a bitmap to a drawing, you can crop, resample, and resize the bitmap. Cropping removes unwanted areas of a bitmap. To crop a bitmap into a rectangular shape, you can use the Crop tool. For more information, see "To crop objects." To crop a bitmap into an irregular shape, you can use the Shape tool and the Crop bitmap command. When you resample a bitmap, you can change the image size, the resolution, or both by adding or removing pixels. For example, if you make an image larger without resampling, you can lose details because the image’s pixels are spread over a greater area. By resampling, you can add pixels to preserve more detail from the original image. Resizing an image maintains the same number of pixels in a smaller or larger area. For example, you can lose details when you make an image larger without resampling because the image’s pixels are spread over a greater area. Upsampling adds pixels to maintain some of the original’s details. With resampling, you can either increase the resolution of an image by adding pixels (upsampling) or decrease the resolution by subtracting pixels (downsampling). To crop a bitmap 1. Open the Shape edit flyout , and click the Shape tool . 2. Select a bitmap. 3. Drag the bitmap’s corner nodes to the shape you want. If you want to add a node, double-click the node boundary by using the Shape tool where you want the node to appear. 4. Click Bitmaps Crop bitmap. • You cannot crop a bitmap comprised of more than one object. • You can also quickly crop a bitmap into a rectangular shape by using the Crop tool . For information about the Crop tool, see "To crop objects." • You can also crop a selected bitmap after you drag the bitmap’s corner nodes by clicking the Crop bitmap button on the property bar. To resample a bitmap 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Resample. 3. In the Resolution area, type values in any of the following boxes: • Horizontal • Vertical If you want to maintain the proportions of the bitmap, enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. If you want to maintain the file size, enable the Maintain original size check box. • You can also resample a selected bitmap by clicking the Resample button on the property bar. • Enable the Anti-alias check box to minimize the jagged appearance of curves. To resize a bitmap 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Resample. 3. Choose a unit of measure from the list box beside the Width and Height boxes. 4. Type values in any of the following boxes: • Width • Height If you want to minimize the jagged appearance of curves, enable the Anti-alias check box. • You can maintain the proportions of the bitmap by enabling the Maintain aspect ratio check box and typing a value in either the Width or Height box. • You can also resample the bitmap as a percentage of its original size by typing values in the % boxes. Using Digimarc watermarks to identify bitmaps A Digimarc watermark embeds copyright details, contact information, and image attributes in an image. A watermark makes subtle changes to the brightness of pixels in an image. These changes cannot be readily seen; however at high magnification, you might notice changes in the brightness of some pixels. Digimarc watermarks aren't affected by normal editing, printing, and scanning. Detecting watermarks When you open an image in CorelDRAW, you can check for a watermark. If a watermark is present, a copyright symbol appears on the title bar. You can find information about the watermarked image by reading the embedded message and by linking to the contact profile in the Digimarc database. Embedding watermarks In CorelDRAW, you can also embed Digimarc watermarks in images. First, you must obtain a unique Creator ID by subscribing to Digimarc's online service. The Creator ID includes contact details, such as name, phone number, address, e-mail and Web addresses. Once you have a Creator ID, you can embed a watermark in an image. You can specify the copyright year, image attributes, and the durability of a watermark. You can also specify the target output method for an image, such as print or Web. Digimarc watermarks do not prevent unauthorized image use or copyright infringement. But the watermarks do communicate copyright claims. They also provide contact information for those who want to use or license an image. For more information about Digimarc, see www.digimarc.com. To detect a watermark 1. Click Bitmaps Plug-ins Digimarc Read watermark. 2. Click Web lookup to view the Web page with contact details, or call the Digimarc fax-back service at the listed fax number. To get a Creator ID 1. Click Bitmaps Plug-ins Digimarc Embed watermark. 2. Click Personalize. 3. In the Personalize Creator ID dialog box, click Register, and follow the instructions on the Digimarc Web site. 4. In the Personalize Creator ID dialog box, type your Creator ID in the Creator ID box. To embed a watermark 1. Click Bitmaps Plug-ins Digimarc Embed watermark. 2. In the Copyright year(s) box, type a year or years. 3. In the Image attributes area, enable the check boxes for the applicable attributes. 4. Choose an option from the Target output list box. 5. Type a value in the Watermark durability box. Higher values increase the persistence of the watermark under common image modifications such as dithering, cropping, compression, and scaling. If you want to confirm the information available to viewers when they detect the watermark, enable the Verify check box. • In the Copyright year(s) box, you cannot type a year before 1922 or after the current year. Separate the years with commas. • In the Target output box, the Monitor and Web controls require a setting of less than 200 per inch (dpi), and the Printer control requires a setting of 300 dpi or higher. • Combine all objects with the background before adding a watermark. For more information about combining objects with the background, see "Combining objects." Working with colors in bitmaps CorelDRAW lets you change colors in monochrome images, apply PostScript halftone screens to optimize color and black-and-white bitmaps for printing, hide and show colors, and mask colors. Monochrome bitmaps have two colors: black and white. You can replace the black and white pixels with any color on a color palette. If you plan to print to a PostScript printer, you can optimize color or black-and-white printing by applying a halftone screen to an image. Halftone screens break down an image into small dots or lines for clearer printing, continuous tones, and special effects. However, you can only see the screen's effect on the bitmap after you print it on a PostScript printer. For information about making changes to halftone screens, see "To customize a halftone screen." You can hide and display selected colors by masking them. Hiding colors in a bitmap lets objects or backgrounds show through the image. Hiding a color can also alter the apparent shape of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap shows a person on a black background, you can hide the background so that the bitmap appears to take on the shape of the person rather than a rectangular shape. Also, hiding colors in bitmaps can increase the speed at which objects are rendered on the screen. You can also display certain colors in a bitmap to change the image's appearance or see where a particular color has been applied. You can mask as many as 10 colors in a bitmap. Color masking also lets you change selected colors without altering the other colors in an image. You can also save a bitmap color mask to a file and open the file for future use. To color a monochrome bitmap 1. Select a bitmap using the Pick tool . 2. Right-click a color on the color palette to change the color of the foreground (black) pixels. 3. Click a color on the color palette to change the color of the background (white) pixels. To apply a screen to a bitmap 1. Select a bitmap using the Pick tool . 2. Open the Fill flyout , and click the Fill color dialog button . 3. Click the Palettes tab. 4. Choose a fixed palette from the Palette list box. 5. Click Options and click PostScript options. 6. Choose an option from the Type list to set the dot shape or line type. 7. Type a value in the Frequency box to set the number of dots or lines that appear in each inch of the screen. 8. Type a value in the Angle box to set the angle of the dots or lines that appear on the screen. To hide or display a color in a bitmap 1. Select the bitmap using the Pick tool . 2. Click Bitmaps Bitmap color mask. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Hide colors • Show colors 4. Enable the check box next to the channel that you want to hide or display. 5. Move the Tolerance slider to set the color tolerance for the color. 6. Click the Color selector button . 7. Click the bitmap, and click the color that you want to hide or display. 8. Click Apply. • Higher tolerance levels target a broader range of colors around the color you select. For example, if you select baby blue and increase the tolerance, CorelDRAW hides or displays pastel blue, electric blue, and so on. To open a bitmap color mask 1. Click Bitmaps Bitmap color mask. 2. Click the Open mask button . 3. Choose the folder where the color mask file is stored. 4. From the Files of type list box, choose a file type. 5. Double-click the file. • Files containing bitmap color mask have the filename extension .ini. To change a masked color 1. Click Bitmaps Bitmap color mask. 2. Choose a color from the list of masked colors. 3. Click the Edit color button . 4. Use the controls in the Select color dialog box to edit the color. You can also Save a bitmap color mask Click the Save mask button . Choose the folder where you want to save the current color mask. Type a name for the file in the File name list box. Click Save. • You can also change a masked color by clicking the Color selector button , selecting another color from the bitmap, and clicking Apply. Applying special effects to bitmaps You can apply a wide range of special effects to bitmaps, such as three-dimensional (3D) and artistic effects. Special effect type Description 3D effects Lets you create the illusion of three-dimensional depth. These effects include embossing, page curl, and perspective. Art strokes Lets you apply hand-painted techniques. The art stroke media and styles include crayon, impressionist, pastels, watercolor, and pen and ink. Blur Lets you blur an image to simulate gradual change, movement, or speckling. These effects include Gaussian blur, motion blur, and zoom. Camera Lets you simulate the effect produced by diffusion filters of a diffusion lens Color transform Lets you create photographic illusions by using color reduction and replacements. These effects include halftones, psychedelic, and solarizing. Contour Lets you highlight and enhance the edges of an image. The contour effects include edge tracing and highlighting. Creative Lets you apply various textures and shapes to an image. The creative effects include fabric, glass block, crystal fragments, vortex, and stained glass. Distort Lets you distort image surfaces. These effects include ripples, blocks, swirl, and tile. Noise Lets you modify the graininess of an image. The noise effects include adding noise, applying dust and scratch, and diffusing to change an image’s granularity. Sharpen Lets you create a sharpening effect to focus and enhance edges. The sharpen effects include accentuating edge detail and sharpening smooth areas. Plug-ins Lets you apply effects from a third-party filter to bitmaps in CorelDRAW. An installed plug-in appears at the bottom of the Bitmaps menu. Adding plug-in filters to CorelDRAW provides additional features and effects that you can use to edit images. You can add plug-in filters, and you can remove them when you no longer need them. Left to right: Add noise effect, Zoom blur effect, Solarize color transform effect, Edge detect contour effect, Sharpen effect Left to right: Original image, Emboss effect, Cubist artistic effect, Mosaic creative effect, Distort pixelate effect CorelDRAW automatically inflates a bitmap to make a special effect cover the entire image. You can disable the automatic inflate and manually specify how much you want to inflate the bitmap. To apply a special effect 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps, choose a special effect type, and click an effect. 3. Adjust any special effect settings. To add a plug-in filter 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, and click Plug-ins. 3. Click Add. 4. Choose a folder containing a plug-in. • To remove a plug-in filter, click a plug-in folder from the Plug-in folders list, and click Remove. To inflate a bitmap manually 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Inflate bitmap Manually inflate bitmap. 3. Type a number representing the pixel amount to inflate to in the Width and Height boxes or a percentage amount to inflate the bitmap in the Percentage boxes. Use the original bitmap size as reference. 4. Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box to inflate the bitmap proportionally. • To automatically inflate the bitmap to cover the entire image, enable the Auto inflate bitmap check box. Adjusting color and tone quickly in the Image Adjustment Lab The Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most photos quickly and easily. The Image Adjustment Lab consists of automatic and manual controls, which are organized in a logical order for image correction. By starting in the top right corner and working your way down, you can select only the controls you need to correct the problems specific to your image. It is best to crop or retouch any areas of the image before beginning the color and tone corrections. For information about cropping and retouching images, see "Cropping and editing bitmaps" and “Retouching” in the Corel PHOTO-PAINT Help. As you work in the Image Adjustment Lab, you can take advantage of the following features: • Create snapshot — You can capture the corrected version of an image in a “snapshot” at any time. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below the image. Snapshots make it easy to compare different corrected versions of the image so you can choose the best one. • Undo, Redo, and Reset to original — Image correction can be a trial and error process, so the ability to undo and redo corrections is important. The Reset to original command lets you clear all corrections so that you can start again. Using automatic controls You can begin by using the automatic correction controls: • Auto adjust — automatically corrects the contrast and color in an image by detecting the lightest and darkest areas and adjusting the tonal range for each color channel. In some cases, this control may be all you need to improve an image. In other cases, you can undo the changes and proceed with more precise controls. • Select white point tool — automatically adjusts the contrast in an image according to the white point that you set. For example, you can brighten an image that is too dark by using the Select white point tool. • Select black point tool — automatically adjusts the contrast in an image according to the black point that you set. For example, you can darken an image that is too light by using the Select black point tool. Using color correction controls After using the automatic controls, you can correct color casts in your image. Color casts are typically caused by the lighting conditions when a photo is taken, and they can be influenced by the processor in your digital camera or scanner. • Temperature slider — lets you correct color casts by “warming” or “cooling” the color in an image to compensate for the lighting conditions at the time the photo was taken. For example, to correct a yellow color cast caused by taking a photo indoors in dim incandescent lighting, you can move the slider toward the blue end to increase the temperature values (based on degrees Kelvin). Lower values correspond to low lighting conditions, such as candlelight or light from an incandescent light bulb; these conditions cause an orange cast. Higher values correspond to intense lighting conditions, such as sunlight; these conditions cause a blue cast. • Tint slider — lets you correct color casts by adjusting the green or magenta in an image. You can add green by moving the slider to the right; you can add magenta by moving the slider to the left. Moving the Tint slider after using the Temperature slider lets you fine-tune an image. • Saturation slider — lets you adjust the vividness of colors. For example, by moving the slider to the right, you can increase the vividness of a blue sky in an image. By moving the slider to the left, you can reduce the vividness of colors. You can create a black-and-white photo effect by moving the slider all the way to the left, so that all color in the image is removed. Correction of a color cast depends on the type of light that caused the cast. The image on the left was taken indoors in incandescent light. The image on the right is the corrected version. Adjusting brightness and contrast across the entire image You can brighten, darken, or improve the contrast in an image by using the following controls: • Brightness slider — lets you brighten or darken an entire image. This control can correct exposure problems caused by too much light (overexposure) or too little light (underexposure) at the time the photo was taken. If you want to lighten or darken specific areas of an image, you can use the Highlights, Shadows, and Midtones sliders. Adjustment made by the Brightness slider is nonlinear, so the current white point and black point values are not affected. • Contrast slider — increases or decreases the difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Moving the slider to the right makes the light areas lighter and the dark areas darker. For example, if the image has a dull, gray tone, you can sharpen the detail by increasing the contrast. Adjusting the brightness and contrast of an image can reveal more image detail. Adjusting highlights, shadows, and midtones You can brighten or darken specific areas of an image. In many cases, the position or strength of the lighting at the time a photo is taken causes some areas to appear too dark and other areas to appear too light. • Highlights slider — lets you adjust brightness in the lightest areas of an image. For example, if you take a photo with a flash, and the flash washes out the foreground subjects, you can move the Highlights slider to the left to darken the washed-out areas of the image. You can use the Highlights slider in conjunction with the Shadows and Midtones sliders to balance the lighting. • Shadows slider — lets you adjust the brightness in the darkest areas of an image. For example, a bright light behind a photo subject (backlighting) at the time a photo is taken can cause the subject to appear in shadow. You can correct the photo by moving the Shadow slider to the right to lighten the dark areas and reveal more detail. You can use the Shadows slider in conjunction with the Highlights and Midtones sliders to balance the lighting. • Midtones slider — lets you adjust the brightness of the midrange tones in an image. After adjusting the highlights and shadows, you can use the Midtones slider to fine-tune the image. The Highlights and Shadows sliders can lighten or darken specific areas of an image. Viewing images in the Image Adjustment Lab The tools in the Image Adjustment Lab let you view images in various ways, so that you can evaluate the color and tone adjustments you make. For example, you can rotate images, pan to a new area, zoom in or out, and choose how to display the corrected image in the preview window. Using other adjustment filters Although the Image Adjustment Lab lets you correct the color and tone of most images, a specialized adjustment filter is sometimes required. Using the powerful adjustment filters in CorelDRAW, you can make precise adjustments to images. For example, you can adjust images using a histogram or a tone curve. For more information about adjustment filters, see "Applying color and tone effects." To correct color and tone quickly by using the Image Adjustment Lab 1. Click Bitmaps Image Adjustment Lab. 2. Click Auto adjust. Auto adjust automatically adjusts color and contrast by setting the white point and black point for an image. If you want to control the white point and black point setting more precisely, click the Set white point tool , and click the lightest area of your image. Then click the Set black point tool , and click the darkest area of your image. 3. Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Correct color in the image Adjust the Temperature slider to warm or cool the colors, and then fine-tune the color correction by adjusting the Tint slider. Make colors more vivid or less vivid Move the Saturation slider to the right to increase the amount of color in the image; move the slider to the left to decrease the amount of color in the image. Brighten or darken an image Move the Brightness slider to the right to lighten the image; move the slider to the left to darken the image. Improve image sharpness by adjusting tone Move the Contrast slider to the right to make the light areas lighter and the dark areas darker. Brighten or darken specific areas Adjust the Highlights slider to brighten or darken the lightest areas of the image. Then, adjust the Shadows slider to lighten or darken the darkest areas of the image. Finally, adjust the Midtones slider to fine-tune the midrange tones in the image. • The Image Adjustment Lab is not available for CMYK images. For CMYK images, you can access the Auto Adjust filter and other adjustment filters from the Bitmaps menu. • You can capture the current version of your image by clicking the Create snapshot button. Thumbnails of the snapshots appear in a window below your image. Each snapshot is numbered sequentially and can be deleted by clicking the close button in the upper right corner of the snapshot title bar. • You can undo or redo the last correction you made by clicking the Undo button or Redo button . To undo all corrections, click the Reset to original button. To view images in the Image Adjustment Lab 1. Click Bitmaps Image Adjustment Lab. 2. Perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Rotate the image Click the Rotate left button or Rotate right button . Pan to another area of an image Using the Pan tool , drag the image until the area you want to see is visible. Zoom in and out Using the Zoom in tool or Zoom out tool , click in the preview window. Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit button. Display an image at its actual size Click the 100% button. View the corrected image in a single preview window Click the Full preview button . View the corrected image in one window and the original image in another window Click the Before and after full preview button . View the image in one window with a divider between the original and corrected versions Click the Before and after split preview button . Move your pointer over the dashed divider line, and drag to move the divider to another area of the image. Applying color and tone effects CorelDRAW lets you apply color and tone to a bitmap. For example, you can replace colors, shift them between different color modes and adjust the brightness, lightness, and intensity of colors. By applying color and tone effects, you can restore detail lost in shadows or highlights, remove color casts, correct underexposure or overexposure, and generally improve the quality of the bitmaps. You can also correct color and tone quickly by using the Image Adjustment Lab. For information about the Image Adjustment Lab, see "Adjusting color and tone quickly in the Image Adjustment Lab." You can apply the following color and tone effects. Effect Description Contrast enhancement Lets you adjust the tone, color, and contrast of a bitmap while preserving shadow and highlight detail. An interactive histogram lets you shift or compress brightness values to printable limits. The histogram can also be adjusted by sampling values from the bitmap. Local equalization Lets you enhance contrast near edges to reveal detail in both light and dark regions. You can set the height and width around the region to accentuate contrast. Sample/Target balance Lets you adjust color values in a bitmap with sample colors taken from the image. You can choose sample colors from the dark, midtone, and light ranges of an image and apply target colors to each of the sample colors. Tone curve Lets you perform color corrections precisely, by controlling individual pixel values. By changing pixel brightness values, you can make changes to shadows, midtones, and highlights. Brightness-contrast-intensity Lets you adjust the brightness of all colors and the difference between light and dark areas Color balance Lets you add cyan or red, magenta or green, and yellow or blue to selected tones in a bitmap Gamma Lets you accentuate detail in low contrast areas without affecting shadows or highlights Hue-Saturation-Lightness Lets you adjust the color channels in a bitmap and change the position of colors in the spectrum. This effect allows you to change colors and their richness, as well as the percentage of white in an image. Selective color Lets you change color by changing the percentage of spectrum CMYK process colors from the red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, and magenta color spectrums in a bitmap. For example, decreasing the percentage of magenta in the reds spectrum results in a color shift toward yellow. Replace colors Lets you replace one bitmap color with another color. A color mask is created to define the color to be replaced. Depending on the range you set, you can replace one color or shift an entire bitmap from one color range to another. You can set the hue, saturation, and lightness for the new color. Desaturate Lets you reduce the saturation of each color in a bitmap to zero, remove the hue component, and convert each color to its grayscale equivalent. This creates a grayscale black-and-white photo effect without changing the color model. Channel mixer Lets you mix color channels to balance the colors of a bitmap. For example, if a bitmap has too much red, you can adjust the red channel in an RGB bitmap to improve image quality. To apply a color or tone effect 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Effects Adjust, and click a color or tone effect. 3. Specify any settings Transforming color and tone effects You can transform the color and tone of an object to produce a special effect. For example, you can create an image that looks like a photographic negative or flatten the appearance of an image. The color and tone transform effects are • Deinterlace — lets you remove lines from scanned or interlaced images • Invert — lets you reverse the colors of an object. Inverting an object creates the appearance of a photographic negative. • Posterize — lets you reduce the number of tonal values in an image. Posterize removes gradations and creates larger areas of flat color. To transform a color and tone effect 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Effects Transform. 3. Click a transform effect: • De interlace — sets the effect level • Invert — inverts the color and tone automatically • Posterize — sets the effect level Removing dust and scratch marks from bitmaps You can quickly improve the appearance of a bitmap by removing dust and scratch marks. The dust and scratch filter works by eliminating the contrast between pixels that exceed the contrast threshold you set. You can set a radius to determine how many pixels are affected by the changes. The settings you choose depend on the size of the blemish and the area surrounding it. For example, if you have a white scratch that is 1 or 2 pixels wide on a dark background, you can set a radius of 2 or 3 pixels and set the contrast threshold higher than if the same scratch was on a light background To remove dust and scratch marks from a bitmap 1. Click Effects Correction Dust and scratch. 2. Move the following sliders: • Radius — lets you set the range of pixels used to produce the effect. Set the radius as low as possible to retain image detail. • Threshold — lets you set the amount of noise reduction. Set the threshold as high as possible to retain image detail. Editing bitmaps in Corel PHOTO-PAINT You can access Corel PHOTO-PAINT, a complete image-editing program, from within CorelDRAW. After you finish editing a bitmap, you can quickly resume your work in CorelDRAW. For more information about editing images in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, from the Corel PHOTO-PAINT menu bar, click Help Help topics. To edit a bitmap in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 1. Using the Pick tool , select the bitmap that you want to edit. 2. On the property bar, click Edit bitmap. Corel PHOTO-PAINT opens, with the selected bitmap in the image window. 3. Edit the bitmap. 4. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, click the Save button , and click the Close button in the top right corner of the application window. Corel PHOTO-PAINT closes and the edited bitmap appears on the drawing page in CorelDRAW. To edit a bitmap in Corel PHOTO-PAINT 1. Using the Pick tool , select the bitmap that you want to edit. 2. On the property bar, click Edit bitmap. Corel PHOTO-PAINT opens, with the selected bitmap in the image window. 3. Edit the bitmap. 4. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, click the Save button , and click the Close button in the top right corner of the application window. Corel PHOTO-PAINT closes and the edited bitmap appears on the drawing page in CorelDRAW. • You can also open Corel PHOTO-PAINT by right-clicking a bitmap and choosing Edit bitmap from the context menu. Tracing bitmaps and editing traced results CorelDRAW lets you trace bitmaps to convert them to fully editable and scalable vector graphics. You can trace scanned sketches, artwork, digital photos, and logos and easily integrate them into your designs. For information about the difference between vector graphics and bitmaps, see "About vector graphics and bitmaps." In this section, you’ll learn about • tracing bitmaps • previewing traced results • controlling the colors of traced results This section also includes useful tips for tracing bitmaps. For more information, see "Tips for tracing bitmaps." Tracing bitmaps You can trace a bitmap quickly, in one step. You can also trace a bitmap in PowerTRACE, which lets you preview and adjust the traced results. The following topics describe the adjustments you can make in PowerTRACE. For information about previewing traced results, see "Previewing traced results." Choosing a preset style A preset style is a collection of settings that are appropriate for the specific type of bitmap you want to trace (for example, line art or a high-quality photo image). Whether you want to trace a scanned sketch, photo, or a detailed illustration, you can choose from several preset styles to achieve optimum trace results. Low-quality image High-quality image Preset styles are available for each of these image types. Smoothing and adjusting detail You can smooth curved lines and adjust the amount of detail in the traced result. Smoothing affects the number of nodes in the traced result; detail affects the number of objects and colors. PowerTRACE provides information about the number of nodes, objects, and colors in a traced result. This information is updated with each adjustment of the settings. For information about changing colors in the traced result, see "Controlling the colors of traced results." Tracing with a low detail value (left); tracing with a high detail value (right). Removing and preserving the background With most preset styles, the background of the bitmap is automatically detected and removed. However, you can choose to preserve the background in the traced result. You can also specify the background color to be removed. If the background color around the edges is removed but some background color is still showing through inside areas of the image, you can have the background color removed from the entire image. Completing a trace By default, the source bitmap is preserved after a trace, and objects in the traced result are automatically grouped. You can also have the source bitmap automatically deleted once the trace is complete. Undoing and redoing actions You can adjust the settings in PowerTRACE and retrace a bitmap as many times as necessary until you are satisfied with the result. If you make a mistake, you can undo or redo an action, or revert to the first traced result. To trace a bitmap in one step 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Trace bitmap Quick Trace. • You can also trace a bitmap in one step by clicking the Trace bitmap flyout button on the property bar, and clicking Quick Trace. To trace a bitmap in PowerTRACE 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Trace bitmap, and click one of the following: • Line art — to trace black-and-white sketches and illustrations • Logo — to trace simple logos with little detail and few colors • Detailed logo — to trace logos containing fine detail and many colors • Clipart — to trace ready-to-use graphics containing a varying amount of detail and number of colors • Low quality image — to trace photos that lack fine detail or in which the fine detail is not important • High quality image — to trace high-quality detailed photos in which detail is important 3. Move either of the following sliders: • Smoothing — lets you smooth curved lines and control the number of nodes in the traced result. Higher values result in fewer nodes and produce curves that follow lines in the source bitmap less closely. Lower values result in more nodes and produce more accurate trace results. • Detail — lets you control how much of the original detail is preserved in the traced result. Higher values maintain more detail and result in a greater number of objects and colors; lower values discard some detail and result in fewer objects. You can also Change the preset style Choose a preset style from the Type of image list box. Keep the source bitmap after a trace In the Options area, disable the Delete original image check box. Discard or preserve the background in the traced result Enable or disable the Remove background check box. Specify the background color you want to remove Enable the Specify color option, click the Eyedropper tool , and click a color in the preview window. To specify an additional background color to remove, hold down Shift, and click a color in the preview window. The last specified color is displayed beside the Eyedropper tool. Remove a background color from the entire image Enable the Remove color from entire image check box. Undo or redo an action Click the Undo or Redo button. Revert to the first traced result Click Reset. • You can also access PowerTRACE from the Trace bitmap flyout button on the property bar. Previewing traced results By default, PowerTRACE displays both the source bitmap and the traced result. You can also preview a traced result in a single-pane preview window, or you can display a wireframe (outline) view of the traced graphic on top of the source bitmap. You can zoom in and out to get a better view of the graphic, and you can pan to view areas that fall outside the preview window. To preview traced results • In PowerTRACE, choose one of the following options from the Preview list box: • Before and after — displays both the source bitmap and the traced result • Large preview — displays a preview of the traced result in PowerTRACE • Wireframe overlay — displays a wireframe (outline) preview of the traced result on top of the original bitmap. To make the original bitmap more or less visible underneath the wireframe, move the Transparency slider. You can also Zoom in or out Click the Zoom in or Zoom out tool, and click in the preview window. Fit an image in the preview window Click the Zoom to fit button. Pan a graphic Click the Pan tool , and drag the graphic Controlling the colors of traced results When the source bitmap is traced, the application generates a color palette for the traced result. The color palette uses the color mode of the source bitmap (for example, RGB or CMYK). The number of colors in the color palette is determined by the number of colors in the source bitmap and the selected preset style. You can change the color mode of the traced result, and you can reduce the number of colors in the traced result. In addition, you can modify the color palette of the traced result by editing and merging colors. When editing a color, you can choose a color from a color model different from that of other colors on the palette. For example, if you are editing a color in an RGB traced result, you can change the color to a spot color, creating a mixed color palette. This feature is useful when preparing the traced result for commercial printing. When two or more colors are merged, their color values are averaged to produce a new color. The merged colors are replaced by the new color. If you want the traced result to contain only colors from a specific color palette, you can open that color palette in PowerTRACE. The colors of the traced result are replaced by their closest match in the color palette. After you edit the color palette of the traced graphic, you can save it to create a custom color palette for later use. A traced graphic containing 152 colors (left). A traced graphic containing 5 colors (right). To control the colors of a traced result 1. Select a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Trace bitmap, and click a command other than Quick Trace. 3. Click the Colors tab, and perform a task from the following table. To Do the following Change the color mode Choose a color mode from the Color mode list box. Reduce the number of colors in a traced result Type a value in the Number of colors box, and click outside the box. Edit a color Click the color you want to edit, click Edit, and modify settings in the Select color dialog box. Merge colors Holding down Ctrl, click the colors that you want to merge, and click Merge. Use a custom color palette Click the Open color palette button , find the folder where the palette is stored, and click a filename. • Color palettes have a .cpl filename extension. • Each color of the traced graphic is mapped to a similar color in the custom palette. Create a custom color palette from the edited color palette of a traced result Click the Save color palette button . In the Save palette as dialog box, type a name in the File name box. • Merging colors does not affect the number of objects in the traced result. • To increase the number of colors in a traced result, you need to change the preset style or increase the amount of detail. For information about how to change the preset style and the amount of detail, see "To trace a bitmap in PowerTRACE." • You can also change the color mode of the traced result and specify the number of colors it contains on the Options page of PowerTRACE. Tips for tracing bitmaps If you are not completely satisfied with the traced result, consider the following tips. • Use high-quality source bitmaps. If dithering or JPEG compression was used in the source bitmap, it may contain additional noise. For best traced results, remove the noise before tracing the bitmap. • You can adjust the traced results at any time, including during a trace, by changing the settings in PowerTRACE. • To trace a specific area in a bitmap, you can use the Shape tool to define the area before clicking Bitmaps Trace bitmap. • If important detail has been removed from the traced results, disable the Remove background check box on the Options page of PowerTRACE. Also, you can try enabling the Specify color option on the Options page and sample the color you want to specify as a background color. • If background color is removed around the edges but remains in inside areas, enable the Remove from entire image check box. • If too many colors or details are removed, make sure that the Number of colors box is set to the maximum number of colors. • To preserve detail in bitmaps that have fine details, thin lines, and no anti-aliasing applied, choose Line art from the Type of image list box on the Options page. Changing the color mode of bitmaps Changing an image to another color mode, such as RGB, CMYK or Grayscale, changes a bitmap’s color structure. In this section, you’ll learn about • changing the color mode of bitmaps • changing bitmaps to black-and-white images • changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode • changing bitmaps to duotones Changing the color mode of bitmaps The colors of the images that you work with in CorelDRAW are based on color modes. Color modes define the color characteristics of images and are described by their component colors. The CMYK color mode is composed of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black values; the RGB color mode is composed of red, green, and blue values. Although you may not be able to see the difference between an image in the CMYK color mode and an image in the RGB color mode on screen, the images are quite different. For the same image dimensions, an RGB image has a smaller file size than a CMYK image and the RGB color space, or gamut, can display more colors. Therefore, images intended for the Web or desktop printers, which require accurate color fidelity, are generally in RGB mode. Where accurate print reproduction is needed, such as on a commercial printing press, images are generally created in CMYK mode. Paletted color images attempt to preserve color fidelity while reducing the file size, making them ideal for on-screen uses. Each time you convert an image, you may lose color information. For this reason, you should save an edited image before you change it to a different color mode. For more information about color modes, see "Working with color." CorelDRAW supports the following color modes: • Black and White (1-bit) • Duotone (8-bit) • Grayscale (8-bit) • Paletted (8-bit) • RGB Color (24-bit) • Lab Color (24-bit) • CMYK Color (32-bit) To change the color mode of a bitmap 1. Click a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Mode, and click a color mode. • The current mode of the selected bitmap is not available in the menu. Changing bitmaps to black-and-white images You can change any image to a black-and-white image. In addition to conversion settings such as threshold, screen type, and intensity, there are seven conversion options that affect how the converted images will look. Conversion Line art Produces a high-contrast, black-and-white image. Colors with a grayscale value lower than the threshold value that you set change to black, while colors with a grayscale value higher than the threshold value change to white. Ordered Organizes the gray levels into repeating geometric patterns of black and white pixels. Solid colors are emphasized and image edges are hard. This option is best suited for uniform colors. Halftone Creates different shades of gray by varying the pattern of black and white pixels in an image. You can choose the screen type, angle for the halftone, lines per unit, and the unit of measure. Cardinality-Distribution Creates a textured look by applying a calculation and distributing the result to the screen. Jarvis Applies the Jarvis algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images. Stucki Applies the Stucki algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images. Floyd-Steinberg Applies the Floyd-Steinberg algorithm to the screen. This form of error diffusion is suitable for photographic images. To change a bitmap to a black-and-white image 1. Click a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Mode Black-and-white (1-bit). 3. Choose an option from the Conversion list box. 4. Move the Intensity slider. If you want to view different parts of the image, you can drag the image in the Preview window. • The Intensity slider is not available for the Halftone conversion option. Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode The paletted color mode, also called indexed color mode, is sometimes used for images on the World Wide Web. When you convert an image to the paletted color mode, a fixed color value is assigned to each pixel. These values are stored in a compact color table, or palette containing up to 256 colors. As a result, the paletted color mode image contains less data than a 24 bit color mode image, and it has a smaller file size. Conversion to paletted color mode works best on images that have a limited range of colors. Choosing, editing, and saving a color palette When you change an image to the paletted color mode, you can use a predefined palette, or you can customize a color palette by replacing individual colors. Saving conversion settings After you choose a color palette and set the dithering and range sensitivity for changing an image to the paletted color mode, you can save the settings as a conversion preset that you can use with other images. You can add as many conversion presets as you want. The color palette you use is called the processed color palette. It can be saved for use with other images. For more information about the predefined color palettes available for the paletted color mode, see "Palette types." For more information about creating and opening custom color palettes, see "Creating custom color palettes." Dithering Changing images to the paletted color mode lets you use dithering to enhance color information. Dithering places pixels with specific colors or values relative to other pixels of a specific color. The relationship of one colored pixel to another creates the appearance of additional colors that do not exist in the color palette. You can use two types of dithering: ordered dithering and error diffusion. Ordered dithering approximates color blends using fixed dot patterns; as a result, solid colors are emphasized and edges appear harder. Error diffusion scatters pixels irregularly, making edges and colors softer. Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg are conversion options that provide error diffusion. The Ordered dithering option applies more quickly than the error diffusion options (Jarvis, Stucki, and Floyd-Steinberg) but is less accurate. Specifying a range-sensitivity color You can change an image to the paletted color mode and specify a focus color and a range sensitivity for the focus color, so that the focus color and colors that fall within the range settings are included in the processed color palette. You can also specify how much emphasis to place on the range sensitivity. Because the palette has a maximum of 256 colors, emphasizing a focus color reduces the number of colors that fall outside the range sensitivity. Palette types The table below outlines available palette types. Related Topics Palette type Description Uniform Provides a range of 256 colors with equal parts of red, green, and blue Standard VGA Provides the Standard VGA 16-color palette Adaptive Provides colors original to the image and preserves the individual colors (the entire color spectrum) in the image Optimized Creates a color palette based on the highest percentage of colors in the image. You can also specify a range-sensitivity color for the color palette. This is the most common color palette for photographic images. Black Body Contains colors that are based on temperature. For example, black may represent cold temperatures, while red, orange, yellow, and white may represent hot temperatures. Grayscale Provides 256 shades of gray, ranging from black to white System Provides the predefined palette of colors used by the operating system Web-safe Provides a predefined palette of 216 non-dithered colors that will display the same on the Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator browsers. This palette is not recommended for use with photographs and only benefits users with older computers. Custom Lets you add colors to create a customized color palette • Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode • To change an image to the paletted color mode • To create a custom processed color palette • To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity To change an image to the paletted color mode 1. Click a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Mode Paletted (8-bit). 3. Click the Options tab. 4. Choose a color palette type from the Palette list box. 5. Choose an option from the Dithering list box. 6. Move the Dithering intensity slider. If you want to save the conversion settings as a preset, click the Add preset button, and type a name in the Save preset box. • You can achieve better color fidelity by choosing the palette you want to use when you change an image to a paletted bitmap or when you export a GIF or PNG. For example, the standard color palette provides more colors than necessary for an image with a limited range of colors, but you can choose an optimized palette to ensure that color representation is accurate. • You can choose a custom color palette by clicking Open, locating the color palette file you want, and double-clicking the filename. • You can load preset conversion settings by choosing a preset from the Preset list box To create a custom processed color palette 1. Click a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Mode Paletted (8-bit). 3. Click the Processed palette tab. 4. Click a color, and click the Edit button. 5. In the Color table, specify the color you want, and click Edit color. 6. Edit the color, and click OK. 7. Click the Save palette as button to save a new palette. 8. Choose the disk and folder where you want to store the color palette. 9. Type a name in the Name box, and click Save. To change a bitmap by setting range sensitivity 1. Click a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Mode Paletted (8-bit). 3. Click the Options tab. 4. Choose Optimized from the Palette list box. 5. Enable the Color range sensitivity to check box. 6. Click the Eyedropper tool , and click a color in the image. 7. Click the Range sensitivity tab. 8. Move the range sensitivity sliders. If you want to preview the color palette, click the Processed palette tab. Changing bitmaps to duotones To convert an image to a duotone, you change a bitmap to the grayscale color mode and enhance it using one to four additional colors, giving the image greater tonal depth. The following four variations of the color mode correspond to the number of additional inks: • Monotone — a grayscale image colored with a single tone • Duotone — a grayscale image colored with two tones. In most cases, one is black and the other is colored. • Tritone — a grayscale image colored with three tones. In most cases, one is black and the other two are colored. • Quadtone — a grayscale image colored with four tones. In most cases, one is black and the other three are colored. The four color mode variations. From left to right: the original image, monotone, duotone, tritone, and quadtone. Adjusting tone curves When you change an image to a duotone, a tone curve grid that represents the dynamic tone curves that are used throughout the conversion is displayed. The horizontal plane (x-axis) displays the 256 possible shades of gray in a grayscale image (0 is black; 255 is white). The vertical plane (y-axis) indicates the intensity of a color (from 0 to 100 percent) that is applied to the corresponding grayscale values. For example, a grayscale pixel with a color value of 25 is printed with a 25-percent tint of the color. By adjusting the tone curves, you can control the color and intensity of the tone that is added to an image. Saving and loading inks You can save an adjusted duotone tone curve and ink settings and then load them for use with other bitmaps. Specifying how overprint colors display When you change an image to a duotone, you can specify the colors to overprint when you print an image. Overprint colors are used to preserve color integrity when inks overlap. When you display the image, each color is applied on the screen in sequence, creating a layered effect. You can view all instances in which the colors you choose for the duotone conversion overlap. Associated with each instance is the color that is produced by the overlap. You can also choose new overprint colors to see how they overlap. Duotones will hold their color ink information when saving to Encapsulated PostScript (EPS), Portable Document Format (PDF) and CorelDRAW (CDR) file formats. Other file formats don’t support duotone images. To change an image to a duotone 1. Click a bitmap. 2. Click Bitmaps Mode Duotone (8-bit). 3. Click the Curves tab. 4. Choose a duotone type from the Type list box. 5. Double-click an ink color in the Type window. 6. In the Select color dialog box, choose a color, and click OK. If you want to adjust the color’s tone curve, click the ink tone curve on the grid to add a node, and drag the node to adjust the percentage of color at that point on the curve. 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each ink color you want to use. You can also Display all the ink tone curves on the grid. Enable the Show all check box. Save the ink settings Click Save. Choose the disk and folder where you want to save the file, and type a filename in the Name box. Specify how overprint colors display Click the Overprint tab, and enable the Use overprint check box. Double-click the color you want to edit, and choose a new color. • You can load preset ink colors by clicking Load, locating the file in which the ink settings are stored, and double-clicking the filename. Creating Web-enabled objects CorelDRAW lets you create Web-enabled objects for optimum viewing in browsers. You can convert text to a Web-compatible format so that it can be edited in a browser, add Web form objects such as options and check boxes, and create interactive rollovers from CorelDRAW objects. In this section, you’ll learn about • using preset Internet objects • optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web • creating rollovers • creating Web-compatible text • working with bookmarks and hyperlinks Using preset Internet objects CorelDRAW provides you with a set of Internet objects, such as options, Java applets, text edit boxes, and check boxes to use when designing an HTML page.You can customize Internet objects by adjusting their parameters. If a document contains form-related Internet objects such as check boxes, you need a CGI script address to enable these Internet objects to work once the document is published to the World Wide Web as an HTML file. After you create a preset Internet object, you can save it as an HTML page. For information about optimizing, see "Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web." To add or customize an Internet object To Do the following Add an Internet object Click Edit Insert Internet object, and click the object you want. Click where you want to place the Internet object. Customize an Internet object Right-click an Internet object, and click Properties. In the Object properties docker, click the Internet tab, and specify the attributes you want to add. Add a CGI Script address to an Internet object Deselect any objects, right-click, and click Properties. Click the Form tab, and type the CGI script address in the URL of CGI script box. Choose an HTML equivalent method from the Method list box and a frame type from the Target list box. • All Internet objects, except for Java applets and embedded files, require a CGI script address to function properly after you publish a drawing to the World Wide Web. To save objects to a Web-compatible format 1. Click File Publish to the Web HTML. 2. Choose the HTML layout from the HTML layout method list box. 3. Choose a destination folder. 4. Choose an image subfolder. 5. Choose an export range. • You can check to see whether there are any issues by clicking the Issues tab. Optimizing bitmaps for the World Wide Web You can save objects and optimize them for the World Wide Web. When you optimize an image for the Web, you can export to a GIF, JPEG, JPEG 2000, PNG 8-bit, and PNG 24-bit file type, choose a Web preset, and compare the previewed results. The Web presets are optimized for color, dithering, compression, and smoothing, depending on the file type you choose. You can compare up to four file types by viewing their download speed, image quality, file size, color range, and compression size as well as by panning and zooming in the image. You can also add and delete Web presets of your own. To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format 1. Click File Publish to the Web Web image optimizer. 2. Choose a speed from the Connection speed list box. 3. Choose one of the following pane display options: • Single pane • Double-vertical panes • Double-horizontal panes • Four panes 4. Keep one pane as the original image. In one or more of the other panes, choose from the following list boxes below the preview window: • File type • Web preset • If no objects are selected, all of the active page’s content is exported. You can also Edit preset settings for a single preview area Click Advanced. In the Export dialog box, customize the preset options. If you select GIF or PNG8 file formats, you can modify the color palette and settings in the Convert to paletted dialog box. Save the current configuration of settings for a preview area Click the Save settings button for each area where you want to save the settings. Save a custom preset Click Add . Delete a preset Click Delete . Display file information below each preview window Click Preview. Pan to another section of the image Drag in the preview window of the original image. Zoom in the preview window Choose a magnification from the Zoom level list box. • Some browsers require a plug-in to display JPEG 2000 files. • You can compare file types with the original image by choosing Original from the File type list box in one of the panes. Creating rollovers Rollovers are interactive objects that change in appearance when you click or point to them. You can create rollovers using objects. To create a rollover, you add the following rollover states: • Normal — the default state of a button when no mouse activity is associated with the button • Over — the state of a button when the pointer passes over it • Down — the state of a clicked button To edit the rollover states, you can view the rollover states and their properties. Rollovers showing Normal (left), Over (center), and Down (right) states To publish a rollover to the Internet, you must save the rollover to a Web-compatible file format by publishing to HTML or to the Macromedia Flash (SWF) format.For information on publishing to the Web, see "Publishing to the Web." For more information about creating and editing objects such as rollovers, see "Working with objects." To create a rollover object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects Rollover Create rollover. To edit a rollover object 1. Select an object. 2. Click Effects Rollover Edit rollover. 3. Specify the attributes of each state. 4. Click Effects Rollover Finish editing rollover. • You cannot close a drawing in which you are editing a rollover. You must finish editing first. • You can also edit a rollover object by clicking the Edit rollover button on the Internet toolbar. To view the rollover states 1. Click Window Toolbars Internet. If the Internet command is not available, click Tools Options, click Command bars in the Workspace, Customization list of categories, and ensure the Internet check box is enabled. 2. On the Internet toolbar, choose between the Normal, Over, and Down states from the Active rollover state list box. • You can preview a rollover object’s states in the drawing page by clicking View Enable rollover. To quit previewing the rollover so that you can edit it, click View Enable rollover. You cannot undo while previewing a rollover. To view rollover properties 1. Click Window Dockers Object manager. 2. Click the page and layer where the rollover resides. 3. Click the rollover name, and expand the Normal, Over, and Down states. Creating Web-compatible text When you convert paragraph text to Web-compatible text, you can edit the text of the published document in an HTML editor. If you are publishing a drawing to the Web as HTML, you can change text font characteristics, including the font type, size, and style. The Web-compatible text sizes, numbered 1 through 7, correspond to particular point sizes between the 10-point and 48-point range. For more information about formatting text, see "Formatting paragraph text." The default Web font style is used automatically unless you override it with another font. If you choose to override it, the default font is used when visitors to your Web site don’t have the same font installed on their computers. The bold, italic, and underline text styles are also available. You can apply uniform fills, but not outlines, to Web-compatible text. Any non-Web-compatible text in your drawing is converted to bitmaps when you publish your drawing to the World Wide Web as HTML. To make text Web-compatible To Do the following Change paragraph text to Web-compatible text Select the paragraph text. Click Text Make text Web compatible. Make new text Web-compatible Click Tools Options. In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Text, and click Paragraph. Enable the Make all new paragraph text frames Web compatible check box. • Ensure that the Web-compatible text does not intersect or overlap other objects or extend beyond the boundaries of the drawing page; otherwise the text will be converted to a bitmap, and it will lose its Internet properties. • Artistic text cannot be converted to Web-compatible text and is always treated as a bitmap. However, you can convert it to paragraph text and then make it Web compatible. For information on converting text, see "Finding, editing, and converting text." Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks CorelDRAW lets you create bookmarks and hyperlinks in your Web document. You can apply these to rollovers, bitmaps, and other objects. Bookmarks To create an internal link in an HTML file, you can assign a bookmark to text or to an object. You can then assign a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) to an object that links to the bookmark. The object containing a URL has a hotspot, an area that activates a hyperlink when clicked in a browser. Hyperlinks Within a document, you can connect a hyperlink to any object that has been assigned a bookmark, or to any document on the Web by using that document’s URL. You can also set a hotspot that follows the outline of the object, or fills the object’s bounding box. When working with text, you can assign a hyperlink to both artistic and paragraph text. CorelDRAW applies a crosshatch pattern to an object containing a hyperlink. You can change the color of the crosshatch pattern as well as its background fill. After you create hyperlinks, you can display and verify them. To assign a bookmark 1. Right-click an object, and click Properties. 2. Click the Internet tab . 3. Choose Bookmark from the Behavior list box. 4. Type the name of the bookmark. To assign a hyperlink to a bookmark or external Web site 1. Right-click an object, and click Properties. 2. Click the Internet tab . 3. Choose URL from the Behavior list box. 4. Type a URL address. You can also Specify what frame appears when the rollover is clicked Choose a target frame from the Target list box. Add a description of the object for text-only browsers Type the text in the Alt comments text box. Define the hotspot area Choose Object shape or Object’s bounding box from the Define hotspot using list box. • URLs to external Web sites must contain the http:// prefix. Other supported protocols include mailto:, ftp:, and file:. • You can rename a bookmark and create a hyperlinked bookmarked object from a document object by using the Internet bookmark manager docker to assign a hyperlink to text 1. Using the Text tool , select the text characters to which you want to assign a hyperlink. 2. Click Window Dockers Properties. 3. Click the Internet tab . 4. Choose URL from the Behavior list box. 5. Type the Web site address in the URL box. • To activate the hyperlink, you must save the drawing before you publish to HTML. For more information about publishing drawings to HTML, see "Publishing to HTML." • By default, when you type “www”, a hyperlink is created automatically. To disable this functionality, click Tools Options. Then, double-click Text in the list of categories, click QuickCorrect, and disable the Automatically hyperlink check box. • You can also create an e-mail hyperlink by typing “mailto:” followed by an e-mail address. o assign a hyperlink to text 1. Using the Text tool , select the text characters to which you want to assign a hyperlink. 2. Click Window Dockers Properties. 3. Click the Internet tab . 4. Choose URL from the Behavior list box. 5. Type the Web site address in the URL box. • To activate the hyperlink, you must save the drawing before you publish to HTML. For more information about publishing drawings to HTML, see "Publishing to HTML." • By default, when you type “www”, a hyperlink is created automatically. To disable this functionality, click Tools Options. Then, double-click Text in the list of categories, click QuickCorrect, and disable the Automatically hyperlink check box. • You can also create an e-mail hyperlink by typing “mailto:” followed by an e-mail address. To assign crosshatch and background hotspot colors 1. Click Window Dockers Properties. 2. Click the Internet tab . 3. Open the Cross-hatch color picker , and click a color. 4. Open the Background color picker , and click a color. • If you choose a hyperlinked object first and then change the crosshatch and background hotspot colors, the change applies to the selected object only. If you change the hotspot colors with no object selected, the default colors are changed for this drawing and for future sessions of CorelDRAW. To display hyperlinked objects 1. Click Window Toolbars Internet. If the Internet command is not available, click Tools Options, click Command bars in the Workspace, Customization list of categories, and ensure the Internet check box is enabled. 2. On the Internet toolbar, enable the Show hotspots button . All objects to which you’ve assigned URLs appear in the crosshatch and background hotspot colors. To verify links in a Web document 1. Click Window Dockers Link manager. 2. In the list, verify that all URL links display a green check mark. 3. Click the Refresh button to verify any broken links. • You can also verify a single link in the Link manager by right-clicking it and clicking Verify link. • If you want to test a link by opening a URL in a Web browser, right-click the object, and click Jump to hyperlink in browser. Publishing to the Web You can ensure that your CorelDRAW files and objects publish to HTML successfully by setting document elements to be Web-compatible, selecting the settings you want, and checking Preflight issues. You can then publish to HTML. The resulting HTML code and images can be used in HTML authoring software for creating a Web site or page. In this section, you’ll learn about • preparing files and objects for Web publishing • publishing to HTML Preparing files and objects for Web publishing You can prepare your files and objects for the Web by setting preferences and verifying the objects before you export them. The CorelDRAW application provides options for publishing your document to the World Wide Web. You can determine layout options, set link colors, and select HTML text preferences. Among the text export options, you can export Web-compatible text as plain text so that users can copy and reuse the text, or you can export all text as images so that the text will always display as you designed it. You can export your graphics to preset JPEG, GIF, or PNG formats. You can also publish your document as a single image, from which the application creates an image map. An image map is a hypergraphic whose hotspots link to different URLs — including pages, locations, and images — when you view the HTML document with a browser. Note that large image maps might cause slow downloads for those with a slow Internet connection. You can check the download times of your Web page objects through a browser preview. To change text export preferences 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to Web, and click Text. 3. Enable one of the following options: • Export HTML compatible text as text — exports the Web-compatible text as text • Export all text as images — exports the text as images and ensures compatibility for all browsers • Exporting all text as images can increase download times because of the larger file sizes. To change link export preferences 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to the Web, and click Links. 3. Enable the Underline check box. 4. Enable the following check boxes, and select a color for each: • Normal link • Active link • Visited link • The link colors set in the Options dialog box are exported with the file, eliminating any conflict between link color and your document’s page background color. To change image export preferences 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Document, Publish to the Web, and click Image. 3. In the Export image using area, enable one of the following image format options: • JPEG • GIF • PNG 4. Set any bitmap options. You can also Apply anti-aliasing Enable the Anti-alias check box. Create a Client-side image map Enable the Client check box. Create a Server-side image map Enable the Server check box, and choose a format. To change HTML layout export preferences 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Document, and click Publish to the Web. 3. Type values in the following boxes: • Position tolerance — lets you specify the number of pixels text can be automatically nudged to avoid introducing rows or columns that are only a few pixels in size • Image white space — lets you specify the number of pixels that can occur in an empty cell before it’s merged with an adjacent cell. This lets you avoid splitting a single graphic that spans adjacent cells. Cells or tables are used to position Internet objects in your Web document when you choose the HTML Tables layout method • Position white space — lets you specify the amount of white space allowed in an image To preview a Web page 1. Click File Publish to the Web HTML. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Click Browser preview. To set Web preflight options 1. Click File Publish to the Web HTML. 2. Click the Issues tab. 3. Click Settings. 4. In the Issues to check for list, expand the Publishing to Web tree. 5. Deselect the issues you do not want to check. Publishing to HTML When publishing a document or selection to the World Wide Web, you can choose several options, such as image format, HTML layout, export range, and file transfer protocol (FTP) site parameters. To publish to the Web 1. Click File Publish to the Web HTML. 2. Set the following options in the Publish to the Web dialog box: • General — contains options for HTML layout, folders for HTML file and images, and FTP site and export range. You can also select, add, and remove presets. • Details — contains details of HTML files produced, and allows you to change the page name and file name • Images — lists all images for the current HTML export. You can set individual objects to JPEG, GIF, and PNG formats. Click Options to select presets for each image type. • Advanced — provides options for generating JavaScript for rollovers and cascading style sheets, and maintaining links to external files • Summary — shows statistics for files according to various download speeds • Issues — displays a list of potential issues, including explanations, suggestions, and tips • CorelDRAW assigns the extension .htm to documents you publish in the HTML format. By default, HTML files share the same name as the CorelDRAW (CDR) source file and are saved in the last folder you used to store exported Web documents. Managing projects The Object Data Manager is an advanced feature that is particularly useful as a project management tool when you create or supervise a large project. Using the Object Data Manager is like having a small spreadsheet program, like Quattro Pro or Microsoft Excel, within your graphics program. You can enter many types of project data about individual objects or groups of objects. In this section, you’ll learn about • setting up the project database • assigning and copying object data • viewing an object data summary Setting up the project database Before you assign project data to objects in a drawing, you need to know what information you want to display. By default, CorelDRAW creates four data fields: Name, Cost, Comments, and CDRStaticID. The first three fields can be edited or deleted as required. The CDRStaticID field is hidden; it is used by CorelDRAW to identify objects, and it can’t be edited or deleted. You can create and assign as many data fields as you want, as long as they use permitted format variables. For more information about assigning data fields, see "Assigning and copying object data." At any time, you can change the setting, such as the name or format, of a data field. If you require custom fields, you can define their formats using four basic field formats: General, Date/time, Linear/angular, and Numeric. Each of these formats provides a series of common settings. If the preset formats in CorelDRAW don’t provide the information you want in your data summary, you can create your own custom formats using the variables available for the format type you’re using. The field format you select is used for all objects in the active drawing. You can reorder fields to display them in a logical order on the data summary. You can also delete any data field except CDRStaticID. When you delete a field, you also delete all data entered for that field in the active document. To add a data field 1. Click Tools Object Data Manager. 2. In the Object data docker, click the Open Field Editor button . 3. In the Object data field editor dialog box, click Create new field. 4. To change the name of the field you created, double-click the field, type a new name, and press Enter. 5. In the Add field to area, enable one or both of the following check boxes: • Application defaults — stores the new field in the application • Document defaults — stores the new field in the current document • You can also use this procedure to change the settings of an existing data field. You can also Change the format of a data field Select the data field, and click Change in the Format area. In the Format definition dialog box, enable the option beside the format type you want to use, and choose a format from the Format type list. Create a custom format for a data field Select the data field, and click Change in the Format area. In the Format definition dialog box, enable the option beside the format type you want to create. Type the format in the Create box, and press Enter. Delete a data field Choose the name of the data field from the list. To choose multiple fields, hold down Ctrl , and click the names in the list. Click Delete field(s) . Assigning and copying object data After creating all the data fields you want for a drawing, you can create a database. The Object data docker and the Object Data Manager provide all the commands and features you need to add and edit object information. The Object data docker is best for entering data for single objects. It lets you add, edit, and delete object data.The Object Data Manager, in contrast, is best for entering and editing data for multiple objects. It provides many of the editing features available in popular spreadsheet applications. You can use one object’s data entries to update another object’s data entries. This function does not replace an object’s data entries; rather, it appends fields and data where appropriate. To add or edit data for an object 1. Select the object using the Pick tool . 2. Click Tools Object Data Manager. 3. Select a data field. Type text in the Value column for the field, and press Enter. 4. Repeat step 3 to add data to other fields. You can also Clear one field Click the Clear field button . Clear all fields Click the Clear all fields button . To add or edit data for multiple objects 1. Select the objects using the Pick tool . 2. Click Tools Object Data Manager. 3. In the Object data docker, click the Open spreadsheet button . 4. In the Object Data Manager window, click a cell, and type the appropriate data. Press Enter to assign the entry to the cell, the fields, and the objects. To copy data from one object to another 1. Using the Pick tool , select the object to which you want to copy data. 2. Click Tools Object Data Manager. 3. In the Object data docker, click the Copy data from button . 4. Click the object from which you want to copy data. Viewing an object data summary The Object Data Manager provides the commands and functions you need to view your object data summary. It summarizes the information you’ve assigned to the objects in a drawing. While the Object Data Manager can be used to view and edit data associated with a single object, its main purpose is to help you view and manage large amounts of data associated with multiple objects contained in various groups in a drawing. You can change how object data displays: • You can display individual group subtotals for fields shared by multiple groups. Use this command when more than one group of objects is displayed in a datasheet. This command applies only to fields with numeric formats. • To create a visible distinction between groups in a column, you can place a two-space indent before data relating to objects in groups. • You can have the Object Data Manager automatically total the values in the selected column. The total is displayed at the bottom of the column. The Object Data Manager gives you access to all of the application’s printing capabilities. This gives you the option to print quickly or print using specific settings. To view an object data summary 1. Select the object or objects using the Pick tool . If you want to view an object data summary for the entire document, click Edit Select all Objects. 2. Click Tools Object Data Manager. 3. In the Object data docker, click the Open spreadsheet button . The object data summary displays in the Object Data Manager window. You can also Display or hide group subtotals Select the column by clicking the column title, and click Field options Summarize groups. A check mark beside the Summarize groups command indicates that the group subtotals are displayed in italics. Indent or align groups in a column Select the column by clicking the column title, and click Field options Show hierarchy. A check mark beside the Show hierarchy command indicates that the groups in a column are indented. Display or hide the sum of values in a column Select the column by clicking the column title, and click Field options Show totals. A check mark beside the Show totals command indicates that the sum of the values in a column are displayed. Print the object data summary Click File Print. Choose a printer from the Name list box. Type a number in the Number of copies box. For more information about the printing capabilities of CorelDRAW, see "Printing." Printing CorelDRAW provides extensive options for printing your work. In this section, you'll learn about • printing your work • laying out print jobs • previewing print jobs • applying print styles • fine-tuning print jobs • printing colors accurately • printing to a PostScript printer • using the Print merge wizard • using Preflight Printing your work In the CorelDRAW application, you can print one or more copies of the same drawing. You can specify what to print, as well as which parts of a drawing to print; for example, you can print selected vector objects, bitmaps, text, or layers. For more information about printing layers, see "To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer." Before printing a drawing, you can specify printer properties, including paper size and device options. To set printer properties 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Click Properties. 4. Set any properties in the dialog box. To print your work 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Choose a printer from the Name list box. 4. Type a value in the Number of copies box. If you want the copies collated, enable the Collate check box. 5. Enable one of the following options: • Current document — prints the active drawing • Current page — prints the active page • Pages — prints the pages that you specify • Documents — prints the documents that you specify • Selection — prints the objects that you have selected • You must select objects before printing a selection. • The Collate check box is available only for documents with more than one page. To print selected vector objects, bitmaps, or text 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. In the Proofing options area, enable any of the following check boxes: • Print vectors • Print bitmaps • Print text • You can print graphics in full color, monochrome, or grayscale, by enabling the corresponding check boxes in the Bitmap downsampling area. • You can print all text in black by enabling the Print all text in black check box. Laying out print jobs You can lay out a print job by specifying the size, position, and scale. Tiling a print job prints portions of each page on separate sheets of paper that you can assemble into one sheet. You would, for example, tile a print job that is larger than your printer paper. If the orientation of a print job differs from the orientation specified in the printer properties, a message prompts you to adjust the paper orientation of the printing device. You can disable this prompt, so that the printer adjusts paper orientation automatically. To specify the size and position of a print job 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Layout tab. 3. Enable one of the following options: • As in document — maintains the image size, as it is in the document • Fit to page — sizes and positions the print job to fit to a printed page • Reposition images to — lets you reposition the print job by choosing a position from the list box • Enabling the Reposition images to option lets you specify size, position, and scale in the corresponding boxes. To tile a print job 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Layout tab. 3. Enable the Print tiled pages check box. 4. Type values in the following boxes: • Tile overlap — lets you specify the number of inches by which to overlap tiles • % of page width — lets you specify the percentage of the page width the tiles will occupy • Enable the Tiling marks check box to include tiling alignment marks. To change the page orientation prompt 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3. Choose Page orientation prompt from the Option list. 4. Choose one of the following from the Setting list box: • Off — always match orientation • On — ask if orientations differ • Off — don't change orientation Previewing print jobs You can preview your work to show how the position and size of the print job will appear on paper. For a detailed view, you can zoom in on an area. You can view how the individual color separations will appear when printed. You can also increase the speed of a print preview by hiding the graphics. Before printing your work, you can view a summary of issues for a print job to find potential printing problems. For example, you can check the current print job for print errors, possible print problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. To preview a print job • Click File Print preview. • You can quickly preview a print job in the Print dialog box by clicking File Print, and clicking the Mini preview button . To magnify the preview page 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click View Zoom. 3. Enable the Percent option, and type a value in the box. • You can also magnify the preview page by choosing a preset zoom level. • You can also zoom in on a portion of the print preview by clicking the Zoom tool in the toolbox and marquee selecting an area. To preview color separations 1. Click File Print preview. 2. On the property bar, click the Enable color separations button . • You can preview the composite by clicking View Preview separations Composite. • You can view individual color separations by clicking the tabs at the bottom of the application window. To hide or display graphics 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click View Show image. A check mark beside the menu command name indicates that graphics are displayed. • When the Show image menu command is disabled, the print job is represented by a bounding box that you can use to position and size the job. To view a summary of issues for a print job 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Issues tab. If you don't want Preflight to check for certain issues, click Settings, double-click Printing, and disable any check boxes that correspond to issues you want overlooked. • You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style box. Applying print styles A print style is a set of saved printing options. Each print style is a separate file. This lets you move a print style from one computer to another, back up a print style, and keep document-specific styles in the same directory as the document file. You can select an existing print style, create a new print style, or edit a print style and save the changes. You can also delete print styles. To choose a print style 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Choose one of the following from the Print Style list box: • CorelDRAW defaults • Browse To create a print style 1. Click File Print. 2. Set any printing options. 3. Click the General tab. 4. Click Save as. 5. Choose the folder where you want to save the print style. 6. Type a name for the style in the File name box. • When you save a print style, a dialog box opens that includes a section called Settings to include. The settings in this section correspond to the printing options you have already selected. You can also specify which settings to include in a print style in this dialog box. • You can also save a print style by clicking File Print preview, and clicking the Save print style as button. To edit a print style 1. Click File Print. 2. Choose a print style from the Print style list box. 3. Modify any of the printing options. 4. Click Save as. 5. Choose the folder where the print style is stored. 6. Click the filename. 7. Click Save. • You should save the modified settings as a print style or apply the changes before canceling; otherwise, you’ll lose all of the modified settings. To delete a print style 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Select a print style. 3. Click the Delete print style button . Fine-tuning print jobs Problems sometimes occur when you are printing text to a non-PostScript printing device; for example, lower numbers of fountain steps can result in banding. You can specify the number of steps in the fountain fills in a print job. A higher value results in a smoother blend, but the printing time is longer. You can decrease printing time by specifying driver compatibility for non-PostScript printing devices. If a printing device has difficulty processing large bitmaps, you can divide a bitmap into smaller, more manageable chunks by setting an output threshold. If any lines appear when the printing device prints the chunks, you can set an overlap value to produce a seamless image. When printing color print jobs to a black-and-white printing device, you can specify whether to print in black or grayscale. You can rasterize a page of a print job. Rasterizing a page converts it to a bitmap and improves the print speed when printing to non-PostScript printing devices. To reduce file size, you can downsample bitmaps. Because bitmaps are made up of pixels, when you downsample a bitmap, the number of pixels per line decreases, which decreases the file size. To specify fountain steps in a print job 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. Type a value in the Fountain steps box. • Specifying the number of fountain steps in the Fountain fill dialog box will override the settings you specify on the Misc page. For information about specifying the number of fountain steps in the Fountain fill dialog box, see "To change the fountain fill print and display quality." To specify driver compatibility settings 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, Printing, and click Driver compatibility. 3. Choose a non-PostScript printing device from the Printer list box. 4. Enable any of the check boxes that correspond to the settings you want to specify To choose a threshold and chunk overlap 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3. From the Option list, choose one of the following: • Bitmap output threshold (K) • Bitmap chunk overlap pixels 4. Choose a value from the Setting list box. To print color print jobs in black or grayscale 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. Enable one of the following options: • All colors as black • All colors as grayscale To rasterize a page 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. Enable the Rasterize entire page check box, and type a number in the box to set the resolution. To downsample bitmaps 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. From the Bitmap downsampling area, enable any of the following check boxes and type a value in the corresponding box: • Color • Grayscale • Monochrome • Downsampling bitmaps affects them only when their resolution is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area. Printing colors accurately To print colors accurately, you can apply an International Color Consortium (ICC) color profile. Using color management also helps you ensure accurate color reproduction. You can output color bitmaps as CMYK, RGB, or grayscale. For more information on color management, see "Managing color for display, input, and output." To apply an ICC color profile 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. Enable the Apply ICC profile check box. • Applying an ICC color profile on the Misc page will use the settings that you specified for separations printer profiles in the Color management dialog box, when printing separations, and it will use the composite printer profiles when printing composites. For information about applying an ICC color profile in the Color management dialog box, see "To choose a color profile." To output color bitmaps 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. Choose one of the following from the Output color bitmaps as list box: • CMYK • RGB • Grayscale • The CMYK option is available only for PostScript devices. Printing to a PostScript printer PostScript is a page-description language that sends printing instructions to a PostScript device. All the elements in a print job (for example, curves and text) are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printing device uses to produce the document. For improved compatibility you can choose a device independent PostScript device. You can also select a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. A PostScript Printer Description file describes the capabilities and features of your PostScript printer and is available from your printer's manufacturer. You can print to a PostScript printing device. To ensure that a print job prints properly on a PostScript Level 1 device, you can test for potential issues such as complex graphics and banding in fountain fills. You can automatically increase the fountain steps in a fountain fill to decrease banding. To ensure that your print jobs print properly, you can reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness. Curve flatness determines how smooth a curve appears when printed. A print job that contains too many fonts may not print properly, and a print job that contains too many spot colors increases file size. You can set the PostScript options to warn you when a print job contains more than a set number of fonts or spot colors. By default, the printing device driver downloads Type 1 fonts to the printing device. You can disable the Download Type 1 Fonts option, so that fonts are printed as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful when the file contains many fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download or would fail to download because of their file size. Bitmap versions of TrueType fonts look better in small print and print faster than regular fonts. You can choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts that a print job can contain. To select a PostScript Printer Description file 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box. 4. Enable the Use PPD check box. 5. Choose the folder where the file is stored. 6. Double-click the filename. To print to a PostScript device 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Choose a PostScript printer from the Name list box. 4. Click the PostScript tab. 5. From the list box in the Compatibility area, choose the PostScript level that corresponds to the printer. If you want to compress bitmaps when printing, enable the Use JPEG compression check box in the Bitmaps area, and move the JPEG quality slider. • Bitmap compression settings can be saved in PostScript Interpreted (PS or PRN) files when you print to a file using a PostScript driver. For information about printing to a file, see "To print to a file." To test for complex graphics 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Issues tab. 3. Click Settings. 4. Double-click Printing. 5. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Text with texture fills (PS Level1 Only) • Bitmaps in complex clipping paths (PS Level1 only) • Texture fills in complex objects (PS Level1 only) • Complex clipping regions (PS Level1 only) • Objects with outline having many nodes (PS Level1 only) • Objects with outline and fill having many nodes (PS Level1 only) To test fountain fills for banding 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Issues tab. 3. Click Settings. 4. Double-click Printing. 5. Enable the Banded fountain fills check box. If you want to optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity, enable the Optimize fountain fills check box under the PostScript tab. • Testing fountain fills for banding applies only to linear fountain fills. To automatically increase fountain steps 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the PostScript tab. 3. Enable the Auto increase fountain steps check box. • Enabling the Auto increase fountain steps check box increases the number of steps used to render fountain fills, which may increase printing time. To reduce curve complexity 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the PostScript tab. 3. Type a value in the Maximum points per curve box. 4. Type a value in the Set flatness to box. 5. Enable the Auto increase flatness check box. • Reducing curve complexity can help alleviate printing problems caused by curves that have too many points on each curve, but it results in increased printing time. • As the flatness increases, curves begin to appear as connected straight lines. • When the Auto increase flatness check box is enabled, the maximum allowable flatness value, specified in the Set flatness to box, increases by a value of 10. If a curve is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds this limit, the printing device skips the problematic curve. If the printing device skips a curve, it does not appear in the final output. For this reason, it is important to inspect proofs before you publish the work. • If you are having problems printing complex objects, type 10 in the Set flatness to box. If this does not achieve the required results, continue to increase the flatness value by increments of two, and evaluate the results. To set color separations and font warning options 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3. Choose Spot color separations warning from the Option list. 4. Choose one of the following from the Setting list box: • If any spot colors are used • If more than 1 spot color used • If more than 2 spot colors used • If more than 3 spot colors used 5. Choose Many fonts (preflight) from the Option list, and choose a number from the Setting list box that appears. To disable the downloading of Type 1 fonts 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the PostScript tab. 3. Disable the Download Type1 fonts check box. • Type 1 fonts can be downloaded only for PostScript devices. • When the Download Type1 fonts check box is enabled, the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box is enabled by default. This ensures that TrueType fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Disable the Convert TrueType to Type1 check box only if the output device has difficulty interpreting Type 1 fonts. To choose the maximum number of bitmap fonts 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3. Choose Bitmap font limit (PS) from the Option list. 4. Choose a value from the Settings list box. If you want to set a maximum bitmap font size, choose a font size from the Bitmap font size threshold (PS) list box. Using the Print merge wizard You can use the Print merge wizard to combine text with a drawing; for example, you can personalize an invitation by printing a different recipient's name on each invitation. The following steps provide a general overview of the process of merging a document. A. Create or open an existing data file — You can open a new file or an existing data file. CorelDRAW supports the following files: Text (TXT), Comma-separated Values (CSV), and Rich Text Format (RTF). B. Create data fields — You can specify data field names. C. Input data in the data fields — Once you have created a list of data fields, you can input data under the data field names. D. Save the data file — You can save information in the data fields in a text file. E. Insert the fields in the drawing — You can specify fields and their position in a drawing by clicking on the Insert selected print merge field icon, choosing a field name from the list box, and clicking anywhere on the drawing. F. Merge the data file and the drawing — You can preview the merged document in the Print Preview window. Data fields are merged with a drawing when you print the document. The steps above may vary if you are using an existing data file. To create merge fields 1. Click File Print merge Create merge fields. 2. Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard. • You can also create merge fields by clicking the Create/Load print merge fields button on the property bar. To edit merge fields 1. Click File Print merge Edit merge fields. 2. Follow the instructions in the Print merge wizard. • You can also edit merge fields by clicking the Edit print merge fields button on the property bar. To perform a merge 1. Click File Print merge Perform merge. 2. Specify any printer settings. 3. Click Print. If you want to ensure that all fields and pages print, enable the Current document option. Using Preflight Preflight checks the status of your file before you decide to output it. A summary of issues and potential problems, and suggestions for resolving them is provided. You can specify which issues Preflight checks for. You can also save Preflight settings. For more information about specific Preflight settings, see any of the following: • To check for issues relating to printing a file, see "To view a summary of issues for a print job." • To check for issues relating to publishing a PDF file, see "To view the preflight summary for a PDF file." • To check for issues relating to publishing to the Web, see "To set Web preflight options." • To check for issues relating to exporting a SWF file, see "To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file." • To check for issues relating to exporting an SVG file, see "Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG)." Commercial printing With CorelDRAW, you can prepare a print job for commercial printing. In this section, you’ll learn about • preparing a print job for a service bureau • working with imposition layouts • printing printers’ marks • maintaining OPI links • printing color separations • working with color trapping and overprinting • specifying In-RIP trapping settings • printing to film • understanding commercial printing Preparing a print job for a service bureau You can use the Prepare for Service Bureau wizard to guide you through the process of sending a file to a service bureau. The wizard simplifies processes such as creating PostScript and PDF files; gathering different pieces required for outputting an image; and copying the original image, embedded image files, and fonts to a user-defined location. You can print a drawing to a file, which lets the service bureau send the file directly to an output device. If you are unsure about which settings to choose, consult the service bureau. You can include a job information sheet with all the pre-press settings that you have specified. For more information about commercial printing, see "Understanding commercial printing." To use the Prepare for Service Bureau wizard 1. Click File Prepare for service bureau. 2. Enable one of the following options: • Gather all files associated with this document • Choose a profile provided by your service bureau • The PDF file settings for the service bureau and the PDF for prepress settings are identical. For information about the PDF for prepress style settings, see "Saving documents as PDF files." • To create a service bureau profile, you need the Service Bureau Profiler utility, which is installed by default with CorelDRAW. To print to a file 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the General tab. 3. Enable the Print to file check box. 4. Click the flyout arrow, and click one of the following commands: • For Mac — saves the drawing to be readable on a Macintosh computer • Single file — prints pages to a single file • Pages to separate files — prints pages to separate files • Plates to separate files — prints plates to separate files 5. Click Print. 6. Choose one of the following from the Save as type list box: • Print file — saves the file as a PRN file • PostScript file — saves the file as a PS file 7. Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 8. Type a filename in the File name box. • If you prefer not to prepare PostScript files, service bureaus equipped with the application in which you created your work can take the original files (for example, CorelDRAW files) and apply the required prepress settings. To include a job information sheet with the print job 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Misc tab. 3. Enable the Print job information sheet check box. 4. Click Info settings. 5. In the Information area, disable any of the options. 6. In the Destination area, enable one of the following: • Send to text file • Send to printer Working with imposition layouts Working with imposition layouts lets you print more than one page of a document on each sheet of paper. You can choose a preset imposition layout to create documents such as magazines and books to print on a commercial printing press; produce documents that involve cutting or folding, such as mailing labels, business cards, pamphlets, or greeting cards; or print multiple thumbnails of a document on one page. You can also edit a preset imposition layout to create your own layout. You can select a binding method by choosing from three preset binding methods, or you can customize a binding method. When you choose a preset binding method, all but the first signature are automatically arranged. You can arrange pages on a signature manually or automatically. When you arrange the pages automatically, you can choose the angle of the image. If you have more than one page across or down, you can specify the size of gutters between pages; for example, you can choose the automatic gutter spacing option, which sizes gutters so that the document's pages fill the entire available space in the layout. When printing on a desktop printer, you can adjust the margins to accommodate the non-printable area of a page. If the margin is smaller than the non-printable area, the edges of some pages or some printers’ marks may be clipped by your printer. To choose a preset imposition layout 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Layout tab. 3. Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box. • The layout you choose does not affect the original document, only the way it is printed. To edit an imposition layout 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Layout tab. 3. Choose an imposition layout from the Imposition layout list box. 4. Click Edit. 5. Edit any imposition layout settings. 6. Click Save layout on the property bar. 7. Type a name for the imposition layout in the Save as box. • When editing an imposition layout, you should save it with a new name; otherwise the settings for a preset imposition layout will be overwritten. To select a binding method 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click the Imposition layout tool . 3. Choose Edit basic settings from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4. Type values in the Pages across/down boxes. If you want the page to be double-sided, click the Single/double sided button . 5. Choose one of the following binding methods from the Binding mode list box: • Perfect binding • Saddle stitch • Collate and cut • Custom binding If you choose either Perfect binding or Custom binding, type a value in the corresponding box. • When you click the Single/double sided button for double-sided printing, and you are printing on a non-duplex printing device, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the paper into the printer, so that you can print on both sides of the page. To arrange pages 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click the Imposition layout tool . 3. Choose Edit page placements from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4. Click one of the following buttons: • Intelligent auto-ordering • Sequential auto-ordering • Cloned auto-ordering If you want to arrange the page numbering manually, click on the page and specify the page number in the Page sequence number box. 5. Choose an angle from the Page rotation list box. To edit gutters 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click the Imposition layout tool . 3. Choose Edit gutters and finishing from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4. Click one of the following buttons: • Auto gutter spacing • Equal gutters 5. Click one of the following buttons: • Cut location • Fold location • If you click the Equal gutters button, you must specify a value in the Gutter size box. • You can edit the gutters only if you've selected an imposition layout with two or more pages across and down. To adjust margins 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click the Imposition layout tool . 3. Choose Edit margins from the What to edit list box on the property bar. 4. Click one of the following buttons: • Auto margins • Equal margins • If you click the Equal margins button, you must specify values in the Top/left margin boxes. • When preparing a job for a commercial press, the service bureau may request minimum margin sizes, such as for page grippers and printers’ marks. Printing printers’ marks Printing printers’ marks lets you display information on a page about how a work should be printed. You can specify the position of the printers’ marks on the page. The available printers’ marks are as follows: • Crop/fold marks — represent the size of the paper and print at the corners of the page. You can print crop/fold marks to use as guides to trim the paper. If you print multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns), you can choose to print the crop/fold marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop/fold marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. Crop/fold marks ensure that marks appear on each plate of a separated CMYK file. • Bleed limit — determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. When you use a bleed to extend the print job to the edge of the page, you must set a bleed limit. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the print job must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size. • Registration marks — are required to line up film for proofing or printing plates on a color press. They print on each sheet of a color separation. • Color calibration bars — are color scales that print on each sheet of a color separation and ensure accurate color reproduction. To see calibration bars, the page size of the print job must be larger than the page size of the work you are printing. • Densitometer scale — is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale. • Page numbers — helps you collate pages of an image that do not include any page numbers or do not contain page numbers that correspond to the actual number of pages • File information — prints file information, such as, the color profile; halftone settings; name, date, and time the image was created; plate number; and job name To print crop and fold marks 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. Enable the Crop/fold marks check box. If you want to print only the exterior crop/fold marks, enable the Exterior only check box. • To print crop and fold marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing. • To set crop and fold marks, see "To edit gutters." To print composite crop and fold marks 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3. Choose Composite crop marks from the Option list. 4. Choose Output on all plates from the Setting list box. To set a bleed limit 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Layout tab. 3. Enable the Bleed limit check box. 4. Type a value in the Bleed limit box. • Usually, a bleed limit of 0.125 to 0.25 inches is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses memory needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper. To print registration marks 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. Enable the Print registration marks check box. 4. Choose a registration mark style from the Style list box. • To print registration marks, the paper on which you print must be 0.5 inches larger on all sides than the page size of the image that you are printing. To print color calibration bars and densitometer scales 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. In the Calibration bars area, enable any of the following check boxes: • Color calibration bar • Densitometer scales If you want to customize the levels of gray in one of the densitometer scale squares, choose a number from the Densities list (lower values represent lighter squares), and type a new density for that square. To print page numbers 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. Enable the Print page numbers check box. If you want to position the page number inside the page, enable the Position within page check box. To print file information 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. Enable the Print file information check box. 4. Type a job name in the Job name/slug line box. If you want to position the file information inside the page, enable the Position within page check box. To position printers’ marks 1. Click File Print preview. 2. Click the Marks placement tool . 3. Click the Auto-position marks rectangle button on the property bar. 4. Type values in the Marks alignment rectangle boxes. • You can also change the position of printers’ marks by clicking on a printers’ mark icon in the print preview window and dragging the bounding box. • If you want to affix printers’ marks to the object's bounding box instead of to the page bounding box, click the Prepress tab in the Print dialog box, and enable the Marks to objects check box. Maintaining OPI links Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a service bureau receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution placeholders. To maintain OPI links 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the PostScript tab. 3. Enable the Maintain OPI links check box. • The Maintain OPI links option is available for PostScript devices only. • You can reduce your work time by using OPI and print management server solutions, such as Creo Color Central. Low-resolution samples are automatically created from the high-resolution originals and are placed in CorelDRAW. These files contain their own OPI comments, which the Creo Color Central server recognizes when it receives the job and then substitutes the high-resolution version of the file for the low-resolution version. • When you import the low-resolution images into your document, they must be flagged as OPI images using third-party software. Printing color separations When you send color work to a service bureau or printing shop, either you or the service bureau must create color separations. Color separations are necessary because a typical printing press applies only one color of ink at a time to a sheet of paper. You can specify the color separations to print, including the order in which they print. Printing presses produce color using either process color or spot color, or both. You can convert the spot colors to process colors at printing time. For more information on spot and process colors, see "Choosing colors." Corel also supports PANTONE Hexachrome, a type of printing process that increases the range of printable colors.Talk to the service bureau about whether you should use PANTONE Hexachrome color. When setting halftone screens to print color separations, we recommend that you use default settings; otherwise, screens can be improperly set and result in undesirable moiré patterns and poor color reproduction. However, if you are using an imagesetter, the screen technology should be set to match the type of imagesetter the service bureau uses. Before customizing a halftone screen, consult the service bureau to determine the correct setting. If you have overprinted areas, you can choose how you want those areas to print. For more information about overprinting, see "Working with color trapping and overprinting." To print color separations 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Print separations check box. If you want to print specific color separations, enable the corresponding check box in the list of color separations. • Although not recommended, you can print separations in color by enabling the Print separations in color check box in the Options area. • You can change the order in which color separations print, by enabling the Use advanced settings check box, clicking Advanced, and choosing an order from the Order list box. To convert spot colors to process colors 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Convert spot colors to process check box. • Changing the spot colors to process colors does not affect the original CorelDRAW file; it affects the way colors are sent to the printer. To use PANTONE Hexachrome process color 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Print separations check box. 4. Enable the Hexachrome plates check box in the Options area. To customize a halftone screen 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Print separations check box. 4. Enable the Use advanced settings check box in the Options area. 5. Click Advanced. 6. Change any of the following settings: • Screening technology • Resolution • Basic screen • Halftone type • You can set the screen frequency, screen angle, and overprint options for spot colors as well as process colors. For example, if you have a fountain fill made up of two spot colors, you can set one to print at 45 degrees and the other at 90 degrees. Working with color trapping and overprinting When colors are trapped, they are intentionally overlapped so that misalignments of print separations are not noticeable. In manual trapping, one color must overprint the other. Overprint trapping works best when the top color is much darker than the underlying color; otherwise, an undesirable third color may result (for example, cyan over yellow results in a green object). In some cases, you might actually want to create a third color; for example, you can overprint two spot colors to create a third color. How overprinted colors mix depends on the type of colors and ink you are mixing and the types of objects you are overprinting. For example, an object that uses a CMYK color overprints differently from an object that uses a spot color. Bitmaps also overprint differently from vector objects. You can preview a simulation of how overprinted colors will mix by using the Enhanced with overprints viewing mode. For more information about choosing a viewing mode, see "Choosing viewing modes." Some variation between the preview and the printed version may occur, depending on the printer you use. When you are ready to print, you can choose to preserve overprint settings if you want to trap objects in a document, or if you want to mix the overlapping colors for effect. You can also choose to knock out the overprinted areas so that only the top color is visible. If you want to print a proof version of the file, you can simulate overprints. Simulating overprints rasterizes the file and it prints using process colors only. You can set a group of objects to overprint. You can overprint bitmaps; or each vector object’s fill, or outline, or both. You can also overprint specific color separations and specify in which order they will print, as well as whether you want to overprint graphics, or text, or both. The two methods for color trapping automatically are always overprinting black and auto-spreading. Always overprinting black creates a color trap by causing any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint any underlying objects. This option is useful for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content. You can adjust the threshold, if the service bureau recommends a black threshold value other than 95%. Auto-spreading creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill and having it overprint underlying objects. Auto-spreading is created for all objects in the file that meet three conditions: they do not already have an outline, are filled with a uniform fill, and have not already been designated to overprint. For advanced trapping options, see "Specifying In-RIP trapping settings." To preserve or ignore overprints when printing 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. From the Document overprints list box, choose one of the following options: • Preserve — preserves overprinted areas • Ignore — does not overprint areas; color on top prints and underlying colors are knocked out To print a simulated overprint 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. Ensure that the Print separations check box is disabled. 3. From the Document overprints list box, choose Simulate. The Simulate option rasterizes the file; the file is printed with process colors. To overprint selected objects 1. Select an object. 2. Click Edit, and choose any of the following: • Overprint outline • Overprint fill • Overprint bitmap • You can also set an object to overprint by right-clicking the object and choosing an overprint option from the context-menu. To overprint selected color separations 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Print separations check box. 4. Enable the Use advanced settings check box. 5. Click Advanced. 6. In the Advanced separations settings dialog box, choose a color separation from the Screening technology list box. 7. In the Overprint column, click one or both of the following icons: • Overprint graphics • Overprint text • The icons appear darker when the separation is set to overprint. • You can change the order in which color separations print by selecting a color separation and choosing an order from the Order list box. To trap by always overprinting black 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Print separations check box. 4. Enable the Always overprint black check box in the Trapping area. To set the overprint black threshold 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Printing. 3. Choose Overprint black threshold (PS) from the Option list. 4. Choose a number from the Setting list box. The number you choose represents the percentage of black above which black objects overprint. To trap by auto-spreading 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the Print separations check box. 4. Enable the Auto-spreading check box. 5. Type a value in the Maximum box. 6. Enable the Fixed width check box. The Maximum box changes to the Width box when you enable the Fixed width check box. 7. Type a value in the Text above box. • The value that you type in the Text above box represents the minimum size to which auto-spreading is applied. If you set this value too low, small text may be rendered illegible when auto-spreading is applied. • The amount of spread assigned to an object depends on the maximum trap value specified in the Maximum box and the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value. Specifying In-RIP trapping settings In-RIP trapping allows you to specify advanced trapping settings. Before selecting In-RIP trapping, ensure that your PostScript 3 printer supports In-RIP trapping options. You can select a trap width—the amount that one color spreads into another. You can also specify image trap placement, which determines where the trap occurs. You can, for example, specify whether the trap is a choke or a spread, depending upon the neutral densities of adjacent colors. Neutral density indicates the lightness or darkness of a color and helps determine how adjacent colors spread into one another. You can specify a threshold at which a trap will be created by specifying a step trap limit. If trap colors are of similar neutral densities, the trap placement will be adjusted accordingly. The step trap limit specifies a threshold at which a trap will adjust. Before trapping, you can set the inks; for example, you can set an ink to opaque, as in the case of a metallic ink, so that nothing shows through it. To reduce the visibility of a trap, you can decrease the amount of ink color in a trap. This is especially helpful in the case of pastel colors, contrasting colors, and colors with similar neutral densities. To select a trap width 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the In-RIP trapping check box. 4. Click Settings. 5. Type a value in the Trap width box. If you are trapping to black, type a value in the Black trap width box. • To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box. To specify image trap placement 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the In-RIP trapping check box. 4. Click Settings. 5. From the Image trap placement list box, choose one of the following placements: • Neutral density — used to determine the lighter object and thus, the direction and placement of the trap • Choke — used to trap a dark foreground object to a light background image • Spread — used to trap a light foreground object to a dark background image • Centerline — used when adjacent images and objects have similar neutral densities or when image density changes along an object's edge If you want to trap an object to an image, enable the Trap objects to images option. • To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab of the Print dialog box. To specify a threshold 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the In-RIP trapping check box. 4. Click Settings. 5. Type a value in one or any of the following boxes: • Step limit — specifies a threshold between color variations. The lower the threshold value, the more likely it is that a trap will be created. • Black limit — specifies the threshold at which process black is considered pure black • Black density limit — specifies a neutral density value for the black ink • Sliding trap limit — specifies the difference between the neutral densities of adjacent colors at which a trap adjusts (slides) from the darker side of a color edge toward the centerline. The lower the sliding trap limit, the more gradual the transition. • To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box. To set inks for trapping 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the In-RIP trapping check box. 4. Click Settings. 5. Click Type, and for each color separation, select one of the following: • Transparent — the selected ink doesn't get trapped, but anything beneath it does • Neutral density — the neutral density of the selected ink determines how it is treated • Opaque — the selected ink is treated as opaque • Opaque ignore — the selected ink doesn't get trapped nor does anything beneath it • To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box. To select a trap color reduction 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Separations tab. 3. Enable the In-RIP trapping check box. 4. Click Settings. 5. Type a value in the Trap color reduction box. • A reduction value of 100% indicates no reduction, while a lower value reduces the neutral density. • To select In-RIP trapping options, you must have selected PostScript 3 from the Compatibility list box under the PostScript tab in the Print dialog box. Printing to film You can set up a print job to produce negative images. An image-setter produces images on film that may need to be produced as negatives depending on which printing device you are using. Consult the service bureau or printing shop to determine whether you can produce images on film. You can specify to print with the emulsion down. Printing with the emulsion down produces a backward image on desktop printers. To print a negative 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. Enable the Invert check box. • Do not choose negative film if you are printing to a desktop printer. To specify film with the emulsion down 1. Click File Print. 2. Click the Prepress tab. 3. Enable the Mirror check box. Understanding commercial printing If you use commercial printing services for your print jobs, you probably use a service bureau or a printing shop. The service bureau takes your file and converts it directly to film or to plates. The printing shop uses the film from a service bureau to make printing plates. When you prepare a print job for commercial printing, you can send camera-ready paper output or the work on disk. If you send the work on disk, the service bureau needs either a PostScript file or a native file from the application that you use. If you are creating a file to send to an imagesetter or a plate-setter, speak with the service bureau about the best file format and printing device settings to use. Always provide a final printout of the work to the service bureau, even if it is only a black-and-white representation. This helps the service bureau to identify and assess any potential problems. Before printing a drawing, you must choose and properly configure the appropriate printing device driver. Consult the printing device manufacturer instructions, or the service bureau or printing shop that you use to print the work, to find out the best way to set up the printing device driver. Publishing to PDF PDF is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original application file. In this section, you’ll learn about • saving documents as PDF files • including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files • reducing PDF file size • working with text and fonts when creating PDF files • specifying the encoding format for PDF files • setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files • choosing an EPS file format • choosing a color model for objects in PDF files • preparing PDF files for a service bureau • setting security options for PDF files • viewing preflight summaries for PDF files • optimizing PDF files Saving documents as PDF files You can save a document as a PDF file. A PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed on any platform provided that users have Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Acrobat Reader, or a PDF-compatible reader installed on their computers.A PDF file can also be uploaded to an intranet or the Web. You can also export an individual selection or an entire document to a PDF file. When you save a document as a PDF file, you can choose from several preset PDF styles, which apply specific settings. For example, with the PDF for the Web style, the resolution of the images in the PDF file is optimized for the Web. You can also create a new PDF style or edit any preset style. PDF file security settings are not saved with PDF styles. For information about PDF file security options, see "Setting security options for PDF files." If you have used symbols in a document, they will be supported in the PDF file. For more information on symbols, see "Working with symbols." To save a document as a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. From the PDF style list box, choose one of the following: • PDF for document distribution — creates a PDF file that can be printed on a laser or desktop printer and is suitable for general document delivery. This style enables JPEG bitmap image compression and can include bookmarks and hyperlinks. • PDF for editing — creates a high-quality PDF file intended to be sent to a printer or digital copier. This style enables LZW compression, embeds fonts, and includes hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails. It displays the PDF file with all the fonts, with all of the images at full resolution, and with hyperlinks, so that you can edit the file at a later date. • PDF for prepress — enables ZIP bitmap image compression, embeds fonts, and preserves spot color options best designed for high-end quality printing. Consult the service bureau for their preferred settings. • PDF for the Web — creates a PDF file intended for online viewing, such as a PDF file to be distributed by e-mail or published on the Web. This style enables JPEG bitmap image compression, compresses text, and includes hyperlinks. • PDF/X-1a — enables ZIP bitmap image compression, converts all objects to CMYK, and preserves spot color options. This style contains the basic settings for prepress and is the standard format for ad distribution. • PDF/X-3 — This style is a superset of PDF/X-1a. It allows both CMYK and non-CMYK data (such as Lab or Grayscale) in the PDF file. 3. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 4. Type a filename in the File name box. To save multiple documents as a single PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the General tab. 4. Enable the Documents option. 5. Enable the check box for each document you want to save. To create a PDF style 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. In the Publish to PDF settings dialog box, specify any settings. 4. Click the General tab. 5. Click the Add PDF style button beside the PDF style list box. 6. Type a name for the style in the Save PDF style as list box. • If you want to delete a PDF style, select the style and click the Delete PDF style button beside the PDF style list box. To edit a PDF style 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. In the Publish to PDF settings dialog box, specify any settings. 4. Click the General tab. 5. Click the Add PDF style button beside the PDF style list box. 6. Choose a style from the Save PDF style as list box. • If you save changes you make to preset style settings, the original settings will be overwritten. To avoid this, save any changes to preset style settings with a new name. Including hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in PDF files You can include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file. Hyperlinks are useful for adding jumps to Web pages or to Internet URLs. Bookmarks allow you to link to specific areas in a PDF file. You can specify whether bookmarks or thumbnails are displayed when the PDF file is first opened in Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. For information about assigning hyperlinks and bookmarks, see "Working with bookmarks and hyperlinks." To include hyperlinks, bookmarks, and thumbnails in a PDF file 1. Choose File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Document tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Include hyperlinks • Generate bookmarks • Generate thumbnails If you want to display bookmarks or thumbnails on startup, enable the Bookmarks or Thumbnails button in the On start, display area. Reducing PDF file size You can compress bitmap images, text, and line art to reduce the size of a PDF file. Options for bitmap image compression include JPEG, LZW, and ZIP. Bitmap images that use JPEG compression have a quality scale ranging from 2 (high quality, less compression) to 255 (lower quality, more compression). The higher the image quality, the larger the file size. You can also reduce the size of a PDF file by downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images or converting complex fills to bitmaps. To set the bitmap compression in a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. Choose one of the following from the Compression type list box: • None • LZW • JPEG • JP2 • ZIP • The JP2 (JPEG 2000) option is available for Adobe Acrobat 6.0 only. • If you choose JPEG compression, you can specify the compression quality by moving the Quality factor slider To compress text and line art in a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. Enable the Compress text and line art check box. To downsample bitmap images in a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes, and type a value in the corresponding box: • Color • Grayscale • Monochrome • Downsampling color, grayscale, or monochrome bitmap images is effective only when the resolution of the bitmap image is higher than the resolution specified in the Bitmap downsampling area. To render complex fills as bitmaps 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Enable the Render complex fills as bitmaps check box. Working with text and fonts when creating PDF files You can determine how the text in your PDF file outputs by setting text and font options. You can choose how text is encoded in a PDF file to accommodate the type of text your file contains and specific output requirements. For example, if you are creating a multilingual document that includes, English, German, and Japanese, choose the Unicode encoding option. Unicode is designed to support text characters from a wide range of languages, including Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. If you are creating an English or German document, ASCII encoding is commonly used. The default setting should work in most cases, but the type of software or hardware you are using to output your files can also influence which encoding option you need. For example, older raster image processors (RIP) may not support type that is defined in a Unicode format. You can embed fonts in a PDF file, including PostScript base 14 fonts. Embedding increases the file size but makes a PDF file more portable, since the fonts do not have to reside on other systems. When you embed base 14 fonts, the fonts are added to your PDF file, thus eliminating font variances on different systems. The base 14 fonts are resident on all PostScript devices. You can also convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts, which can increase file size if there are many fonts in a file. When you convert fonts, you can reduce file size by subsetting Type 1 fonts if you use only a smaller number of characters (for example, English characters A to E). You can also include a percentage of fonts used. For example, you can create a subset of 50 percent of fonts. If the number of characters used in the document exceeds 50 percent, the whole set of characters is embedded. If the number of characters used in the document is less than 50 percent, only the characters used are embedded. You can also eliminate font variances on different computers by exporting text as curves. For example, if you are using unusual text characters, you can export the text as curves. Exporting text as curves increases the complexity of the file and can increase file size. For general document publication, embed fonts in a document rather than convert text to curves. To specify text encoding for a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. In the Text and fonts area, choose one of the following options: • ASCII — American Standard Code for Information Interchange. This format is generally more compatible with Latin-based languages than Unicode, but is not fully multilingual. • Unicode — a more recent encoding format that is fully multilingual. This format supports languages such as Chinese, Japanese, and Korean, but may not be supported by some raster image processors or viewers. To embed fonts in a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. Enable the Embed fonts in document check box. If you want to install the basic fonts to your PDF file, enable the Embed base 14 fonts check box. • Enabling the Embed base 14 fonts check box increases file size, and, therefore, it is not recommended for publishing to the World Wide Web. To convert TrueType fonts to Type 1 fonts 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. Enable the Convert TrueType to Type 1 check box. If you want to reduce file size, you can create a subset of Type 1 fonts by enabling the Subset fonts check box and typing a percentage of fonts used in the Under% of charset box. • If you create a subset of Type 1 fonts, you should not edit or correct the PDF file using Adobe Acrobat, since the characters you add when editing may not be present in the file. To export text as curves 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Objects tab. 4. Enable the Export all text as curves check box. Specifying the encoding format for PDF files ASCII and binary are encoding formats for documents. When you publish a file to PDF, you can choose to export ASCII or binary files. The ASCII format creates files that are fully portable to all platforms. The binary format creates smaller files, but they are less portable, because some platforms cannot handle the file format. Document encoding is not related to text encoding. For information about setting encoding options for text in PDF files, see "Working with text and fonts when creating PDF files." To specify an encoding format for a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Document tab. 4. Enable one of the following options: • ASCII 85 • Binary Setting the number of fountain steps in PDF files You can increase or decrease the number of steps for fountain fills. A low number of steps prints faster, but the transition between shades may be rather coarse. The number of fountain steps can be set between 1 and 256. To set the number of steps for fountain fills in a PDF file 1. Choose File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Type a value in the Fountain steps box. Choosing an EPS file format EPS files are PostScript files that are embedded in a document. You can choose how encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files are viewed in a PDF document. The PostScript option includes high-resolution images in the PDF document but does not let you view them in Adobe Acrobat. The Preview option includes high-resolution images in the PDF file and displays their low-resolution bitmap representation in Adobe Acrobat. To choose an EPS file format 1. Choose File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Choose one of the following from the EPS files list box: • PostScript — includes high-resolution images in the PDF document but does not let you view them • Preview — includes high-resolution images in the PDF file and displays their low-resolution bitmap representation Choosing a color model for objects in PDF files You can choose a color space option of RGB, CMYK, or grayscale for the output of objects in a PDF file. If you choose the CMYK option, you can apply a generic ICC profile to define the CMYK color space of your printer. For more information on ICC color profiles, see "Working with color profiles." To specify RGB, CMYK, or grayscale settings for a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Choose one of the following from the Output all objects as list box: • RGB • CMYK • Grayscale • Native If you want to use ICC color profiles to define the CMYK color space of your printer, enable the Apply ICC profile check box, and enable a printer profile from the list. • The ICC color profile option is available only for CMYK. Preparing PDF files for a service bureau Open Prepress Interface (OPI) lets you use low-resolution images as placeholders for the high-resolution images that appear in your final work. When a service bureau receives your file, the OPI server substitutes the low-resolution images for the high-resolution images. Document settings can be preserved to maintain how a PDF file looks. You can preserve document overprints and halftone screen information. If you have spot colors in your file, you can choose either to preserve the spot colors or to convert them to process colors so that the file produces four plates for CMYK output. Printers’ marks provide information to the service bureau about how the work should be printed. You can specify which printers’ marks to include on the page. The available printers’ marks are as follows: • Crop marks — represent the size of the paper and appear at the corners of the page. You can add crop marks to use as guides in trimming the paper. If your output has multiple pages per sheet (for example, two rows by two columns), you can add the crop marks on the outside edge of the page so that all crop marks are removed after the cropping process, or you can choose to add crop marks around each row and column. A bleed determines how far an image can extend beyond the crop marks. A bleed requires that the paper you are printing on is larger than the size of paper you ultimately want, and the image area must extend beyond the edge of the final paper size. • Registration marks — are required to line up the film, analog proofs, or print plates on a color press. Registration marks print on each sheet of a color separation. • Densitometer scale — is a series of gray boxes ranging from light to dark. These boxes are required to test the density of halftone images. You can position the densitometer scale anywhere on the page. You can also customize the levels of gray that appear in each of the seven squares on the densitometer scale. • File information — can be printed, including the color profile; name, date, and time the image was created; and page number. To maintain OPI links in a PDF file 1. Choose File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Enable the Maintain OPI links check box. • Don't use OPI links if you are not sure whether your PDF file is destined for an OPI server. To preserve document settings in a PDF file 1. Choose File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Preserve document overprints — retains the overprint settings of objects in a document • Preserve halftone screen information — useful for color separation screening To convert spot colors to process colors in a PDF file 1. Choose File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Enable the Convert spot colors to process check box. To include printers’ marks in a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Prepress tab. 4. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Crop marks • File information • Registration marks • Densitometer scales If you want to include a bleed, enable the Bleed limit check box, and type a bleed amount in the corresponding box. • The bleed option is available only for Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, PDF/X-1a, and PDF/X-3. A third party plug-in is required to view printers’ marks in Adobe Acrobat. • Usually, a bleed amount of 0.125 to 0.25 inch is sufficient. Any object extending beyond that uses space needlessly and may cause problems when you print multiple pages with bleeds on a single sheet of paper. Setting security options for PDF files You can set security options to protect PDF files that you create. Security options let you control whether, and to what extent, a PDF file can be accessed, edited, and reproduced when viewed in Adobe Acrobat. The security options are controlled by two passwords: the Permission password and the Open password. The Permission password is the master password that lets you control whether a file can be printed, edited, or copied. For example, as the owner of the file, you can protect the integrity of the file’s content by choosing permissions settings that prevent editing. You can also set an Open password that lets you control who can access the file. For example, if your file contains sensitive information, and you want to limit the users who can view it, you can set an Open password. It is not recommended that you set an Open password without setting a Permission password, because users would then have unrestricted access to the PDF file — including the ability to set a new password. The security options are applied when you save the PDF file. These settings can be viewed when a PDF file is opened in Adobe Acrobat. To open and edit a secured PDF file, you must enter the Permissions password (or the Open password if no Permission password is set). For information about opening and importing PDF files, see "Portable Document Format (PDF)." To set PDF file permissions 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Security tab. 4. Enable the Permission password check box. 5. Type a password in the Password box. 6. Retype the password in the Confirm Permission password box. 7. In the Printing permissions box, choose one of the following options: • None — lets users view the PDF on-screen but prevents them from printing the PDF file • Low resolution — lets users print a low resolution version of the PDF file. This option is available for PDF files compatible with Adobe Acrobat 5 or higher. • High resolution — lets users print a high resolution version of the PDF file 8. In the Editing permissions box, choose one of the following options: • None — prevents users from editing the PDF file • Any except extracting pages — lets users edit the PDF file but prevents them from removing pages from the file If you want to allow copying of content from the PDF file to other documents, enable the Enable copying of text, images, and other contents check box. • The Permission password is the master password for the document. It can be used by the file owner to set permissions, or to open the file if an Open password is set. To set a user password for a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Security tab. 4. Enable the Open password check box. 5. Type a password in the Password box. 6. Retype the password in the Confirm Open password box. • If you set an Open password, it is recommended that you also set a Permission password. Viewing preflight summaries for PDF files Before saving a document as a PDF file, you can preflight your document to find potential problems. Preflighting checks and displays a summary of errors, possible problems, and suggestions for resolving issues. By default, many PDF issues are checked during a preflight, but you can disable the issues that you do not want to check. To view the preflight summary for a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Preflight tab. You can limit the issues to check during the preflight by clicking the Settings button, double-clicking Publishing to PDF, and disabling the check boxes next to the items that you want the preflight to overlook. • You can save settings by clicking the Add preflight settings button and typing a name in the Save preflight style box. Optimizing PDF files You can optimize PDF files for different versions of Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader. You can customize compatibility to match the type of viewer used by the recipients of the PDF file. In CorelDRAW, you can select one of six compatibilities: Acrobat 4.0, Acrobat 5.0, PDF/X-1a, or PDF/X-3. The available controls differ, depending on which compatibility option you choose. To optimize viewing of a PDF document on the Web, you can linearize a PDF file. Linearizing a file speeds up processing time by loading one page at a time. To select a compatibility option 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the General tab. 4. From the Compatibility list box, choose one of the following: • Acrobat 4.0 • Acrobat 5.0 • Acrobat 6.0 • PDF/X-1a • PDF/X-3 • If you want to preserve layers and layer properties in the published PDF file, you should choose the Acrobat 6.0 option. Note that master layers will not be preserved. To linearize a PDF file 1. Click File Publish to PDF. 2. Click Settings. 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Enable the Optimize for Web check box. Object linking and embedding Object linking and embedding (OLE) is a method of exchanging information between applications. Using OLE, you can take selected objects or entire files from one application, called the source application, and place them into another application, called the destination application. You can freely move objects and files between applications as long as all the applications involved support OLE. CorelDRAW lets you create and edit OLE objects, as well as insert objects and files created in other applications. Linking results in a larger file size but is useful when you want to use an object or file in multiple files. To change every instance of the object or the file, you only need to change the object in the source application. Linking is also useful when the destination application does not directly support files created in the source application. Embedding is useful when you want to include all objects in one file. In this section, you’ll learn about • inserting linked or embedded objects • editing linked or embedded objects Inserting linked or embedded objects CorelDRAW lets you insert CorelDRAW files as linked or embedded objects in other applications. You can also insert a linked or embedded object in CorelDRAW. A linked object remains connected to its source file; whereas an embedded object is not linked to its source file but is integrated into the active document. To insert a linked object 1. In CorelDRAW, select an object. Make sure that the file is saved first. 2. Click Edit Copy. 3. In the destination application, click Edit Paste special. 4. Click Edit Paste special in the destination application. 5. Enable the Paste link option. • To insert a linked object into the active drawing from another application, click Edit Insert new object. In the Insert new object dialog box, enable the Create from file option, browse to the file you want to insert, and enable the Link check box. To insert an embedded object 1. In the destination application, click Edit Insert new object. 2. Enable the Create from file option. 3. Click the Browse button. 4. Click a filename. • You can also create an embedded object by enabling the Create new option, and choosing the application in which you want to create the object from the Object type list box. • You can also insert an embedded object by selecting an object in the source application, and dragging it to the window of the source application. Editing linked or embedded objects You can edit a linked or embedded object. You can edit a linked object by editing its source file. Any changes you make to the source file are automatically applied to the linked object. You can also modify a linked object; for example, you can update a linked object, substitute the source file of a linked object for another, or break a link between a linked object and its source file. To edit a linked or embedded object 1. Double-click the linked or embedded object to start the source application. 2. Edit the object in the source application. 3. Save the changes in the source application. 4. Close the source application. 5. Return to the active application window to review the edits. • In most cases, you can edit OLE objects only in the source application. If you try to change an OLE object using CorelDRAW, note the following limitations. Depending on the source of the OLE object, you might not be able to rotate, skew, clone, trim, weld, intersect, use as symbols, or combine OLE objects. Also, you might not be able to apply any of the effects in the Effects menu to OLE objects, except for PowerClip objects. You can only size, move, copy OLE objects and place them into PowerClip containers. • You can also edit linked or embedded objects by starting the source application and opening the file directly. To modify a linked object 1. Select a linked object using the Pick tool . 2. Click Edit Links. 3. Click one of the following buttons: • Update now — updates the linked object to reflect changes made in the source file • Open source — opens the object in the source application • Change source — redirects the link to another file • Break link — disconnects the link so that the object is embedded in the file Importing and exporting files Your application provides filters that convert files from one format to another when you import or export files. In this section, you will learn about • importing files • exporting files Importing files Your application lets you import files created in other applications. For example, you can import a Portable Document Format (PDF), JPEG, or Adobe Illustrator (AI) file.You can import a file and place it in the active application window as an object. You can also resize and center a file as you import it. The imported file becomes part of the active file. While importing a bitmap, you can resample it to reduce the file size, or crop it to eliminate unused areas of the photo. You can also crop a bitmap to select only the exact area and size of the image you want to import. When you import a file from an earlier version of CorelDRAW that contains text in a language different from the language of your operating system, you can use code page settings to ensure that object names, keywords, and notes saved with the file are displayed correctly. To import a file into an active drawing 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the folder where the file is stored. 3. Choose a file format from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Options. If the file contains text in a language different from that of your operating system, choose the corresponding option from the Code page list box to ensure that object names, keywords, and notes are displayed correctly. 6. Enable any of the following check boxes that are available: • Link bitmap externally — lets you link a bitmap externally instead of embedding it in a file • Combine multi-layer bitmap — automatically merges the layers within a bitmap • Extract embedded ICC profile — lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed • Check for watermark — lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains, such as copyright • Do not show filter dialog — lets you use the filter’s default settings without opening its dialog box • Maintain layers and pages — lets you preserve layers and pages when importing files. If you disable the check box, all layers are combined into a single layer. • Link to high resolution file for output using OPI — lets you insert a low-resolution version of a TIFF or Scitex Continuous Tone (CT) file into a document. The low-resolution version is linked with the high-resolution image, which resides on an Open Prepress Interface (OPI) server. 7. Click Import, and do one of the following: • Click the drawing page to maintain original file and position top-left corner where you click. • Click and drag on the drawing page to resize the file. The import cursor displays the dimensions of the resized file as you drag on the drawing page. • Press Enter to center the file on the drawing page. Active snapping options are applied to the imported file. • Not all importing options are available for all file formats. • Multilayered bitmaps can be imported by default. • You can import multiple files. Hold down Shift + click to select consecutive files in a list. Hold down Ctrl + click to select non-consecutive files. To resample a bitmap while importing 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the folder where the image is stored. 3. Choose a file format from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Options, and enable any of the following check boxes: • Link bitmap externally — lets you link a bitmap externally instead of embedding it in a file • Combine multi-layer bitmap — automatically merges the layers within a bitmap • Extract embedded ICC profile — lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed • Check for watermark — lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright • Do not show filter dialog — lets you use the filter’s default settings without opening its dialog box • Maintain layers and pages — lets you maintain layers and pages when importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer 6. Choose Resample from the list box, and click Import. 7. In the Resample image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes: • Width — specifies the width of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original width • Height — specifies the height of the graphic in a chosen unit of measurement or as a percentage of its original height 8. In the Resolution area, type values in the following boxes: • Horizontal — lets you specify the horizontal resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi) • Vertical — lets you specify the vertical resolution of the graphic in pixels or dots per inch (dpi) 9. Click the drawing page. You can also Maintain the width-to-height ratio of the image Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box. Change the units of measurement Choose a unit type from the Units list box. Maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values automatically Enable the Identical values check box. • If a dialog box for the import format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see "File formats." • Not all importing options are available for all file formats. To crop a bitmap while importing 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the folder where the image is stored. 3. Choose a file format from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Options, and enable any of the following active check boxes: • Link bitmap externally — lets you link a bitmap externally instead of embedding it in a file • Combine multi-layer bitmap — automatically merges the layers within a bitmap • Extract embedded ICC profile — lets you save the embedded International Color Consortium (ICC) profile to the color folder where the application is installed • Check for watermark — lets you check the image for a watermark and any information it contains such as copyright • Do not show filter dialog — lets you use the filter’s default settings without opening its dialog box • Maintain layers and pages — lets you maintain layers and pages when importing files; if you disable the check box, all layers are combined in a single layer 6. Choose Crop from the list box, and click Import. 7. In the Crop image dialog box, type values in any of the following boxes: • Top — specifies the area to remove from the top of the graphic • Left — specifies the area to remove from the left edge of the graphic • Width — specifies the width of the graphic you want to keep • Height — specifies the height of the graphic you want to keep 8. Click the drawing page. • You can also resize a graphic by dragging the selection handles in the preview window. • You can change the units of measurement by choosing a unit type from the Units list box in the Crop image dialog box. Exporting files You can export and save images to a variety of file formats that can be used in other applications. For example, you can export a file to the Adobe Illustrator (AI) or GIF format. You can export a file to a selected file format. You can also export a file by saving the open file under a different name or to a different file format while leaving the open file in its existing format. Some file formats may not support all the features that a CorelDRAW (CDR) file has so it is a good idea to save the original file as a CorelDRAW (CDR) file before exporting it. To export a file 1. Click File Export. 2. Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 3. Choose a file format from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Options, and enable any of the following active check boxes: • Export this page only — exports only the current page in a multipage file • Selected only — saves only the objects selected in the active drawing • Web_safe_filenames — replaces the white space in a filename with an underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based filenames. • Do not show filter dialog — suppresses dialog boxes that provide other options when exporting 6. Click Export. • If a dialog box for the export format opens, specify the options you want. For detailed information about file formats, see "File formats." You can also Compress a file on export Choose a compression type from the Compression type list box. Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the Notes box. • Not all of the options or the compression types in the Export dialog box are available for all file formats. • Objects on a hidden layer are displayed in the exported file unless the printing and exporting function for the hidden layer is disabled. • For information about the options available when you export to a bitmap file format, see "To convert a vector graphic to a bitmap when exporting." • You can specify which layers will appear in the exported file. For more information, see "To enable or disable printing and exporting of a layer." To export a file to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office 1. Click File Export for Office. 2. From the Export to list box, choose one of the following: • Microsoft Office — lets you set options to meet the different output requirements of Microsoft Office applications • WordPerfect Office — automatically optimizes the image for WordPerfect Office by converting it to a WordPerfect Graphics file (WPG) 3. From the Graphic should be best suited for list box, choose one of the following: • Compatibility — lets you save the drawing as a bitmap in the Portable Network Graphic (PNG) file format. This preserves the appearance of the drawing when you import it into an office application. • Editing — lets you retain most of the editable elements in vector drawings by saving the drawing in the Extended Metafile Format (EMF) 4. From the Optimized for list box, choose one of the following options: • Presentation — lets you optimize the file for outputs such as slide shows or online documents (96 dpi) • Desktop printing — lets you maintain good image quality for desktop printing (150 dpi) • Commercial printing — lets you optimize the file for high-quality printing (300 dpi) An estimated file size appears in the lower-left corner of the dialog box. 5. Click OK. 6. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 7. Type a filename in the Filename list box. 8. Click Save. You can also Zoom in and out in the preview window Using the Zoom in or Zoom out tool, click in the preview window. Pan to view another area of the drawing Using the Pan tool , drag in the preview window until the area you want to see becomes visible. • Only the options that apply to your output are available. For example, the Optimized for options are available only if you choose the Microsoft Office and Compatibility options. • Layers in a drawing are flattened when exported to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office. To save a file to a different format 1. Click File Save as. 2. Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 3. Choose a file format from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Options, and enable any of the following active check boxes: • Selected only — saves only the objects selected in the active drawing • Web_safe_filenames — replaces the white space in a filename with an underscore. Special characters are replaced by characters suitable for Web-based filenames. • Save with embedded VBA project — lets you save, with the file, macros you have created in the VBA editor 6. Click Save. You can also Specify information about a file Type any comments you want in the Notes box. Add keywords Type any keywords you want in the Keywords box. • Not all of the options or the compression types in the Save drawing dialog box are available for all file formats. Working with office applications CorelDRAW is highly compatible with office productivity applications such as Microsoft Word and WordPerfect Office. You can import and export files between applications, and you can copy or insert objects from CorelDRAW into office productivity documents. You can also use a workspace that emulates the look and feel of Microsoft Office. In this section, you’ll learn about • importing files from office applications • exporting files to office applications • copying and inserting objects • using the Microsoft Office workspace Importing files from office applications CorelDRAW lets you import files created in other applications. For example, you can import a file from a Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office application. For more information about importing files, see "Importing files." Exporting files to office applications You can export a file so that it is optimized for use with office productivity applications such as Microsoft Word or WordPerfect. For more information on exporting files from CorelDRAW, see "To export a file to Microsoft Office or WordPerfect Office." Copying and inserting objects CorelDRAW lets you copy an object and paste it into a drawing. You can also copy an object and place it into a document created in an office productivity application such as Microsoft Word or WordPerfect. For more information about copying objects, see "Copying, duplicating, and deleting objects."You can insert an object into a CorelDRAW document, or into an office productivity document, such as a Microsoft Word or WordPerfect document. For more information about inserting objects into CorelDRAW, see "Finding, inserting, and storing drawing content." For information about inserting objects into office productivity documents, see "Inserting linked or embedded objects", or see the office productivity application’s Help. Using the Microsoft Office workspace A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, buttons, and menus are arranged when you open the application. You can use a workspace that emulates the look and feel of Microsoft Office. For more information, see "Using multiple workspaces." File formats A file format defines how an application stores information in a file. If you want to use a file created in a different application than the one you are currently using, you must import that file. Conversely, if you create a file in one application and want to use it in another application, you must export the file to a different file format. When you name a file, an application automatically appends a filename extension, usually three characters in length (for example, .cdr, .bmp, .tif, and .eps). This filename extension helps you and the computer differentiate between files of different formats. The following file formats are used in this application: • Adobe Illustrator (AI) • Windows Bitmap (BMP) • Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) • CorelDRAW (CDR) • Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) • Microsoft Word Document (DOC or RTF) • Corel DESIGNER (DSF or DES) • AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) • AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) • Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) • Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) • PostScript (PS or PRN) • Macromedia Flash (SWF) • GIF • GIMP (XCF) • HTML • JPEG (JPG) • JPEG 2000 (JP2) • Adobe Photoshop (PSD) • PICT (PCT) • Portable Document Format (PDF) • Hewlett-Packard Plotter (PLT) • Portable Network Graphics (PNG) • Corel Painter (RIF) • Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) • TIFF Bitmap (TIF) • Corel Paint Shop Pro (PSP) • WordPerfect Document (WPD) • WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) • Raw camera file formats • Other file formats • Recommended formats for importing graphics from other applications • Recommended formats for exporting graphics Adobe Illustrator (AI) The Adobe Illustrator (AI) file format was developed by Adobe Systems, Incorporated for the Macintosh and Windows platforms. It is primarily vector-based, although later versions support bitmap information. To import an Adobe Illustrator file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. • Depending on the settings and the version of Adobe Illustrator used to create the AI file, you can import the text as text or curves. If the AI file was created in Adobe Illustrator 10 or higher, and is not PDF-compatible, text elements are not imported. To export an Adobe Illustrator file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose AI - Adobe Illustrator from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. From the Compatibility list box, choose an Adobe Illustrator file format. 7. In the Destination area, enable one of the following options: • PC — lets you export a file that can be edited on a Windows operating system • Macintosh — lets you export a file that can be edited on a Macintosh operating system 8. In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options: • Curves — lets you export text as curves • Text — lets you export text as editable characters 9. Enable any of the check boxes corresponding to conversion options. • Text is exported as curves if you choose Adobe Illustrator CS or higher from the Compatibility list box. Windows Bitmap (BMP) The Windows bitmap (BMP) file format was developed as a standard for representing graphic images as bitmaps on the Windows operating system. To import a bitmap file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. • You can also resample a bitmap while importing. For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." • You can also crop a bitmap while importing. For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." To export a bitmap file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose BMP - Windows bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings. Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) is an open, platform-independent metafile format used for storing and exchanging two-dimensional graphics. It supports RGB color. CGM files can contain both vector graphics and bitmaps, but they usually contain one graphic type or the other — rarely both. You can import and export the following CGM files: • CGM Version 1 • CGM Version 3 To import a CGM file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose CGM - Computer Graphics Metafile from the Files of type list. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. To export a CGM file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose CGM - Computer Graphics Metafile from the Files of type list. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the CGM export dialog box, choose a version from the Export version list box. 7. Enable one of the following encoding options: • Binary • Text CorelDRAW (CDR) CorelDRAW (CDR) files are primarily vector graphic drawings. Vectors define a picture as a list of graphic primitives (rectangles, lines, text, arcs, and ellipses). Vectors are mapped point by point to the page, so if you reduce or increase the size of a vector graphic, the original image will not be distorted. Vector graphics are created and edited in graphics design applications, such as CorelDRAW, but you can also edit vector graphics in image-editing applications such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT. You can use vector images of various formats in desktop publishing programs. To import a CorelDRAW file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose CDR - CorelDRAW from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Open. 6. Click the drawing page. Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) is a metafile format that supports bitmap and vector information and the full range of PANTONE, RGB, and CMYK colors. Files saved in CMX format can be opened and edited in other Corel applications. To import a Corel Presentation Exchange file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose CMX - Corel Presentation Exchange from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Open. 6. Click the drawing page. To export a Corel Presentation Exchange file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose CMX - Corel Presentation Exchange from the Files of type list. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) Files saved to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) file format are bitmaps that represent shapes as pixels arranged to form an image. When you save a graphic to the Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, masks, floating objects, and lenses are saved with the image. CorelDRAW can import and export files in Corel PHOTO-PAINT format, including files that contain color and grayscale information. To export a Corel PHOTO-PAINT file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose CPT - Corel PHOTO-PAINT image from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings. • You can export CorelDRAW layers as objects in the CPT file format. • You can export to an image with transparent background. Microsoft Word Document (DOC or RTF) You can import Microsoft Word 97, 2000, and 2002 files or any RTF file To import a Microsoft Word file 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored. 3. Choose DOC - MS Word 97/2000/2002 or RTF - Rich Text Format from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. If the document has a table, you will see the Import table data dialog box. Click the Table outline button, and choose whether or not to add lines around the table and its cells. 6. Position the import cursor in the drawing window, and click. • Any embedded Windows Metafile Format (WMF) or Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) graphics are preserved in the imported file. If the file contains other graphic elements, these are lost during conversion and do not appear in CorelDRAW. • You can place your imported text by dragging a marquee to define a paragraph text box, or by pressing the Spacebar to place the imported text in the default location. To export a Microsoft Word file 1. Open a drawing that contains a text object. 2. Click File Export. 3. Choose DOC - MS Word for Windows 97/2000 or RTF - Rich Text Format from the Files of type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. • The filename extension for the format you choose is appended to the filename automatically. • Only text in drawings can be exported to the Microsoft Word file formats. Other graphical elements, such as lines, curves, and rectangles, are lost during conversion and do not display in the file. To export graphics, use a graphic format such as WMF. Corel DESIGNER (DSF or DES) You can import Corel DESIGNER (formerly Micrografx Designer) files. Files from version 9 and earlier have the filename extension .dsf; files from version 10 and later have the filename extension .des. To import a Corel DESIGNER file (DSF or DES) 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. From the Files of type list box, choose one of the following options: • DSF, DRW - Corel/Micrografx Designer • DES - Corel DESIGNER 4. In the Designer import dialog box, adjust any of the settings. AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) files are vector files used as a native format for AutoCAD drawings. To import an AutoCAD Drawing Database file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose DWG-AutoCAD from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. From the 3D projection list box in the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point. If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable Auto-reduce nodes. 7. In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options: • Automatic — scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file • English (1 unit = 1 inch) — lets you scale the drawing in inches • Metric (1 unit = 1 mm) — lets you scale the drawing in millimeters • If views are specified in your file, they appear automatically in the 3D projection list box. • If your computer is missing a font that is included in a file you are importing, a PANOSE font matching dialog box appears and lets you substitute the font with a similar font. To export an AutoCAD Drawing Database file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose DWG-AutoCAD from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, choose an AutoCAD version from the Export version list box. 7. Choose a unit of measure from the Export units list box. 8. In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options: • Curves — lets you export text as curves • Text — lets you export text as editable characters 9. In the Export bitmap as area, enable one of the options to export the bitmaps in a drawing to a supported bitmap format. 10. In the Fill unmapped fills area, enable one of the following options: • Color — fills all unmapped fills with color. To change the color, click the Color picker and choose a color on the palette. • Unfilled — leaves unmapped fills unfilled AutoCAD Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) The Drawing Interchange Format (DXF) is a tagged data representation of the information contained in an AutoCAD drawing file. The Drawing Interchange format is a native file format of AutoCAD. It has become a standard for exchanging CAD drawings and is supported by many CAD applications. The Drawing Interchange format is vector-based and supports up to 256 colors. To import an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose DXF - AutoCAD from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. In the Import AutoCAD file dialog box, choose a plane projection of a three-dimensional object as seen from a given focal point from the 3D projection list box. If you want to reduce the number of nodes on the imported object, enable Auto-reduce nodes. 7. In the Scaling area, enable one of the following options: • Automatic — scales the drawing using the scale of the AutoCAD source file • English (1 unit = 1 inch) — lets you scale the drawing in inches • Metric (1 unit = 1 mm) — lets you scale the drawing in millimeters • If your computer is missing a font that is included in a file you are importing, a PANOSE font matching dialog box appears and lets you substitute the font with a similar font. To export an AutoCAD Drawing Interchange file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose DXF-AutoCAD from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Export to AutoCAD dialog box, choose an AutoCAD version from the Export version list box. 7. Choose a unit of measure from the Export units list box. 8. In the Export text as area, enable one of the following options: • Curves — lets you export text as curves • Text — lets you export text as editable characters 9. In the Export bitmap as area, enable one of the options to export the bitmaps in a drawing to a supported bitmap format. 10. In the Fill unmapped fills area, enable one of the following options: • Color — fills all unmapped fills with color. To change the color, click the Color picker , and choose a color on the palette. • Unfilled — leaves unmapped fills unfilled Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) EPS files can contain text, vector graphics, and bitmaps and are intended to be included (encapsulated) in other documents. Unlike other PostScript files, which can contain multiple pages, an EPS file is always a single page. EPS files usually contain a preview image (header) that lets you view the file content without the help of a PostScript interpreter. An EPS file without a preview image is displayed as a gray box in Corel applications. You can import and export EPS files. You can import an EPS file as a group of editable objects as you would import any other PostScript (PS) file. You can also bring the file as encapsulated, placing the preview image in the drawing window. The preview image is linked to the file. It is recommended that you import an EPS file as encapsulated in the following situations: • You want text in the EPS file to be displayed with the original fonts, without any font substitutions. • You are working with a large EPS file, and you don’t want to slow down the application. To import an encapsulated PostScript file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose EPS, PS, PRN - PostScript from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. In the Import EPS dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Import as editable —brings in the file as a group of CorelDRAW objects that you can modify • Place as encapsulated PostScript —places the preview image in the drawing. You cannot modify specific parts of the file, but you can edit the file as a whole by applying transformations, such as sizing and rotation. 7. If you are importing the file as editable, enable one of the following text options: • Text — preserves text objects in the imported file so that you can edit the text • Curves — converts text to curves 8. Click OK. 9. Click the drawing page. • Some restrictions apply when you modify EPS files imported as editable. For more information, see "PostScript (PS or PRN) technical notes." • If the EPS file contains text converted to curves, the text in the imported file is not editable, even if you choose to import the text as text. • You can also drag an EPS file from Windows Explorer into the drawing window. To export an encapsulated PostScript file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose EPS - encapsulated PostScript from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the EPS export dialog box, adjust any of the settings. To set general exporting options 1. In the EPS export dialog box, click the General tab. 2. Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Specify an image header In the Image header area, enable the Include header check box. Choose a preview format from the Format list box. Choose a color depth for the preview from the Type list box. Type a value in the Resolution box. Apply an ICC profile Enable the Apply ICC profile option in the Color management area. Enable one of the following options: • Composite printer profile • Separations printer profile Select a color mode Choose a color mode from the Send bitmaps as list box. Specify how to export text Enable one of the following options in the Export text as area: • Curves — lets you export text as curves • Text — lets you export text as editable characters If you want to include PostScript font information with your file, enable the Include fonts check box. Maintain OPI link Enable the Maintain OPI links check box to use low-resolution images as placeholders for high-resolution images. Automatically increase fountain steps Enable the Auto-increase fountain steps check box to automatically increase the number of steps used to create fountain fills. Change the number of fountain steps Type a value in the Fountain steps box. Choose a compatibility option From the Compatibility list box, choose a PostScript level that is supported by the printer or the application with which you will be printing or displaying the file. • If you output all objects as grayscale objects, no color profiles are available. If you output objects as colors, composite color profiles are available. If you output colors as CMYK, composite or separations color profiles are available. • If you choose a bitmap format, you can make the background of the bitmap transparent by enabling the Transparent background check box in the Image header area. To set advanced exporting options 1. In the EPS export dialog box, click the Advanced tab. 2. Perform one or more tasks from the following table. To Do the following Specify the author’s name Type a name in the Author box. Convert spot colors to process colors In the Spot colors area, enable the Convert spot colors to process check box. Apply bitmap compression In the Bitmap compression area, enable the Use JPEG compression check box. Move the Quality factor slider to adjust the quality of the bitmaps. Apply a trapping option In the Trapping area, enable any of the following options: • Preserve document overprint settings — maintains current settings on objects • Always overprint black — creates a color trap by causing any objects that contain at least 95 percent black to overprint any underlying objects • Auto-spreading — creates a color trap by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as its fill and having it overprint underlying objects • Maximum — lets you specify the amount of spread that the Auto-spreading option assigns to an object If you want to specify the minimum font size to which Auto-Spreading is applied, type a value in the Text above box. If you want the outlines of all objects on the page to have the same width, enable the Fixed width check box. Apply a bounding box In the Bounding box area, enable any of the following options: • Objects — aligns the bounding box exactly to the objects in the file • Page — aligns the bounding box to the page • Bleed limit — lets you specify how far the bleed extends beyond the edge of the area to be printed • Crop marks — lets you use crop marks as alignment aids when you trim the print output to its final size • Floating point numbers — lets you use numbers with decimals • The Use JPEG compression check box remains disabled until you choose a PostScript level that supports this feature. PostScript (PS or PRN) PostScript (PS) files use PostScript language to describe the layout of text, vector graphics, or bitmaps for printing and display purposes. They can contain multiple pages. PostScript files are imported as a group of objects that you can edit. PostScript files usually have a .ps filename extension, but you can also import PostScript files with a .prn extension. Files with a .prn filename extension, commonly known as Printer (PRN) files, contain instructions about how a file should be printed. These files let you reprint a document even if the application in which the document was created is not installed on your computer. You can also import encapsulated PostScript (EPS) files. For more information, see "Encapsulated PostScript (EPS)". To import a PostScript (PS or PRN) file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose EPS, PS, PRN - PostScript from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename, and click Import. 5. In the Import text as area, enable one of the following text options: • Text — preserves text objects in the imported file so that you can edit the text • Curves — converts text to curves 6. Click OK. 7. Click the drawing page. • When the PostScript file contains text converted to curves, the text in the imported file is not editable, even if you choose to import the text as text. GIF GIF is a bitmap-based format designed for use on the Web. It is highly compressed to minimize file transfer time and supports images with up to 256 colors. The GIF format provides the ability to store multiple bitmaps in a file. When the multiple images are displayed in rapid succession, the file is called an animated GIF file. For Internet use, you can also save images to the JPEG and PNG formats. If you want to publish an image to the Web and are not sure which format to use, see "To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format." To import a GIF file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose GIF - CompuServe bitmap from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." • You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose. To export a GIF file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose GIF - CompuServe bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings, and click OK. 7. In the Convert to paletted dialog box, adjust any of the settings, and click OK. 8. In the GIF export dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparency area: • None — specifies that you do not want any colors to be transparent when viewed in a Web browser • Image color — makes the color you click on the color palette transparent • For more information about the controls in the Convert to paletted dialog box, see "Changing bitmaps to the paletted color mode." • You can specify the transparent color by using the Eyedropper tool to click a color in the original image window or by moving the Index slider. • To display the image in the Web browser gradually so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading, enable the Interlace image check box. HTML HTML files are plain-text (also known as ASCII) files that can be created using any text editor, including SimpleText and TextEdit. HTML files are intended for display on a Web browser. You can import HTML files to edit text and add Web objects, bookmarks, and hyperlinks. You can also publish files to the Web. For more information about preparing files and objects for Web publishing and uploading to the Web, see "Publishing to the Web." To import an HTML file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose HTM - HyperText Markup Language from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. In the Use default text colors area, enable one of the following options: • Yes — uses the default color for text and for visited, unvisited, and active links, ignoring the colors specified in the HTML file • No — uses the colors specified in the HTML file 7. Click the drawing page. JPEG (JPG) JPEG is a standard format developed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group. Through the use of superior compression techniques, this format allows the transfer of files among a wide variety of platforms. JPEG supports 8-bit grayscale and color depths of up to 32-bit CMYK. To import a JPEG file 1. Click File Import. The File Import command lets you place the file as an object in the active image. If you want to open a JPEG file as an image, click File Open. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose JPG - JPEG bitmaps from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." • You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose To export a JPEG file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose JPG - JPEG bitmaps from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings, and click OK. If you chose Paletted (8-bit) from the Color mode list box, the Convert to paletted dialog box appears. Adjust any of the settings, and click OK. 7. In the JPEG export dialog box, enable one of the following check boxes: • Progressive — loads the image gradually in certain browsers so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading • Optimize — uses the optimal encoding method to produce the smallest file size 8. From the Sub format list box, choose one of the following encoding methods: • Standard (4:2:2) — creates a smaller file with some image quality loss • Optional (4:4:4) — creates a larger file, but preserves image quality You can also Set the quality of the image resolution Move the Compression slider. Smooth the transitions between adjacent pixels of different colors Move the Smoothing slider. JPEG 2000 (JP2) The JPEG 2000 (JP2) file format is a JPEG image with advanced compression and file data capabilities. JP2 files can store more descriptive file data (or metadata) than JPEG 2000 codestream files, which are optimized for network transmission. You can import either JP2 or JPC files but export only to the JP2 format. When you export the image to a JP2 file, you can choose to view download progression by resolution, quality, and position. To import a JPEG 2000 file 1. Click File Import. The File Import command lets you place the file as an object in the active image. If you want to open the file as an image, click File Open. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose JP2 - JPG 2000 bitmaps from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. To export a JPEG 2000 file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose JP2 - JPEG 2000 Codestream or JP2 - JPEG 2000 Standard from the Save as type list box. 4. Click Export. 5. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings, and click OK. 6. In the JPEG 2000 export dialog box, specify the compression ratio in the Compression box. 7. From the Progression list box, choose one of the following: • Quality — lets you set the image download by the amount of detail in the image • Resolution\Quality — lets you set the image download from low to high resolution so that the size of the entire image increases • Position\Quality — lets you set the image download from the upper-left corner of the image to the lower-right corner • Channels • Setting a progression by image quality lets a user with a “slow” network connection stop downloading a file when the desired quality is reached. Kodak Photo CD Image (PCD) Kodak Photo CD image file is a raster format developed by Eastman Kodak for scanning photographic images onto compact discs. Photo CD allows high-quality digital storage and manipulation of photographic images. It is typically used by photofinishers and service bureaus who provide the service of placing photographs on CDs. Related Topics To import a Kodak Photo CD image file 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PCD - Kodak Photo-CD image from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. In the PCD import dialog box, move any of the following sliders: • Brightness — lets you set the amount of light • Contrast — lets you specify the contrast between the pixels in the image • Saturation — lets you specify the purity of a color • Red — lets you specify the amount of red in the image • Green — lets you specify the amount of green in the image • Blue — lets you specify the amount of blue in the image 7. From the Resolutions list box, choose an image size. 8. From the Image type list box, choose a color mode. 9. Position the import placement start cursor on the drawing window, and click. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." • You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose. • You can remove the adjustments made by the photofinisher at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk by enabling the Subtract scene balance check box. • You can identify out-of-gamut areas of the image by enabling the Show colors out of gamut check box, which renders the out-of-gamut pixels in pure red or pure blue. To import a Kodak Photo CD image file 1. Click File Import. 2. Choose the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PCD - Kodak Photo-CD image from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. In the PCD import dialog box, move any of the following sliders: • Brightness — lets you set the amount of light • Contrast — lets you specify the contrast between the pixels in the image • Saturation — lets you specify the purity of a color • Red — lets you specify the amount of red in the image • Green — lets you specify the amount of green in the image • Blue — lets you specify the amount of blue in the image 7. From the Resolutions list box, choose an image size. 8. From the Image type list box, choose a color mode. 9. Position the import placement start cursor on the drawing window, and click. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." • You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose. • You can remove the adjustments made by the photofinisher at the time the original image was scanned and placed on the Photo CD disk by enabling the Subtract scene balance check box. • You can identify out-of-gamut areas of the image by enabling the Show colors out of gamut check box, which renders the out-of-gamut pixels in pure red or pure blue. PICT The Macintosh PICT file format was developed for the Mac OS platform by Apple Computer Inc. It is a native file format of QuickDraw and can contain both vectors and bitmaps. The Macintosh PICT file format is widely used in Macintosh applications. To import a PICT file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. • You can drag on the drawing page to place the graphic proportionally at the size you choose. To export a PICT file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose PCT - Macintosh PICT from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. PaintBrush (PCX) The PaintBrush (PCX) file format is a bitmap format originally developed by the ZSoft Corporation for the PC Paintbrush program. To import a PaintBrush file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. To export a PaintBrush file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose PCX - PaintBrush from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings. Portable Document Format (PDF) The Portable Document Format (PDF) is a file format designed to preserve fonts, images, graphics, and formatting of an original file. Using Adobe Reader and Adobe Acrobat Exchange, a PDF file can be viewed, shared, and printed by Mac OS, Windows, and UNIX users. You can open or import a PDF file. When you open a PDF file, it is opened as a CorelDRAW file. When you import a PDF file, the file is imported as grouped objects and can be placed anywhere within your current document. You can import an entire PDF file, individual pages from the file, or multiple pages. Some PDF files are secured by a password. You are prompted to enter a password before you can open and edit a secured PDF file. For information about PDF security options, see "Setting security options for PDF files." Importing text The method by which PDF files store information affects how text looks and how easily it can be edited. To help ensure the best results for your document, you can choose whether to import the text in your file as text or as curves. When you import text as text, the font and text are preserved, and the text is fully editable as artistic or paragraph text. However, some effects and formatting may be lost. This option is recommended if you have a PDF file that contains large blocks of text, such as a newsletter, and you want to reformat the text or add text content. When you import text as curves, the appearance of the text, including all effects applied to it, are preserved, and each letter is converted to a curve object. With this option, the text formatting features can no longer be used to edit the text. If you have a PDF file that contains a small amount of text that does not require editing, or if you do not have the fonts used in the PDF file, you can import the text as curves. For more information about converting text to curves, see "Finding, editing, and converting text." To import a Portable Document Format file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PDF - Adobe Portable Document Format from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. If the file is protected by a password, type a valid password in the Password box. 6. In the Import text as area, choose one of the following options: • Text — lets you edit and reformat the text from the PDF file • Curves — converts text to curves. Choose this option when you do not need to edit the text from the PDF file, and you want to maintain the appearance of the original text. If you are importing a multipage document, select the pages you want to import, and click OK. 7. Click the drawing page. • If a block of text is imported as separate text objects, you can combine the text objects by selecting them and clicking Arrange Combine. HPGL Plotter File (PLT) The HPGL Plotter File (PLT) format, developed by Hewlett Packard, is vector-based. It is used in programs such as AutoCAD for printing drawings on plotters. Other Corel applications can interpret a SUBSET of the HPGL and HPGL/2 command set. This format uses a scaling factor of 1,016 To import an HPGL Plotter file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PLT - HPGL Plotter File from the Files of type list. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. In the HPGL options dialog box, adjust any of the settings plotter units to 1 inch. To export an HPGL Plotter file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PLT — HPGL Plotter File from the Files of type list. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the HPGL export dialog box, adjust any of the settings. Portable Network Graphics (PNG) The Portable Network Graphics (PNG) file format is an excellent file format for lossless, portable, and well-compressed storage of bitmaps. It takes up a minimum amount of disk space and can be easily read and exchanged between computers. The Portable Network Graphics format provides a replacement for the GIF format and can also replace many common uses of the TIFF format. The Portable Network Graphics format is designed to work well in online viewing, such as on the Web, and it’s fully streamable with a progressive display option. Some Web browsers do not support all formatting and features. You can export images to the Portable Network Graphics file format if you want to use transparent backgrounds, image interlacing, image maps, or animation in your Web pages. Exporting graphics to the Portable Network Graphics format converts them to bitmaps that can be used in desktop publishing programs and Microsoft Office applications. You can also edit Portable Network Graphics in image-editing programs such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT and Adobe Photoshop. You can also save images to the GIF and JPEG formats to use on the Internet. If you want to publish an image to the Web but are not sure which format to use, see "To save and optimize a bitmap to Web-compatible format." To import a Portable Network Graphics file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." • You can drag on the drawing page to place the image proportionally at the size you choose. To export a Portable Network Graphics file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose PNG - Portable Network Graphics from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, specify any options, and click OK. 7. In the PNG export dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparency area: • None — specifies that you do not want any colors to be transparent when viewed in a Web browser • Image color — makes the color you click on the Color Palette transparent • To display the image in the Web browser gradually, so that you can see portions of the image before it finishes loading, enable the Interlace image check box. • You can specify the transparent color by typing values in the Index boxes or by using the Eyedropper tool to click a color in the original drawing page. Adobe Photoshop (PSD) The Adobe Photoshop (PSD) file format is the native bitmap file format for Adobe Photoshop. To import an Adobe Photoshop file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see "To resample a bitmap while importing." Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see "To crop a bitmap while importing." To export an Adobe Photoshop file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose PSD - Adobe Photoshop from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings. • You can export to an image with a transparent background. Corel Painter (RIF) Imported Corel Painter (RIF) files retain information such as floating objects, which makes the files much larger than GIF or JPEG files. Corel Painter files can be opened for editing, resizing, and adjusting floaters. To import a Corel Painter file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose RIFF - Painter from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. You can also Resample a graphic while importing For more information, see “To resample a graphic while importing.” Crop a graphic while importing For more information, see “To crop a graphic while importing.” Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) is an open standard graphics file format that allows designers to put the power of vector graphics to work on the Web. It was created by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). SVG files are described in Extensible Markup Language (XML). They are vector graphic images, which can provide superior detail and faster download times than bitmaps. Compressed SVG files have an .svgz filename extension. To view SVG files, you need an SVG viewer plug-in such as the Corel SVG viewer. Unicode support SVG files support Unicode encoding for text. When exporting an SVG file, you can choose a Unicode encoding method. Embedding and linking You can embed information in an SVG file, or you can create additional files to store some of the information. For example, you can embed a style sheet in an SVG file, or you can create an external cascading style sheet and link it to the SVG file. By default, JavaScript, such as JavaScript related to rollovers, is embedded in the exported file, but you can choose to store it as a separate file linked to the SVG file. Also, you can embed bitmaps, or you can save bitmaps as externally linked files. Exporting text You can export text as text or curves. When exporting text as text, you can choose to embed all fonts in a Scalable Vector Graphics file to have full editing capabilities. You can also embed only the fonts used, and common English or common Roman fonts. Using preset export options To make your work easier, you can use preset export options, and you can create custom preset export options that you can reuse later. Using SVG colors SVG colors correspond to color keywords. You can use the SVG color palette available in the application to help ensure that colors in the exported SVG file are defined by color keywords. To ensure that the SVG color names you choose are retained in the SVG exported file, it is recommended that you disable color correction. For information about color correction, see "Understanding the Color management dialog box." Adding reference information to SVG objects and files Reference information can be added to a drawing and retained in an exported Scalable Vector Graphics object or file. You can add information to a drawing so that the information appears in the file’s XML tags. These tags are derived from the data field names, each of which is formatted as general text, data and time, linear and angular dimensions, or numbers. For example, you can name individual objects in the drawing and add comments for each of these objects. The name and comments for each object display in the tags of the exported Scalable Vector Graphics file. For more information about assigning information to objects, see "Assigning and copying object data." Similarly, you can preserve page property information in a Scalable Vector Graphics file, in which the data field categories are maintained as inline tags. You can also rename the default author name, classification, description, and keywords categories. To export a Scalable Vector Graphics file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose SVG - Scalable vector graphics or SVGZ - Compressed SVG from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. From the Encoding method list box, choose one of the following encoding options: • Unicode - UTF-8 — produces a smaller file size. This is the default encoding method and is useful in most circumstances. • Unicode - UTF-16 — produces a bigger file size 7. In the Export text area, enable one of the following options: • As text — exports text as editable characters, known as glyphs • As curves — exports text as curves 8. Choose one of the following options from the Styling options list box: • Presentation attributes — lets you specify attributes directly in an element in the exported file • Internal style sheet — uses the CLASS attribute to embed the style sheet in the Scalable Vector Graphics file • External CSS — creates an external cascading style sheet file and links it to the Scalable Vector Graphics file JavaScript related to rollovers can be saved to a separate file by enabling the Link externally check box in the JavaScript area. • You must embed fonts when you require the display of a specific font that the users may not have installed on their computers. • As the number of fonts or fountain fill steps increases, so does the size of the file. • Objects with mesh fills or drop shadows are exported as bitmaps. • If no single element in a drawing is selected, the content of the entire page is exported. • To preview the SVG file, you can use the Corel SVG viewer installed with the application. To choose a color by using the SVG color palette 1. Select an object. 2. Click Window Color palettes SVG colors. 3. Click a color swatch on the SVG color palette. • To ensure that SVG colors are preserved in the exported file, you can disable color correction by clicking Tools Color management and then choosing Color management off from the Style list box in the Color management dialog box. To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics object 1. Select an object using the Pick tool . 2. Click Tools Object data manager. 3. In the Field/value list, click a data field name. 4. Type the information in the text box. You can also Rename a data field Click the Open field editor button . Choose the name of the data field, and type a new name. Add a data field Click the Open field editor button. Click the Create new field button, and type the name of the new field. Change the data field format Click the right-arrow button, and then click Field editor. Click a field name and then click the Change button. Enable a field type option. • Fields containing no values are ignored when a file is exported to the Scalable Vector Graphics format. To add reference information to a Scalable Vector Graphics file 1. Click Window Dockers Properties. 2. Click the Page tab. 3. Type information in one or both of the following: • Page title box • Content boxes in the Page information area You can also Rename the data field categories Click any of the Name data fields, and type a new name. • The Page tab appears only when no objects are selected. • Information in the HTML file box is not retained in the Scalable Vector Graphics file. • A valid Scalable Vector Graphics file must contain unique field names and no spaces or special characters. In the SVG export dialog box, you can click the Issues tab and ensure that all elements of the file are correctly named. Macromedia Flash (SWF) Macromedia Flash is a file format for creating and displaying vector-based images and animation. Macromedia Flash files are extremely compact and of high quality, making them ideal for use on the Web. Before you save a file to the Macromedia Flash file format, you can determine whether the file has potential export problems. You can check the current file and display a summary of errors, possible problems, and a suggestion for resolving the issue. To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Internet, you must create an HTML file that encapsulates the Macromedia Flash file and specifies browser settings. The required HTML document can be generated automatically. To export a Macromedia Flash file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose SWF-Macromedia Flash from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Flash export dialog box, choose values from any of the following list boxes: • JPG compression — specifies the amount of JPEG file compression • Resolution — specifies the resolution of the image • Smoothing — tones down differences between adjacent pixels 7. Enable one of the following options in the Bounding box size area: • Page — applies the bounding box to the page • Objects — aligns the bounding box to the objects in the file 8. Enable any of the following check boxes in the Optimization area: • Convert dashed outlines — converts dashed outlines to solid lines • Rounded caps and corners — rounds the corners and endpoints of lines and curves • Use default fountain steps — lets you use the default number of steps for fountain fills You can also Prevent a Macromedia Flash file from being loaded into the Macromedia Flash editor Enable the File protection from import check box. Export sounds Enable the Use sound behaviors check box, and choose a value for the sound compression from the Compression list box. • The more you compress a sound, the smaller the size and the lower the sound quality. • You can save the settings in the Flash export dialog box to a preset by clicking the Add preset button and typing a name in the Setting name box. • To preview a Macromedia Flash file in a browser, you must have the Macromedia Flash Player plug-in installed on your computer. To view the issues summary for a Macromedia Flash file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose SWF-Macromedia Flash from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Flash export dialog box, click the Issues tab. 7. Click an error or warning in the error list to see the details and suggestions for resolving the issue. If you want to overlook certain issues, click Settings, and disable the check boxes that correspond to those issues. • The Issues tab heading indicates the number of issues. The icon on the tab heading changes, depending on the severity of the issue or issues identified. To publish a Macromedia Flash file to the Web 1. Click File Publish to the Web Flash embedded in HTML. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Type a filename in the File name list box. 4. Click Export. 5. In the Flash export dialog box, click the HTML tab. 6. Choose a template from the Flash HTML template list box. 7. Type values in the Width and Height boxes to specify the dimensions of the HTML document. If you want to set the movie dimensions relative to the browser window, type percentage values in the Width and Height boxes. 8. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Paused at start — pauses the movie until you initiate play • Loop — repeats the movie when it reaches the last frame • Display menu — displays a contest menu when you right-click the movie 9. Choose any of the options available in the following list boxes: • Quality — specifies the level of anti-aliasing • Window mode — lets you use the absolute positioning, transparent movie, and layering capabilities of Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later. • HTML alignment — lets you define the position of the movie within the browser window • Scale — determines how the movie is placed within the boundaries set in the Width and Height boxes • You can type values in the Width and Height boxes only when you disable the Match movie check box. Match movie is the default and sets the dimensions of the HTML document to the size of the movie. • You should have the latest Macromedia Flash Player plug-in installed on your computer to preview a Macromedia Flash file in a browser. • You can also set the dimensions of the HTML document in pixels by typing values in the Width and Height boxes. • You can also choose a template by clicking Open. • You can preview a movie in a Web browser window by clicking Preview. TARGA (TGA) The TARGA(TGA) graphics format is used for describing bitmaps. It supports various compression systems and can represent bitmaps ranging from black-and-white to RGB color. To export a TARGA file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose TGA-TARGA bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings, and click OK. 7. In the TGA export dialog box, enable one of the following options: • Normal • Enhanced • Black-and-white images cannot be saved as TARGA files. • To compress an image while exporting it, choose a compression type from the Type list box in the Export dialog box. TIFF The Tagged Image File format (TIFF) is a raster format designed as a standard. Almost every graphics application can read and write TIFF files. There are many variations of TIFF, considering that TIFF supports six different encoding routines and three different image modes: black-and-white, grayscale, and color. Uncompressed TIFF images may contain 1, 4, 8, or 24 bits per pixel. TIFF images compressed using the LZW algorithm may contain 4, 8, or 24 bits per pixel. TIFF files can save information for RGB, CMYK, and Lab color modes, but not for duotones. To export a TIFF file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose TIF - TIFF bitmap from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. In the Convert to bitmap dialog box, adjust any of the settings, and click OK. Corel Paint Shop Pro (PSP) The .PspImage file format is the native format for Corel Paint Shop Pro. You can import .PspImage files versions 9 and 10 that are in the RGB color mode (24- or 48-bit). To import a PSP file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose PSP - Corel Paint Shop Pro from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Import. 6. Click the drawing page. WordPerfect Document (WPD) The WordPerfect Document format (WPD) is the native file format for WordPerfect files. CorelDRAW supports WPD files from versions 4.2 to 12. When you import or export a WordPerfect file, only text is transferred. Graphic elements are not imported or exported. When you import text from a WPD file, you can maintain formatting, maintain fonts and formatting, or discard fonts and formatting. WordPerfect files for versions 4 and 5 have the file extensions .wp4 and .wp5. WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) The Corel WordPerfect Graphic file format (WPG) is primarily a vector graphic format, but it can store both bitmap and vector data. The WPG files may contain up to 256 colors, chosen from a palette of more than 1 million colors. To import a WordPerfect Graphic file 1. Click File Import. 2. Locate the folder in which the file is stored. 3. Choose WPG - WordPerfect Graphic from the Files of type list box. 4. Click the filename. 5. Click Open. 6. Click the drawing page. • Any embedded Windows Metafile Format (WMF) or Enhanced Metafile Format (EMF) graphics are preserved in the imported file. If the file contains other graphic elements, these are lost during conversion and do not appear in CorelDRAW. To export a WordPerfect Graphic file 1. Click File Export. 2. Locate the folder in which you want to save the file. 3. Choose WPG - WordPerfect Graphic from the Save as type list box. 4. Type a filename in the File name list box. 5. Click Export. 6. Enable one of the following options in the Export colors area: • 16 colors — exports the image as a 16 color image • 256 colors — exports the image as a 256 color image 7. Enable one of the following options in the Export text as area: • Text — exports text as editable characters • Curves — exports text as curves 8. Enable one of the following options, in the Export file as area: • WordPerfect Version 1.0 — supported by WordPerfect 5.1 and earlier • WordPerfect Version 2.0 — supported by WordPerfect 6 and la GIMP (XCF) XCF is the native GIMP format. It supports layers and other GIMP-specific information. Raw camera file formats A raw camera file is a data file captured by the image censor of a high-end digital camera. Raw camera files contain minimal in-camera processing, such as sharpening or digital zoom, and they give you full control over the sharpness, contrast, and saturation of images. Various raw camera file formats exist, so the files can have different filename extensions, such as .nef, .crw, .dcr, .orf, or .mrw. RawShooter essentials 2005, an application developed by Pixmantec, lets you open and edit raw camera files, and save them as TIFF or JPEG files. You can then bring the TIFF or JPEG files into Corel PHOTO-PAINT or CorelDRAW. You can access RawShooter essentials 2005 from the Start menu of the Windows taskbar. For information about working with raw camera files, see the RawShooter essentials 2005 user guide. Other file formats CorelDRAW also supports the following file formats: • Adobe Type 1 Font (PFB) — The PFB file format is for an Adobe Type 1 Font file. • ANSI Text (TXT) — ANSI Text (TXT) is a vector format that stores ANSI characters. This format is able to store text information but not formatting information, such as the font type or size. When a TXT file is imported to or exported from CorelDRAW, only the text is transferred. If the file has graphic elements, they are not imported or exported. • CALS Compressed Bitmap (CAL) — CALS Raster (CAL) is a bitmap format used mainly for document storage by high-end CAD programs. It supports a monochrome (1-bit) color depth and is used as a data graphics exchange format for computer-aided design and manufacturing, technical graphics, and image-processing applications. • Corel ArtShow 5 (CPX) — The CPX file format is a native file format of Corel ArtShow 5. It can contain both vectors and bitmaps. • Corel Presentations (SHW) — The SHW file format is a native format of Corel Presentations. • Corel R.A.V.E. (CLK) — The CLK file format is an animation file native to Corel R.A.V.E. • CorelDRAW Compressed (CDX) — The CDX file format is a compressed CorelDRAWfile. • Corel DESIGNER or CorelDRAW Template (CDT) — The CDT file format is for a Corel DESIGNER or CorelDRAW template file. • Encapsulated PostScript (Desktop Color Separation) — The DCS file format, developed by QuarkXPress, is an extension of the standard encapsulated PostScript (EPS) file format. Typically, the DCS file format consists of five files. Four of the five files contain information about high-resolution color. This information is expressed in CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow and black) format. The fifth file, considered the master file, contains a PICT preview of the DCS file. • FPX — The FlashPix file format stores images at different resolutions in a single file. • Frame Vector Metafile (FMV) — The FMV file format is used for a Frame Vector Metafile. • GEM Paint (IMG) — GEM Paint (IMG) is a bitmap format that is the native bitmapped file format of the GEM environment. IMG files support 1- and 4-bit paletted color and are compressed by using an RLE method. IMG was a common format in the early days of desktop publishing. • GEM File (GEM) — The GEM file format is used for a GEM file. • Lotus PIC (PIC) — The PIC file format is used for a Lotus PIC file. • MacPaint Bitmap (MAC) — MacPaint (MAC) is a bitmap format that uses the filename extensions MAC, PCT, PNT, and PIX. It is the format used by the MacPaint program that was included with the Macintosh 128. It supports only two colors and a palette of patterns. It is used mainly by Macintosh graphics applications to store black-and-white graphics and clipart. The maximum size for MAC images is 720 x 576 pixels. • Macromedia FreeHand (FH) — the FH format is the native vector file format for Macromedia Freehand. Corel graphics applications support versions 7 and 8 of Macromedia FreeHand. • MET Metafile (MET) — The MET file format is for a MET Metafile. • Micrografx 2.x, 3.x (DRW) — The DRW file format is used for a Micrografx 2.x or 3.x file. • Micrografx Picture Publisher 4 (PP4) — The PP4 file format is a native file format of Micrographx Picture Publisher 4. • Micrografx Picture Publisher 5 (PP5) — The PP5 file format is a native file format of Micrographx Picture Publisher 5. • Picture Publisher File (PPF) — The PPF file format is native to Micrografx Picture Publisher 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10. • Microsoft PowerPoint (PPT) — The PPT file format is native to Microsoft PowerPoint. • NAP Metafile (NAP) — The NAP file format is used for a NAP Metafile. • OS/2 Bitmap (BMP) — This type of bitmap file is designed for the OS/2 operating system. • Pattern File (PAT) — The PAT file format is used for a pattern file. • PostScript Interpreted (PRN) — PRN PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import PS, PRN, and EPS PostScript files. • PostScript Interpreted (PS) — PRN PostScript (PS or PRN) is a metafile format for PostScript printers. This format is written in ANSI text. The PostScript Interpreted import filter can import PS, PRN, and EPS PostScript files. • Rich Text Format (RTF) — Rich Text Format (RTF) is a text format that stores plain text plus text formatting, such as bold. When you import an RTF file to CorelDRAW, the text and any embedded Windows Metafile Format (WMF) graphics are transferred. However, graphic elements are not transferred in an RTF file exported from CorelDRAW. • SCITEX CT Bitmap (SCT) — The SCT file format is used for importing 32-bit color and grayscale SCITEX images. SCITEX bitmaps are created from high-end scanners. The bitmaps are then processed for output by film recorders or high-end page layout programs. • TrueType Font (TTF) — The TrueType Font (TTF) file format was created jointly by Apple Computer and Microsoft Corporation. It is the most common format for fonts used in both Macintosh and Windows operating systems. The TTF file format prints font characters as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. True Type fonts appear the same in print and on-screen, and they can be resized to any height. • Visio (VSD) — VSD is the Visio drawing format. It can contain bitmaps and vectors. • Windows Metafile Format (WMF) — Developed by Microsoft Corporation, this file format stores both vector and bitmap information. It was developed as the internal file format for Microsoft Windows 3. It supports 24-bit RGB color and is supported by most Windows applications. • XPixMap Image (XPM) — The XPM file format is used with an XPixMap Image file. Recommended formats for importing from other applications Application Recommended import format Adobe Illustrator AI, PDF (for some Adobe Illustrator files version 11) AutoCAD DXF, DWG, HPGL (PLT files) Text Clipboard, RTF CorelDRAW CDR, Clipboard Deneba Canvas, Macromedia FreeHand and other vector packages PCT, AI, FN Microsoft Office WMF, PNG, VSD. For more information, click Help Working with Office. WordPerfect Office WPG Micrografx Designer DRW, AI Recommended formats for exporting graphics When exporting graphics to be used in Adobe PageMaker, use the encapsulated PostScript file format if you have a PostScript printer. If you have a non-PostScript printer, the WMF format is recommended. The following table lists the recommended file formats for exporting to page layout and desktop publishing packages that have graphics editing capabilities. Application Recommended format Adobe Illustrator AI, PDF AutoCAD DXF Macromedia FreeHand and other vector programs PCT, AI, FH Microsoft Office PNG, WMF WordPerfect Office WPG Micrografx Designer CGM The HPGL or DXF outlines formats are recommended for exporting graphics to be output to devices such as plotters and computer-driven cutters. Reference: Technical notes about file formats This section contains technical reference information about file formats. For more information about file formats, see "File formats." Adobe Illustrator (AI) technical notes Importing an AI file • Corel programs provide full support for all AI file formats up to and including Adobe Illustrator CS. For files saved in Adobe Illustrator CS or higher, text can be imported as text or curves if the files are PDF-compatible. If a file is not PDF-compatible, text is not imported. • Corel programs cannot import AI files containing bitmaps linked as EPS files. • Adobe Illustrator graphics are imported into the program as a group of objects. Click Arrange Ungroup to manipulate objects in the imported graphic. If you open an AI file instead of importing it, you do not need to ungroup objects. • Adobe Acrobat 6.0 files are not fully supported. Exporting an AI file • During export conversion, objects can become complex, making it difficult to edit them in other drawing programs or in CorelDRAW if you reimport them. To avoid this problem, keep a copy of the image in CorelDRAW (CDR) format, and use CorelDRAW for all editing. • If you create a file that will be printed in other programs, such as Adobe PageMaker, export it using the Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) filter, not the Adobe Illustrator (AI) filter. The Encapsulated PostScript filter supports more drawing effects than the Adobe Illustrator filter does and yields better results overall. • Most linear and radial fountain fills are preserved. Conical and square fountain fills are exported as a series of filled bands, an effect similar to that achieved by blending. You can set the number of bands by clicking Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, click Display, and type a number in the Preview fountain steps box. The maximum number of bands supported is 256. • To accurately reproduce calligraphic outlines, corner styles, and line caps, click Tools Options. In the Workspace list of categories, double-click Text, and enable the Calligraphic text check box in the Clipboard area. The outlines are exported as a group of polygons that match the appearance of the outlines in the program, but add significantly to the size of the exported file Windows Bitmap (BMP) technical notes Importing a BMP file • You can import Windows Bitmap files conforming to the Windows and OS/2 BMP specifications. • Windows Bitmap files may be black-and-white, 16 colors, grayscale, paletted, or RGB color (24-bit), and print accordingly, depending on your printer. • Run-length encoding (RLE) compression may be used on all bitmaps, except RGB color (24-bit), and black-and-white bitmaps. • The resolution ranges from 72 to 300 dpi, or higher if you choose custom settings. • The maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels. Exporting a BMP file • Because raster images such as bitmaps are mapped pixel by pixel to the page, the resolution does not increase. Instead, your bitmap appears “jagged” with an apparent loss of resolution. CorelDRAW (CDR) technical notes • Imported CorelDRAW files appear as a group of objects. Click Arrange Ungroup to manipulate individual objects in the imported graphic. • Linked symbols are converted to internal symbols. Corel Symbol Library (CSL) technical notes • Corel Symbol Library (CSL) files store symbols that can be used in other files. • Corel Symbol Library (CSL) files can be stored locally or on a network, allowing easy deployment and management of symbol collections. • For more information, see "Managing collections and libraries." Computer Graphics Metafile (CGM) technical notes • You can import and export CGM files versions 1 and 3. Importing a CGM file • The CGM filter accepts only markers supported by the CGM file format standard. Private-use markers are ignored. • Text is editable, provided the file is exported from the source program with the correct text options specified. The typeface you see may not correspond to the one used in the source program; however, you can easily correct the typeface in the Corel program. • If the CGM file contains a font that is not on your computer, the PANOSE font-matching dialog box lets you replace the font with an available one. Exporting a CGM file • CGM files can be saved in text or binary format. Text-encoded files can be opened in an ASCII text editor. • PostScript textures are converted to solid gray fills. Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) technical notes • The following versions are available: 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 11. • This file format is available in CorelDRAWand Corel PHOTO-PAINT. These programs import Corel Presentation Exchange (CMX) files as bitmaps. Corel PHOTO-PAINT (CPT) technical notes • This filter is available in CorelDRAW, Corel PHOTO-PAINT, and Corel DESIGNER. • Corel PHOTO-PAINT files may be black-and-white, grayscale, paletted, CMYK color (32-bit), RGB color (24-bit), or LAB. Corel DESIGNER (DSF) technical notes • Guidelines and grid settings are not converted. • Snap points are not converted — the program preserves the default gravity settings. • Objects on some pages may be grouped together. You may want to select the group and then ungroup it before editing. • DSF files display OLE data is as picture objects. OLE data object types are lost in the conversion. • Curvygons are converted to curves. • Gradient transparency may be offset in some cases. • Hatch fills are rendered but are actually part of the object fill. They are separate objects that are grouped. • Unclosed, filled lines are converted to two objects: one for the line and one for the fill. • Warped text is converted to curves. • Repelled text (block text that wraps around an object) is converted to multiple text objects. • Each line of a nonrectangular text object (text placed within an object) is converted to a separate text object. • For block text that has many transformations, tab stops may stretch or shrink. • Text flowing between containers is not preserved; each container is converted to a separate object. • Dimensions of text in small caps vary when the text is imported. Corel DESIGNER (DES) technical notes • B-splines are preserved in the imported file but cannot be modified before you convert them to curve objects. For information about converting objects to curve objects, see "To convert objects to curve objects." • Hatch fills are preserved but cannot be modified in CorelDRAW. You can, however, apply a hatch fill to other objects in a drawing. For more information, see "To copy fill, outline, or text properties from one object to another". • Enhanced line styles are preserved but you can modify only some of their properties. For example, you can change the color and width of the lines, but you cannot modify the line pattern. You can apply an enhanced line style to other objects. Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) technical notes Importing an EPS file • When you import an EPS file as editable, the PostScript information in the file is converted to native CorelDRAW objects that you can edit with some restrictions. For information about these restrictions, see "PostScript (PS or PRN) technical notes." • If the encapsulated PostScript file contains a preview image (called a header), the preview image is imported and displayed. The EPS information remains attached to the header and is used when the image is printed to a PostScript printer. Exporting an EPS file • On a PostScript printer, graphics exported to the encapsulated PostScript (EPS) format print from other programs exactly as they do from a Corel graphics programs. • You can save a header to the Tagged Image file format (TIFF) or Windows Metafile format (WMF) in black and white, 4-bit grayscale or color, or 8-bit grayscale or color. You can set the header resolution between 1 and 300 dots per inch (dpi); the default header resolution is 72 dpi. If the program importing the EPS file has a limitation on the image header size, you might receive an error message stating that the file is too large. To reduce file size, in the EPS export dialog box, choose Black and White from the Type box, and lower the header resolution before exporting the file. The setting determines only the resolution of the header and has no impact on the print quality of a drawing. Color headers are useful for viewing EPS files. If the program in which you are going to use the file does not support color headers, try exporting with a mono header instead. You can also export without a header. • Along with the graphic, exported EPS files contain a filename, program name, and date. • To save font information in an EPS file, enable the Include fonts check box in the Export text as area. • If you export text as curves, text is converted to vector curves. • If a font used in the file is not available on the printer or has not been saved in the file, either the text is printed in Courier font or the drawing is not printed. PostScript (PS or PRN) technical notes • PostScript files containing mesh fills with spot colors, DeviceN images, or duotone images cannot be imported. • Mesh fills in the CMYK color mode are imported as bitmaps and cannot be edited. • Gradient fills are imported as a group of filled objects simulating the gradient fill appearance and cannot be edited as gradient fills. • RGB bitmaps are converted to CMYK in imported PS files. • Font information is maintained only if the font was embedded in the original file before it was imported. • Files that are too large cannot be imported into some programs because of memory limitations. This problem can be caused by complex gradient fills that increase the number of objects in a graphic. • Only Printer (PRN) files in PostScript format are supported. GIF technical notes • Corel programs import versions 87A and 89A of the GIF file format, but export only to version 89A. Version 87A supports basic features and interlacing. The newer version, 89A, includes all features found in 87A plus the ability to use transparent colors and to include comments and other data from the image file. • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing animated GIF files: black and white (1-bit), 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), and 256 color paletted (8-bit). • The GIF file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535  64,535 pixels and uses LZW compression. • You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by clicking in the Original window using the Zoom in tool. You can zoom out by right-clicking in the Original window with the Zoom in tool. HTML technical notes Importing an HTML file • The HTML import filter extracts editable information from a Web document and brings objects into CorelDRAW in a manner similar to the original layout. • Imported HTML files that exceed the boundaries of the drawing page continue down the workspace without a page break. Exporting an HTML file • All objects that are not within the boundaries of the drawing page are ignored on export. • Overlapping HTML text frames cause difficulties during export. If this occurs, try exporting the file to the GIF or JPEG file format. JPEG technical notes • You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by clicking in the Original window. JPEG 2000 (JP2) technical notes • JPEG 2000 standard files offer better image compression and storage of metadata, such as dimensions, tone scale, color space, and intellectual property rights. • A region of interest in a JP2 image is an area where the compression ratio in a transmitted image is lower, which results in higher fidelity for that part of the image. • JPEG 2000 codestream files are optimized for network transmissions, resisting bit errors and, therefore, data loss on low-bandwidth channels. • Not all Web browsers support JPEG 2000 formats. You may require a plug-in to view these files. • CorelDRAW supports exporting JPEG 2000 files in 24-bit RGB, and 8-bit grayscale. • CMYK, 48-bit RGB, and black-and-white images are not supported for export. PICT (PCT) technical notes • Corel graphics programs can import vector drawings and bitmaps contained in PICT (PCT) files. • Objects that contain a fill and an outline open as a group of two objects. One object is the outline, and the other is the fill. • PICT fills are often bitmap patterns, and the Corel program tries to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns. • Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color. • Text in PICT files opens as editable text. If a typeface in the imported file is not available on your computer, it is converted to the font that it most closely resembles. • Text alignment may not be preserved in the original file. This is due to the differences in font size, and intercharacter and interword spacing between the two formats. Any misalignment is easily corrected using the text formatting settings in the program. PICT (PCT) technical notes • Corel graphics programs can import vector drawings and bitmaps contained in PICT (PCT) files. • Objects that contain a fill and an outline open as a group of two objects. One object is the outline, and the other is the fill. • PICT fills are often bitmap patterns, and the Corel program tries to maintain these fills as bitmap patterns. • Pattern outlines are converted to a solid color. • Text in PICT files opens as editable text. If a typeface in the imported file is not available on your computer, it is converted to the font that it most closely resembles. • Text alignment may not be preserved in the original file. This is due to the differences in font size, and intercharacter and interword spacing between the two formats. Any misalignment is easily corrected using the text formatting settings in the program. PaintBrush (PCX) technical notes Exporting a PCX file • Bitmaps may be black-and-white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit). • Run-length encoding (RLE) compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels. • These files may contain one, two, or four color planes. • This file format is supported in CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT. Importing a PCX file • PCX files can be imported if they conform to the following PCX specifications: 2.5, 2.8, and 3.0. • Bitmaps may be black-and-white, 16 colors, grayscale (8-bit), paletted (8-bit), or RGB color (24-bit). • RLE compression is supported and the maximum image size is 64,535 x 64,535 pixels. • These files may contain one, two, or four color planes. Files containing three color planes or more than four color planes cannot be imported. Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF) technical notes Publishing a PDF file • To publish a PDF file, click File Publish to PDF. • Texture fills created in CorelDRAW are exported and imported as bitmap patterns. Importing a PDF file • CorelDRAW imports Portable Document Format and Adobe Illustrator 9 and 10 files. • Transparency applied to text is preserved. • Character attributes of text, including superscript and subscript, are preserved. • DeviceN color spaces may be converted to RGB or CMYK processed colors in the imported file, depending on the file content. • Layers are preserved. • Xform objects are converted to symbols. • Symbols are preserved when PDF files created with version 1.3 or later undergo round-tripping. • Pattern and texture fills are preserved. • Most mesh fills created in Adobe Illustrator are preserved. Portable Network Graphics (PNG) technical notes • You can import Portable Networks Graphics (PNG) files from 1-bit black and white to 24-bit color; 48-bit color is not supported. • Masks and indexed-color, grayscale, and true color images are supported. Masks, however, are not saved in 1-bit black-and-white or 8-bit paletted files. • LZ77 compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 30,000  30,000 pixels. Sample depths range from 1 to 16 bits. • The PNG file format also checks full-file integrity and detects common transmission errors. The PNG file format can store gamma and chromatic data for improved color matching on different platforms. • You can preview and adjust the settings of the image you are exporting. You can zoom in to get a closer look at the image by clicking in the Original window. You can zoom out by right-clicking. Adobe Photoshop (PSD) technical notes Importing a PSD file • Monotone, grayscale, duotone, and up to 32-bit CMYK images are supported. • Some layer effects cannot be imported. • Files that contain spot color channels are imported as multichannel (DeviceN) bitmaps. Exporting a PSD file • This format supports 1-bit black-and-white and up to 32-bit CMYK color images. • Layers are supported. Macromedia Flash (SWF) technical notes • Macromedia Flash (SWF) files cannot be imported into CorelDRAW. You can, however, link, embed, export, and publish Macromedia Flash files to the Web in a format equivalent to Macromedia Flash 4. To do this choose File Publish to the Web HTML. TARGA (TGA) technical notes • The following features are supported: uncompressed color-mapped images, uncompressed RGB images, run-length encoding (RLE) compressed color-mapped images, RLE-compressed RGB images (types 1, 2, 9, and 10 as defined by the AT&T Electronic Photography and Imaging Center), and masks. • The type of file produced depends on the number of colors exported. For example, 24-bit color TARGA (TGA) files are exported as RLE-compressed RGB bitmaps. • You can import TGA files from 8-bit grayscale to 24-bit RGB. • Masks are not saved in 1-bit black-and-white or 8-bit paletted files. • RLE compression is supported, and the maximum image size is 64,535  64,535 pixels. TIFF technical notes Exporting a TIFF file • Masks are not saved in 1-bit black-and-white, 16-bit grayscale, or 48-bit RGB files. Importing a TIFF file • Black-and-white, color, and grayscale TIFF files up to and including the 6.0 specification can be imported and exported. • TIFF files compressed using CCITT, Packbits 32773, or LZW compression can also be imported. However, you may notice additional loading time with these files because the program decodes the file compression. Corel Paint Shop Pro (PSP) technical notes • You can import only Corel Paint Shop Pro files with a .PspImage filename extension. • Text and layers are merged with the background in the imported file. WordPerfect Graphic (WPG) technical notes • This filter imports graphics created in WordPerfect programs. • Graphics Text Type 2 is not supported General notes on importing text files • When you import a text file into a Corel program, it appears almost the same as in the source program. However, some formatting attributes and page layout features may not be supported. In such cases, the program tries to simulate the results of a feature when a reasonable substitution can be made. • The following word-processing features are not supported: headers, footers, footnotes and endnotes, columns, and macros. • Font matching support is included. You can modify font-matching settings in the Font matching results dialog box. Fonts are converted by size and by family, provided the source file format includes font family information that the program can access. • Rich Text Format (.rtf) files are automatically converted to the Microsoft Windows ANSI (American National Standards Institute) character set. The Macintosh Character Set and Standard IBM PC Code Page 437 are also supported. • Corel graphics programs match characters as closely as possible. Font matching is used if the imported text font is not on the user’s system. However, if a match cannot be made, the font characters appear in the program as unrecognizable text. • Conversion of font sizes is supported. The following table shows font family conversion capabilities. Word-processing program From.rtf to Corel graphics WordPerfect All fonts supported Microsoft .rtf All fonts supported Microsoft Word PC All fonts supported Ami Professional Limited font support Microsoft Word Macintosh All fonts supported Word for Windows All fonts supported “All fonts supported” means that Corel graphics programs support all font families supported by the word-processing program listed. “Limited font support” means that Corel graphics programs support only selected fonts from the fonts supported by the word-processing program listed. This typically includes Standard PostScript fonts and the Standard HP PCL fonts. • When Macintosh files are converted, font support is limited to the supported font families of the Windows formats. • Fonts converted to formats other than those listed in the table above are mapped to fonts that Corel graphics programs find as the best fit. • You may encounter alignment problems when converting from and to a proportional and nonproportional font. Therefore, if you import a document created in a nonproportional font to a proportional font, some pages may have more text on a page than the original document. • Source documents that contain a table of contents and index are converted into the appropriate functions in an .rtf file. • Data that is automatically outlined is converted to regular text. • Style sheet properties are converted to RTF. The file appears as in the source program; however, the style sheet from the original program is not imported. • Text contained within a frame or a positioned object is retained. AutoCAD Data Interchange Format (DXF) technical notes • The Data Exchange File (DXF) filter is supported in AutoCAD R13 and R14. • AutoCAD 2000, 2002, and 2004 files are supported. • Layers are retained on import and export. Importing an AutoCAD DXF file • The DXF filter imports vector graphics created in AutoCAD 12, AutoCAD 13, AutoCAD 14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002/2004. • If a DXF file is too complex to import into CorelDRAW, you can configure your AutoCAD output device as an HP7475 plotter and perform a plot-to-file of the drawing. Then you can try importing this plot file with the HPGL import filter. Newer versions of AutoCAD allow you to create EPS files. • Corel graphics programs try to center the imported image. The image is scaled down if the coordinates are larger than the maximum page size available in CorelDRAW — 150  150 feet. • Solid and trace entities are filled. • A point is imported as an ellipse of minimum size. • Files exported as “Entities only” may appear in the Corel program incorrectly because of a lack of header information. • Justification of text entries may not be preserved, especially if fonts needed to be replaced in the imported files. For best results, avoid justification of text. • If the DXF file contains a font that is not on the user’s computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets the user replace the font with an available one. Exporting an AutoCAD DXF file • CorelDRAW saves drawings in a vector format accepted by computer-aided design/computer-aided manufacturing (CAD/CAM) programs and devices, such as AutoCAD and certain computer-driven sign and glass cutters. • Only the outlines of objects are exported. • Filled objects with no outlines have an outline appended to them on export. • All text is exported using a generic font. AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) technical notes • The AutoCAD Drawing Database (DWG) filter is supported in AutoCAD R13, R14, and AutoCAD 2000/2002/2004. • CorelDRAW can import AutoCAD 12, AutoCAD 13, AutoCAD 14, AutoCAD 2000, AutoCad2002, and AutoCAD 2004 DWG files. • If the DWG file contains a font that is not on your computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets you replace the font with an available one. Windows Metafile (WMF) technical notes Importing a WMF file • CorelDRAW substitutes fonts that are missing from a file in the WMF format from similar fonts available on your computer. • The following features are not supported: PANOSE font matching and rotated and skewed bitmaps. Exporting a WMF file • The WMF format is used to export graphics to Windows programs. • A header contains additional information, such as sizing.Therefore, a WMF file can successfully be exported from CorelDRAW if the header is included. • Text is maintained as text when exported, and WMF files can be very large. This can cause problems in programs that limit the size of imported files. • The Windows Metafile Format is 16 bits, while CorelDRAW is 32 bits.When you export a WMF file, the 32-bit numbers are converted to 16 bits. For example, lines that are 0.01388 inch and thinner appear as hairlines because the WMF format does not have enough precision to specify these widths accurately. HPGL Plotter (PLT) technical notes Importing a PLT file • Corel programs support versions 1 and 2 of PLT file formats although some features of version 2 are not supported. • You can import images larger than the Corel program’s maximum page size by enabling the Scale option in the HPGL options dialog box, which lets you resize the imported image. • The curve resolution factor can be set to a value between 0.0 and 1.0 inch. The value can be very precise; up to eight decimal places are accepted. A setting of 0.0 results in the highest resolution, but it also greatly increases file size. A curve resolution of 0.004 inch is recommended. • The PLT file format does not contain color information. Instead, the various objects in a PLT file have certain pen numbers associated with them. When imported into a Corel program, each pen number is assigned a specific color. You can specify the color assigned to a particular pen, so that you can match the original colors of the graphic. • The Pen selection list contains 256 pens, although not all of the pens may be assigned. You can change the color assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new color for that pen from the Pen color list box. Choosing Custom colors brings up a color definition dialog box that allows you to define a custom color according to RGB values. • You can change the pen width assignments by choosing the pen and then choosing a new width for that pen from the Pen width list box. • You can change the pen velocity by choosing the pen and then choosing a new velocity for that pen from the Pen velocity list box. This is useful only for exporting PLT files. • You can set a defined pen to the Unused option. You can also reset the current Pen Library pen settings to the previously saved settings. • Corel programs support numerous dotted, dashed, and solid line types of the PLT file format. The pattern number of a line in a PLT file is translated to a line type pattern. • If the PLT file contains a font that is not on the user’s computer, the PANOSE font matching dialog box lets the user replace the font with an available one. Exporting a PLT file • Only the outlines of objects are exported to the PLT file format. • Dotted lines, dashed lines, and arrowheads are mapped to standard line types of the PLT file format. • Bézier curves are converted to line segments. • Outline thickness and calligraphic settings are lost. • Outline colors are limited to eight: black, blue, red, green, magenta, yellow, cyan, and brown. Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) technical notes Importing an SVG file • Most of the information in SVG files created in other programs is preserved in the imported file, even if CorelDRAW does not support a feature. For example, information about ink strokes in an SVG file created in Corel Grafigo is preserved in the imported file, even though the ink strokes are not displayed. • Clipped and masked objects are imported as PowerClip objects. • Group, object, and symbol names and IDs are retained in the imported file. • Symbols in the imported file appear in the Symbol manager docker. • Bitmap files embedded in an SVG file are retained. • Links to external files, such GIF, PNG, or JPEG files, are supported on import unless the external files are stored on the Web. • SVG color definitions and names are supported. • Round-tripping is supported. • Metadata is supported. • Hyperlinks are supported. Exporting an SVG file • Scalable Vector Graphics (SVG) allows three types of graphic objects: vector graphic shapes (for example, paths consisting of straight lines and curves), images, and text. • Drop shadows are rasterized in SVG files. • All CorelDRAW symbols are supported on export as SVG symbols. • Object, layer, group, and symbol names are also supported. If the names are the same, the SVG file appends unique numbers to the object IDs. Invalid names are corrected on export. • Graphical objects can be grouped, styled, transformed, and combined into previously rendered objects. • You can export text as editable characters, so that after you publish an SVG graphic to the Web, text continues to be recognized as text. Text strings can be restyled, copied and pasted, or indexed by search engines. Text can also be edited by SVG-capable editing programs, eliminating the need for maintaining multiple versions of graphic images for editing. • The SVG standard allows the use of Cascading Style Sheets (CSS) to define font, text, and color properties of objects on a page. • Layers are retained as groups in the exported file. If you import the file back into CorelDRAW, the layer groups are converted into layers with the original layer names preserved. • Only the active page in a drawing is exported. If you want to export only a part of a drawing, enable the Selected only check box in the Export dialog box. • URLs assigned to text objects are retained in the exported file. • Transformations, such as rotation and skewing, are usually retained in the exported files. In some cases, transformations may be lost, and transformed shapes may be converted into curves. Corel Painter (RIF) technical notes • Wet digital watercolor strokes and vector shapes are not preserved in the imported file. • Text and annotations are not preserved. TrueType Fonts (TTF) technical notes • TrueType fonts (TTF) print as bitmaps or vectors depending on the capabilities of your printer. TrueType fonts appear in print as they appear on-screen and can be resized to any height. • TrueType fonts exported from CorelDRAW are unhinted. • Each exported character constitutes a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects. • Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported. • For best results, avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the following example. Left to right: three objects correctly combined; five objects correctly combined; five objects incorrectly combined Adobe Type 1 Fonts technical notes • Most Type 1 fonts are single master fonts that permit only style editing; for example, Roman, italic, bold. A single master Type 1 font contains two files: a Printer Font Metrics (PFM) file and a Printer Font Binary (PFB) file. • Some Type 1 fonts are also available in multiple master format. You can customize design elements of multiple master fonts such as weight, width, style, and optical size. A multiple master base font is the multiple master font itself, from which you create variations called multiple master instances. A multiple master base font is composed of a PFM file, a PFB file, and a Multiple Master Metrics (MMM) file. A multiple master instance is composed of a PFM file and a PostScript Printer Stub (PSS) file. • Adobe Type 1 fonts exported from CorelDRAW are unhinted. • Each exported character constitutes a single object. Before you export multiple objects, you must combine them by clicking Arrange Combine. You cannot export multiple objects or grouped objects. • For best results, avoid intersecting lines. Any object in your character should lie completely inside or outside of others, as shown in the following example. Left to right: three objects correctly combined; five objects correctly combined; five objects incorrectly combined • Fill and outline attributes applied to objects are not exported. • Adobe Type 1 fonts you create are compatible with Adobe Type Manager version 2.0, but not with earlier versions. OS/2 Bitmap technical notes • Corel programs support Standard Version 1.3 and Enhanced Version 2.0, or later versions of the OS/2 Bitmap file format. • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing and exporting BMP files: 1-bit The OS/2 Bitmap file format supports a maximum image size of 64,535 x 64,535 pixels. OS/2 uses Run-length encoding (RLE) compression. Kodak Photo CD (PCD) image technical notes • PCD images are derived from 35-mm film negatives or slides that have been converted to digital format and stored on a CD. • Kodak Photo CD (PCD) images may be subject to copyright. The Corel program does not display a warning message about this. • Other Kodak-compatible programs may install the Kodak pcdlib.dll file in the Windows folder instead of the Windows\System folder. This difference in the folder location produces an error message. • When you import Photo CD files, a dialog box appears and prompts you to choose the desired file resolution and color. The resolution is limited to 72 dpi and the maximum image size is 3072 x 2048 pixels. • You can import the following color modes: RGB (24-bit), paletted (8-bit), and grayscale (8-bit). Microsoft Word (DOC) technical notes Importing a DOC file • The following Microsoft Word (DOC) versions are available: Microsoft Word 97/2000, Microsoft Word for Windows 6/7, Microsoft Word for Windows 2.x, Microsoft Word 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, and 5.5. • The embedded-field method for building indexes in Microsoft Word is supported, but the style-implied method for building indexes is not. • The Corel program matches the fonts in the file you are importing with the same or similar fonts, depending on the fonts installed on your computer. However, the Normal text style in Microsoft Word is converted to the default text style. To set the default text style, click Tools Customization. In the list of categories, double-click Document, double-click Styles, and choose a text style. • Whenever possible, the program automatically converts characters available in the sets “Symbol” or “MS Linedraw” to the corresponding Windows character set entries. • Most fonts are proportionally spaced, and text is reflowed when imported. As a result, soft line and page breaks often appear in new locations if you are converting to a fixed-pitch or nonscalable font. • When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size, which may affect the placement of text. • Footnotes or endnotes created in Microsoft Word 3.x, 4.x, 5.0, or 5.5 are not supported. • Tables are converted to text in place (in rectangles). The total height and width are determined by the original table. • If the file contains more then one table, each is placed on a new page. • If a table is longer then the current page, the table data continues down and off the page. • Nested tables are not fully supported. The text within a nested table appears within the text box of the top-level table cell as text only (no bounding lines). • Equations are not maintained — the data and results may be maintained but they are unlinked. • Text direction is not maintained. For more information, see "To import a Microsoft Word file." WordPerfect Document (WPD) technical notes • The WPD filter imports text files created in WordPerfect 4.2, 5.0, 5.1, Corel WordPerfect 6, 7, 8, and WordPerfect 9 and 10. • The following features are not supported: index functions, text in tables of contents, and style sheets. • Equations and formulas created in the WordPerfect equation language are converted to regular text. • Graphic features like HLine and VLine are not converted. • When importing text, the page size in the original document is ignored. The text is fit to the current page size, which may affect the placement of text. • For more information, see "General notes on importing text files." WI technical notes Importing a WI file • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing Wavelet Compressed Bitmap (.wi files): 256-shade (8-bit) grayscale, and 24-bit RGB. Exporting a WI file • Corel programs support the following color depths when exporting to the Wavelet Compressed Bitmap file format: 256 shade (8-bit) grayscale, 24-bit RGB. • The Wavelet Compressed Bitmap file format supports Wavelet compression. It also supports a minimum image size of 16 pixels and a maximum size of 2,048 pixels. Cursor Resource (CUR) technical notes • The Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource (.cur files) file format is used to create icons for Windows 3.1, Windows NT, and Windows 95 interfaces. • The Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource file format supports cursor graphic elements that are used in Windows pointers. You can select a color for Transparent and Inverse masks. • Corel programs support the following color depths when importing .cur files: 1-bit black-and-white, 16 color (4-bit) paletted, 256 color (8-bit) paletted. • The Windows 3.x/NT Cursor Resource file format supports a maximum image size of 32 x 32 pixels Working with graphic, text, and color styles The CorelDRAW application has three types of styles you can create and apply in drawings: graphic, text, and color. After you create a style, you can edit it and apply it to any number of graphic and text objects. When you edit a style, all the unlocked objects using that style are automatically updated, letting you make design changes to many objects in one step. You can save all styles in the active drawing and use them for all new drawings you create. For more information, see "Saving defaults." In this section, you’ll learn about • creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles • customizing the Graphic and text styles docker • creating and applying color styles • editing and sorting color styles • moving and copying color styles Creating, applying, and editing graphic or text styles A style is a set of formatting attributes. When you apply a style to an object, all the attributes of the style are applied to that object in one step. Styles can save you considerable time if you must apply the same formatting to several objects. There are graphic styles and text styles. A graphic style consists of fill and outline settings that you can apply to graphic objects such as rectangles, ellipses, and curves. For example, if you have a group of objects in a drawing that use one graphic style, you can simultaneously change their fill by editing the graphic style. For more information on applying fills, see "Filling objects." For more information about changing the appearance of outlines, see "Formatting lines and outlines." A text style is a set of text settings such as font type and size. Text styles can also include fill and outline attributes. For example, you can create a style that applies a 72 point AvantGarde font with a texture fill. There are two types of text styles: artistic and paragraph. You can also change the properties of default artistic and paragraph text. For example, you can change the properties of default artistic text, so that every artistic text object you create has the same formatting. For information about default text, see "Changing the appearance of text." You can create a graphic or text style from the properties of an existing object or from scratch, at which time the style is saved. When you apply a style to an object, CorelDRAW overrides the existing text or graphic properties with the properties of the current style. To use the style in another drawing, you can copy the style to the new drawing or save the style in a template. For more information about templates, see "Working with templates." If you copy or import a style with the same name as an existing style, CorelDRAW renames the style by adding a number to the style name. At any point, you can rename a style, unless it is a default style. You can also change the properties of an object back to its previous style if you made a mistake or decide that the previous style was better suited to that object. After you create a style, you can edit its properties and find any object using a given style. For example, you can find all objects that use the default graphic style. Finding objects assigned a specific style makes editing that style even more efficient. To create a graphic or text style from an object 1. Right-click an object whose style properties you want to save. 2. Click Styles Save style properties. 3. Enable one or more of the following check boxes: • Text • Fill • Outline 4. Type a name for the style in the Name box. • When you create a style from an existing object, CorelDRAW does not automatically apply the style to an object. If you want an object to use the style, you must apply the style. For information about applying a style, see "To apply a graphic or text style." • You can also create a graphic or text style from an object by dragging the object to the Graphic and text styles docker. To create or edit a graphic or text style 1. Click Tools Graphic and text styles. 2. In the Graphic and text styles docker, click the flyout button . 3. Click New, and click one of the following style types: • Graphic style • Artistic text style • Paragraph text style 4. Choose a style from the list. 5. Click the flyout button, and click Properties. 6. Click Edit beside a property. 7. Modify any text, fill, or outline properties. You can also Copy object properties Choose a style, click the flyout button , click Copy properties from, and click the object. Delete a style Right-click a style, and click Delete. Rename a style Right-click a style, click Rename, type a new name, and press Enter. Revert to an object’s style Right-click an object using the Pick tool , and click Styles Revert to style. To apply a graphic or text style 1. Select an object. 2. Click Tools Graphic and text styles. 3. In the Graphic and text styles docker, double-click a style. To find objects assigned a specific graphic or text style 1. Click Tools Graphic and text styles. 2. Choose a style from the list in the Graphic and text styles docker. 3. Click the flyout button , and click Find. Customizing the Graphic and text styles docker You can specify what types of styles — graphic, artistic text, or paragraph text — are displayed in the Graphic and text styles docker/palette. You can also specify that only the styles available to selected objects will display. For example, when you select artistic text, only artistic text styles appear in the Graphic and text styles docker. If you are using several styles to format a drawing, displaying only the styles applicable to the selected object makes it easier to find the style you want. As you select graphic objects and text objects, CorelDRAW automatically refreshes the docker and displays only the relevant styles. To specify which styles display in the Graphic and text styles docker 1. Click Tools Graphic and text styles. 2. Click the flyout button in the Graphic and text styles docker. 3. Click Show and click any of the following options: • Graphic styles — to display graphic styles • Artistic text styles — to display artistic text styles • Paragraph text styles — to display paragraph text styles • Auto-view — to display only those styles available to a selected object Creating and applying color styles A color style is a color you save and apply to objects in a drawing. Since an infinite number of colors are available in CorelDRAW, color styles can make it easier to apply the exact color you want. When you create a color style, the new style is saved to the active drawing. After you create a color style, you can apply it to objects in the drawing. You can also delete color styles if you no longer require them. One powerful feature of color styles is that you can create a shade or series of shades based on a color style. The original color style is referred to as the “parent” color, and the shades are referred to as “child” colors. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent color but have different saturation and brightness levels. With the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, PANTONE Hexachrome, and Custom spot color palettes, child and parents are linked to one another but have different tint levels. CorelDRAW has an Auto-create feature for creating color styles from selected objects. For example, you can import a drawing and Auto-create color styles from an object in the drawing. When you create color styles from an object, the color style is automatically applied to that object so that if you decide to change a color style, the object’s related color will also be updated. For more information on importing files, see "Importing files." When you use the Auto-create feature, you can choose to create few or many parent color styles. After you have converted all colors to color styles, you can, for example, use one parent color to control all red objects, or many parents, one for each shade of red in the drawing. When creating child colors, colors added from a color-matching system are converted to the parent color’s color model so that they can be grouped into appropriate parent-child groups automatically. To create a color style 1. Click Tools Color styles. 2. In the Color styles docker, click the New color style button . 3. Select a color from the New color style dialog box. You can also Apply a color style Select an object, and double-click the name of the style you want to apply in the Color styles docker. Delete a color style Right-click the color style in the Color styles docker, and click Delete. • You can also create a color style from an object or the color palette by dragging a color to the Color styles docker. • You can also apply a color style to an object by dragging a color from the Color styles docker. To create a child color 1. Click Tools Color styles. 2. In the Color styles docker, choose the color style to which you want to link a child color. 3. Click the New child color(s) button . 4. In the Create a new child color dialog box, specify the settings you want. 5. Type a name in the Color name box. • You can also create a child color by typing values in the Saturation and Brightness boxes To create a series of child colors 1. Click Tools Color styles. 2. In the Color styles docker, choose the color style to which you want to link a child color. 3. Click the New child color(s) button . 4. In the Number of shades area, type a value in the Create box. 5. Enable one of the following options: • Lighter shades — creates child colors that are lighter than the parent • Darker shades — creates child colors that are darker than the parent • Both — creates an equal number of light and dark child colors 6. Adjust the Shade similarity slider. Move the slider to the left to create very different shades; move the slider to the right to create very similar shades. • You can also create a series of child colors by right-clicking a color style and clicking Create a child color. To create parent and child colors from an object 1. Click Tools Color styles. 2. Select an object or a group of objects. 3. In the Color styles docker, click the Auto create color styles button . 4. Enable any of the following check boxes: • Use fill colors • Use outline colors 5. Enable the Automatically link similar colors together check box to link similar colors together under their appropriate parent colors. 6. Click the Convert child palette colors to CMYK check box. If you want to convert colors added from a color-matching system to CMYK so that they can be grouped under an appropriate parent color, enable this check box. If you want these colors to represent separate color styles, disable the check box. • If you enable the Automatically link similar colors check box, move the Parent creation index slider to determine the number of parent colors created. To test different slider values, click Preview. Editing and sorting color styles You can edit both parent and child colors in CorelDRAW When you change the hue of a parent color, all of its child colors are updated, based on the new hue and the original saturation and brightness values. For color styles using the PANTONE MATCHING SYSTEM, PANTONE Hexachrome, and Custom spot color palettes, if you change the color of a parent, all child colors are updated, based on the new color and the original tint. If you want to change the color of the object later, you can edit the parent color, and CorelDRAW will automatically adjust the child colors. For example, if you change a parent color from red to yellow, CorelDRAW converts the child colors of the red parent to shades of yellow. Sorting color styles allows you to locate a style in less time. Instead of having color styles appearing randomly in a list, you can sort color styles alphabetically by name, or you can have all parent colors with child colors listed first. To edit a parent or child color 1. Click Tools Color styles. 2. In the Color styles docker, choose the parent or child color you want to edit. 3. Click the Edit color style button . 4. Select a color from either of the following dialog boxes: • Edit color style — for parent colors • Edit child color — for child colors You can also Rename a color style Right-click a color style, click Rename, type a new name for the color, and press Enter. Sort colors by name Click Tools Color styles, right-click the folder whose color styles you want to sort, and click Sort By names. Sort by links Click Tools Color styles, right-click the folder whose color styles you want to sort, and click Sort By color styles with children. • You can also edit a parent or child color by right-clicking the color and clicking Edit color. • You can also rename a color style by clicking the color style, pausing, clicking the color style a second time, typing the new name, and pressing Enter. Moving and copying color styles You can move a child color from one parent to another. The child color will change color based on the new hue and the original saturation, brightness, or tint levels. You can also copy color styles from one drawing to another. To move a child color 1. Click Tools Color styles. 2. In the Color styles docker, drag the child color under another parent color using the Pick tool . To copy a color style from one drawing to another 1. Open the drawing with the color style you want to copy. 2. Open the drawing to which you want to copy the style. 3. Click Tools Color styles. 4. In the Color styles docker, drag the color style to another drawing folder. Customizing your application You can customize your application by arranging command bars and commands to suit your needs. Command bars include menus, toolbars, the property bar, and the status bar. Help topics are based on the application’s default settings. When you customize command bars, commands, and buttons, the Help topics associated with them do not reflect your changes. In this section, you’ll learn about • saving defaults • using multiple workspaces • customizing keyboard shortcuts • customizing menus • customizing toolbars • customizing the property bar • customizing the status bar • customizing feedback sounds • customizing filters • customizing file associations Saving defaults Many application settings apply to the active drawing only. These include page layout options, grid and ruler settings, guideline settings, style options, save options, some tool settings, and Web publishing options. Saving the current settings as defaults lets you use the settings of the active drawing for all new drawings you create. You can also choose to save only specific settings as defaults. To save current settings as defaults • Click Tools Save settings as default. To save specific settings as defaults 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, click Document. 3. Enable the Save options as defaults for new documents check box. 4. Enable the check boxes that correspond to the options you want to save. Using multiple workspaces A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. You can create, choose, and delete workspaces. You can also reset the current workspace to the default settings. You can export and import workspaces to and from other computers that use the same application. For example, you can customize a workspace and share it with a group of users. To create a workspace 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3. Click New. 4. Type the name of the workspace in the Name of new workspace box. 5. From the Base new workspace on list box, choose an existing workspace on which to base the new workspace. If you want to include a description of the workspace, type a description in the Description of new workspace box. • Custom workspaces are saved as XML files and exported as XML-based Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT) files. To choose a workspace 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3. Enable the check box beside a workspace in the Workspace list. To delete a workspace 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3. Choose a workspace from the Workspace list. 4. Click Delete. • You cannot delete the default workspace. To reset the current workspace • Hold down F8 while the application is starting. To import a workspace 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3. Click Import. 4. In the Import workspace dialog box, click Browse. 5. Choose the folder where the file is stored. 6. Double-click the file. 7. Follow the instructions on screen. To export a workspace 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the list of categories, click Workspace. 3. Click Export . 4. Enable the check boxes beside the workspace items you want to export. 5. Click Save. 6. Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 7. Type a filename in the File name box. 8. Click Save. 9. Click Close. • The workspace items available for export are dockers, toolbars (including the property bar and toolbox), menus, status bar, and shortcut keys. • Custom workspaces are exported as XML-based Extensible Stylesheet Language Transformations (XSLT) files. You can use a workspace saved to the XSLT format when you set up or deploy custom workspaces. • You can send a workspace as an e-mail attachment by clicking Email in the Export workspace dialog box. Customizing keyboard shortcuts Although your application has preset keyboard shortcuts, you can change them, or add your own shortcuts, to suit your working style. You can assign keyboard shortcuts to the commands and text styles that you use the most, and you can delete keyboard shortcuts. Assigning a keyboard shortcut to a text style lets you quickly change the style of selected text. You can print a list of keyboard shortcuts. You can also export a list of keyboard shortcuts to the CSV file format — a comma delimited format that is easily opened by word processors and spreadsheet applications. When you change keyboard shortcuts, the changes are saved in a file called an accelerator table. Your application comes with two accelerator tables which can be customized to suit your work habits: • Main table — contains all non-text-related shortcut keys • Text editing table — contains all text-related shortcut keys To assign a keyboard shortcut to a command 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4. Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box. 5. Choose a command category from the top list box. 6. Click a command in the Commands list. The shortcut keys currently assigned to the selected command are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box. 7. Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination. If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box. 8. Click Assign. • If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut. • You can reset all keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all. • You can view all of the existing keyboard shortcuts by clicking View all. To assign a keyboard shortcut to a text style 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4. Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box. 5. Choose Apply styles from the top list box. 6. Choose a text style from the list. The shortcut keys currently assigned to applying the selected style are displayed in the Current shortcut keys box. 7. Click the New shortcut key box, and press a key combination. If the key combination is already assigned to another command, that command is listed in the Currently assigned to box. 8. Click Assign. • If the same keyboard shortcut is already assigned to another command, the second assignment overwrites the first. By enabling the Navigate to conflict on assign check box, you can automatically navigate to the command whose shortcut you reassigned, prompting you to assign a new shortcut. • You can all reset keyboard shortcuts by clicking Reset all. To delete a keyboard shortcut 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4. Choose a shortcut key table from the Shortcut key table list box. 5. Choose a command category from the top list box. 6. Click a command in the Commands list. 7. Click a shortcut key in the Current shortcut keys box. 8. Click Delete. To print keyboard shortcuts 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4. Click View all. 5. Click Print. To export a list of keyboard shortcuts 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Click the Shortcut keys tab. 4. Click View all. 5. Click Export to CSV. 6. Choose the folder where you want to save the file. 7. Type a filename in the File name box. 8. Click Save. Customizing menus Corel customization features let you modify the menu bar and the menus it contains. You can change the order of menus and menu commands; add, remove, and rename menus and menu commands; and add and remove menu command separators. You can search for a menu command if you do not remember the menu in which it belongs. You can also reset menus to the default setting. The customization options apply to the menu bar menus as well as to shortcut menus that you access by right-clicking. Help topics are based on the application’s default settings. When you customize menus and menu To change the order of menus and menu commands 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. In the application window, drag a menu on the menu bar to the left or right. If you want to change the order of a menu command, click a menu on the menu bar, click a menu command, and drag it up or down. If you want to change the order of context menu commands, right-click in the application window to display the context menu, and drag a menu command to a new position. To rename a menu or menu command 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Click a menu or command in the list. A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. 5. Click the Appearance tab. 6. Type a name in the Caption box. • An ampersand (&) before a letter in the Caption box indicates a shortcut, also known as a mneumonic accelerator key. Menus are displayed by pressing Alt + the letter. Commands are invoked by pressing the letter when the menu is displayed. • You can reset the name to the default by clicking Restore defaults. To add or remove an item on the menu bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. If you want to remove an item, drag it off the menu bar. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Drag an item to the menu bar. A black arrow displayed next to a name in the list indicates a menu. All other items in the list are commands. To add or remove a command on a menu 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. If you want to remove a command from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command off the menu. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Drag a command to a menu in the application window. To add or remove a command separator on a menu 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. If you want to remove a command separator from a menu, click the menu name, and when the menu displays, drag the command separator off the menu. 3. Choose User menus from the top list box. 4. Click Separator and drag it onto a menu in the application window. To find a menu command quickly 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Click the Search button . 4. From the Find text dialog box, type the menu command in the Find what box. 5. Click Find next. To reset menus to the default setting 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3. Choose Menu bar from the list. 4. Click Reset. Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbar position and display. For example, you can move or resize a toolbar, and you can choose to hide or display a toolbar. Toolbars can be either docked or floating. Docking a toolbar attaches it to the edge of the application window. Undocking a toolbar pulls it away from the edge of the application window, so it floats and can be easily moved around. You can create, delete, and rename custom toolbars. You can customize toolbars by adding, removing, and arranging toolbar items. You can adjust toolbar appearance by resizing buttons; adjusting the toolbar border; and displaying images, captions, or both. You can also edit toolbar button images. When moving, docking, and undocking toolbars, you use the grab area of the toolbar. For a The grab area is Docked toolbar Identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar Floating toolbar The title bar. If the title is not displayed, the grab area is identified by a double line at the top or left edge of the toolbar. To customize toolbar position and display To Do the following Move a toolbar Click the toolbar’s grab area, and drag the toolbar to a new position. Dock a toolbar Click the toolbar’s grab area, and drag the toolbar to any edge of the application window. Undock a toolbar Click the toolbar’s grab area, and drag the toolbar away from the edge of the application window. Resize a floating toolbar Point to the edge of the toolbar and, using the two-directional arrow, drag the edge of the toolbar. Hide or display a toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, and disable or enable the check box next to the toolbar name. Reset a toolbar to its default setting Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Reset. To add, delete, or rename a custom toolbar To Do the following Add a custom toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click New, and type a name. Delete a custom toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar, and click Delete. Rename a custom toolbar Click Tools Customization, click Command bars, click a toolbar name twice, and type a new name. To add or remove an item on a toolbar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Drag a toolbar item from the list to a toolbar in the application window. If you want to remove an item from a toolbar, drag the toolbar item off the toolbar. To arrange toolbar items 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. On the toolbar in the application window, drag the toolbar item to a new position. If you want to move a toolbar item to another toolbar, drag the toolbar item icon from one toolbar to the other. • You can copy a toolbar item to another toolbar by holding down Ctrl while dragging a toolbar item. To modify toolbar appearance 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3. Click a toolbar name in the list. If you want to choose multiple toolbars, hold down Ctrl, and click the other toolbar names. 4. Choose a size from the Button list box. 5. In the Border box, click an arrow to specify a value from 1 to 10 pixels for the toolbar border. 6. From the Default button appearance list box, choose one of the following: • Caption below image • Caption only • Caption to right of image • Default • Image only If you want to hide the title when the toolbar is floating, disable the Show title when toolbar is floating check box. • You can reset a built-in toolbar to its default settings by clicking Reset. To edit a toolbar button image 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Command. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Click a toolbar command. 5. Click the Appearance tab. 6. Edit the button image using the options in the Image area. • When you choose either Small or Medium in the Size list box, you edit the small or medium versions of a particular button image. You cannot edit the large version of a button image. For information about how to display all buttons as small, medium, or large, see "To modify toolbar appearance." • You can reset toolbar button images to the default settings by clicking Restore defaults. Customizing the property bar You have control over the placement and content of the property bar. You can move the property bar anywhere on screen. Placing it inside the application window creates a floating property bar. Placing it on any of the four sides of the application window docks it, making it part of the window border. When moving, docking, or undocking the property bar, you use the grab area of the property bar, which is the same as the grab area of a toolbar. For more information about the grab area, see "Customizing toolbars." You can also set up a custom property bar by adding, removing, and rearranging toolbar items. This lets you customize what appears on the property bar when you choose various tools. For example, when the Text tool is active, you can have the property bar display additional commands for text-related tasks such as increasing or decreasing font size, or changing case. To position the property bar To Do the following Move the property bar Click the property bar’s grab area, and drag the property bar to a new position. Undock the property bar Click the property bar’s grab area, and drag the property bar away from the edge of the application window. Dock the property bar Click the property bar’s grab area, and drag the property bar to any edge of the application window. To add or remove a toolbar item on the property bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Drag a toolbar item from the list to the property bar. If you want to remove an item from the property bar, drag the toolbar item icon off the property bar. • The new item is displayed on the property bar for the active tool or task. When the property bar content changes, the item is not displayed. The new item is displayed again when the related tool or task is activated. To rearrange toolbar items on the property bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Drag the toolbar item icon to a new position on the property bar. Customizing the status bar The status bar displays information about selected objects, such as color, fill type, and outline. The status bar also shows the current mouse position and relevant commands. You can customize the status bar by resizing it. If you want to see more of the application window, you can hide the status bar. You can also customize the status bar by adding, removing, and resizing toolbar items. To resize the status bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3. Click Status bar, and enable the check box. 4. Type 1 or 2 in the Number of lines when docked box. To hide the status bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3. Disable the check box beside Status bar. • You can also switch between hiding and displaying the status bar by clicking Window Toolbars Status bar. To add or remove a toolbar item on the status bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Choose a command category from the top list box. 4. Drag a toolbar item from the list to the status bar. If you want to remove a toolbar item from the status bar, drag the item off the status bar. To resize toolbar items on the status bar 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Customization list of categories, click Command bars. 3. Click Status bar, and enable the check box. 4. Choose one of the following options from the Button list box: • Small • Medium • Large • Only toolbar items you have added to the status bar are affected by resizing. The size of the default icons remains unchanged. Customizing feedback sounds Your application supports sounds through the Windows operating system. These sounds, which provide feedback through audio cues, are associated with certain user interface events. Though your application registers events available for sound cues, it does not supply any sounds. You can assign feedback sounds to specific events. Once assigned, feedback sounds are enabled by default, but you can disable them. To assign feedback sounds 1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar. 2. Click Settings Control panel. 3. Double-click Sounds. 4. From the Sound events list, choose an event below the application name. 5. Choose a sound from the Name list box. • For more information about feedback sounds, consult your operating system’s Help file. To assign feedback sounds (Windows XP) 1. Click Start on the Windows taskbar. 2. Click Control panel. 3. Click Sounds, speech, and audio devices. 4. Click Sounds and audio devices. 5. In the Sounds and audio properties dialog box, click the Sounds tab. 6. From the Program events list, choose an event below the application name. 7. Choose a sound from the Sounds list box. To disable feedback sounds 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, click General. 3. Disable the Enable sounds check box. • You must restart the application for the disable command to take effect. Customizing filters Filters are used to convert files from one format to another. They are organized into four types: raster, vector, animation, and text. You can customize filter settings by adding or removing filters so that only the filters you need are loaded. You can also change the order of the list of filters and reset filters to the default setting. To add a filter 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3. Double-click a type of filter in the Available file types list. 4. Click a filter. 5. Click Add. To remove a filter 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3. Click a filter in the List of active filters. 4. Click Remove. To change the order of the list of filters 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3. Click a filter in the List of active filters. 4. Click one of the following: • Move up — moves the filter up the list • Move down — moves the filter down the list • You can reset the List of active filters to the default setting by clicking Reset. Customizing file associations You can associate a number of different file types with Corel applications. When you double-click a file you have associated with an application, the application starts and the file opens. When you no longer need a file type association, you can break it. To associate a file type with CorelDRAW 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3. Click Associate. 4. In the Associated file extensions with CorelDRAW list, enable the check box of the file type you want to associate. • You can reset file associations by clicking Reset. To break a CorelDRAW file type association 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, double-click Global, and click Filters. 3. Click Associate. 4. In the Associated file extensions with CorelDRAW list, disable the check box of the file type association you want to break. • You can reset file associations by clicking Reset. Automating application tasks CorelDRAW tasks can be automated using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) and Corel scripts. In this section, you’ll learn about: • automating using VBA • running Corel scripts For more information about available VBA resources, see "Reference: Automating application tasks." Automating using VBA Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) is an object-oriented programming language that lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. CorelDRAW lets you record a series of operations as a VBA macro and run it in the drawing window. For example, you can create a VBA macro that draws a rectangle and fills it with a two-color fountain fill. VBA is an embedded subset of the Microsoft Visual Basic (VB) development environment. Even though VBA uses the Visual Basic programming language, it is considered “for applications” because it is integrated into another application in order to customize the functionality of that application. VBA enables you to build custom solutions within your application that can automate and extend application functionality, integrate with other applications, and shorten the development cycle of custom business solutions. It allows you to create solutions that reuse and extend your application. By incorporating VBA, Corel provides an international programming language to users. For more information about working in VBA, see the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help and the VBA Programming Guide, accessible from the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help. For information on how to access Help, see "To access the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help." Using VBA macros VBA allows you to record and run macros that automate a series of tasks within an application. You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once you have saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and access the macro. You can also access a macro from an open global macro storage (gms) file. After you have developed the macro, you should edit it to remove any bugs in the program by stepping through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to ensure that the macro will have the desired outcome. You can play the macro before or after debugging it. For more detailed instruction relating to VBA and its programming environment, consult the “Microsoft Visual Basic Help” from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor. To record a VBA macro 1. Click Tools Visual Basic Record. 2. Type a name for the script in the Macro name box. 3. Perform the actions you want to record. 4. Click Tools Visual Basic Stop. • Recorded macros indicate which actions cannot be recorded. • You can also record a VBA macro by clicking Tools Undo Docker, performing the actions you want to record in the drawing window and clicking the Save list to a VBA macro button in the Undo docker. To run a VBA macro 1. Click Tools Visual Basic Play. 2. Choose the macro you want to play from the Macros in list box. 3. Click Run. • You can access a macro from either an open global macro storage (gms) file or an open document from the Store macro in list box. To edit a VBA macro 1. Click Tools Visual Basic Play. 2. Choose the macro you want to edit. 3. Click Edit. 4. Use the Visual Basic Editor to edit the macro. Working in the VBA Editor When you work in the VBA Editor, you can create a new object, such as a dialog box, which is known as a form. You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box. You can set the object’s properties in the Properties dialog box. You can also set the object’s properties at run time by programming a method. Each document that you create with VBA has a corresponding project. In order to customize your document with VBA coding procedures, you must open the project file in the Visual Basic Editor. For more detailed information on constructing code procedures and setting properties, consult the “Microsoft Visual Basic Help” from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor. For descriptions and code samples of properties, methods, and events in the CorelDRAW X3 Object Model, you can access the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help. To create a project using Visual Basic Editor 1. Click Tools Visual Basic Visual Basic Editor. 2. Use the Visual Basic Editor to create a project. • For more information about working with VBA, consult the “Microsoft Visual Basic Help” from the Help menu in the Visual Basic Editor. • You can also access the “Microsoft Visual Basic Help” by pressing F1. To access the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help 1. Click Tools Visual Basic Visual Basic Editor. 2. Press F2. The Object browser displays. 3. Choose CorelDRAW from the Library list box. 4. Press F1. Installing Add-ins You can install Add-ins by following the documentation provided by a third party developer. Add-ins are separate modules that extend the functionality of the application. Most Add-ins automatically load when the application starts up; however, you can override this specification through the Add-in manager. If an Add-in doesn’t load immediately, double-check the Add-in manager to make sure it is included in the list of Add-ins, and that the Load behavior is set to Load on startup. You can also unload an Add-in if you want to temporarily remove it from the user interface. To load or unload an Add-in 1. Click Tools Visual Basic Add-in manager. 2. Enable the Loaded/unloaded check box. • You can view a list of all Add-ins in the Add-In manager dialog box. • Depending on the specifications included upon the creation of the Add-in, you may be able to access it directly by clicking Tools Visual Basic Add-ins. Running Corel scripts CorelDRAW lets you run Corel scripts in the drawing window. Scripts are short programs that automate drawing tasks. For example, you can run a script that applies a preset fill to a selected object. If you want to view scripts from the application window, you can display and run scripts through the Corel scripts manager docker. To run a Corel script 1. Click Tools Run script. 2. Choose the script you want to run. 3. Click Open. • You can also run a Corel script from the Corel scripts manager docker. See "To display the Corel scripts manager docker." To display the Corel scripts manager docker 1. Click Tools Customization. 2. In the Workspace, Customization list of categories, click Commands. 3. Choose Window from the list box. 4. Drag the Corel scripts manager button to a command bar. 5. Click the Corel scripts manager button on the command bar. • This feature is useful for running existing Corel scripts. Reference: Automating application tasks You have access to the following VBA resources: • Sample VBA macros: CorelDRAW includes new samples of VBA macros. They supply users with additional functionality, demonstrate the capabilities of VBA in CorelDRAW, and provide sample code to VBA developers. For more information about the macros, please refer to “Overview of sample macros” in the CorelDRAW X3 VBA Help. From Adobe Illustrator to CorelDRAW Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW have many similarities, which makes it easy to move from one graphics application to the other. Although they share the most basic drawing and design capabilities, Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW are distinguished by some differences in both terminology and tools. Understanding these differences lets you make a quick transition to CorelDRAW. In this section you’ll learn about • comparing terminology • comparing tools Comparing terminology The terms and concepts in Adobe Illustrator and CorelDRAW differ for some features. Many terms have similar meanings but are referred to by different names. Adobe Illustrator terms are listed below with their CorelDRAW equivalents. Adobe Illustrator term CorelDRAW term Anchor points Nodes Artwork Drawing Compound object Curve object Gradient fill Fountain fill Mask PowerClip Outline view Wireframe view Path Curve Placing images Inserting images Rasterizing Converting to a bitmap Stroke Outline Swatches palette Color palette Unite Weld Comparing tools The following table lists Adobe Illustrator tools and the corresponding CorelDRAW tools. Many of the tools create the same result but operate slightly differently. Adobe Illustrator tool CorelDRAW tool Add anchor point tool Shape tool , see "To add or delete a node." Area type tool Text tool , see "To add paragraph text." Blend tool Interactive blend tool , see "To blend objects." Convert anchor point tool Shape tool , see "To shape a curve object by using cusp, smooth, or symmetrical nodes." Delete anchor point tool Shape tool , see "To add or delete a node." Direct selection tool Shape tool , see "To select a node." Drop shadow tool Interactive drop shadow tool , see "To add a drop shadow." Gradient tool Interactive fill tool , see "Applying fountain fills." Line segment tool Freehand tool , see "To draw a curve by specifying width and height" or Polyline tool , see "Drawing lines." Measure tool Dimension tool , see "Drawing flow and dimension lines." Mesh tool Interactive mesh fill tool , see "To apply a mesh fill to an object." Paint bucket tool Interactive fill tool , see "To apply a uniform fill." Paintbrush tool Artistic media tool , see "To draw a calligraphic line" or Brush tool , see "Applying brush strokes." Path type tool Text tool , see "To fit text to a path." Pencil tool Freehand tool , see "To draw a line by using the Freehand tool." Pucker tool Interactive envelope tool , see "To apply an envelope." Rectangular grid tool Graph paper tool , see "To draw a grid." Reflect tool Mirror buttons, see "To mirror an object." Reshape tool Shape tool , see "To stretch, scale, rotate, or skew nodes." Rotate tool Pick tool , see "To rotate an object." Rounded rectangle tool Rectangle tool , see "To round the corners of a rectangle or square." Scissors tool Knife tool , see "To split an object." Selection tool Pick tool , see "To select objects." Size tool Pick tool , see "To size an object." Skew tool Pick tool , see "Skewing and stretching objects." Star tool Star tool , see "To draw a star." Symbol sprayer tool Sprayer tool , see "To spray a line." Twirl tool Interactive twister distortion tool , see "To distort an object." Twist tool Interactive twister distortion tool , see "To distort an object." Type tool Text tool , see "To add paragraph text." Warp tool Smudge brush tool , see "To smudge an object" or Envelope tool, see "Shaping objects by using envelopes." Wrinkle tool Roughen brush tool , see "To roughen an object." Reference information This reference section provides additional information and technical notes about customizing recovery and warning options, memory, filters, and file associations. Corel Application Recovery Manager Corel Application Recovery Manager (C.A.R.M.) is an online wizard that allows you to save your work and exit in case the application becomes unstable. You can also send an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it. The C.A.R.M. wizard opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action: • saving the drawing and closing the application • exiting the application without saving the drawing • continue working With the last option, there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your drawing after the last time you saved or kept the program open. After you have made your selection, you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log. Your report will be vital part of Corel's product improvement efforts. You can disable C.A.R.M., but doing so can result in your losing any work since the last time you saved. To disable Corel Application Recovery Manager 1. Click Tools Options. 2. In the list of categories, click Global. 3. Disable the Enable CARM check box. • All Corel applications installed on your computer are affected when C.A.R.M. is disabled. Specifying memory options You can increase the amount of memory available using swap disks. When you perform an action that requires more RAM than is available in your computer, image information can be swapped to the hard disk. If you have two hard disks, or two partitions, you can set up both a primary and a secondary disk. Although swap disks let you artificially increase the amount of memory available on your computer, swapping image information to hard disks requires more processing time than when it is sent to your computer's RAM. You can also choose how much of the available RAM on your computer is reserved for storing the images you open and edit. Set the amount of memory based on the type of work you perform and the number of applications you usually run simultaneously. If you increase the amount of memory reserved for images and find the application's performance has decreased, you might need to reduce this amount so that more RAM is available to run the application. To create swap disk space for temporary storage 1. Click Tools Options. 2. Click Workspace, and click Memory in the list of categories. 3. Choose a disk from the Primary disk list box. 4. Choose a disk from the Secondary disk list box. 5. Click OK. 6. Restart the application to apply the changes. • You should set the total amount of disk space two or three times larger than the size of your uncompressed images. • Primary and secondary swap disk space are allocated to the user's temp folder by default. You can change the swap disk space folder only if you have sufficient privileges on your system To specify how much RAM is used 1. Click Tools Options. 2. Click Workspace, and click Memory in the list of categories. The Memory usage area of the Memory page displays the total amount of memory available on your computer. 3. In the Maximum box, type the percentage of the total memory you want to make available for storing drawings. The amount of memory this percentage corresponds to appears to the right of the Max box. 4. Restart CorelDRAW for the new settings to take effect. Disabling warning messages You may encounter warning messages while working in the application. Warning messages explain the consequences of an action you are about to perform, and inform you of permanent changes that might result from that action. Although the warnings are helpful, you can disable them so you don't have to view them after you become familiar with the software. Avoid disabling warning messages until you are comfortable with the application and familiar with the results of the commands you use. To disable warning messages 1. Click Tools Options. 2. Click Workspace, and click Warnings in the list of categories. 3. Disable one or more of the check boxes Viewing system information You can view information about your computer as well as information about the application itself. For example, you can view details about your computer's setup. You can view detailed information about your system, display and printing properties, Corel applications and DLL files, and system DLL files. This feature is useful, for instance, to find out how much space you have on the drive to which you want to save a file. To view system information 1. Click Help About CorelDRAW. 2. Click System info. 3. Choose a category from the Choose a category list box. • Click the Save button to store system information for printing. Glossary A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W Z A accelerator table A file that contains a list of shortcut keys. Different tables are active depending on the task that you are performing. add-in A separate module that extends the functionality of an application. anchor point The point that remains stationary when you stretch, scale, mirror, or skew an object. Anchor points correspond to the eight handles that appear when an object is selected, as well as the center of a selection box marked by an X. animation file A file that supports moving images; for example, animated GIF and QuickTime (MOV). anti-aliasing A method of smoothing curved and diagonal edges in images. Intermediate pixels along edges are filled to smooth the transition between the edges and the surrounding area. arrow keys Direction keys that move or “nudge” selected objects in small increments. You can also use arrow keys to position the cursor when you type or edit text on-screen or in a dialog box. artistic text A type of text created with the Text tool. Use artistic text to add short lines of text, such as titles, or to apply graphic effects, such as fitting text to a path, creating extrusions and blends, and creating all other special effects. An artistic text object can contain up to 32,000 characters. aspect ratio The ratio of the width of an image to its height (expressed mathematically as x:y). For example, the aspect ratio of an image that is 640 x 480 pixels is 4:3. B base color The color of the object that appears under a transparency. The base color and the color of the transparency combine in various ways depending on the merge mode you apply to the transparency. Bézier line A straight or curved line made up of segments connected by nodes. Each node has control handles that allow the shape of the line to be modified. bit depth The number of binary bits that define the shade or color of each pixel in a bitmap. For example, a pixel in a black-and-white image has a depth of 1 bit, because it can only be black or white. The number of color values that a given bit depth can produce is equal to 2 to the power of the bit depth. bitmap An image composed of grids of pixels or dots. See also vector graphic. black point A brightness value that is considered black in a bitmap image. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can set the black point to improve the contrast of an image. For example, in a histogram of an image, with a brightness scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light), if you set the black point at 5, all pixels with a value greater than 5 are converted to black. black-and-white color mode A 1-bit color mode that stores images as two solid colors — black and white — with no gradations. This color mode is useful for line art and simple graphics. To create a black-and-white photo effect, you can use the grayscale color mode. See also grayscale. bleed The part of the printed image that extends beyond the edge of the page. The bleed ensures that the final image goes right to the edge of the paper after binding and trimming. blend An effect created by transforming one object into another through a progression of shapes and colors. bookmark An indicator for marking an address on the Internet. bounding box The invisible box indicated by the eight selection handles surrounding a selected object. brightness The amount of light that is transmitted or reflected from a given pixel. In the HSB color mode, brightness is a measure of how much white a color contains. For example, a brightness value of 0 produces black (or shadow in photos), and a brightness value of 255 produces white (or highlight in photos). C calligraphic angle The angle that controls the orientation of a pen to the drawing surface, like the slant of the nib on a calligraphy pen. A line drawn at the calligraphic angle has little or no thickness, but widens as its angle gets farther from the calligraphic angle. cascading style sheet (CSS) An extension to HTML that allows styles such as color, font, and size to be specified for parts of a hypertext document. Style information can be shared by multiple HTML files. See also HTML. center of rotation The point around which an object rotates. CGI script An external application that is executed by an HTTP server in response to an action you perform in a Web browser, such as clicking a link, image, or another interactive element of a Web page character A letter, number, punctuation mark, or other symbol. child color A color style created as a shade of another color style. For most of the available color models and palettes, child colors share the same hue as the parent, but have different saturation and brightness levels. See also parent color. choke In commercial printing, a form of trapping created by extending the background object into the foreground object. clipart Ready-made images that can be imported into Corel applications and edited if required. Clipboard An area that is used to temporarily store cut or copied information. The information is stored until new information is cut or copied to the Clipboard, replacing the old. clone A copy of an object or an area of an image that is linked to a master object or image area. Most changes made to the master are automatically applied to its clones. See also symbol. closed object An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are connected. closed path A path whose start point and end point are connected. color cast A color tint that often occurs in photos as a result of lighting conditions or other factors. For example, taking a photo indoors in dim incandescent light can result in a yellow color cast, and taking a photo outdoors in bright sunlight can result in a blue color cast. CMY A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), and yellow (Y). This mode is used in the three-color printing process. CMYK A color mode made up of cyan (C), magenta (M), yellow (Y), and black (K). CMYK printing produces true blacks and a wide tonal range. In the CMYK color mode, color values are expressed as percentages; therefore, a value of 100 for an ink means that the ink is applied at full saturation. code page A code page is a table in the DOS or Windows operating system that defines which ASCII or ANSI character set is used for displaying text. Different character sets are used for different languages. color channel An 8-bit grayscale version of an image. Each channel represents one level of color in the image; for example, RGB has three color channels, while CMYK has four. When all the channels are printed together, they produce the entire range of colors in the image. See also RGB and CMYK. color gamut The range of colors that can be reproduced or perceived by any device. For example, a monitor displays a different color gamut than a printer, making it necessary to manage colors from original images to final output. color mode A system that defines the number and kind of colors that make up an image. Black-and-white, grayscale, RGB, CMYK, and paletted are examples of color modes. color model A simple color chart that defines the range of colors displayed in a color mode. RGB (red, green, blue), CMY (cyan, magenta, yellow), CMYK (cyan, magenta, yellow, black), HSB (hue, saturation, brightness), HLS (hue, lightness, saturation), and CIE L*a*b (Lab) are examples of color models. color palette A collection of solid colors from which you can choose colors for fills and outlines. color profile A description of the color-handling capabilities and characteristics of a device. color separation In commercial printing, the process of splitting colors in a composite image to produce a number of separate grayscale images, one for each primary color in the original image. In the case of a CMYK image, four separations (one for cyan, magenta, yellow, and black) must be made. color space In electronic color management, a virtual representation of a device or the color gamut of a color model. The boundaries and contours of a device's color space are mapped by color management software. See also color gamut. color swatch A solid-colored patch in a color palette. color trapping A printing term used to describe a method of overlapping colors to compensate for misaligned color separations (misregistration). This method avoids white slivers that appear between adjoining colors on a white page. See also spread, choke, and overprinting. color value A set of numbers that define a color in a color mode. For example, in the RGB color mode, color values of 255 for red (R) and zero for both green (G) and blue (B) result in the color red. combined object An object created by combining two or more objects and converting them into a single curve object. A combined object takes on the fill and outline attributes of the last selected object. Sections where an even number of objects overlapped have no fill. Sections where an odd number of objects overlapped are filled. The outlines of the original objects remain visible. compound blend A blend created by blending the start or end object of one blend with another object. concave Hollowed or rounded inward like the inside of a bowl. content The object or objects that appear inside a container object when you apply PowerClip effects. contour An effect created by adding evenly spaced concentric shapes inside or outside the borders of an object. contrast The difference in tone between the dark and light areas of an image. Higher contrast values indicate greater differences and fewer gradations between dark and light. control object The original object used to create effects such as envelopes, extrusions, drop shadows, contours, and objects created with the Artistic media tool. Changes made to the control object control the appearance of the effect. control handles The handles that extend from a node along a curve that is being edited with the Shape tool. Control handles determine the angle at which the curve passes through the node. convex Curved or rounded outwards like the exterior of a sphere or circle. crop To cut unwanted areas of an image without affecting the resolution of the part that remains. curve object An object that has nodes and control handles, which you can manipulate to change the object's shape. A curve object can be any shape, including a straight or curved line. D desktop The area in a drawing where you can experiment and create objects for future use. This area is outside the borders of the drawing page. You can drag objects from the desktop area to the drawing page when you decide to use them. DeviceN A type of color space and device color model. This color space is multi-component, allowing color to be defined by other than the standard set of three (RGB) and four (CMYK) color components. diacritical mark An accent mark above, below, or through a written character; for example, the acute (é) and cedilla (ç) accents. dimension line A line that displays the size of objects or the distance or angle between objects. dithering A process used to simulate a greater number of colors when only a limited number of colors is available. document navigator The area at the bottom-left of the application window that contains controls for moving between pages and adding pages. The document navigator also displays the page number of the active page and the total number of pages in a drawing. dpi (dots per inch) A measure of a printer's resolution in dots per inch. Typical desktop laser printers print at 600 dpi. Image setters print at 1270 or 2540 dpi. Printers with higher dpi capabilities produce smoother and cleaner output. The term dpi is also used to measure scanning resolution and to indicate bitmap resolution. drawing A document you create in CorelDRAW. drawing page The portion of a drawing window enclosed by a rectangle with a shadow effect. drawing window The portion of the application window on which you can create, add, and edit objects. drop shadow A three-dimensional shadow effect that gives objects a realistic appearance. duotone An image in the duotone color mode is simply an 8-bit grayscale image that has been enhanced with one to four additional colors. dynamic guides Temporary guidelines that appear from the following snap points in objects — center, node, quadrant, and text baseline. E embedding The process of placing an object created in one application into a document created in a different application. Embedded objects are included entirely in the current document; they are not linked to their source files. encoding Determines the character set of text, letting you correctly display text in the appropriate language. envelope A closed shape that can be placed around an object to change the object's shape. An envelope consists of segments connected by nodes. Once an envelope has been placed around an object, the nodes can be moved to change the shape of the object. exposure A photographic term referring to the amount of light used to create an image. If not enough light is permitted to interact with the sensor (in a digital camera) or film (in a traditional camera), an image appears too dark (underexposed). If too much light is permitted to interact with the sensor or film, an image appears too light (overexposed). extrusion A feature that lets you apply a three-dimensional perspective by projecting lines from an object to create the illusion of depth. F feathering The level of sharpness along a drop shadow's edges. fill A color, bitmap, fountain, or pattern applied to an area of an image. filter An application that translates digital information from one form to another. floating object A bitmap with no background. Floating objects are also referred to as photo objects or cutout images. font A set of characters with a single style (such as italic), weight (such as bold), and size (such as 10 point) for a typeface such as Times New Roman. fountain fill A smooth progression of two or more colors applied to an area of an image that follow a linear, radial, conical, or square path. Two-color fountain fills have a direct progression from one color to another, while custom fills may have a progression of many colors. fountain steps The shades of color that make up the appearance of a fountain fill. The more steps in a fill, the smoother the transition from the beginning color to the end color. freehand marquee select To marquee select objects or nodes while dragging the Shape tool and controlling the shape of the marquee box enclosure as if you were drawing a freehand line. See also marquee select. FTP (File Transfer Protocol) A method of moving files between two computers. Many Internet sites have established repositories of material that can be accessed by using FTP. G GIF A graphic file format designed to use a minimum of disk space and be easily exchanged between computers. This format is commonly used to publish images of 256 or fewer colors to the Internet. glyph Diamond-shaped handles that can be dragged to alter the form of a shape. grab area The area of a command bar that can be dragged. Dragging the grab area moves the bar, while dragging any other area of the bar has no effect. The location of the grab area depends on the operating system you are using, the orientation of the bar, and whether the bar is docked or undocked. Command bars with grab areas include toolbars, the toolbox, and the property bar. grayscale A color mode that displays images by using 256 shades of gray. Each color is defined as a value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). Grayscale images, especially photos, are commonly referred to as “black and white.” greeking A method of representing text by using either words that have no meaning or a series of straight lines. grid A series of evenly spaced horizontal and vertical dots that are used to help draw and arrange objects. group A set of objects that behaves as one unit. Operations you perform on a group apply equally to each of its objects. guideline A horizontal, vertical, or slanted line that can be placed anywhere in the drawing window to aid in object placement. gutter The space between columns of text, also called the alley. In printing, the white space formed by the inside margins of two facing pages. H halftone An image that has been converted from a continuous tone image to a series of dots of various sizes to represent different tones. handles A set of eight black squares that appear at the corners and sides of an object when the object is selected. By dragging individual handles, you can scale, resize or mirror the object. If you click a selected object, the shape of the handles changes to arrows so that you can rotate and skew the object. highlight, shadow, and midtone Terms used to describe the brightness of pixels in a bitmap image. Brightness values range from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). Pixels in the first third of the range are considered shadows, pixels in the middle third of the range are considered midtones, and pixels in the last third of the range are considered highlights. You can lighten or darken specific areas in images by adjusting the highlights, shadows, or midtones. A histogram is an excellent tool for viewing and evaluating the highlights, shadows, and midtones of images. histogram A histogram consists of a horizontal bar chart that plots the brightness values of the pixels in your bitmap image on a scale from 0 (dark) to 255 (light). The left part of the histogram represents the shadows of an image, the middle part represents the midtones, and the right part represents the highlights. The height of the spikes indicates the number of pixels at each brightness level. For example, a large number of pixels in the shadows (the left side of the histogram) indicates the presence of image detail in the dark areas of the image. hotspot The area of an object that you can click to jump to the address specified by a URL. hotspotting The process of adding data to objects or groups of objects, so that they respond to events, such as pointing or clicking. For example, you can assign a URL to an object, making it a hyperlink to an external Web site. hot zone The distance from the right margin at which hyphenation begins. HSB (hue, saturation, brightness) A color model that defines three components: hue, saturation, and brightness. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, and so on); brightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color); and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). HTML The World Wide Web authoring standard comprised of markup tags that define the structure and components of a document. The tags are used to tag text and integrate resources (such as images, sound, video, and animation) when you create a Web page. hue The property of a color that allows it to be classified by its name. For example, blue, green, and red are all hues. hyperlink An electronic link that provides access directly from one place in a document to another place in that document or to another document. I icon A pictorial representation of a tool, object, file, or other application item. image map A graphic in an HTML document that contains clickable areas that link to locations on the World Wide Web, to other HTML documents, or to graphics. image resolution The number of pixels per inch in a bitmap measured in ppi (pixels per inch) or dpi (dots per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance to the bitmap; high resolutions can produce smoother images but result in larger file sizes. imagesetter A high-resolution device that creates film or film-based paper output used in the production of plates for printing presses. insert To import and place a photo image, clipart object, or sound file into a drawing. intensity Intensity is a measure of the brightness of the light pixels in a bitmap compared with the darker mid-tones and dark pixels. An increase in intensity increases the vividness of whites while maintaining true darks. interlacing In GIF images, a method that lets you display a Web-based image on the screen at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality improves. intersection The point at which one line crosses another. J JavaScript A scripting language used on the Web to add interactive functions to HTML pages. JPEG A format for photographic images that offers compression with some loss of image quality. Because of their compression (up to 20 to 1) and small file size, JPEG images are widely used in Internet publishing. JPEG 2000 An improved version of the JPEG file format that features better compression and allows you to attach image information and assign a different compression rate to an image area. justify To modify the spacing between characters and words so that the edges on the left, right, or both margins of a block of text are even. K kerning The space between characters, and the adjustment of that space. Often, kerning is used to place two characters closer together than usual, for example WA, AW, TA, or VA. Kerning increases readability and makes letters appear balanced and proportional, especially at larger font sizes. knockout A printing term that refers to an area where underlying colors have been removed so that only the top color prints. For example, if you print a small circle on a large circle, the area under the small circle is not printed. This ensures that the color used for the small circle remains true instead of overlapping and mixing with the color used for the large circle. L Lab A color model that contains a luminance (or lightness) component (L) and two chromatic components: “a” (green to red) and “b” (blue to yellow). layer A transparent plane on which you can place objects in a drawing. leader tabs A row of characters placed between text objects to help the reader follow a line across white space. Leader tabs are often used in place of tab stops, especially before text that is flush right such as in a list or table of contents. leading The spacing between lines of text. Leading is important for both readability and appearance. linking The process of placing an object created in one application into a document created in a different application. A linked object remains connected with its source file. If you want to change a linked object in a file, you have to modify the source file. library A collection of symbol definitions that are included in a CorelDRAW (CDR) file. To share a library between drawings, you can export it to the Corel Symbol Library (CSL) file format. ligature A character consisting of two or more letters joined together. lightness The level of brightness that is shared between a transparency and the object to which it is applied. For example, if a transparency is applied to an object whose color appears bright, the transparency color takes on a comparable brightness. The same is true for a transparency that is applied to an object whose color appears dark — the transparency takes on a comparable darkness. lossless A kind of file compression that maintains the quality of an image that has been compressed and decompressed. lossy A kind of file compression that results in noticeable degradation of image quality. LZW A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time. LZW compression is commonly used on GIF and TIFF files. M marquee select To select objects or nodes by dragging the Pick tool or Shape tool diagonally and enclosing objects in a marquee box with a dotted outline. master object An object that has been cloned. Most changes you make to the master object are automatically applied to the clone. master layer A layer on a master page whose objects appear on every page of a multipage drawing. A master page can have more than one master layer. master page A page that controls the master settings for the Grid, Guideline, and Desktop layers plus one initial active layer. mesh fill A type of fill that lets you add patches of color to the inside of a selected object. metadata Information about objects. Examples of metadata are names, comments, and cost assigned to objects. micro nudge To move an object in small increments. See also nudge and super nudge. midpoint The point of a Bézier line that divides it into two parts of equal length. miter limit A value that determines when two lines that meet at a sharp angle switch from a pointed (mitered) joint to a squared-off (beveled) joint. moiré pattern The visual effect of radiating curves created by superimposing two regular patterns. For example, a moiré pattern can result by overlapping two halftone screens of different angles, dot spacing, and dot size. Moiré patterns are the undesirable result of rescreening an image with a different halftone screen or with the same halftone screen on an angle different from the original. multiple select To select multiple objects by using the Pick tool, or multiple nodes by using the Shape tool. N nested group A group of two or more groups that behaves as one object. nested PowerClip objects Containers that hold other containers to form complex PowerClip objects. nodes The square points at each end of a line or curve segment. You can change the shape of a line or curve by dragging one or more of its nodes. noise In bitmap editing, random pixels on the surface of a bitmap, resembling static on a television screen. nonprinting characters Items that appear on the screen but do not print. They include the rulers, guidelines, table gridlines, hidden text, and formatting symbols, such as spaces, hard returns, tabs, and indents. nudge To move an object in increments. See also micro nudge and super nudge. O object A generic term for any item you create or place in a drawing. Objects include lines, shapes, graphics, and text. one-point perspective An effect created by lengthening or shortening one side of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in one direction. opacity The quality of an object that makes it difficult to see through. If an object is 100 percent opaque, you cannot see through it. Opacity levels under 100 percent increase the transparency of objects. See also transparency. open object An object defined by a path whose start point and end point are not connected. origin The point in the drawing window at which the rulers intersect. output resolution The number of dots per inch (dpi) that an output device, such as an imagesetter or laser printer, produces. outline The line that defines the shape of an object. overexposure Excessive light in an image that gives it a washed-out appearance. See also exposure. overprinting Overprinting is achieved by printing one color over another. Depending on the colors you choose, the overprinted colors mix to create a new color, or the top color covers the bottom color. Overprinting a dark color on a light color is often used to avoid registration problems that occur when color separations are not precisely aligned. See also color trapping, choke, and spread. P paletted color mode An 8-bit color mode that displays images of up to 256 colors. You can convert a complex image to the paletted color mode to reduce file size and to achieve more precise control of the colors used throughout the conversion process. pan To move the drawing page around in the drawing window. Panning changes the page view in the same way that scrolling moves the drawing up, down, to the left, or to the right in the drawing window. When working at high magnification levels where not all of the drawing is displayed, you can quickly pan to see parts of the drawing that were previously hidden. PANOSE font matching A feature that lets you choose a substitute font if you open a file that contains a font not installed on your computer. You can make a substitution for the current working session only, or you can make a permanent substitution, so that the new font is automatically displayed when you save and reopen the file. PANTONE process colors The colors that are available through the PANTONE Process Color System, which is based on the CMYK color model. paragraph text A text type that allows you to apply formatting options and directly edit large blocks of text. parent color An original color style that you can save and apply to objects in a drawing. You can create child colors from the parent color. See also child color. path The basic component from which objects are constructed. A path can be open (for example, a line) or closed (for example, a circle), and it can be made up of a single line or curve segment or many joined segments. pattern fill A fill consisting of a series of repeating vector objects or images. Perfect Shapes Predefined shapes, such as basic shapes, arrows, stars, and callouts. Perfect Shapes often have glyphs, which let you modify their appearance. perpendicular line A line that intersects another line at a right angle. pixel A colored dot that is the smallest part of a bitmap. See also resolution. PNG (Portable Network Graphics) A graphic file format designed for use in online viewing. This format can import 24-bit color graphics. point A unit of measure used primarily in typesetting to define type sizes. There are approximately 72 points to an inch and 12 points to a pica. PostScript fill A type of texture fill designed using the PostScript language. PowerClip effect A way of arranging objects that lets you contain one object inside another. PowerClip object An object created by placing objects (contents objects) inside other objects (container objects). If the contents object is larger than the container object, the contents object is automatically cropped. Only the contents that fit inside the container object are visible. process color In commercial printing, colors that are produced from a blend of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. This is different from a spot color, which is a solid ink color printed individually (one printing plate is required for each spot color). progressive In JPEG images, a method of having the image appear on screen in its entirety, at a low, blocky resolution. As the image data loads, the image quality progressively improves. Q QuickCorrect A feature that automatically displays the fully worded form for abbreviations or the correct form for errors as you type. You can use QuickCorrect to capitalize words or to correct common spelling and typographic errors automatically; for example, QuickCorrect can replace “asap” with “as soon as possible” and “hte” with “the.” R radius As applied to the Dust & Scratch filter, sets the number of pixels surrounding the damaged area that are used to apply the filter. range sensitivity A paletted color mode option that lets you specify a focus color for the paletted conversion. You can adjust the color and specify its importance to guide converting. rasterized image An image that has been rendered into pixels. When you convert vector graphics files to bitmap files, you create rasterized images. render To capture a two-dimensional image from a three-dimensional model. resample To change the resolution and dimensions of a bitmap. Upsampling increases the size of the image; downsampling decreases the size of the image. Resampling with fixed resolution lets you maintain the resolution of the image by adding or subtracting pixels while varying the image size. Resampling with variable resolution keeps the number of pixels unchanged while changing the image size, resulting in lower or higher resolution than that of the original image. resolution The amount of detail that an image file contains, or that an input, output, or display device is capable of producing. Resolution is measured in dpi (dots per inch) or ppi (pixels per inch). Low resolutions can result in a grainy appearance; high resolutions can produce higher quality images but result in larger file sizes. RGB A color mode in which the three colors of light (red, green, and blue) are combined in varying intensities to produce all other colors. A value between 0 and 255 is assigned to each channel of red, green and blue. Monitors, scanners, and the human eye use RGB to produce or detect color. rollover An interactive object or group of objects that changes its appearance when you click or point to it. round-tripping The conversion of a document saved in a file format such as Portable Document Format (PDF) in another format such as Corel DESIGNER (DES) and then back again. rotate To reposition and reorient an object by turning it around its center of rotation. ruler A horizontal or vertical bar marked off in units and used to determine the size and position of objects. By default, the rulers appear on the left side, along the top of the application window, but they can be hidden or moved. S saturation The purity or vividness of a color, expressed as the absence of white. A color that has 100 percent saturation contains no white. A color with 0 percent saturation is a shade of gray. scale To change an object’s horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by a specified percentage. For example, scaling a rectangle that is 1 inch high and 2 inches wide by 150 percent results in a rectangle that is 1.5 inches high and 3 inches wide. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained. segment The line or curve between nodes in a curve object. selection box An invisible rectangle with eight visible handles that appears around any object you select using the Pick tool. shape recognition The ability to recognize and convert hand-drawn shapes into perfect forms. To take advantage of shape recognition, you must use the Smart drawing tool. For example, you can draw four pen strokes to sketch a rectangle, and the application will convert your hand-drawn lines into a perfect rectangle. simple wireframe view An outline view of a drawing that hides fills, extrusions, contours, and intermediate blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome. See also wireframe view. size To change an object’s horizontal and vertical dimensions proportionally by changing one of the dimensions. For example, a rectangle with a height of 1 inch and a width of 2 inches can be sized by changing the value of the height to 1.5 inches. A width of 3 inches automatically results from the new height value. The aspect ratio of 1:2 (height to width) is maintained. skew To slant an object vertically, horizontally, or both. snap To force an object that is being drawn or moved to align automatically to a point on the grid, a guideline, or another object. source object The object you use to perform a shaping action on another object, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting. The source object receives the fill and outline attributes of the target object. See also target object. splash screen The screen that appears when CorelDRAW starts. It monitors the progress of the startup process and provides information about copyright and registration. split blend A single blend that is broken into two or more components to create a compound blend. The object where the blend is split becomes the end object for one component of the blend and start object for the other. spot color In commercial printing, a solid ink color that prints individually, one plate per spot color. spread In commercial printing, a type of trap that is created by extending the foreground object into the background object. style A set of attributes that controls the appearance of a specific type of object. There are three style types: graphic styles, text styles (artistic and paragraph), and color styles. subpaths Paths that are part of one object. subscript Text characters that are positioned below the baseline of the other characters in a line of text. subtractive color model A color model, such as CMYK, that creates color by subtracting wavelengths of light reflected from an object. For example, a colored ink appears blue if it absorbs all colors except blue. super nudge To move an object in large increments by pressing Shift and an Arrow key. The super nudge value is multiplied by the nudge value to obtain the distance by which the object is moved. See also nudge and micro nudge. superscript Text characters that are positioned above the baseline of the other characters in a line of text. swap disk Hard drive space used by applications to artificially increase the amount of memory available in your computer. swatch One of a series of solid-colored patches used as a sample when selecting color. A printed booklet of swatches is called a swatchbook. Swatch also refers to the colors contained in the color palette. symbol A reusable object or group of objects. A symbol is defined once and can be referenced many times in a drawing. symbol instance An occurrence of a symbol in a drawing. A symbol instance automatically inherits any changes made to the symbol. You can also apply unique properties to each instance, including size, position, and uniform transparency. T tangent A straight line that touches a curve or an ellipse at a point, but does not cross the curve or ellipse at that point. target object The object you perform a shaping action on, such as welding, trimming, or intersecting with another object. The target object retains its fill and outline attributes while copying these attributes to the source objects used to perform the action. See also source object. temperature A way of describing light in terms of degrees Kelvin — lower values correspond to dim lighting conditions that cause an orange cast, such as candlelight or the light from an incandescent light bulb. Higher values correspond to intense lighting conditions that cause a blue cast, such as sunlight. template A predefined set of information that sets the page size, orientation, ruler position, and grid and guideline information. A template may also include graphics and text that can be modified. text baseline The imaginary horizontal line that text characters appear to be placed on. text frame The rectangle that appears as a series of dashed lines around a block of paragraph text created using the Text tool. text style A set of attributes that controls the appearance of text. There are two text style types: artistic text styles and paragraph text styles. texture fill A fractally generated fill that, by default, fills an object or image area with one image instead of with a series of repeating images. threshold A level of tolerance for tonal variation in a bitmap. thumbnail A miniature, low-resolution version of an image or illustration. tick Invisible divisions to which your pointer gravitates tiling The technique of repeating a small image across a large surface. Tiling is often used to create a patterned background for World Wide Web pages. tint In photo editing, a tint often refers to a semitransparent color applied over an image. Also called a color cast. In printing, a tint refers to a lighter shade of a color created with halftone screening — for example, a spot color. See also halftone. tonal range The distribution pixels in a bitmap image from dark (a value of zero indicating no brightness) to light (a value of 255 indicating full brightness). Pixels in the first third of the range are considered shadows, pixels in the middle third of the range are considered midtones, and pixels in the last third of the range are considered highlights. Ideally, the pixels in an image should be distributed across the entire tonal range. A histogram is an excellent tool for viewing and evaluating the tonal range of images. tone The variations in a color or the range of grays between black and white. transparency The quality of an object that makes it easy to see through. Setting lower levels of transparency causes higher levels of opacity and less visibility of the underlying items or image. See also opacity. TrueType fonts A font specification developed by Apple. TrueType fonts print the way they appear on the screen and can be resized to any height. TWAIN By using the TWAIN driver supplied by the manufacturer of the imaging hardware, Corel graphics applications can acquire images directly from a digital camera or scanner. two-point perspective An effect created by lengthening or shortening two sides of an object to create the impression that the object is receding from view in two directions. U underexposure Insufficient light in an image. See also exposure. uniform fill A type of fill used to apply one solid color to your image. See also fill. Unicode A character encoding standard that defines character sets for all written languages in the world by using a 16-bit code set and more than 65, 000 characters. Unicode lets you handle text effectively regardless of the language of the text, your operating system, or the application you are using. URL (Uniform Resource Locator) A unique address that defines where a Web page is located on the Internet. V vanishing point A marker that appears when you select an extrusion or an object to which perspective has been added. With an extrusion, the vanishing point marker indicates the depth (parallel extrusion) or the point at which the extruded surfaces would meet if extended (perspective extrusion). In both cases, the vanishing point is indicated by an X. vector graphic An image generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. Vector graphics are created as collections of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels. See also bitmap. vector object A specific object within a drawing that is created as a collection of lines rather than as patterns of individual dots or pixels. Vector objects are generated from mathematical descriptions that determine the position, length, and direction in which lines are drawn. W watermark A small amount of random noise added to the luminance component of the image pixels which carries information about the image. This information survives normal editing, printing, and scanning. weld To combine two objects into a single curve object with a single outline. A source object is welded to a target object to create a new object that takes on the fill and outline attributes of the target object. white point The measurement of white on a color monitor that influences how highlights and contrast appear. In image correction, the white point determines the brightness value that is considered white in a bitmap image. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, you can set the white point to improve the contrast of an image. For example, in a histogram of an image, with a brightness scale of 0 (dark) to 255 (light), if you set the white point at 250, all pixels with a value greater than 250 are converted to white. Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) A standard interface and driver, created by Microsoft, for loading images from peripheral devices, such as scanners and digital cameras. wireframe view An outline view of a drawing that hides fills but displays extrusions, contour lines, and intermediate blend shapes. Bitmaps are displayed in monochrome. See also simple wireframe view. workspace A configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. Z zoom To reduce or magnify the view of a drawing. You can zoom in to see details or zoom out for a broader view. ZIP A lossless file compression technique that results in smaller file size and faster processing time.